MX M450 & MX M350

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM450/S1E
LASER PRINTER
MX-M350/M450 U
MODEL MX-M350/M450 N
CONTENTS
[1] GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] SIMULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] MACHINE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] ROM VERSION-UP METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CAUTION
Cautions on laser
+10 nm At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit
Wave length 785 nm
−15 nm is adjusted to 0.4 MILLIWATT PLUS 8 % and is maintained
North America: constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC).
Pulse times
35 cpm model: (6.2 μs ± 6.2 ns)/7 mm
45 cpm model: (4.8 μs ± 4.8 ns)/7 mm Caution
Europe: This product contains a low power laser device. To ensure
35 cpm model: (6.2 μs ± 6.2 ns)/7 mm safety do not remove any cover or attempt to gain access
45 cpm model: (4.8 μs ± 4.8 ns)/7 mm to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified
Output power 0.2 mW - 0.4 mW personnel.
For North America: For Europe:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the LASER KLASSE 1
CDRH standards. This means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
your safety, observe the precautions below.
● Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers. KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT
● The equipment's exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any
safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into switch slots. CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS
Caution DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in TO BEAM.
hazardous radiation exposure.
VORSICHT
UNSICHTBARE
LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN
ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG
ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM
STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
ADVARSEL
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING
VED ÅBNING, NÅR
SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER
UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ
UDSAETTELSE FOR
STRÅLNING.
VAROITUS!
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN
MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ
KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA
MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1
YLITTÄVÄLLE
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE
LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
CLASS 1 VARNING
VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND
OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERERÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
LASER PRODUCT ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA
ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER
UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING.
ADVERSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES OG SIKKERHEDSLÅS BRYTES.

UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.
BRUKSANVISNING
VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRRAR ÄR
URKOPPLADE. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.
SPECIFICERATS, KAN
Laserstrahl ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS FÖR
VARO! AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ
LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
LASER KLASSE 1 OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING,

SOM ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN
FÖR LASERKLASS 1.
CONTENTS
[1] GENERAL [5] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1. Different points of MX-M350N/350U series 1. Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
from AR-M355/M455 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 2. Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
2. Note for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 3. Operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
A. Cautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
4. Job status screen
[2] CONFIGURATION (common to print, scan, fax and Internet fax) . . . . . . 5-4
1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 5. BASE SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
A. Basic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 A. Condition settings screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
B. Option lineup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 B. Address book screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
C. List of combination of peripheral devices . . . . . . .2-4 6. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
[3] SPECIFICATIONS
B. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
1. Basic Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
7. Switch, Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
A. Base Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
B. Document Feeding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
B. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
C. Output Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
8. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
2. Specific Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
A. Printer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
B. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
B. Image send function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
9. Motor, Clutch, Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
C. Copy function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
3. B/W Scanner Module (DSPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
B. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
4. Rack for Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
[6] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
[4] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Installing procedure flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
2. Note for installation place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
A. USA/Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
3. Unpacking procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
B. European Subsidiary/East Europe/Russia/
Australia/New Zealand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 4. Unpacking and installation of the desk unit . . . . . . . . 6-3
C. Taiwan (Aurora). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 A. AR-D28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
D. Asia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 B. AR-D27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
E. Middle East/Africa/Israel/Philippines . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 C. AR-MU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
F. Hong Kong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 5. Unpacking and installation of the rack (AR-RK2) . . . 6-9
G. China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 6. Machine installing procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
2. Maintenance parts list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 A. Setting related to process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
A. USA/Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 B. Toner cartridge settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand/Taiwan . . . . . . . . .4-2 C. Setting related to fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
C. Agency/Asia/Middle East/Africa/ D. Paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Latin America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
7. Unpacking and installation of the MX-EFX1 . . . . . . 6-11
D. Hong Kong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 8. Automatic developer adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
E. China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 9. Print test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
2. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
10. Distortion adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
A. Drum cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 11. Attach the document scanning label . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
B. Toner cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 12. Adjuster installation and adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
C. Developer cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
13. Using the transport handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
3. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
A. Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
B. Storage conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
[7] MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION [9] SIMULATION
[Maintenance System Table] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 1. Outline and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
1. Engine section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 2. Code-type simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
2. Scanner / DSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 A. Operating procedures and operations . . . . . . . . . 9-1
3. Peripheral devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 B. Simulation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
[DETAILS OF EACH SECTION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 C. Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
1. Process section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
[OPC drum section] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 [10] MACHINE OPERATION
[Transfer section] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 1. Acceptable originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[Developing section] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16 A. Size and weight of acceptable originals . . . . . . . 10-1
2. Fusing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21 B. Total number of originals that can be set in the
3. Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26 document feeder tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
4. Transport section/Paper exit reverse section . . . . . .7-33 2. Standard original placement orientations . . . . . . . . 10-1
5. Laser scanner section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43 3. Automatic copy image rotation -

rotation copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
6. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
4. Specifications of paper trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
7. DSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
A. Applicable plain paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
8. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62
B. Applicable special paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
9. Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67
5. Printing onto envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10. Drive section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-68
A. Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers . . . . . . . . 10-3
11. Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70
6. Printer setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
12. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-73
A. System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
13. Fan motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-75
B. Printer software, firmware diagram . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
[8] ADJUSTMENTS
C. Configuration report (Test page) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
1. Process section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
[11] TROUBLE CODES
A. Doctor gap adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
B. MG roller main pole position adjustment . . . . . . . .8-1
2. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
C. High voltage output adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
3. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
2. Image check, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
4. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
A. Adjustments on the engine side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
[12] ROM VERSION-UP
B. Adjustment on the scanner side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
3. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
A. Version-up target ROM's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
A. OC scan distortion adjustment
(MB-B rail height adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 B. ROM version-up is required in the
following cases: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
B. Vertical image distortion balance adjustment
(Copy lamp unit installing position 2. Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
A. Relationship between each ROM and
C. Vertical image distortion balance adjustment version-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
(No. 2/3 mirror base unit installing and
3. Necessary items for Flash ROM version-up . . . . . . 12-1
position adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
4. Flash ROM version-up method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
D. Vertical (sub scanning direction) distortion
adjustment [Winding pulley position A. Version-up procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
adjustment] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 B. Version-up procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
E. Height adjustment of original detection C. Version-up procedure 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
light emitting unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
D. Countermeasures against “Result: NG” . . . . . . . 12-4
F. Original size detection photo sensor check . . . . .8-12
5. Turning OFF the power during the version-up
G. Original size detection photo sensor procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
6. Version-up procedure flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
H. Image density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
I. DSPF width detection adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
A. System block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
3. Signal name list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
[1] GENERAL 8) Do not print anything which is prohibited from printing by law.
The following items are normally prohibited from printing by
national law. Other items may be prohibited by local law.
1. Different points of MX-M350N/350U • Money
series from AR-M355/M455 • Stamps
• Adopted new operation panel with 8.9 inch LCD • Bonds
• Addition of a blue screw to DV unit. • Stocks
• Added firmware version-up using USB device by Sim 49-1. • Bank drafts
• Eliminated parallel port • Checks
• Passports
2. Note for servicing • Driver's licenses
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge into fire. Toner may be
Pictogram
spattered, causing a burn.
This Service Manual uses some pictographs to assure safe opera-
10) Store toner or toner cartridges in a hard-to-reach place for
tion.
children.
Please understand the meanings of pictographs before servicing.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, an injury or a
damage to properties could result.
A. Cautions for servicing

1) Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches or
smudges on the drum will cause dirty printouts.
2) The fusing unit is extremely hot. Exercise care in this area.
Fusing unit
3) Do not look directly at the light source of the scanner module.

Doing so may damage your eyes.
4) Five adjusters are provided on all optional stand/paper drawer
units. These adjusters should be lowered until they contact the
floor.
Adjuster
Lock Release
5) Do not make any modifications to this machine. Doing so may

result in personal injury or damage to the machine.
6) Since this machine is heavy, it is recommended that it be
moved by more than one person to prevent injury.
7) When connecting this machine to a computer, be sure to first
turn both the computer and the machine off.
MX-M350/M450 N/U GENERAL 1 - 1

[2] CONFIGURATION
1. System configuration
A. Basic system
MX-M350N/M450N MX-M350U/M450U
(Copier/Network printer model) (Copier/Printer model)
Necessary options
• Any one of the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer (AR-D28), the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer (AR-D27), or the multi purpose
drawer (AR-MU2)*
• Any one of the upper exit tray extension (AR-TE4), the finisher (AR-FN6), the mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1), the saddle stitch finisher (AR-
FN7), or the right upper exit tray (AR-TE5)
• Scanner module with DSPF (MX-EFX1)
• Scanner rack (AR-RK2)
• MX-M450U/M450N: Any one of the duplex module/bypass tray (AR-DU4), or the duplex module (AR-DU3)
* To install the AR-MU2, the exclusive-use desk is required.
MX-M350/M450 N/U CONFIGURATION 2 - 1

B. Option lineup
For combinations of options, refer to "C. List of combination of peripheral devices" described later.
(1) Major options
10. Exit tray 7. Finisher

(AR-TE3 (The AR-DU4 is a standard provision. )) (AR-FN6)
11. Duplex
module/bypass tray
(AR-DU4)
1. Scanner module with DSPF 8. Right upper exit

(MX-EFX1) tray (AR-TE5)
6. Upper exit tray

(AR-TE4)
12. Duplex module

(AR-DU3)
9. Mail-bin stacker
(AR-MS1)
13. Saddle stitch

finisher
(AR-FN7) 2. Scanner rack
(AR-RK2) 15. Fax expansion kit
(AR-FX12)
14. Punch module

(AR-PN1 A/B/C/D)
5. Multi purpose drawer

(AR-MU2)
4. Stand/3 x 500 sheet 3. Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet

paper drawer paper drawer
(AR-D27) (AR-D28)

No. Option item Installing conditions
1 Scanner module with DSPF MX-EFX1
2 Scanner rack AR-RK2
3 Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer AR-D28 • Simultaneous installation with the large capacity paper feed
4 Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer AR-D27 desk (AR-D28) or the 3-stage paper feed desk (AR-D27) is
inhibited.
5 Multi purpose drawer AR-MU2
6 Upper exit tray AR-TE4 • Required when the finisher (AR-FN6) or the mail-bin stacker
(AR-MS1) is not installed.
7 Finisher AR-FN6 • Simultaneous installation with the saddle finisher (AR-FN7) is
inhibited.
• Any one of the multi paper drawer (AR-MU2), the stand/3 x
500 sheet paper drawer (AR-D27), or the stand/MPD & 2000
sheet paper drawer (AR-D28) is required.
8 Right upper exit tray AR-TE5 • Simultaneous installation with the mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1)
or the finisher (AR-FN6) is inhibited.
9 Mail-bin stacker AR-MS1 • Any one of the multi paper drawer (AR-MU2), the stand/3 x
500 sheet paper drawer (AR-D27), or the stand/MPD & 2000
10 Exit tray AR-TE3 • Required when the duplex module (AR-DU3) is installed and
the saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7) is not installed.
11 Duplex module/bypass tray AR-DU4 • Any one of the multi purpose drawer (AR-MU2), the stand/3 x
12 Duplex module AR-DU3 500 sheet paper drawer (AR-D27), or the stand/MPD & 2000
• The duplex module/bypass tray (AR-DU4) cannot be installed
with the exit tray (AR-TE3) or the saddle stitch finisher (AR-
FN7).
• When the duplex module (AR-DU3) is installed, the exit tray
(AR-TE3) or the saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7) is required.
13 Saddle stitch finisher AR-FN7 • Simultaneous installation with the finisher (AR-FN6) is
inhibited.
• The duplex module (AR-DU3) is required.
• The stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer (AR-D27) or the stand/
MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer (AR-D28) is required.
14 Punch module AR-PN1 A/B/C/D • The saddle finisher (AR-FN7) is required.
15 Fax expansion kit AR-FX12 • The stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer (AR-D27), or the
stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer (AR-D28) is required.
(2) Other options

STD: Standard provision ❍: Installable ✕ : Not available
Main unit
Option item MX-M350N/ MX-M350U/ Installing conditions
M450N M450U
Function Network expansion kit MX-NBX2 ✕ ❍
expansion options MX-NBX3 STD ❍ with HDD
PS3 expansion kit AR-PK6 ❍ ❍
Bar code font AR-PF1 ❍ ❍
Flash ROM kit AR-PF2 ✕ ❍
Network scanner expansion kit MX-NSX1 ❍ ❍*1
Sharpdesk 1 license kit MX-USX1 ❍*2 ❍*2
Sharpdesk 5 license kit MX-USX5 ❍*2 ❍*2
Sharpdesk 10 license kit MX-US10 ❍ *2 ❍*2
Sharpdesk 50 license kit MX-US50 ❍*2 ❍*2
Sharpdesk 100 license kit MX-USA0 ❍*2 ❍*2
Application integration module MX-AMX1 ❍*2 ❍*2 *3
Internet fax expansion kit MX-FWX1 ❍ *2 ❍*2 *3
Application communication module MX-AMX2 ❍ ❍*3
External account module MX-AMX3 ❍ ❍*3
Data security Data security kit (For a model with MX-FRX6 ❍ ❍*3 Authentication version
HDD installed) MX-FRX6U ❍ ❍*3 Commercial version
Data security kit (For a model MX-FRX7 ✕ ❍ Authentication version
without HDD installed) MX-FRX7U ✕ ❍ Commercial version
FAX-related option Fax memory (8 MB) AR-MM9 ❍ ❍ For fax expansion kit (AR-FX12)
*1: The Network expansion kit (MX-NBX2/NBX3) is required.
*2: The Network scanner expansion kit (MX-NSX1) is required.
*3: The Network scanner expansion kit (with HDD) (MX-NBX3) is required.

C. List of combination of peripheral devices
As shown in the table below, some other peripheral devices (B) may be needed for installation of a peripheral device (A) and some periph-
eral devices cannot be installed together.
Data security kit (For a model with HDD installed)

Data security kit (For a model without HDD installed)
Application communication module

Network expansion kit (with HDD)
Application integration module

Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer
Scanner module with DSPF
Network scanner expansion kit

Duplex module/bypass tray
Sharpdesk 100 license kit

Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet
Internet fax expansion kit
External account module

Facsimile expansion kit
Network expansion kit
Multi purpose drawer
Saddle stitch finisher
Right upper exit tray
Fax memory (8 MB)

PS3 expansion kit
Mail-bin stacker
Duplex module
Upper exit tray
Flash ROM kit

Bar code font
Punch unit
Exit tray
Finisher
Related to paper feed unit
Multi purpose drawer AR-MU2
Stand/3 x 500 sheet
AR-D27
paper drawer
Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet
AR-D28
paper drawer
Duplex module/bypass tray AR-DU4 *1
Duplex module AR-DU3 *1
Scanner module with DSPF MX-EFX1 *1
Output units
Saddle stitch finisher AR-FN7 *1
Finisher AR-FN6 *1
Mail-bin stacker AR-MS1 *1
Exit tray *2 AR-TE3 *1
Upper exit tray AR-TE4
Right upper exit tray AR-TE5
Punch unit AR-PN1 *1
Related to extension of
functions and others
Network expansion kit *3 MX-NBX2
Network expansion kit (with HDD) *3 MX-NBX3
PS3 expansion kit AR-PK6
A
Network scanner expansion kit MX-NSX1 *1 *1
Facsimile expansion kit AR-FX12 *1
Fax memory (8 MB) AR-MM9 *1
Data security kit MX-FRX6/ *1
(For a model with HDD installed) MX-FRX6U
Data security kit MX-FRX7/ *1
(For a model without HDD installed) MX-FRX7U
Bar code font AR-PF1
Flash ROM kit AR-PF2
Internet fax expansion kit MX-FWX1
Sharpdesk 1 license kit MX-USX1
Sharpdesk 5 license kit MX-USX5
Sharpdesk 10 license kit MX-US10
Sharpdesk 50 license kit MX-US50
Sharpdesk 100 license kit MX-USA0
Application integration module MX-AMX1
Application communication module MX-AMX2
External account module MX-AMX3
= Must be installed together.

= Cannot be installed together.
*1 = Any of the units must be installed together.
*2 = The AR-DU4 is a standard provision.
*3 = Installable to the MX-M350U/M450U. The MX-NBX3 is a standard provision for the MX-M350N/M450N.

[3] SPECIFICATIONS (in mm)
Paper size A B C D E
A3 297 420 4 289 4
1. Basic Specification
B4 257 364 4 242 4
A. Base Engine A4 210 297 4 202 4
B5 182 257 4 168 4
(1) Form
A5 148 210 4 140 4
Console type
Japanese postcard 100 148 4 92 4
(2) Engine speed Ledger 279 432 4 271 4
Legal 216 356 4 208 4
MX-M350U/ MX-M450U/
Paper size Foolscap 216 330 4 208 4
M350N M450N
A4, 8.5" x 11" 35ppm (31ppm*) 45ppm (40ppm*) Letter 216 279 4 208 4
A4R, 8.5" x 11"R 25ppm 30ppm Executive 184 267 4 183 4
A5R/5.5" x 8.5"R, Invoice-R 35ppm 45ppm Invoice 140 216 4 132 4
B5 35ppm 45ppm Com-10 (envelope) 105 241 4 97 4
B5R, Executive-R 25ppm 30ppm C5 (envelope) 162 229 4 154 4
B4/8.5" x 14" 20ppm 22ppm Monarch (envelope) 98 191 4 90 4
A3/11" x 17" 17ppm 20ppm DL (envelope) 110 220 4 102 4
8K 17ppm 20ppm ISO B5 (envelope) 176 250 4 168 4
16K 35ppm 45ppm (6) Warm-up
* Paper feed from Manual bypass tray Warm-up time less than 80 seconds
(3) Engine composition Pre-heat requirement Required
Photoconductor type OPC Jam recovery time Target: about 30 seconds
(diameter of photoconductor : ø30mm) (Under standard condition of 60
Record method Electro-photograph (laser) seconds left after side cover opening,
polygon motor halt)
Development method Dry-type dual-component magnetic
brush development (7) Power source
Charge method Charged saw-tooth method
Voltage current 100V system 200V system
Transfer method Transfer roller
100-127V, 12A 220-240V, 8A
Cleaning method Counter blade
Frequency 50/60Hz
Fusing method Heat roller
Power cord Inlet type
(4) Engine resolution
(8) Power consumption
Resolution Read: 600dpi x 600dpi
Max. Power 100V 1440W
Write: 600dpi x 600dpi
consumption 200V 1850W
Smoothing Write: 1200dpi equivalent x 600dpi
Gradation Write: 2 levels (9) Energy Star benchmark
(5) Printable area MX-M350U/M350N MX-M450U/M450N
Low power mode 184.75W 223.25W
The print area of this product is shown below.
Recovery time from Max. 30 sec. Max. 30 sec.
E low power mode
Sleep mode Less than 80W Less than 95W
Transition time to 60 min. 60 min.
C C sleep mode
(10) Noise
At working less than 6.8dB
At waiting mode less than 5.0dB
B ∗ Showing noise benchmark in each model as a whole system.

(11) Dimensions
External dimensions 33-1/16" x 26-11/64" x 44-23/64"
(W x D x H) (840 mm x 665 mm x 1127 mm)
(including automatic document feeder)
Occupied space 38-3/16" x 26-11/64" (970 x 665 mm)
dimensions (Include automatic document feeder)
(W x D)
E Weight Engine: Approx. 85.8 lb (38.9 kg)
D Desk: Approx. 72.6 lb (32.9 kg)
A Rack: Approx. 16 lb (7.4 kg)
DSPF: Approx. 46 lb (21 kg)
Paper size
Printable area
If a printer driver for Windows or Macintosh is used for printing, the

printable area will be smaller. The actual printable area depends
on the printer driver to be used.
MX-M350/M450 N/U SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 1

B. Document Feeding Equipment (2) Support OS
(1) One-drawer tray (included in the base engine) Custom PS Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack5 or later)
Paper feed method One-drawer tray
Windows 2000
Sizes to be fed A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Windows Server 2003
Paper capacity 500 sheets (at 80g/m²) Windows XP
Media available for Plain paper 60 - 105g/m², 16 - 28lbs Windows Vista
paper feeding Custom Windows 98/Me
Paper type Normal, recycled, pre-printed, pre- PCL5e/6(XL) Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack5 or later)
punched, color, letter head Windows 2000
Paper size switching To be switched by user Windows Server 2003
(paper size to be entered from the Windows XP
operation panel). Windows Vista
Dehumidification Not available PPD Windows 98/Me
heater Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack5 or later)
Balance detection Provided (paper empty and 3 steps) Windows 2000
Default size setting 100V system Windows Server 2003
8.5" x 11" Windows XP
Mounting/demounting Provided Windows Vista
of the tray Mac OS 9.0 - 9.2.2, X 10.1.5, X 10.2.8,
X 10.3.9, X 10.4 - 10.4.8
C. Output Equipment GPD Windows Server 2003 x64
Windows XP x64
(1) Face-down Exit Tray (included in the base engine) Windows Vista x64
Output position/ Face-down output at the upper side of
method main unit (3) PDL emulation
Output paper capacity 400 sheets (80g/m² sheet) PCL6 compatible, PCL5e compatible, PostScript 3 compatible
Output paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R
11 " x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13",
(4) Windows driver function
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5"R a. General
Executive, Japanese post card, PPD file *1
Monarch (98 x 191), 8K, 16K, 16KR Function PCL5e PCL6 PS
(for Windows XP)
Com-10 (105 x 241), DL (110 x 220), Copies 1-999
C5 (162 x 229), ISO B5 (176 x 250)
Orientation Portrait Portrait
Spec of media for Tracing paper: 52 ~ 59g/m² / 14 ~ 15lbs Landscape Landscape-A
paper output Plain paper: 60 ~ 128g/m² / 16 ~ 34lbs
Landscape-B
Index paper: 176g/m² / 47lbs (*2)
Cover paper: 205g/m² / 54 ~ 55lbs
Duplex 1-sided 1-sided
Transparency firm
2-sided 2-sided
Remaining paper Not available (Left /top/ right (Long / short
detection
binding) binding)
Exit tray full detection Provided (*2)
Booklet Invoice on Letter Yes
2. Specific Function Letter on Ledger (2up booklet only)
A5 on A4 (*2)
A. Printer Function A4 on A3
(1) Platform B5 on B4
Letter on Letter
IBM PC/AT (Include compatible machine) Ledger on Ledger
Macintosh A4 on A4
A3 on A3
B4 on B4
Binding edge Left / top / right –
N-up 2/4/6/8/9/16 2 / 4 / 6 / 9 / 16
(*2)
N-up order Z / Reversed Z / Z (*2)
N / Reversed N
N-up border Yes / No Always Yes (*2)
*1: For printing, PS driver bundled with the Windows is required.
*2: Since the function is of PS driver bundled with Windows, spec-
ification may vary according to the OS.

b. Paper Input d. Graphic
PPD file *1 PPD file *1
Function PCL5e PCL6 PS
(for Windows XP) Function PCL5e PCL6 PS (for Windows
Paper size A3 / B4 / A4 / B5 / XP)
A5 / Ledger / Resolution 600/300 dpi 600dpi 600dpi
Legal / Foolscap / setting
Letter / Executive Halftone – No Screen frequency –
/Invoice/8k / 16k setting 8.0 to 360.0
/COM10/C5/ in 0.1 steps
Monarch/DL Screen angle
Paper type Plain 0.0 to 360.0
Letter Head in 0.1 steps
Pre-Print Graphics Raster Raster – –
Pre-Punch mode HP-GL2 Vector
Recycle Smoothing Yes/No
Color Toner save Yes / No
Label
Photo – Yes/No – –
Heavy Paper enhancement
Transparency
Negative – – Yes / No
Envelope
image
Custom 7 type –
Mirror image – – Horizontal Horizontal
paper type
Vertical (*2)
Source Automatic
Zoom – – 25-400% 1-1000%
selection Tray 1/2/3/4
(XY zoom) (*2)
Bypass-tray
Fit to page Yes / No –
Cover Yes/No –
User can select from *1: For printing, PS driver bundled with the Windows is required.
1-sided/2-sided/ *2: Since the function is of PS driver bundled with Windows, spec-
No print ification may vary according to the OS.
Insert page Yes/No – e. Font
User can select from
1-sided/2-sided/ PPD file *1
No print (for Windows XP)
Transparency No – Download Bitmap Bitmap Auto
inserts Yes (Blank) font TrueType Type1 Outline
Yes (Printed) TrueType Bitmap
Native TrueType
*1: For printing, PS driver bundled with the Windows is required. (*2)
c. Paper Output *1: For printing, PS driver bundled with the Windows is required.
PPD file *1 *2: Since the function is of PS driver bundled with Windows, spec-
(for Windows XP) ification may vary according to the OS.
Output tray Center tray
f. Others
selection Finisher
• Top tray PPD file *1
• Offset tray (for Windows XP)
Saddle Stitch Configuration Yes
Finisher setting
• Offset tray Watermark Yes Yes
Mailbin stacker (functionality is
• Mailbin top tray limited)
• Mailbin (1-7) Line width –
Duplex module setting
• Left tray Form overlay Yes –
Staple Finisher Print hold Yes –
• No staple Confidential print Yes –
• 1 staple Sample print Yes –
• 2 staples Print accounting Yes –
Saddle Stitch Saddle Stitch Quick sets Yes –
Finisher Finisher Auto Yes –
• No staple • No staple configuration
• 1 staple • 1 staple Job end Yes –
• 2 staples • 2 staples notification
Offset cancel Yes/No Tandem print Yes
*1: For printing, PS driver bundled with the Windows is required. Carbon print Yes –
Multi- –
enlargement
XY zoom – Yes –
Cover insert + Yes –
pamphlet

PPD file *1 c. Paper output
(for Windows XP) Macintosh PPD file
Function
Document filing Yes – (for Mac OS X ver10.2.8)
(MX-M350U/M450U: The Output tray Center tray
MX-NBX3 is required.) selection Finisher
*1: For printing, PS driver bundled with the Windows is required. • Top tray
• Offset tray
(5) Macintosh driver functions Saddle Stitch Finisher
a. General • Offset tray
Macintosh PPD file Mailbin stacker
Function • Mailbin top tray
(for Mac OS X ver10.2.8)
• Mailbin (1-7)
Copies 1-999
Duplex module
Orientation Portrait
• Left tray
Landscape-A
Landscape-B (*1) Staple Finisher
• No staple
Duplex 1-sided
• 1 staple
2-sided
• 2 staples
Pamphlet
(Right /left /top binding) Saddle Stitch Finisher
• No staple
Booklet Yes
• 1 staple
N-up 2/4/6/9/16 (*1)
• 2 staples
N-up order Z / reversed Z / N / reversed N (*1)
Offset Yes/No
N-up border None / Single hairline / Single thin line /
Double hairline / Double thin line (*1) d. Graphic
*1: Since the function is of PS driver bundled with Macintosh, Macintosh PPD file
Function
specification may vary according to the OS. (for Mac OS X ver10.2.8)
Resolution setting 600dpi
b. Paper input
Halftone setting –
Macintosh PPD file Graphics mode –
Function
(for Mac OS X ver10.2.8) Smoothing Yes/No
Paper size A3 / B4 / A4 / B5 / A5 / Toner save Yes / No
Japanese Postcard / Photo enhancement Yes/No
Ledger / Legal / Foolscap / Letter / Negative image –
Executive / Invoice/ 8K / 16K/ Mirror image –
COM10/C5/Monarch/DL Zoom 1-100000 (*1)
Paper type Plain / Letter Head / Pre-Print / Fit to page –
Pre-Punch / Recycle / Color /
Label / Heavy Paper / Transparency / *1: Since the function is of PS driver bundled with Macintosh,
Envelope specification may vary according to the OS.
Custom paper 7 e. Font
type Macintosh PPD file
Source selection Automatic Function
(for Mac OS X ver10.2.8)
Tray 1/2/3/4 Download font –
Bypass-tray (Selectable only on MacOS9.x.x -
Different 1st Yes / No (*1) LaserWriter) (*1)
page
Cover / insert – f. Others
page (On OS9, user can select from: No/First Macintosh PPD file
Function
Page/Last Page) (for Mac OS X ver10.2.8)
(*1) Configuration setting Yes
Transparency No Watermark Yes
inserts Yes (Blank) Form overlay –
Yes (Printed) Print hold Yes
Confidential print Yes (PIN selection)
*1: Since the function is of PS driver bundled with Macintosh,
Sample print Yes
specification may vary according to the OS.
Print accounting Yes
Quick sets –
Auto configuration – (OS9: Yes)
Job end notification –
Tandem print Yes
Carbon print –
Multi-enlargement –
XY zoom –
Cover insert + pamphlet –
Document filing Yes (*1)
(MX-M350U/M450U: The MX-
NBX3 is required.)
*1: Since the function is of PS driver bundled with Macintosh,
specification may vary according to the OS.

(6) Compatibility (5) Specified destination
PCL5e PCL5e is compatible with HP LaserJet 4050. Mode Scanner Internet Fax FAX
compatibility Small margin difference, rendering difference by Specified Specifying by one-touch or group, manual
different font family, default and transfer function destination destination entry
difference is not to be included in the compatibility. Entry from soft keyboard. (Scanner/Internet
PCL6 PCL6 is compatible with HP LaserJet 4050. Fax)
compatibility Small margin difference, rendering difference by Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
different font family, default and transfer function Selection from LDAP server
difference is not to be included in the compatibility. Resend
PostScript Must be compatible with Adobe PostScript. Quick
Compatibility Small margin difference, rendering difference by One-touch keys Max. 999 (500*1) destinations
different font family, default and transfer function (Max. number of In this, FTP, Desktop, and SMB are 200
difference is not to be included in the compatibility. keys to be (100*1) destinations.
stored.)
B. Image send function Number of Max. 500 (300*1) destinations
(1) Mode Group (1 key)
address
Scanner Scan to e-mail registration
Scan to Desktop
Program Yes (8 programs)
(Scan data send which is not dependent on IP
Manual Entry from soft keyboard. Input via the
addresses under DHCP environment)
destination entry numeric
Scan to FTP
Scan to Folder (SMB) keys, # key
Scan to e-mail with Meta and * key.
Scan to Desktop with Meta Chain dialing – Up to 64-digit
Scan to FTP with Meta with pause key.
Scan to SMB with Meta Resend Call up nearest 1 addresse which are
Fax Fax specified as a single destination.
Fax to e-mail (Inbound Routing) Speed dialing This is used to recall address control number
Fax to FTP/Desktop/SMB/e-mail (quick key) by using numeric keys.
(Document Admin)* CC / BCC Yes –
Internet Fax Internet Fax (Full mode support) sending
Internet Fax to e-mail Subject Selective/direct entry from –
(Inbound Routing) (HDD) the list
Internet Fax to FTP/Desktop/SMB/e-mail File name Selective/direct entry from –
(Document Admin)* the list
* PC-FAX/PC-Internet-Fax is allowed. Sender name – (1 default address fixed as
sender name)
(2) Support system Transmitter's Yes (Selective/ No
Mode Scanner Internet Fax FAX name direct entry
Supported SMTP POP server – from the list /
server/ FTP (TCP/IP) SMTP server selection from
protocol SMB ESMTP server LDAP server)
(3) Support image *1: Model without HDD installed
Mode Scanner Internet Fax FAX (6) Specified multiple destinations

File format TIFF, PDF TIFF-FX – Mode Scanner Internet Fax FAX
(TIFF-F) Specified Specifying by one-touch or group, manual
Compression Uncompressed, MH, MMR MH, MR, destination destination entry.
method G3 (1-dimension) = MH MMR, Max. number Total of 5000 (100*1) destinations including
(Modified Huffman) JBIG of Manual group and relay broadcast.
G4 = MMR (Modified MR) destination
entry*
(4) Image process
Sequential Yes (E-mail only. It is not Yes
Mode Scanner Internet Fax FAX broadcasting available for
Half tone Equivalent to 256 levels FTP/Desktop/SMB.)
reproduction Simultaneous – Yes
Exposure Auto + 5 steps FAX
adjustment transmission
Quality Half-tone ON/OFF (It's not effective for the
*1: Model without HDD installed
selection following resolution with *.)
* Manual destination entry: Entry other than One-touch, using
Resolution 200 x 200dpi Normal * Normal
numeric keys or soft keyboard.
(Varies with (203.2 x 97.8dpi)*
the file type/ * In the case of broadcast transmission including fax destina-
200 x 200dpi Small letter Small letter
transmission tion, the resolution level for fax mode is applied.
(203.2 x 195.6dpi)
method) 300 x 300dpi Fine Fine * In the case of broadcast transmission with Internet Fax and
(203.2 x 391dpi) Scanner destinations, the resolution level of Internet Fax mode
is applied.
400 x 400dpi Extra fine Extra fine
(406.4 x 391dpi) * In the case of broadcast transmission, the compression format
600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi – set with the system settings is applied.

(7) Functions Mode Scanner Internet Fax FAX
Mode Scanner Internet Fax FAX Special Time setting Yes
Transmit Memory transmit – Yes function Transmit request – Yes
function Data is sent Remote transmit – Yes
by memory Cover function – No
transmit Print at sender – Yes –
when upper Page division Yes
limit is set.
Confidential – Yes (F code
On-hook – Yes (machine at the method)
Quick online – Yes other end)
transmit Transmit broadcast – Yes (F code
Manual transmit – At on-hook direction method)
only Edge erase Yes
Auto reduction – Yes: A3 → B4, Center erase Yes
transmit A3 → A4,
2 in 1 Yes
B4 → A4
Card shot Yes
Rotation transmit Yes (Manual) Yes (Auto)
Report/ Transmit/receive Yes
Scaling transmit Yes (Scaling from regular size to regular
List record
size only.
function Transmit/receive No Yes
Some functions does not allow rotation
result
transmit)
Address/phone Yes
Re-call Error – Yes
directory list
mode Busy – – Yes
Group list Yes
No. of times/interval is set via system
Sender list Print No
settings.
administrator Described in the system
Book original Yes
address. settings list
transmit
Program list Yes
Long length Yes Yes Yes
Memory box list – Yes (FAX
original transmit Max. 800mm
mode only)
Specified pages Yes –
Memory clear –
per file
notice list (It's possible that this is output in case of
Maximum number Yes – errors.)
of send data
Rejected Number – Yes
Sender name Max. 999 (500*1) destinations List
Address – Yes Receiving setting – Yes –
Confirmation (Soft SW) address list
Function
List of Transfer Yes (HDD)
(Prevention of mis-
tables to E-mail
send)
List of transfer Yes
Receive Auto receive – Yes
tables to
function Manual receive – Yes administrator
Memory receive – Yes Web setting list Yes
Reduction receive – Yes Others PC-facsimile – PC-Internet PC-FAX
for standard size transmission Fax
Rotation receive – Yes
(8) Transmission method
Divided receive – Yes: To be defined by
system settings Mode FAX
Duplex receive – Yes: To be defined by Transmission time 2 seconds (level: Super G3/JBIG)
system settings 6 seconds (G3 ECM)
2 in 1 receive – Modem speed 33.6kbps → 2.4kbps automatic fallback
Address/Domain- – Yes (50 –
Intercommunication Super G3/G3
specified reception address)
is enabled. Communication line General telephone line (PSTN), Private
Address/Domain- – Yes (50 – branch exchange(PBX), FAX line
specified reception address) R-key for PBX setting: Germany, France
is disabled. Number of 1 line only
Reception refusal – Yes (30 maximum
setting of Specific destinations) communication line
number ECM Yes
External phone – Yes
connection (9) Record size
Transfer function at – Yes
Mode Internet Fax FAX
output trouble
Max. record 293mm
Auto startup mode – Yes
width
*1: Model without HDD installed Record size A3-A5,
11" x 17" - 5.5" x 8.5"
(10) F code transmission

Mode FAX
Sub address Yes
Passcode Yes

(11) Registration-related settings C. Copy function
Item Registerable Number (1) Copy Speed
Individual/ Group 999 (Up to 500 can be
MX-M350U/M350N MX-M450U/M450N
registered for 1 group.)
Actual Reduction Enlargement Actual Reduction Enlargement
Program 8 A4, 35 35 35 45 45 45
Memory box Total 100 of Polling Memory/ 8.5" x 11"
Confidential/Relay Broadcast A4R, 25 25 25 30 30 30
Scheduled send job 94 8.5" x 11"R
(Manual transmit: 1, Manual A5R, 35 35 35 45 45 45
forwarding: 1, 5.5" x 8.5"R,
Manual Internet Fax Invoice-R
forwarding: 1, Inbound B5 35 35 35 45 45 45
Routing and Document B5R, 25 25 25 30 30 30
Executive-R
Admin : total 3 Total: 100)
B4, 20 20 20 22 22 22
Own number and Name Set Internet Fax: 1
8.5" x 14"
Fax: 1
A3, 17 17 17 20 20 20
User list (Reply-to List) 999 (500*1) 11" x 17"
Inbound Routing List 50 Extra, 17 17 17 20 20 20
Inbound routing addresses 1000 Envelope
Sender Number/Address 500 ∗ Figures in reduction/enlargement are represented by those at
Registration (Inbound Routing) the ratio to show slowest speed
Subject (Send Settings) 30 (2) First copy time
File name (Send Settings) 30
Conditions: A4 or 8.5"x11" from front tray of PPC, with polygon
Metadata Set List 10
motor running.
Rejected Number 50
Rejected Address 50 (30*1)
Document glass *1 Less than 4.9 Less than 4.4
Polling permitted Number 10
seconds seconds
*1: Model without HDD installed DSPF Less than 6.0 Less than 5.3
(12) Telephone Functions seconds seconds
Mode Fax *1: During OC mode

Speaker Yes (3) Job speed
Hold No
Setting of pause time Yes (1-15 seconds)
S→ S *1 33 cpm (94%) 42 cpm (93%)
Telephone transmission during No (External telephone
S→ D *2 32 cpm (91%) 40 cpm (88%)
power outage transmission allowed)
D→ D *3 32 cpm (91%) 40 cpm (88%)
Tone pulse switching Existence of settings for 10/
20/TONE/Auto Select and *1: S → S : A4 / 8.5" x 11" original 5 sheets copy 5sets
their default values depends *2: S → D : A4 / 8.5" x 11" original 10 sheets copy 5sets
on destinations. *3: D → D : A4 / 8.5" x 11" original 5 sheets (10 pages) copy 5sets
(13) Others (4) Continuous copy
Mode Scanner Internet Fax Fax Max. multiple number 999 pages
PC- FAX – Yes
(5) Copy Ratio
PC-Internet Fax – Yes ---
FAST – – Yes Copy ratio AB series :
25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%,
(SEC
only) 141%, 200%, 400%
Inch series :
Trial mode Yes (Included No –
25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200%,
meta data. These
400%
can be set up
Zoom 25 - 400%
separately.)
25 - 200% (Copy from DSPF)
Linearrized PDF Support by Net –
Independent 4
Scan Tool
scaling
(6) Exposure/Copy Quality Process

Exposure mode Binary: Text(auto/manual), Text/photo, Photo,
Auto
256 levels: Not provided
Manual steps 9 steps
Toner save mode Yes (Except for U.K.), Default: OFF

(7) Copy Function 3. B/W Scanner Module (DSPF)
Function APS Yes
(1) Form
AMS Yes
Scanner (Document glass) / DSPF standard
XY zoom Yes
Operation panel integral type
Paper type select Yes (By type setting)
(common hardware for all the destinations)
Auto tray switching Yes
Rotation copy Yes
(2) Resolution / Gradation
Electronic sort Yes Reading resolution (dpi)
Copy mode
Rotation sort Yes (Europe, Australia,
Magnification 25 - 99 100 101 - 171 172 - 400 –
Agency) (DSPF/
Reserved copy Yes (99 destinations) SPF (high
Recall/register of program Yes (10 destinations) quality):
101 - 200))
Document filing Yes
OC 600x600 600x600 600x600 600x1200 –
(MX-M350U/M450U: The
OC 600x600 600x600 600x600 600x1200 –
MX-NBX3 is required.) (High speed):
Preheat function Yes (To be set up by the Text/Auto
system settings) OC 600x600 600x300 600x600 600x1200 –
Auto power shut-off Yes (To be set up by the (High speed):
function system settings) Others
DSPF/SPF 600x300 600x300 600x600 - –
Account control Yes (500 accounts)
(standard)
Process control Yes DSPF/SPF 600x600 600x600 600x600 - –
Tandem copy Yes (Network interface's (high quality)
being unnecessary) Input and transmitting resolution (dpi)
Book copy Yes FAX transmit mode and scanner/fax multicasting mode
Selection Standard Fine Super fine Ultra fine 600dpi
Irregular original size input Yes
mode sending
Irregular paper size input Yes (Tray 2/Manual tray) Input 600x600 600x600 600x600 600x600 –
Mixed originals feeder Yes (MIX only) resolution: OC
Special Margin shift Yes (Left/Right) Input 600x300 600x300 600x300 600x300 –
function resolution:
Edge erase/Center erase Yes (Center/Edge/Center
DSPF
+ Edge) Transmitting 203.2x97.8 203.2x195.6 203.2x391 406.4x391 –
Dual page copying Yes resolution
Covers/Inserts/Tab paper Yes Internet-FAX
insertion Transmitting 200x100 200x200 200x400 400x400 600x600
resolution
Transparency insert Yes
Scanner mode
Multi shot (Nin1) Yes (2 in 1 / 4 in 1) Selection Standard Fine Super fine Ultra fine –
(Centering: Yes) mode
Card shot Yes (Centering: Yes) Input 600x391.2 600x391.2 600x391.2 600x600 –
Pamphlet copy Yes (Centering: Yes) resolution: OC
Input 600x300 600x300 600x300 600x300 –
2-sided copy orientation Yes
resolution:
change
DSPF
Job build HDD model: Max.10,000 Transmitting 200x200 300x300 400x400 600x600 –
sheets resolution
HDD uninstallation model Reading level
is decided by memory 256 tones
retention. Exposure lamp
Scaling, Density and Electrodeless xenon lamp
Paper for each bunch are Output level
possible to be changed. Binary
Negative image Yes (3) Document Glass
Shading No
Reading area 297 x 431.8 (mm)
Black-white inversion Yes (Except UK) 11.7" x 17"
Mirror image Yes Original Left edge / Rear corner alignment
Multi-page enlargement No alignment
Repeat No Original size Provided
Date stamp Yes detection (Standard size only)
Stamp Yes Sizes to be Automatic (one detection unit to be used with
detected software modification by destination)
Character stamp Yes
Inch-1 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11",
Page stamp Yes
8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5"
Yes: Standard Function Inch-2 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11",
No: Not available 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5"
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R,
216 x 330 mm
AB-3 8K, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 16K,
16KR

OR guide Rear left side Original reference position " " (5) Power Source
display (Print display) Supplied from the main unit
Left side OR (From the Interior side)
guide 5-1/2, A5R, B5R, A4R/A5,
(6) Dimensions
(Print display) 8.5", B4R/B5, 11", A3R/A4 External dimensions 840 x 665 x 1127 mm
Interior side OR (From the left side) (WxDxH) (33-1/16" x 26-11/64" x 44-23/64")
guide 5-1/2, A5, B5, A4/A5R, 8-1/2, (Includes a scanner unit)
(Print display) B5R, 11", A4R, 13", 14", B4R, 1043 x 665 x 1127 mm
A3R, 17" (41-1/16" x 26-11/64" x 44-23/64")
Interior side OR Book marks are at A4 and (For machine with AR-DU4)
guide 8-1/2 positions. Occupied space 970 x 665 mm (38-3/16" x 26-11/64")
The position available to attach the staple dimensions (WxD) (When the tray is extended)
position guide label when the optional finisher Weight DSPF: Approx. 47 lbs (21.2 kg)
(desktop console type) is equipped.
(7) Display device at scanner part
(4) DSPF/SPF Type Dot map LCD, touch panel
Type DSPF One-scan-dual-side scanning Display dot number 640 x 240 dots (H-VGA)
method DSPF with OC (dot pitch 0.24 x 0.24 mm)
integrated LCD operating dimension 192 x 79 mm (7-35/64 x 3-7/64 inch)
Scan speed Standard mode 45 opm LCD back-light Fluorescent tube method
High quality mode 22.5 opm LCD brightness adjustment Provided
Original Center alignment Operation panel LCD Monochrome H-VGA 8.9 inch
alignment
Original size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R (8) Key
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x13", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, Mode Job status key
5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR selection Document filing key or Printer key
(Long size original up to 800mm in FAX, e-mail and area (* online display LED/data in-memory display LED)
Internet Fax mode) Image send key
Original 50~128g/m², 15~34lbs (busy display LED/data in-memory display LED)
paper Copy mode key
weight System settings key
Original Max. 50 sheets Basic input Start key
stack (Max. 30 sheets for A3, B4,11" x 17",8.5" x 14") area CA key
capacity (Max. 15 sheets for A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" 10-key
over 105g/m²) Clear key
or, Total thickness less than ∗ key
Max. 6.5mm (at 50 to 80g/m², 15 to 21lbs) #/P key
Max. 5.0mm (at 80 to 128g/m², 21 to 34lbs)
* For printer
Not Transparency film, secondary original paper,
transportable tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, (9) Used character in the LCD
original type original with crumple/crimp/rip, Dot 8 x 16 , 16 x 16 dots
original with attachment/clipping, Bold display O
original with many punch holes
(with 2 or 3 holes acceptable), (10) Touch sense method
original preprinted with ink-ribbon, Resistive film method
Documents with considerable curl.
Original size Provided 4. Rack for Scanner
detection
Sizes to be Automatic (one detection unit to be used with (1) Dimensions
detected software modification by destination) Strength 60 kg
Inch-1 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", Weight Approx. 16.3 (7.4 kg)
8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A4, A3
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11",
8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A4, A3
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
A3, 8.5" x 11", 11" x 17",
216 x 330 mm
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
8.5" x 11", 11" x 17",
216 x 330 mm
AB-3 8K, A4, A4R, B4, 16K, 16KR,
8.5" x 11", 216 x 330 mm
Original tray Center of the tray Original reference position " "
guide (inscribed symbol) Original face-down placement
display indication " "
Original Guide (From Center)
(inscribed symbol) B5R, A4R/A5, 8.5",
B4R/B5, 11", A3R/A4
The position available to attach the staple position
guide label when the optional finisher (desktop
console type) is equipped.

[4] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table
A. USA/Canada
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (with IC) x 10 350K AR-455MT *Life setup is based on A4 6%
(Toner : Net weight 750 g) (35K x 10)
2 Developer (Black) Developer x 10 1000K AR-455MD
(Developer : Net weight 500 g) (100K x 10)
3 Drum OPC drum x1 200K AR-455DR
B. European Subsidiary/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner CA with IC Chip x 10 350K AR-455LT *Life: A4 size at Area Coverage
(Toner; Net Weight 750g) (35K x 10) 6%
2 Developer (Black) Developer x 10 1,000K AR-455LD
(Developer; Net Weight 500g) (100K x 10)
3 Drum Drum x1 200K AR-455DM
C. Taiwan (Aurora)
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner CA with IC Chip x 10 350k AR-455ET *Life : A4 size at Area Coverage
(Toner; Net Weight 750g) (35k x 10) 6%
2 Developer (Black) Developer x 10 1,000k AR-455LD
3 Drum Drum x1 200k AR-455DM
D. Asia
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner CA with IC Chip x 10 350K AR-455CT *Life: A4 size at Area Coverage
2 Developer (Black) Developer x 10 1,000K AR-455CD
3 Drum Drum x1 200K AR-455DR
E. Middle East/Africa/Israel/Philippines
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner CA with IC Chip x 10 350K AR-455ET *Life : A4 size at Area Coverage
2 Developer (Black) Developer x 10 1,000k AR-455CD
3 Drum Drum x1 200k AR-455DR
F. Hong Kong
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner CA with IC Chip x 10 350K AR-455CT-C *Life : A4 size at Area Coverage
2 Developer (Black) Developer x 10 1,000K AR-455CD-C
3 Drum Drum x1 200k AR-455DR-C
G. China
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner CA with IC Chip x1 35k AR-456ST-C *Life : A4 size at Area Coverage
(Toner; Net Weight 750g) 6%
2 Developer (Black) Developer x1 100k AR-455SD-C
(Developer; Net Weight 500g)
3 Drum Drum x1 200k AR-455DR-C
MX-M350/M450 N/U CONSUMABLE PARTS 4 - 1

2. Maintenance parts list
A. USA/Canada
1 200K Maintenance kit Cleaner blade x1 200K AR-455KA1 *1:Screen grid, charging plate, MC
Drum separation pawl x4 cleaner unit are included.
MC unit *1 x1
Toner receiving seal x1
Side malt F x1
Side malt R x1
Transfer roller x1
Discharge plate x1
Paper dust removing unit x1
DV blade x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
2 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR-455UH
Fusing separation pawl (Upper) x4
3 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x1 200K AR-455LH
Fusing separation pawl (Lower) x2
4 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade x 10 200K (x 10) AR-455CB AR-455CB = (AR-455BL) x 10
5 Cleaning roller kit Cleaning roller x 10 200K (x 10) AR-455CR AR-455CR = (AR-455RC) x 10
Bearing x 20
6 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x 3 3000 times x 3 AR-SC1 Cartridge for AR-FN4
Common with cartridge for AR-FN6
7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 AR-SC2 Cartridge for AR-FN7
B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand/Taiwan
1 200K PM kit Cleaner blade x1 200K AR-451KA *1: Screen grid, charging plate, MC
MC unit *1 x1
Side malt F x1
Side malt R x1
Transfer roller x1
Discharger plate x1
DV blade x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Upper heat roller x1
Lower heat roller x1
Cleaning roller x1
Bearing x2
3 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 AR-SC2 Common with cartridge for AR-FN7
Note: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts.

C. Agency/Asia/Middle East/Africa/Latin America
MC unit *1 x1
Side malt F x1
Side malt R x1
Transfer roller x1
Discharger plate x1
DV blade x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Cleaning roller x1
Bearing x2
3 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 AR-SC2 Common with cartridge for AR-FN7
D. Hong Kong
MC unit *1 x1
Side malt F x1
Side malt R x1
Transfer roller x1
Discharger plate x1
DV blade x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Cleaning roller x1
Bearing x2
3 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x 3 5000 times x 3 AR-SC2 Common with cartridge for AR-FN7

E. China
MC unit *1 x1
Side malt F x1
Side malt R x1
Transfer roller x1
Discharger plate x1
DV blade x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Cleaning roller x1
Bearing x2
3 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x 3 5000 times x 3 AR-SC2 Common with cartridge for AR-FN7

2. Production number identification C. Developer cartridge
The lot number is of 8 digit, and each digit indicates as follows.
A. Drum cartridge
The lot number shall be printed on the bag.
The lot number, printed on the front side flange, is composed of 10
digits, each digit showing the following content: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
1 Number
2 Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
Indicates the production year.
2 Alphabet
3/4 Number
Indicates the model conformity code. T for this model.
Indicates the production month.
3 Number
5/6 Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Indicates the production day.
4 Number or X, Y, Z
7 Hyphen
8 Number
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Indicates the production lot.
5/6 Number
Indicates the production day on the month.
3. Environmental conditions
7 Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the month of packing. A. Operating conditions
8/9 Number 30 85%
Indicates the day of the month of packing. 85
10 Alphabet
Humidity (%)
Indicates the production factory. "A" for Nara Plant.
35 60%
B. Toner cartridge
The lot number is of 7 digits, and each digit indicates as follows.
The lot number shall be printed in the position shown in the figure.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
20
1 Version number (A - sequentially revised)
2 Numeral figure 10 Temperature 35
Indicates the end digit of the production year. (Without dew condensation)
3 Alphabet
Indicates the production factory. (B for SOCC) B. Storage conditions
4 Destination code
5/6 Numeral figures
Indicates the production day.
90
7 Numeral figure or X, Y, Z
Humidity (%)

Serial No. attachment
20
-10 Temperature 40
(Without dew condensation)
Serial No. attachment
Heat seal
Aluminum bag

[5] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
1. Exterior
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
11 13
No. Name Function/Operation Note

1 Bypass tray This tray can also be used for special papers including transparency Option
film. (AR-DU4)
2 Exit tray The tray is extendable to support large size paper. Extend the tray Option
when 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", A3 or B4 paper is being (AR-DU4/AR-TE3)
used.
3 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet originals. Both Option
sides of two-sided originals can be scanned at once. (MX-EFX1)
4 Duplex module Module for two-sided printing Option
(AR-DU3/DU4)
5 Upper paper output area (Center tray) Finished sheets are deposited here. –
6 Upper exit tray extension Provides support for large size paper. Option
(AR-TE4)
7 Operation panel – –
8 Front cover Open to add toner. –
9 Power switch Press to turn power on and off. –
10 Paper tray 1 – –
11 Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer This paper feed unit contains an upper multi-purpose drawer and Option
two lower drawers each of which can hold a maximum of 500 sheets (AR-D27)
of 20 lbs. (80 g/m2) paper.
12 Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer This paper feed unit contains an upper multi-purpose drawer and a Option
lower drawer which can hold a maximum of 2000 sheets of 20 lbs. (AR-D28)
(80 g/m2) paper.
13 Multi purpose drawer Up to 500 sheets of 20 lbs. (80 g/m2) paper can be loaded. Also Option
special papers such as envelopes (standard sizes only) and (AR-MU2)
postcards can be set.
MX-M350/M450 N/U EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 - 1

2. Interior
1 2 3 4
5 6
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Duplex module side cover Open when a misfeed has occurred in the duplex module.
2 Side cover latch Push up to open the side cover when a misfeed has occurred in the main unit.
3 Fusing unit Lift up to open the side cover when a misfeed has occurred in the main unit.
CAUTION: The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing misfed paper.
4 Toner cartridge (drum/toner cartridge) The toner cartridge must be replaced when indicated on the operation panel.
5 Photoconductive drum Images are formed on the photoconductive drum.
NOTE: Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum.
6 Cartridge lock lever When replacing the drum, toner or developer cartridge, turn down this lever and pull it out.

3. Operation panel
PRINT
1 2 3
When the document filing
function has not been
added.
PRINT
DOCUMENT READY
FILING DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS LOGOUT
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 Touch panel The machine status, messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel. The document filing*1,
copy, network scanner*2, fax*3, and Internet fax*4 functions are used by switching to the screen for the
desired function.
2 Mode select keys and Use to change modes and the corresponding display on the touch panel.
indicators [DOCUMENT FILING] key
Press to select the document filing mode*1.
∗ When the document filing function has not been added, this key is the [PRINT] key. This key is
pressed to change to the print mode screen.
[IMAGE SEND] key/LINE indicator/DATA indicator
Press to change the display to network scanner mode*2, fax mode*3 or Internet fax mode*4.
[COPY] key
Press to select the copy mode.
3 PRINT mode indicators READY indicator
Print data can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator
Lights up or blinks when print data is being received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is being
performed.
4 [JOB STATUS] key Press to display the current job status.
5 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key This is used to store, edit, and delete user names and folder names for the document filing function*1,
and to configure the administrator settings and printer configuration settings.
6 Numeric keys Use to enter numeric values for various settings.
7 [ ] key ([LOGOUT] key) This key is used in copy mode, document filing mode*1, network scanner mode*2, fax mode*3, and
Internet fax mode*4.
8 [#/P] key This is used as a program key when using the copy function, and to dial when using the fax function*3.
9 [C] key (Clear key) This key is used in copy mode, document filing mode*1, network scanner mode*2, and fax mode*3.
10 [START] key Use this key to start copying in copy mode, scan a document in network scanner mode*2, or scan a
document for transmission in fax mode*3 or Internet fax mode*4.
11 [CA] key (Clear all key) This key is used in copy mode, document filing mode*1, network scanner mode*2, fax mode*3, and
Internet fax mode*4. Use the key to cancel settings and perform an operation from the initial machine
state.
*1: MX-M350N/M450N, or when the document filing function has been added.
*2: When the network scanner option is installed.
*3: When the fax option is installed.
*4: When the Internet fax option is installed.

4. Job status screen (common to print, scan, fax and Internet fax)
This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.
This screen can be used to display the "JOB QUEUE" (showing stored jobs and the current job) or the "COMPLETE" job list (showing fin-
ished jobs). This screen can be used to check jobs, interrupt a job in progress to perform another job, and cancel a job.
1 *1 2 "COMPLETE"
"JOB QUEUE" screen job screen
JOB QUEUE SETS / PROGRESS STATUS JOB QUEUE JOB QUEUE
COPY 020 / 001 COPYING 1/1 COMPLETE COMPLETE
COPY 020 / 000 PAPER EMPTY

DETAIL DETAIL
Suzuki 020 / 000 WAITING
PRIORITY
066211221 002 / 000 WAITING STOP/DELETE CALL
PRINT JOB SCAN TO FAX JOB INTERNET-FAX INTERNET-FAX
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 Job list The displayed jobs in the job list are themselves operation keys. To cancel printing or to give a job the highest print priority,
touch the relevant job key to select the job and execute the desired operation using the keys described in 8 and 9.
This shows the current job and the jobs waiting to be run. The icons to the left of the jobs in the queue show the job mode.
The document filing reprint job icon is highlighted.
Note that the icon does not become highlighted during retransmission of a fax/image transmission job.
Print mode Copy mode
SCAN mode
Scan to e-mail job Scan to FTP job Scan to Desktop job Scan to Network folder job
Fax mode
Fax send job Fax reception job PC-Fax send job
Internet Fax mode
Internet Fax send job Internet Fax reception job PC-Internet Fax send job
*1: "PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display
When a job status display indicates "PAPER EMPTY", the specified paper size for the job is not loaded in any of the trays.
In this case, the job will be suspended until the required paper is loaded. Other stored jobs will be printed (if possible) until
the required paper is loaded. (Other jobs will not be printed if the paper runs out during printing.) If you need to change the
paper size because the specified paper size is not available, touch the current job key to select it and then touch the
[DETAIL] key described in 10.
2 Mode select key This switches the job list display between "JOB QUEUE" and "COMPLETE".
"JOB QUEUE": Shows stored jobs and the job in progress.
"COMPLETE": Shows finished jobs.
Files saved using the "FILE"*2 and "QUICK FILE"*2 functions and finished broadcast transmission jobs appear as keys in
the finished job screen. The "FILE"*2 or "QUICK FILE"*2 job keys in the finished job screen can be touched, followed by the
[CALL] key*2, to call up a finished job and print or transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission job key can be touched
followed by the [DETAIL] key to check the result of the transmission.
3 [PRINT JOB] key This displays the print job list of print mode (copying, printing, fax reception, Internet fax reception, and self printing).
4 [SCAN TO] key This displays the transmission status and finished jobs of scan mode (Scan to e-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and
Scan to Network Folder) when the network scanner option is installed.
5 [FAX JOB] key This displays the transmission/reception status and finished jobs of fax mode (fax and PC-Fax) when the fax option is
installed.
6 Display switching Use to switch the page of the displayed job list.
keys
7 [INTERNET-FAX] This displays the transmission/reception status and finished jobs of Internet fax mode and PC Internet fax mode when the
key Internet fax option is installed.
8 [STOP/DELETE] Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete the stored job. Note that printing of received faxes and received Internet
key faxes cannot be canceled or deleted.
9 [PRIORITY] key Touch this key after selecting a stored job in this [JOB QUEUE] list to print the job ahead of the other jobs.
Note that a job in progress cannot be interrupted if it is an interrupt copy job or if it is a list print job.
10 [DETAIL] key This shows detailed information on the selected job. Files saved using the "FILE"*2 and "QUICK FILE"*2 functions and
finished broadcast transmission jobs appear as keys in the finished job screen. A Quick File in the finished job screen or
the [Filing] key*2 can be touched, followed by the [CALL] key*2, to call up a finished job and print or transmit it. A finished
broadcast transmission job key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL] key to check the result of the transmission.
11 [CALL] key*2 When this key is touched after selecting a job in the COMPLETE job status screen (a job stored using the FILE or QUICK
FILE keys of the document filing function), the "JOB SETTINGS" menu screen appears to let you resend or reprint the
finished job.
*2: Can only be used on the MX-M350N/M450N, or when the document filing function has been added.

5. BASE SCREEN
To display the base screen of a mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key in the touch panel and then select the desired mode with the [MODE
SWITCH] key.
If you have set the display to show the address book screen when the [IMAGE SEND] key is pressed, touch the [CONDITION SETTINGS]
key in the address book to display the condition setting screen.
The administrator setting can be used to set the display to show either the condition setting screen or the Address book screen when the
[IMAGE SEND] key is pressed.
A. Condition settings screen

Base screen of scan mode Base screen of Internet fax mode
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
READY TO SEND. RESEND READY TO SEND. RESEND
AUTO SCAN 5 AUTO INTERNET-FAX ADDRESS BOOK 5
16 EXPOSURE ADDRESS BOOK MODE SWITCH
MODE SWITCH 16 EXPOSURE
300x300dpi ADDRESS REVIEW 6 ADDRESS REVIEW 6
15 RESOLUTION STANDARD
PDF MMR(G4) SPECIAL MODES 7 15 RESOLUTION SPECIAL MODES 7
14 FILE FORMAT
ADDRESS ENTRY FILE AUTO ADDRESS ENTRY FILE 8
AUTO
8 13 ORIGINAL
13 ORIGINAL SEND SETTINGS QUICK FILE 9 SEND SETTINGS QUICK FILE 9
12 11 10 12 11 10

1 Message display Messages appear here to indicate the current status of the machine.
When the machine is ready to send, an icon appears to the left.
2 [ ] (Quick) key When you add a one-touch key or a group key, the machine will automatically assign a shortened number.
Use this key for a three-digit shortened number to simplify the transmission procedure.
3 [MODE SWITCH] key Touch this to change the image send mode.
The modes that can be selected will vary depending on the peripheral devices (network scanner expansion
kit, facsimile expansion kit, Internet fax expansion kit) that are installed.
When the application integration module is installed, the [DATA ENTRY] key appears below the [MODE
SWITCH] key.
4 [RESEND] key Touch this key to resend to the last Scan to E-mail, Internet fax, or fax destination used.
Note that the following types of destinations are not retained for the resend function.
• A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key).
• Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder addresses.
• Broadcasting addresses • Addresses used only for BCC delivery
After the resend address is entered, the key changes to the [NEXT ADDRESS] key.
5 [ADDRESS BOOK] key This displays the Address Book screen. Touch this key when you wish to use a onetouch key that has a
destination (or group) programmed in it.
6 [ADDRESS REVIEW] key When performing a broadcast transmission, touch this key to check your selected destinations. Your
selected destinations will appear as a list, and the list can be edited.
7 [SPECIAL MODES] key Touch this key to set the special modes.
• Program • Erase • Dual page scan • Timer • 2 in 1 • Card shot
• Job build • Transaction report
8 [FILE] key Touch this key to store a document image that you are transmitting in the hard disk (this includes selecting
a user name, file name, and location).
9 [QUICK FILE] key Touch this key to store a document image that you are transmitting in the temporary storage folder.
10 [SEND SETTINGS] key Touch this key to set the subject, file name, and sender name.
11 [ADDRESS ENTRY] key When performing Scan to E-mail, touch this key if you wish to enter the e-mail address of the recipient
manually instead of using a one-touch key.
12 Two-sided scanning icon Icons appear here when you touch the [ORIGINAL] key and select two-sided scanning. The icons can be
display touched to open function selection screens.
13 [ORIGINAL] key Touch this key when you wish to manually set the size of the original to be scanned or scan both sides of
the original.
14 [FILE FORMAT] key Touch this key to set the file format of scan images that you transmit. The selected file format setting will be
highlighted above the key. The initial factory setting is "PDF MMR(G4)".
15 [RESOLUTION] key Touch this key to change the resolution setting for the original to be scanned. The selected resolution
setting will be highlighted above the key. The initial factory setting is "300x300dpi" (SCAN mode) or
"STANDARD" (INTERNET-FAX mode).
16 [EXPOSURE] key Touch this key to change the exposure setting for the original to be scanned. The selected exposure setting
will be highlighted above the key. The initial factory setting is "AUTO".

B. Address book screen
If you have set the initial screen to the address book screen using the Administrator setting, the initial screen will appear as follows.
Destinations stored using the Web page are grouped in indexes (9) according to the letter entered in "Initial" for each destination, and the
name entered in "Display Name" is displayed in the one-touch key (4).
The screen shown below is the address book screen with an alphabetical index. The address book screen can be set with the group index
as the initial screen.
4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
READY TO SEND. RESEND
TO CC BCC CONDITION
SETTINGS
TEST1 TEST2 ADDRESS REVIEW
TEST3 TEST4 GLOBAL
ADDRESS SEARCH
TEST5 TEST6
FREQUENT USE ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ ABC GROUP
9 8
9
E-mail Destination Management page USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 USER 4 USER 5 USER 6 ABC GROUP

1 [TO] key After selecting a destination using a one-touch key or the global address search function, touch this key. For
Scan to E-mail or Internet-Fax transmission, you can select multiple destinations before touching this key.
2 [CC] key If you wish to a send "CC" ("Carbon Copy") of a Scan to E-mail transmission to other recipients in addition to
the main recipient, after selecting destinations using one-touch keys or the global address search function,
touch this key. You can select multiple destinations before touching this key.
3 [BCC] key This key only appears when the [ENABLE BCC] checkbox is selected in [BCC SETTING] in the administrator
settings.
If you wish to send a "BCC" ("Blind Carbon Copy") of a Scan to E-mail transmission to other recipients in
addition to the main recipient, after selecting destinations using one-touch keys or the global address search
function, touch this key. Other recipients will not be informed that a copy was sent to the "BCC" recipients. You
can select multiple destinations before touching this key.
4 One-touch key This shows the one-touch keys that have been stored on the selected "index card". The key type is indicated by
display the icon at the right.
: Scan to E-mail : Scan to FTP
: Scan to Desktop : Scan to Network Folder
: Internet-Fax : Fax (An optional facsimile expansion kit is required.)
: Multiple destinations including Scan to E-mail and Fax destinations
This can be changed to 6 or 9 using the administrator setting, "The number of direct address/sender keys
displayed setting".
5 Display switching In cases where the one-touch keys cannot all be displayed on one screen, this shows how many screens are
keys left. Touch the " "" " keys to move through the screens.
6 [CONDITION This displays the Condition settings screen, which is used to set various conditions.
SETTINGS] key
7 [GLOBAL ADDRESS This feature makes it possible to search for an email address in an Internet or intranet directory database.
SEARCH] key To use this function, the IP address (or network name) of the LDAP server must be set, as well as an account
name and password. These settings are configured by accessing the Web server in the machine from a
computer. Click "LDAP" in the Web page menu frame to display the LDAP Setup screen.
8 [ABC GROUP] Touch this key to switch between the alphabetical index and the group index.
key
9 Index keys One-touch key destinations are stored on each of these index cards (alphabetical index or group index). Touch
an index key to display the card. Each time you touch the same index key, the order of display of one-touch
keys changes as follows: Order of registration → Alphabetical order → Reverse alphabetical order. An icon
indicating the current display order will appear on the tab.
Storing order (initially selected) Ascending order Descending order
FREQUENT USE ABCD FREQUENT USE ABCD FREQUENT USE ABCD
Group indexes make it possible to store one-touch keys by group with an assigned name for easy reference.
This is done with the custom settings. Frequently used one-touch key destinations can be stored on the
FREQUENT USE card for convenient access.

6. Cross sectional view
A. Scanner unit
3 SPPD
4 SPED
16 1 2 6 7
17 SPOD 5
15
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
No. Name No. Name
1 CIS unit 10 Copy lamp base unit
2 Original resist roller 11 No. 1 mirror
3 Original resist front sensor (SPPD) 12 Copy lamp (Xenon)
4 Original set sensor (SPED) 13 Mirror base unit
5 Original take-up sensor 14 No. 3 mirror
6 Original length sensor 1 (SPLS1) 15 No. 2 mirror
7 Original length sensor 2 (SPLS2) 16 Original exit roller
8 CCD/lens unit 17 Original exit sensor
9 Original feed roller
B. Engine
POD1 POD2 POD3
21 22 23 24
20
18
15
19
16
17
26 4
3
2
1
8
6
9
25
5
PPD1
10
11
12 13 PED TUD 7 14
No. Name No. Name
1 OPC drum 14 Machine tray (Paper tray1) rotating plate
2 Main charger 15 Upper heat roller
3 Cleaning blade 16 Pressure roller
4 LSU 17 Heater lamp
5 Developing unit 18 Thermistor (RTH1 / RTH2)
6 Magnet roller 19 Thermostat
7 Toner hopper 20 Fusing back roller
8 Transfer roller 21 Reverse gate
9 Resist roller 22 Paper exit roller
10 Paper transport roller 23 Full detection lever
11 Machine tray (Paper tray1) paper feed roller 24 Printer control PWB
12 Machine tray (Paper tray1) separation roller 25 Power supply unit
13 Machine tray (Paper tray1) take-up roller 26 Cleaning roller

7. Switch, Sensor
A. Scanner unit
4 5 6
7
3
2
1
8
12
11 9
10
Code Name Active condition
1 SPPD SPF original resist front sensor
2 SCOV SPF paper feed cover sensor
3 SPED SPF original set sensor
4 OCSW OC open/close sensor
5 ORS-LED Original size sensor PWB (Light emitting side)
6 SPLS1 SPF original length sensor 1
7 SPLS2 SPF original length sensor
8 SPFVR SPF original width detection volume PWB
9 ORS-PD Original size sensor PWB (Light receiving side)
10 SOCD SPF open/close sensor
11 SPOD SPF original exit sensor
12 MHPS Mirror home position sensor
B. Engine
5.POD3
4.POD2
2.DSW-L
3.POD1
7.TCS
8.LUD
6.PPD1 10.MAIN SW
1.DSW-F
9.PED
Code Function/Operation Active condition

1 DSW-F Front door open/close detection H= Door open
2 DSW-L Left door open/close detection H=Door open
3 POD1 Paper exit detection L= Paper detection
4 POD2 Paper exit detection L= Paper detection
5 POD3 Paper exit detection Full L= Paper detection
6 PPD1 Paper transport detection L= Paper detection
7 TCS Toner concentration sensor
8 LUD Paper feed cassette upper limit detection H= Upper limit detection
9 PED Paper feed cassette paper empty detection L= Paper empty detection
10 MAIN SW Power switch

8. PWB
A. Scanner unit
2 3
1
13
6
4
12 8
11
10 7 14
9

1 SPF control PWB SPF control
2 Original size detection PWB (Light emitting side) Original size detection when using the table glass
3 CCD PWB (in lens unit) (The lens unit cannot be disassembled.) Image scan (Table glass/SPF surface)
4 SPF original width detection volume PWB SPF original width detection
5 MFP operation PWB Panel operation control
6 Scanner control PWB Scanner unit control
7 LVDS PWB LCD signal relay
8 Original size sensor (Light receiving side) Original size detection when using the table glass
9 CIS unit (in CIS unit) (The CIS unit cannot be disassembled.) Image scan (SPF back surface)
10 CIS interface PWB (in CIS unit) (The CIS unit cannot be disassembled.) CIS signal AD conversion process
11 Scanner interface PWB Scanner unit and connection of scanner control PWB
12 CIS control PWB CIS unit control and image process
13 CL inverter PWB Inverter for copy lamp
14 LCD INV PWB Generates a high voltage for the backlight.
B. Engine
1
4
7 5
11
10
13
9
12
3

1 PRT controller Image process, image data communication control
2 PCU PWB Overall control of the machine and options
3 Power supply unit DC power supply
4 LD PWB (Inside LSU) Laser ON control (Inside LSU: LSU cannot be disassembled.)
5 Mother PWB Signal interface between PCU and the controller
6 Reactor PWB (200V only) / Filter PWB (Taiwan only) Noise filter
7 BD PWB Laser control (Inside LSU: LSU cannot be disassembled.)
8 High voltage resistor PWB High voltage load adjustment
9 Cassette detection PWB Paper cassette control
10 Drawer PWB Fan control
11 High voltage PWB High voltage power supply
12 Fuse PWB Protection of the machine when an abnormal power is supplied.
13 Relay PWB HDD back up

9. Motor, Clutch, Solenoid
A. Scanner unit
5
4
3
1 2
7
6

1 SPFM SPF motor Original transport in SPF scan
2 SRRC SPF original resist clutch SPF original scan timing adjustment
3 SPFC SPF original feed clutch SPF original feed roller drive
4 SDSS SPF original stopper solenoid SPF original stopper gate drive
5 MIRM Mirror motor Mirror base copy lamp base drive
6 SPFS SPF original feed solenoid SPF original feed unit drive
7 STMPS Stamp solenoid Finish stamp drive (Japan only)
B. Engine
13.PSPS 16.CNTFAN
10.CFM2
3.POM 6.VFM2
17.PM
1.DM
15.HDDFAN
14.RRC
12.TRC
2.MM
11.CPFC 7.VFM1
7.VFM1
5.LUM
8.CFM1
4.TM
Code Function/Operation Type
1 DM Drum motor Brushless motor
2 MM Main motor Brushless motor
3 POM Paper exit motor Stepping motor
4 TM Toner motor Synchronous motor
5 LUM Lift-up motor Synchronous motor
6 VFM2 Heat exhaust fan motor Fan motor
7 VFM1 Cooling fan motor Fan motor
8 CFM1 Suction fan motor Fan motor
10 CFM2 Ozone exhaust fan motor Fan motor
11 CPFC Paper cassette paper feed clutch
12 TRC Paper transport clutch
13 PSPS Separation solenoid
14 RRC Resist roller clutch
15 HDDFAN Cooling fan motor (for HDD) Fan motor
16 CNTFAN Cooling fan motor (for controller) Fan motor
17 PM Polygon motor Polygon motor

[6] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
1. Installing procedure flowchart
There are many combinations between this machine and option
units. For installing option units, observe the following procedures
for efficiency.
To install the devices effciently, follow the procedure below.
Some peripheral devices may have been installed as standard
devices depending on the main unit model.
Part of descriptions and illustrations may be different.
Scanner/document feeder device
Finishing device
Finishing device
Main unit
Duplex device Paper feeding device
* To install the AR-MU2, the optional exclusive-use desk is required.
Start of installation
Main unit, paper feeding Install controller board,

device, and power supply facsimile unit or other electric
unit. devices.
Controller board, Yes
AR-MU2 facsimile unit or other AR-FX12/AR-MM9
AR-D27 electric devices MX-NBX2
AR-D28 installed? MX-NBX3
Main unit AR-PK6
No MX-NSX1
Extended memory
[Electrical setting/adjustment]
Install duplex/pypass device.
Duplex/bypass Yes 1) Installation of driver software, setting,
device installed? AR-DU3 and operation check
AR-DU4 Main unit/MX-EFX1/AR-FX12/MX-NBX2/MX-NBX3/
AR-PK6/MX-NSX1
No 2) Paper guide position adjustment/off center adjustment
AR-MU2/AR-D27/AR-D28/
Install finishing device. AR-DU3/AR-DU4
Finishing device Yes

AR-MS1
installed? AR-FN6
AR-FN7
AR-PN1A / B / C / D End
No
Install scanner/document feeder.

MX-EFX1/AR-RK2 When installing a paper feeding device or a duplex/bypass device, be sure to reattach
the rear cabinet, the AC inlet cover, and the harness cover of the main unit at the end
of installation as needed.
When installing a controller board, a facsimile unit, and other electric devices, be sure to install them
at a time.
Only off center adjustment is needed for AR-DU3.
∗ For installation of an option unit, refer to the Service Manual of the option unit.
MX-M350/M450 N/U UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 1

2. Note for installation place MX-M350N/M450N MX-M350U/M450U
CD-ROM (Printer)
Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the
Maintenance card/Maintenance case (Except UK)
following during initial installation and whenever the machine is
Warranty Registration (UK only)
moved.
Delivery/installation report (Europe only)
1) The machine should be installed near an accessible power
MSDS card (North America/UK only)
outlet for easy connection.
Warranty (Australia only)
2) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that Scanner key sheet (Local area only)
meets the specified voltage and current requirements. Also Dust cover (Local area only)
make certain the outlet is properly grounded.
3) Remove the cushioning materials from the right and left of the
• For the power supply requirements, see the name plate of front side.
the main unit.
3) Do not install your machine in areas that are:
• damp, humid, or very dusty
• exposed to direct sunlight
• poorly ventilated
• subject to extreme temperature or humidity
changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater.
4) Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for
servicing and proper ventilation.
11-13/16" (30cm)
31-1/2" 23-5/8"
(80cm) (60cm)
4) Remove the locking tape from the right and left sides of the
tray.
Then, Remove the top of the carton and lower the plastic bag
covering the machine while the machine is still on the carton
base.
23-5/8" (60cm) 5) Remove the packing tape from the paper tray, pull out the
paper tray until it stops and remove it by tilting it upward.
3. Unpacking procedure
1) Release the joint, and remove the packing case.
2) Remove the top pad, and open the electrostatic polyethylene
bag.
6) One person must lift by the empty front tray pocket with the
right hand and steady the machine with the left hand placed at
the upper left of the machine.
The other person must lift with the right hand by using the lift-
ing recess in the rear of the machine and also steady the
machine with the left hand as shown in the illustration.
Front side
Rear side
Check the following items are included in the package.

MX-M350N/M450N MX-M350U/M450U
Operating Manual
(Common/Copier, Administrator guide (System settings))
Web manuals (Printer) –
Note: The center of gravity of the machine lies in the left side
(Network Scan)
when viewed from the Back of machine. When lifting the
Installation manual (PCL/PS)
machine, be careful not to drop it.

4. Unpacking and installation of the Caution: The lower tray cannot be pulled out unless the adjuster
is lowered to the specified position.
desk unit 3) Put the main unit of the printer on the stand/paper drawer.
Note: In advance to installation of the machine, the paper feed <1> Pull out the paper tray of the main unit until it stops and then
option units (AR-D27/AR-D28/AR-MU2) should have been remove it by lifting both ends of the tray.
installed.
A. AR-D28
<Before installation>
• Start installation after checking that the DATA and COMMUNI-
CATION indicators on the operation panel are neither lit nor
blinking.
<2> Hold the main unit of the printer at the positions shown in the
illustration and put the main unit on the stand/paper drawer
so that the front side and the left side of the main unit are
aligned to those of the stand/paper drawer.
Front side
Rear side
<Parts included>
Front mounting Rear mounting Screws (M4x6):

plates: 2 pcs. plates: 2 pcs. 4 pcs.
Caution: For installation of the main unit, it must be held by two
persons and installed without haste.
4) Connect the main unit to the stand/paper drawer.
<1> Attach the rear mounting plates using a supplied screw for
Left adjuster: 1 pc. each.
Left paper guides: 2 pcs. Right paper guides: 2 pcs.

Rear mounting plate
1) Turn off the main switch of the main unit of the printer.
Turn the main switch located on the front side of the printer to
the "OFF" position.
Then remove the power plug from the outlet.
Screw Screw
Rear mounting plate
Rear
mounting plate
"OFF"
Desk frame
2) Attach the adjusters and adjust them.

Caution: Insert the rear mounting plates under the desk frame.
<1> Insert the left adjusters to the stand/paper drawer.
<2> Turn the each adjusters to lower them until they touch the
floor.
2
2
1 2
∗ Be sure to attach the left adjuster to prevent overturning.

<2> Pull out the upper paper tray of the stand/paper drawer until it Remove the M4 screw shown in the illustration, insert the cir-
stops and attach the front mounting plates using a supplied cle terminal of ground harness, and it fixes again.
screw for each.
Then, remove the lock of the paper tray and close the tray.
Front
mounting plate
Screw
Front mounting
plate Screw
<3> Reattach the power supply I/F harness cover to its original
<3> Reattach the paper tray of the main unit. position and fix it with the removed screw.
At this time, ensure that the power supply I/F harness are
arranged as shown in the illustration.
• Fix the harness securely to the wire saddle.
Screw
Power supply
I/F harness
5) Connect the power supply I/F harness to the PCU PWB of the
main unit of the printer. Harness cover
<1> Remove the screw that fixes the harness cover of the main
unit of the printer and slide the harness cover up to remove it. Wire saddle
Process the harness cover as shown in the illustration. Wire saddle
Screw 6) Attach the paper guides to the lower tray (large capacity tray)
and set the size.
Refer to "Setting and adjustment" described later.
∗ If another peripheral device must be installed, carry out the fol-
lowing step at the end of the installation work.
7) Adjust the position of the paper guides of the upper paper tray
of the stand/paper drawer.
Cut out.
8) Carry out the off center adjustment.
Harness cover
<2> Connect the power supply I/F harness connector (red, 22pin)
to CN11 (red connector) of the PCU PWB of the main unit of
the printer.
Connector
CN11
Connect the connector (white, 4pin) of power supply I/F har-

ness to the I/F connector (white, 4pin) of the main unit.

B. AR-D27 <2> Hold the main unit of the printer at the positions shown in the
illustration and put the main unit on the stand/paper drawer
<Before installation>
• Start installation after checking that the DATA and COMMUNI- aligned to those of the stand/paper drawer.
CATION indicators on the operation panel are neither lit nor
blinking. Front side
Rear side
Caution: For installation of the main unit, it must be held by two

4) Connect the main unit to the stand/paper drawer.
<Parts included> each.
Rear mounting plate
Front mounting Rear mounting Screws (M4x6):

plates: 2 pcs. plates: 2 pcs. 4 pcs.
Left adjuster: 1 pc.
Turn the main switch located on the front side of the printer to Screw Screw
the "OFF" position.
Then remove the power plug from the outlet. Rear mounting plate
Mounting plate
"OFF"
Desk frame
2) Attach the adjusters and adjust them.
<1> Insert the left adjusters to the stand/paper drawer.
Caution: Insert the rear mounting plates under the desk frame.
<2> Turn the five adjusters to lower them until they touch the floor.
<2> Pull out the upper paper tray of the stand/paper drawer until it
stops and attach the front mounting plates using a supplied
screw for each.
Remove the locks of the middle tray and the lower tray simi-
larly.
2
2
2
1 2 Front
mounting plate
∗ Be sure to attach the left adjuster to prevent overturning.
Caution: The lower tray cannot be pulled out unless the adjuster
is lowered to the specified position. Screw
3) Put the main unit of the printer on the stand/paper drawer.

<1> Pull out the paper tray of the main unit until it stops and then
remove it by lifting both ends of the tray.
Front mounting
plate Screw

<3> Reattach the paper tray of the main unit. <3> Reattach the harness cover to its original position and fix it
with the removed screw.
At this time, ensure that the power supply I/F harness is
Screw
Power supply
I/F harness
5) Connect the power supply I/F harness to the PCU PWB of the
main unit of the printer.
unit of the printer and slide the harness cover up to remove it.
Process the harness cover as shown in the illustration. Harness cover
Screw
Wire saddle
Wire saddle
6) Adjust the position of the paper guides of the upper paper tray
of the stand/paper drawer.
Cut out. 7) Carry out the off center adjustment.
C. AR-MU2
Harness cover
<2> Connect the power supply I/F harness connector (red, 22pin)
to CN11 (red connector) of the PCU PWB of the main unit of
the printer.
Connector
CN11
<Parts included>
Connect the connector (white, 4pin) of power supply I/F har-

ness to the I/F connector (white, 4pin) of the main unit.
Remove the M4 screw shown in the illustration, insert the cir-
Front mounting plates: Rear mounting plates: Screws (M4x8):
cle terminal of ground harness, and it fixes again. 2 pcs. 2 pcs. 4 pcs.
Turn the main switch located on the front side of the main unit
to the "OFF" position.
Then, remove the power plug of the main unit from the outlet.
"OFF"

2) Put the main unit of the printer on the multi purpose drawer. <2> Pull out the paper tray of the multi purpose drawer until it
<1> Pull out the paper tray of the main unit until it stops and then stops and attach the front mounting plates using a supplied
remove it by lifting both ends of the tray. screw for each.
Front
mounting plate
Screw
<2> Hold the main unit of the printer at the positions shown in the
illustration and put the main unit on the multi purpose drawer
aligned to those of the multi purpose drawer. Front mounting plate
Front side Screw
<3> Reattach the paper tray of the main unit of the printer.
Rear side
4) Remove the multi rear cabinet.

Caution: For installation of the main unit, it must be held by two <1> Remove the two screws that secure the multi rear cabinet.
Screw
3) Connect the main unit of the printer to the multi purpose
drawer.
each.
Multi rear cabinet

Rear mounting plate
Screw
<2> Remove the two screws that secure the Harness protection
Screw sheet.
Screw
Rear mounting plate
Mounting
plate
Tray frame
Caution: Insert the mounting plate under the desk frame.

<3> Remove the filament tape that secure the the power supply I/ <3> Connect the connector (white, 4pin) of power supply I/F har-
F harness. ness to the I/F connector (white, 4pin) of the main unit.
Connect the power supply I/F harness connector (red, 22pin) to
CN11 (red connector) of the PCU PWB of the main unit of the
printer.
Remove the M4 screw shown in the illustration, insert the cir-
cle terminal of ground harness, and it fixes again.
Connector
CN11
5) Connect the harness to the main unit of the printer.

unit of the printer and then slide the harness cover up to
remove it.
Process the harness cover as shown in the illustration.
Screw
∗ For installation of a finisher or a mail-bin stacker, see its installa-

tion manual.
6) Attach the harness cover.
Reattach the harness cover to its original position and fix it
with the removed screw.
At this time, ensure that the power supply I/F harness is
Cut out.
Harness cover Screw
<2> Connect the connector of the relay harness of the multi pur-
pose drawer to the connector of the PCU PWB of the main
unit of the printer.
CN10 Connector
Harness cover
Wire saddle
Wire saddle
∗ If another peripheral device must be installed, carry out the fol-

lowing step at the end of the installation work.
7) Adjust the position of the paper guides of the paper tray.
8) Carry out the off center adjustment.

5. Unpacking and installation of the rack 6. Machine installing procedure
(AR-RK2) A. Setting related to process
1) Open the left door and the front door, and remove the blue
screw in the developer cartridge section.
2) Remove the developer cartridge from the machine.
1) Attach the rack to the desk unit.

★ Be sure to identify the left and the right racks. Refer to the fig-
ure below.
Insert the rack boss into the rack mounting hole (made by
removing the mold of the desk unit), and fix each rack with two
fixing screws (M5 x 70).
3) Remove the top cover of the developer cartridge.
Cam
Rack sheet
Rack with the Rack with the

rack sheet cam attached
attached to it to it
Rack mounting hole

Boss
Fixing screws
Boss Rack mounting hole
(M5x70)
2) Attach the rack bottom plate.

4) While rotating the MG roller, supply developer into the devel- 3) Gently remove the sealing tape from the cartridge.
oper cartridge evenly.
Note that the MG roller must be rotated in the arrow direction
as shown in the figure below.
Use of a metal scale or a screwdriver (-) facilitates the proce-
dure.
Note: Before opening the developer seal, shake it 4 or 5 times.
4) Return the cartridge lock lever.
5) Attach the top cover to the developer cartridge and install the
cartridge to the machine.
∗ After installing the machine, fix it with the blue screw.
B. Toner cartridge settings

1) Remove a new toner cartridge from the package and shake it
horizontally five or six times. C. Setting related to fusing
1) Put down the right and the left levers of the fusing unit in the
arrow direction.
2) Insert a new toner cartridge.

Push the cartridge in until it locks securely into place.
D. Paper setting
1) Pull out the first stage paper feed tray.
Slowly pull out the tray until it stops.

2) While pressing the paper holding plate, remove the fixing pin. 1) Turn off the main switch of the main unit of the printer.
Turn the main switch located on the front side of the printer to
the "OFF" position.
Then remove the power plug from the outlet.
"OFF"
2) Put the scanner unit on the rack.

Hold the handle of the scanner unit, and put the scanner unit
on the rack from the front side of the rack as shown in the fig-
ure. Slowly slide the scanner unit until it is brought into contact
3) Put paper in the tray, and close the paper feed tray. with the rack and stopped.
Rack
Scanner unit
3) Fix the scanner unit.

Fix the scanner unit which is on the rack with the fixing screw
(M4 x 8), and fix it to the rack with the M4 step screw (long,
short x 2).
7. Unpacking and installation of the M4 stepped

MX-EFX1 screw Reference
Reference
Screw
(M4x8
M4 stepped
screw
4) Remove the fixing tape for scanner packing and remove the
fixing screw.
Remove the pack fixing tape and the fixing screws which are
Be sure to remove it, fixing the scanner unit, and remove the packing note.
or it may cause a trouble.
Parts included in the scanner unit

Scanner unit
fixing screw
Operation manual Tray Scanner

(1 pc.) (1 pc.) rack sheel
(1 pc.)
M4 step M4 step Fixing screw

screws (long) screws (short) (M4x8)
(1 pc.) (2 pcs.) (1 pc.)

5) Connect the cable. 6) Press the [START] key, and the automatic developer adjust-
Connect the scanner unit connector with the printer connector, ment will be performed.
and fix the connectors with two screws attached to the con- During execution of the automatic developer adjustment,
nector. “EXECUTING...” is displayed and the toner sensor value is
indicated on the LCD. (DEVE REFERENCE)
7) After about 2 min, the adjustment value is stored in the
machine. Check that the mode was normally completed.
Normal end: Returns to the initial window (PRESS
START display).
Abnormal end: Returns to the initial window (PRESS
START display), and indicates the trouble
display (TROUBLE! EE-**).
In case of an error end, remove the cause of the error, and
execute the automatic developer adjustment again.
8) Turn off/on the power, and the machine returns to the normal
Scanner cable Screws mode and enters the warm-up mode.
Note: When inserting the connector, be careful not to break the

9. Print test
pins, and connect according to the guide.
6) Attach the paper exit tray. 1) After completion of warm-up (normal mode), select [SYSTEM
Attach the paper exit tray to the scanner unit as shown in the SETTINGS] → [Data list up] to display the menu.
figure. 2) Print [ALL SETUP LIST] to check and confirm the print quality.
3) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key again to return to the
normal menu.
10. Distortion adjustment

Note: This adjustment must be performed after installing the
machine and its peripheral devices.
There is basically no need because it has been made prior to ship-
Paper exit tray ping. If there should be a distortion as shown in the figure below,
perform the adjustment according to the following procedures.
1) Use a level gauge to check to confirm that the scanner unit is
8. Automatic developer adjustment installed horizontally.
1) Attach the cabinets which were removed. Make a copy, and if any distortion is found as shown in Fig 1 or
2) Close the left door. Fig. 2, loosen the scanner fixing screw (M4 x 8) and the cam A
fixing screw (M3 x 12) to make an adjustment.
At that time, keep the front door open.
Note: The automatic developer adjustment must be performed by
entering the simulation mode with the front door open. If the
power is turned on with the front door closed, warm-up is
performed to supply toner to the developing unit. As a
result, the reference toner density cannot be obtained.
3) Insert the power plug into the power outlet.
4) Enter simulation 25-2.
5) Close the front door. Fixing screw
(M4x8)
(LCD Display)
SIMULATION 25-2
AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START.
HUMIDITY AREA: 70.0 - 72.5 [Fig. 1]
TEMPERATURE AREA: 70.0 - 72.5
First copy image
DEVE REFERENCE: 128
Image
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and the operation
is stopped immediately or after 2 min.
Paper
SIMULATION 25-2 Difference
AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. EXECUTING···.
HUMIDITY AREA: 70.0 - 72.5 • Case of Fig. 1
TEMPERATURE AREA: 70.0 - 72.5 Shift the cam A in the direction of A by the difference of the image.
DEVE REFERENCE: 118 For one scale (one groove), shift by 0.5mm.
After shifting the cam, tighten the cam A fixing screw (M3 x 12).
Make a copy again and check to confirm that there is no distortion
on the image.

13. Using the transport handle
[Fig. 2]
1) Remove the screw, and remove the handle.
First copy image
Image
Paper
Difference
• Case of Fig. 2
Shift the cam A in the direction of B by the difference of the image.
For one scale (one groove), shift by 0.5mm.
After shifting the cam, tighten the cam A fixing screw (M3 x 12).
Make a copy again and check to confirm that there is no distortion
on the image.
After adjustment, tighten the fixing screw (M3 x 12) and the scan- 2) Insert the handle into the left rack notch diagonally upward as
ner fixing screw (M4 x 8). shown in the figure.
Attach the decoration seal to the screw hole. 3) Attach the screw which was removed in procedure 1) to
(DSPF scan position automatic adjustment) secure the handle.
1) Execute SIM 53-8 after completion of the distortion adjust-
ment.
2) If any distortion is made after execution of the simulation, exe-
cute the MB rail position adjustment. (Refer to "3-A OC scan
distortion adjustment (MB-B rail height adjustment)" in [8]
ADJUSTMENTS.)
11. Attach the document scanning label

Reference
6mm
Reference
15mm
4) Lift the rear edge A of the handle to engage the head with
the rack.
12. Adjuster installation and adjustment

1) Insert the left adjuster into the paper feed desk.
2) Turn each adjuster until it is brought into contact with the floor.
5) After completion of transport, restore the handle to the original

position.
2
2
2
1 2
∗ Be sure to install the left adjuster in order to prevent falling down

of the machine.
Note: If the adjusters are not lowered to the specified positions,
the lower stage tray cannot be pulled out.

[7] MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
• Self print of set values • When assembling, check that the flat cable and the harness
Use of SIM 22-6 allows to print the set values and the jam his- connectors are securely connected.
tory of the machine. • When connecting the flat cable, be careful not to break the pins.
These values must be printed before execution of maintenance When installing the PWB unit and the memory module, use a
or disassembly procedures. Ground Strap to prevent damage caused by electrical dis-
charge.
[Maintenance System Table]

1. Engine section
Maintenance cycle : 200K
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace Δ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position
When
Unit name Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K 500K 600K 700K 800K Remark
calling
Drum peripheral Drum ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Cleaner blade ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ Replace at 200K or 1 year.
P/G No.: [10]-49
Toner reception seal ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [10]-42
Side molt F ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [10]-33
Side molt R ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [10]-37
Transfer roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-8
Discharge plate ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-2
TR bearing (F/R) ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-9, 18
Transfer roller collar ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-10
After-transfer star ring ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ P/G No.: [5]-19
TR gear ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-15
Drum separation pawl unit ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-501
MC unit ✕ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ Includes the screen grid, the
charging plate, and the MC
cleaner.
❍: Charging plate cleaning by
the MC cleaner
P/G No.: [9]-901
Paper guide ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Developing Developer ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Supplied when installing
section DV blade ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [11]-55
DSD collar ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
DV side seal F ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [11]-38
DV side seal R ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [11]-43
Toner cartridge – – – – – – – – Attached when installing./
750g, user replacement for every
35K.
Fusing section Upper heat roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-46
Lower heat roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-22
Upper separation pawl ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-3
Lower separation pawl ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-41
Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Clean and remove paper dust.
Upper heat roller gear ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-47
Paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
CL roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-52
CL roller bearing ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-53
Filters Ozone filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ P/G No.: [12]-2
Paper feed Pick-up roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
section Paper feed roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
Separation roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
Transport section Resist roller ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper exit Transport rollers ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
reverse section Transport paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper dust remover unit ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ P/G No.: [14]-51
Optical reflection sensor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ PS roller unit section
Drive section Gears (Specified position) ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Image quality ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Clean with air.
Note 1: Replacement reference: Use the counter value of each paper feed port as the replacement reference.
Paper feed roller/Separation pad/Torque limiter section (Include Desk, Multi purpose): 100K or 1 year
MX-M350/M450 N/U MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 1

2. Scanner / DSPF
When
calling
Optical Mirror/Lens/Reflector/Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
section Table glass/Dust-proof glass/OC ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
White reference glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Drive belt/Drive wire/Pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
DSPF Paper feed Pick-up roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Note 2
section Paper feed roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Note 2
Separation mylar lower ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Note 2
Separation pad ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Note 2
Transport section PS roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Exposure section ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
(Dust-proof glass)
Paper exit Paper exit roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
section
Other Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Clean with air.
Note 2: Replacement reference: Replace by using the SPF counter value as an indication.
Paper feed section pickup roller, paper feed roller, separation pad, separation lower mylar lower:
100K or 1 year

3. Peripheral devices
When
Option name Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K 500K 600K 700K 800K Remark
calling
Finisher Transport section Transport rollers ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
De-curler roller (❍)✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Transport paper ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
guides
Drive section Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified position)
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Staple unit Replace unit
at 200K staple.
Staple cartridge User replacement
for every 3000 pcs.
Mail-bin Transport section Transport rollers ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
stacker Transport paper ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
guides
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Saddle finisher, Transport section Transport rollers ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
punch unit Transport paper ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
guides
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Staple unit Replace unit at 300K
staple.
Staple cartridge User replacement
for every 5000 pcs.
Punch unit Replace unit at
1000K.
ADU Paper feed Paper feed (❍)✕ (❍)✕ (❍)✕ (❍)✕ (❍)✕ (❍)✕ (❍)✕ (❍)✕ (❍)✕ Note 3
+ Manual feed separation section rollers
Transport section Transport rollers ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Transport paper ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
guides
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Paper feed section pickup roller, paper feed roller, separation pad: 100K or 1 year

[DETAILS OF EACH SECTION]
1. Process section
A. General
Toner is attached to electrostatic latent images formed by the laser
beams which were radiated to the OPC drum charged by the main
charger, forming toner images.
The toner images formed on the OPC drum are transferred to
paper by the transfer roller.
4 5
3 2 1
No. Name Operation

1 Toner cartridge Supplies toner to the developing unit, and collects waste toner.
2 Developer unit Mixes toner and carrier, and attaches toner to electrostatic latent images to form visible images.
3 Transfer roller Transfers toner to the paper.
4 Process drum unit The electrostatic image formed by the laser on the drum comes in contact with the developer to
form the visible image on the OPC drum.
5 Main charger unit Charges the drum evenly with a negative charge.

Process Section Composition and Applying Voltage
MAX 8KV
constant current
opc27 m
ctc27 m 13 3
Separation electrode 12
1
-1.8KV 4
-650V
11 10
2 (-620V)
30 6
9
-800V
5
25μA (45ppm)
15
19μA (35ppm)
MAX 5KV
16 7
Paper dust cleaner Toner density sensor
8
200M 200M
14 14
Temperature/humidity sensor
-500V
(-470)
Composition of process section

1 Laser beam Forms latent electrostatic images on the photoconductor drum. (Writing resolution: 600dpi)
The output from LSU can be set with the simulation. (Basically the initial setup is used.)
2 Photoconductor drum Latent electrostatic images are formed on the photoconductor drum. It attracts toner to the
electrostatic images and transfers them to paper. An OPC drum of 30mm diameter is employed.
3 Main charger Applies a high voltage to charge the OPC drum. Of saw teeth type.
4 Screen grid Charges electric charges generated from the main charger to the OPC drum evenly. -650V, 35cpm
Copy, -620V only for AE.
5 MG roller Forms a magnetic brush with developer and puts toner on the OPC drum. -500V, 35cpm
Copy, -470V only for AE.
6 Developing doctor Keeps the thickness of developer and toner (magnetic brush) on the MG roller at a constant level.
7 Toner quantity sensor Detects the quantity of toner in the developing unit. A magnetic sensor of transmission type is
employed.
8 Temperature/humidity sensor The temperature and the humidity inside the machine are detected, and process control is
performed according to the detected temperature and humidity.
9 CRUM-IC Toner cartridge conditions (destination, toner motor rotating time, empty, near empty, etc.)
10 Transfer roller Applies a voltage to transfer toner on the OPC drum to paper.
11 Separation electrode The electrode to separate paper from the OPC drum by the potential difference.
12 Drum separation pawl The pawl to separate paper from the OPC drum mechanically.
13 Cleaning blade Made of silicon rubber. Removes remaining toner from the OPC drum. Always in contact with the
drum.
14 High voltage resistor PWB Prevents a high voltage from leaking through the paper guide at a high humidity. 200MΩ each.
15 Resist roller Bends paper to adjust the paper feed timing to the process section.
16 Paper dust cleaner Removes paper dust from the resist roller to reduce mixing of paper dusts into the process section.

[OPC drum section]
A. General
In this section the laser beam expose's the drum. The latent image
is formed on the OPC drum. Then is sent to the development unit.
B. Major parts and signal functions

8FE-BT-VK-N
DSW-L 8
DSW-L 7
GND2 6
GND2 5
DM DM\ 4
DM-T 3
DMCLK\ 2
(NC) 1
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
2 PSPS\ 1
PSPS 1 +24V1 2
9
4
5
6
8
3
CN5
B8B-PH-K-S
CN15 GND2 1
1-84432-4(AMP) 9604S-14F +5V2 2
SRA-21T-4L DSW-F 1 1 DSW-F CRUCLK 3
PS-187
RD GND2 2 2 GND2 CRUSDA
MHV RD 4
GND2 3 3 GND2 PSPS\ 5
SRA-21T-3 PS-187 DHVREM 4 4 DHVREM
WH +24V1 6
THV WH MHVREM\ 5 5 MHVREM\ (NC) 7
SRA-21T-4L THV+PWM\ 6 6 THV+PWM\ +24V1 8
PS-187
WH GBPWM\ 7 7 GBPWM\
GB YL HV DHVPWM\ 8 8 DHVPWM\ PCU PWB CN6
SRA-21T-3 9604S-08C
PS-187 THV-PWM\ 9 9 THV-PWM\
RD DSW-F 1
DHV BL DVREM\ 10 10 DVREM\
DSW-F 2
DVPWM\ 11 11 DVPWM\
PS-187 GND2 3
THVREM\ 12 12 THVREM\
BIAS DV GR GND2 4
MHV-T 13 13 MHV-T
DM\ 5
THin 14 14 THin
DM-T 6
DMCLK\ 7
(NC) 8
Signal
Code Name Function/Operation Type Note
name
DM DM OPC drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the transfer section. DC brushless motor
PSPS PSPS Drum separation pawl solenoid Drives the OPC drum separation pawl Solenoid
No. Name Operation

1 OPC drum Forms electrostatic latent images by laser beams.
2 Drum separation pawl Separates paper from the drum.
3 Sub blade (Cleaning seal) Prevents against toner leakage from the cleaner section.
4 Screen grid Helps to charge the OPC drum evenly with electric charges provided from the main charger.
5 Saw-teeth charger Applies a high voltage to charge the OPC drum.
6 Separation pawl oscillation shaft Moves in the front and rear frame direction to install the separation pawl.
7 Cleaning blade Cleans remaining toner on the OPC drum.
8 Waste toner transport pipe Transports toner from the cleaner unit to the waste toner box in the toner cartridge front section.
9 Cleaning unit Saw teeth charger is cleaned.

C. Operational descriptions 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. cleaning blade.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.
Main corona unit Drum
High voltage unit
Screen grid
CTL
CGL
Aluminum
layer OPC drum
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- Residual toner removed from the OPC drum surface is trans-
age applied to the screen grid. ported to the recycle toner collection section in the toner car-
2) LD lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser tridge by the waste toner transport screw.
unit to form latent electrostatic images. 4) All the surface of the OPC drum is discharged by laser beams.
LD lights LD lights
CTL CTL
CGL CGL
layer layer
Aluminum Aluminum
OPC drum
OPC drum After completion of the job, laser beams are radiated onto al
CTL the surface of the OPC drum.
CGL When laser beams are radiated onto the CGL of the OPC
layer drum, positive and negative charges are generated.
Aluminum Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alu-
When LD lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative minum layer of the OPC drum.
and positive charges are generated.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
negative charges are attracted to the positive charges in the of the OPC drum.
OPC drum aluminum layer.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where LD lights are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
∗ OPC: Organic Photo Conductor
∗ CTL: Charge Transfer Layer
∗ CGL: Charge Generation Layer

D. Maintenance and parts replacement
(1) Maintenance list
When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K 500K 600K 700K 800K Remark
calling
Drum 1 Drum ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
peripheral 2 DSD collar ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
3 Cleaner blade ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ Replace at 200K or 1 year.
P/G No.: [10]-49
4 Toner reception seal ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [10]-42
5 Side molt F ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ Apply side seal powder.
P/G No.: [10]-33
6 Side molt R ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ Apply side seal powder.
P/G No.: [10]-37
7 Drum separation pawl unit ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-501
8 MC unit ✕ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ Includes the screen grid,
the charging plate, and the
MC cleaner.
❍: Charging plate cleaning
by the MC cleaner
P/G No.: [9]-901
2
8
1
3
7
5
2
(2) Maintenance and parts replacement a. Drum cartridge

No. Unit Parts 1) Release the lock, and pull out the left door.
a Drum cartridge 1 MC unit ȿ❍ 2) Open the front door, and remove the screw.
2 Drum ɣ
3 DSD collar ❍
4 Drum separation pawl unit ȿ
5 Toner reception seal ȿ
6 Cleaner blade ȿ
7 Side molt F ȿ
8 Side molt R ȿ
b 1 Separation solenoid
b-1
a-8
a-5 a
a-3 3) Put down the DV guide handle. Loosen the screw, and remove
a-1 the drum cartridge.
a-2
a-6
a-4
a-7
a-3

a-1. MC unit ∗ When installing, install the DSD collar R to the drum frame, then
1) Remove the drum cartridge. install the drum and the DSD collar F. When installing the DSD
2) Check to confirm that the cleaning unit is inserted fully to the collar, engage the DSD collar boss with the drum frame hole.
bottom.
3) Remove the pawl, and remove the MC unit.
a-4. Drum separation pawl unit

1) Remove the drum cartridge.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the drum separation pawl unit.
∗ When handling the separation pawl, be careful not to break or
∗ For cleaning the MC unit (charging plate), reciprocate the clean- scratch the tip of the separation pawl and keep it away from dirt.
ing unit back and forth 3 times or more.
After installing the drum separation pawl unit, push the separation
lever and check to confirm that the separation pawl operates nor-
mally.
a-2. Drum
a-3. DSD collar
2) Loosen the screw, and remove the drum boss mounting plate.
3) Remove the drum, and remove the DSD collar.
∗ When removing the drum, place the drum cartridge as shown in
the figure and remove the drum.
a-5. Toner reception seal

2) Remove the drum and the DSD collar.
3) Remove the drum separation pawl unit.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the toner reception seal.
∗ When replacing the OPC drum, clear the following counters.

• Drum rotating time (a)
• Drum counter
∗ When installing the toner reception seal, tighten the screw (a) on
∗ When installing a new drum, apply starting powder. the positioning side for the first time. Check to confirm that the
process earth plate and the toner reception seal are conductive.
(10Ω or less)

a-6. Cleaner blade ∗ When attaching the side molts F/R, attach them to the attach-
1) Remove the drum cartridge. ment reference as shown.
2) Remove the drum and the DSD collar. ∗ After attaching the side molt F/R, push the both ends of the
3) Pull it out until the cleaning unit stops. blade with your fingers to check to confirm that the red moquette
moves smoothly.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the cleaner blade.
∗ When removing the drum blade, place the drum as shown in the
figure and remove the drum blade to prevent toner from dispers- 0.3mm 0.3mm
ing.
Reference Reference
∗ Do not damage the cleaner blade. Do not touch the lead edge.
0mm 0mm
Side molt R Side molt F
0.5mm
(From the blade edge) 0.3mm 0mm
0.1mm 0.1mm Reference
Reference
Put side seal powder (1g) on the moquettes F/R and spread side
seal powder all over the moquettes surfaces.
Side seal powder: UKOG-0309FCZZ
∗ Do not apply powder excessively to the ambient parts.
∗ Be careful not to damage the cleaning blade and the side blade.
∗ When installing the cleaner blade, pull the cleaner shaft fully
toward you.
∗ After installing the cleaner blade, insert the cleaner shaft fully to
the bottom.
a-7. Side molt F
a-8. Side molt R
2) Remove the drum and the DSD collar. b-1. Separation solenoid
3) Remove the toner reception seal. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
4) Remove the cleaner blade.
5) Remove the side molt F and R.

2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the PCU 3) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the separa-
PWB unit. tion solenoid unit.
4) Remove the E-ring and the screw, and remove the separation
solenoid.
[Transfer section]
A. General
In this section, toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to
paper.

8FE-BT-VK-N
DSW-L 8
DM DSW-L 7
GND2 6
GND2 5
DM\ 4
DM-T 3
DMCLK\ 2
(NC) 1
4 5
3
6
2
4
1 3
CN15
1-84432-4(AMP) 9604S-14F
SRA-21T-4L DSW-F 1 1 DSW-F
PS-187
RD GND2 2 2 GND2 CN6
MHV RD
GND2 3 3 GND2 9604S-08C
SRA-21T-3 PS-187 DHVREM 4 4 DHVREM DSW-F 1
WH
THV WH MHVREM\ 5 5 MHVREM\ DSW-F 2
SRA-21T-4L THV+PWM\ 6 6 THV+PWM\ GND2 3
PS-187
WH GBPWM\ 7 7 GBPWM\ GND2 4
GB YL HV DHVPWM\ 8 8 DHVPWM\ PCU PWB DM\ 5
SRA-21T-3 PS-187 THV-PWM\ 9 9 THV-PWM\ DM-T 6
RD
DHV BL DVREM\ 10 10 DVREM\ DMCLK\ 7
DVPWM\ 11 11 DVPWM\ (NC) 8
PS-187
THVREM\ 12 12 THVREM\
BIAS DV GR
MHV-T 13 13 MHV-T
THin 14 14 THin
Signal
name
DM DM OPC drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the transfer section. DC brushless motor
THV THV Transfer high voltage High voltage for transfer
DHV DHV High separation voltage High voltage for separation of paper
No. Name Function

1 Transfer roller Transfers toner images from the OPC drum surface to paper.
2 Discharge plate (Separation electrode) Separates paper from the drum.
3 TR bearing (F/R) Transfer roller bearing
4 Transfer roller collar Transfer roller collar
5 After-transfer star ring Guides paper after transfer.
6 TR gear Transfer roller drive gear

C. Operational descriptions 2) Transfer roller cleaning
1) Toner image transfer After completion of the job, the applied voltage to the transfer
Toner images formed on the drum by the developing roller are roller is switched to negative in order to attract toner from the
transferred to paper by the transfer roller. transfer roller to the OPC drum, cleaning the drum with the
cleaning blade.
Toner on the drum is negatively charged by stirring in the
developing unit. By applying a positive voltage to the transfer
roller, the transfer roller and paper on the transfer roller are
positively charged to transfer negatively charged toner images
to paper.
Separation electrode Separation electrode
-1.8KV -1.8KV
-800V -800V
25 A 45ppm 25 A 45ppm
19 A 35ppm 19 A 35ppm
MAX 5KV MAX 5KV
200M 200M
Separation operation The transfer cleaning voltage and the developing positive bias are
Since paper with toner images transferred on it is positively applied to the OPC drum at the timing shown below so that
charged, a high negative voltage is applied to the separation elec- remaining toner on the transfer roller is attracted again to the OPC
trode to separate the paper from the drum. drum, performing cleaning.
1) When the power is turned on:
Separation electrode
CLEANING READY CONDITION
-1.8KV
WARMING UP
∗ However, the cleaning voltage is not applied during warm up

after completion of SIM.
2) After completion of a print job
1sec
-800V
CLEANING
PRINTING Job
25 A 45ppm
19 A 35ppm
MAX 5KV 3) After printing 100 sheets (during 1 job)
200M 1sec 1sec
PRINTING (100 Sheets) CLEANING PRINTING (100 Sheets) CLEANING

When
calling
Transfer 1 Transfer roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-8
2 Discharge plate ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-2
3 TR bearing (F/R) ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-9, 18
4 Transfer roller collar ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-10
5 After-transfer star ring ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ P/G No.: [5]-19
6 TR gear ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [5]-15
4
5
3
2
4
3
(2) Maintenance and parts replacement 2) Remove the transfer lock pawl, and pull out the transfer roller
unit.
No. Unit Parts
a Transfer roller unit 1 After-transfer star ring ✕
2 Discharge plate ✕
3 Transfer roller ✕
4 Transfer roller collar ✕
5 TR bearing (F/R) ✕
6 TR gear ✕
a-4
a-1
a-5
a-6
a-3
a a-2
a-4
a-1. After-transfer star ring
a-5
1) Remove the transfer roller unit.
a. Transfer roller unit 2) Remove the transfer rear star ring.
1) Pull out the left door.

a-2. Discharge plate
2) Remove the screw, and remove the discharge plate holder and
the discharge plate.
a-3. Transfer roller

a-4. Transfer roller collar
a-5. TR bearing (F/R)
a-6. TR gear
2) Remove the screw, and remove the discharge plate holder and
the discharge plate.

[Developing section]
A. General
In this section, toner is attached to electrostatic latent images
formed by laser beams on the OPC drum, making visible images.
CN6
9604S-08C
DM TM1 1 DSW-F
2 DSW-F
3 GND2
4 GND2
5 DM\
6 DM-T
7 DMCLK\
8 (NC)
HUS-DV CN7
173981-2
TH-DV BK
1 TMA
BK
2 TMB
1 CN5
3 TCS BR
B8B-PH-K-S
1 GND2
GY
2 +5V2
BL
3 CRUCLK
BR
4 CRUSDA
5 PSPS\
6 +24V1
1 2 3 3 7 (NC)
8 +24V1
CN8
QR/P8-12S-C(01) B11B-PH-K-S
BR
1 DVCH1 1 1 DVCH1
BR
2 DVCH2 2 2 DVCH2
BR BR
3 DVCH3 3 3 DVCH3
BR BR
51021-0400 4 TH-DV 4 4 TH-DV
GY GY
(NC) 1 5 GND2 5 5 GND2
GY
+24V1 2 6 GND2 6 6 GND2
BR BR
TCS 3 7 TCS 7 7 TCS
GY GY
GND2 4 8 GND2 8 8 GND2
RD RD
HUS-DV BL
9 +24V1 9
BL
9 +24V1
TH-DV TCS ZHR-4 10 +5V2 10 10 +5V2
BR BR
+5V2 1 11 HUS-DV 11 11 HUS-DV
WH WH
HUS-DV 2 12 DVBias 12
GND2 3
#187
TH-DV 4 Bias
SRA-21T-3
Bias PCU PWB
Signal
name
HUS-DV HUS-DV Developing humidity sensor Developing section peripheral humidity Humidity sensor Analog detector
detection
TH-DV TH-DV Developing temperature Temperature detection around the Thermistor Analog
thermistor developing unit
TCS TCS Toner density sensor Toner density detection Magnetic sensor Analog detector
DM DM Drum motor Drives the drum/developing section. DC brushless motor
TM1 TM Toner motor Drives the toner hopper. Synchronous motor
Bias Bias Developing bias High voltage for developing bias
No. Name Operation

1 Developing roller Forms magnetic brush with developer and put toner on the OPC drum.
2 DV doctor Keeps the height of the magnetic brush on the developing roller at a fixed level.
3 Mixing roller (MX roller) Mixes developer (carrier and toner) and charges toner negatively.

C. Operational descriptions
Electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC drum by the Laser
unit (LD image light) are converted into visible images by toner.
layer
Aluminum CGL
CTL
Drum
-500V
(-470V)
Toner in the developing unit is stirred by the mixing roller.

When toner is stirred, it is negatively charged by mechanical fric-
tion.
The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the developing
roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted and attached to the area on
the OPC drum where negative voltage is reduced by exposure.
On the other hand, the negative voltage at an area where expo-
sure is not made is higher than the developing bias voltage, and
toner is not attached.

When
calling
Developing 1 Developer ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Supplied when installing
section 2 DV blade ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [11]-55
3 DV side seal F ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [11]-38
4 DV side seal R ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [11]-43
5 Toner cartridge Attached when installing./
750g, user replacement for every 35K.
4 5
(2) Maintenance and parts replacement a. DV cartridge
No. Unit Parts 1) Release the lock, and pull out the left door.
a DV cartridge 1 Developer ▲ 2) Open the front door, and remove the screw.
2 DV blade ✕
3 DV side seal F ✕
4 DV side seal R ✕
5 Toner density sensor
6 Temperature/humidity sensor
b 1 Toner cartridge
2 Toner motor
b-2
a-6
a-4
a-1 3) Put down the DV guide handle, release the lock, and remove
the DV cartridge.
a-5
b-1
a
a-3
a-2

a-1. Developer ∗ When attaching the DV blade, attach to the attachment refer-
1) Remove the DV cartridge. ence shown in the figure below.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover.
0mm
Reference
(Step)
0.5mm
0mm 0.5mm
Reference
a-3. DV side seal F

a-4. DV side seal R
1) Remove the DV cartridge.
2) Remove the DV side seal F and the DV side seal R.
3) Remove old developer.
∗ Use a metal scale or a minus screwdriver for easy operation.

4) Supply new developer.
∗ When attaching the SV side seals F and R, attach them to the

attachment reference shown in the figure below.
0.5mm 0.5mm
Reference Reference
0mm 0mm
0mm 0.5mm 0.5mm 0mm
Reference Reference
a-2. DV blade
1) Remove the DV cartridge.
2) Remove the DV blade.

a-5. Toner density sensor a-8. Toner motor
a-6. Humidity sensor 1) Remove the toner cartridge.
1) Remove the DV cartridge. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the bottom cover.
3) Remove the bottom cover.

4) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the humid- 2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the PCU
ity sensor. PWB unit.
a-7. Toner cartridge

1) Open the left door and the front door.
3) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the toner
2) Release the lock and remove the toner cartridge.
motor unit.
4) Remove the coupling and the spring from the toner motor.

2. Fusing section A. General
This section explains how the toner is fused to the paper by heat
and pressure.
Paper
Copy Fusing
exit
Fusing roller Fusing roller Cleaning

(Heating) (Pressing) roller
Paper exit Main Heater lamps

roller motor (2 pcs.)
Power/
Filter PWB

09P-RWZV-K4GG-P4 09R-RWZV-K2GGP4
+CZHR-05V-S +CZHR-05V-S
B-5 SMP-04V-NC+SMR-04V-N
B-1
B-4 BR BR
B-2 1 RTH1 1
B-3 GY GY
B-2
B-3
BR
2 GND2 2
BR
PCU
B-4 3 RTH2 3
B-1
B-5
GY
4 GND2 4
GY PWB
CN14
VLP-03V+VLR-03V CN2 B16B-PH-K-S
WH
BR
1 1
WH
1 HL1 (HL1N*) 1
AC/DC B7B-PH-K-S
RD
1 FW
2 2 2 HL2 (HL2N*) 2 2 +24VPR
BK +24VPR 1
3 3 3 L2 (L*) 3 BR
4 4
GY
*: 100V
PWB (NC) 2 3 HLPR
+12V2
HLPR 3 4
BR
HLCNT1 4 5 HLCNT1
CN1 BR
HLCNT2 5 6 HLCNT2
B03P-VL BR
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4 MSW MON 6 7 RTH1
1 HL1 (HL1N*) GY
DCCNT/ 7 8 GND2
2 HL2 (HL2N*) BR
9 RTH2
L2 (L*)
FILTER PWB 3
*: 100V
GY
10 GND2
L2out BK 11 (NC)
3 VLP-03V+VLR-03V
CN1 WH CN5 12 (NC)
(NC) 2 1 HL1 1
B03P-VL(RD) WH B12P-HL-A BR
L2in BK 13 MSW MON
1 2 HL2 2 RD
BK +24V1 1 14 BUP_PR
3 L2 3 RD
GY +24V2 2
TAIWAN ONLY BK +24V3 3
15 GND
16 GND
REACTOR BR +5V1 4
PWB WH
CN1
+5VOPT 5
OR
CN17
+3.3V1 6 B9P-VH
B03P-VL RD
WH OR
HL-1N 1 +3.3V1 7 1 +24V1
1 HL1 RD
WH GY
HL-2N 2 GND2 8 2 +24V2
CN2 2 HL2 GY
BK GY
B03P-VL HL-L 3 GND2 9 3 GND2
3 L2
GY
GND2 10 4 +5V2
L2 BK GY
1 L #187(BK) GND2 5 +5V2
11
(NC) BR OR
2 FW 6 +3.3V1
12
(NC) L2R #187(BK) OR
CN1 3 7 +3.3V1
B2P4-VH L2R BK GY
4 8 GND2
GY
GND2
200V ONLY 9
CN9
9604S-08C
1 DSW-F
2 DSW-F
3 GND2
4 GND2
5 +5V2
6 GND2
7 MM\
8 MM-T
MM 7 6 5 2 7,8
9
Rth1 8
Rth2
HLTS HL2
8FE-ST-VK-N
DSW-L 8 HL1
DSW-L 7
GND2 6
GND2 5
+5V2 4
GND2 3
MM\
MM-T
2
1
10 4 3 1 9

Signal Active
Code Name Type Function/Operation Note
name condition
RTH1 RTH1 Fusing temperature Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller Analog input
sensor (1) (heating). (Center section)
RTH2 RTH2 Fusing temperature Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller Analog input
sensor (2) (heating). (Side roller section)
HLTS HLTS Thermostat (1) Opens the circuit to the heater lamp when the temperature
rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
HL1 HL1 Heater lamp (1) Heats the fusing roller (heating).
HL2 HL2 Heater lamp (2) Heats the fusing roller (heating).
MM MM Main motor Drives the fusing unit.
1 Heater lamp 1 Generates heat and transmits heat to the heat roller. The temperature is controlled by the
thermistor. (Generates heat for the upper roller.)
2 Heater lamp 2 Generates heat and transmits heat to the heat roller. The temperature is controlled by the
thermistor. (Generates heat for the upper roller.)
3 Upper heat roller Transmits heat to melt toner on paper and fuse toner by means of a pressure with the lower heat
roller.
4 Lower heat roller Fuses toner on paper by means of a pressure with the upper heat roller.
To improve fusing capability, the diameter is greater than the conventional ones.
(ø30mm→ø40mm)
5 Fusing upper separation pawl Prevents winding of paper around the upper heat roller.
6 Fusing lower separation pawl Prevents winding of paper around the lower heat roller.
7 Thermistor (Center) Detects the surface temperature of the upper heat roller.
(On/off of heater lamp 1 is controlled according to the detected temperature.)
8 Thermistor (Side) Detects the surface temperature of the upper heat roller.
(On/off of heater lamp 2 is controlled according to the detected temperature.)
9 Thermostat When an abnormal temperature of the upper heat roller is detected, the heater lamp power is
interrupted.
To reset the thermoset and close the electrical circuit. Reset the switch on top of the thermostat.
10 Cleaning roller Cleans toner on the lower heat roller. The blast process is employed.
The cold steel roller will attract the unused dirty toner from the pressure roller.
C. Operational descriptions (3) Fusing operation

(1) Fusing unit drive Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat
roller.
To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (MM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
The drive motor DC brushless motor is driven according to the
control signal sent from the PCU.
PCU MM
(2) Heater lamp drive

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther-
mistor is sent to the PCU.
When the temperature is lower than the specified level, the heater
lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive
circuit in the sub power PWB.
Change to : When the triac for the heater lamp circut is turned on
the AC power is supplied to the heater lamp. Heat is supplied to
the roller.
To prevent abnormally high temperatures to the heat roller, the
thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is prohibited. Fusing roller (Heating)
HL2 HL1
---------
Paper exit
Fusing roller (Pressing)

The fusing heat roller (heating) is provided with two heater lamps, (5) Cleaning roller
which heat the fusing roller to fuse toner onto paper. The fusing section cleaning roller of this machine is made of the
The fusing rollers (pressing) are made of silicon rubber because of blast process.
the following reasons and purpose. 1) Change to the fusing unit uses a colder roller to clean
1) Paper is separated upward. (Since the fusing roller (heating) is unwanted toner from the pressure roller.
of higher hardness, the fusing roller (pressing) is deformed to 2) Due to coating and the temperature characteristics of the
separate paper upward.) upper heat roller, toner is not attached to the upper heat roller
2) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for but to the lower heat roller.
paper. 3) Remaining toner on the lower heat roller is further attached to
3) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without the cleaning roller due to the temperature characteristics and
deformation.
the difference in roughness of surfaces of the rollers.
(4) Fusing temperature control 4) Remaining toner attached to the cleaning roller is accumulated
The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the fusing until the roller is replaced.
roller (heating).
The roller temperature is detected by the thermistor sensor, and
the heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is maintained
at the specified level.
In addition, the fusing temperature is switched according to the
kind of paper.
Fusing roller
Mode MX-M350U/ MX-M450U/
M350N M450N
Ready condition Plain paper 190°C 190°C
print mode Heavy Paper 190°C 190°C
Postcard 190°C 190°C
Envelope 190°C 190°C
Pre-heat 150°C 150°C

When
calling
Fusing 1 Upper heat roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-46
section 2 Lower heat roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-22
3 Upper separation pawl ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-3
4 Lower separation pawl ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-41
5 Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Clean and remove
paper dust.
6 Upper heat roller gear ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-47
7 CL roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-52
8 CL roller bearing ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ P/G No.: [7]-53
9 Paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
10 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
2
8 5
7
4
8
5

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement 3) Pull the fusing lever, and remove the fusing unit.
No. Unit Parts

a Fusing unit 1 Lower separation pawl ❍
2 Upper separation pawl ❍
3 Thermistor ✕
4 Lower heat roller ✕
5 CL roller ✕
6 CL roller bearing ✕
7 Heater lamp
8 Upper heat roller ✕
9 Upper heat roller gear ✕
10 Thermostat
a a-2
a-9
a-8
a-4
a-6
a-5
a-1. Lower separation pawl
a-3 1) Remove the fusing unit.
a-1 a-7 2) Open the fusing rear lower PG, and remove the lower separa-
a-10 tion pawl.
a-6
a-3
a. Fusing unit
a-2. Upper separation pawl

1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the rear upper PG, and remove the upper separation
pawl.
2) Remove the stopper R.

a-3. Thermistor a-5. CL roller
1) Remove the fusing unit. a-6. CL roller bearing
2) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing drawer. Remove the 1) Remove the fusing unit.
connector.
2) Remove the lower heat roller.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the thermistor.
3) Remove the CL roller, and remove the CL roller bearing.
a-7. Heater lamp

a-4. Lower heat roller
2) Open the fusing unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the heater lamp.
2) Release pressure with the pressure adjustment lever.
∗ Be careful not to mistake the installing position of the heater
3) Remove the screw, and open the fusing unit. lamp.
4) Open the fusing rear lower PG.

5) Remove the lower heat roller, and remove the lower heat roller
bearing.
∗ When installing, loosen the screws on the front side (drawer

ON side) then the screws on the rear side (gear side) in this
sequence.
∗ Check to confirm again that the screws are tighten securely. (If
any screw is loosened, a bad contact may cause heating.)

a-8. Upper heat roller 3. Paper feed section
a-9. Upper heat roller gear
2) Open the fusing unit.
3) Remove the fusing rear upper PG.
4) Remove the heater lamp.
5) Remove the upper heat roller, the roller stopper. The upper
heat roller gear, and the upper heat roller bearing.
A. General
This section picks up paper in the cassette and feed it to the trans-
port roller section.
The capacity of the paper feed tray is 550 sheets for 64g/m2 or 500
sheets for 80g/m2.
There are three kinds of the paper feed desk: 3-stage paper feed
a-10. Thermostat
desk (AR-D27), 2-stage paper feed desk (AR-D28), and 1-stage
1) Remove the fusing unit. paper fed desk (AR-MU2). For details, refer to the AR-D27/D28/
2) Open the fusing unit. MU2 Service Manual.
3) Remove the fusing rear upper PG.
4) Remove the heater lamp.
5) Remove the upper heat roller.
6) Remove the screw, and remove the electrode plate and the
thermostat.
∗ When installing, check to confirm that the screws are securely

tighten. (If any screw is loosened, a bad contact may cause
heating.)
∗ A loose screw will provide a bad contact and poor heating will
occur.

CN2
173979-2 173979-2 CSS PWB CN1
S4B-PH-K-S
OR 1 BR
LUMB 1 LUMB CSS 1
LUMA 2
OR 2
LUMA CSS GND2 2
GY
BR
LUMB 3
BR
LUMA 4
LUM 179228-3(AMP)
+5V2 1
LUD 2
GND2 3
179228-3(AMP)
+5V2 1
PED 2
MM CPFC GND2 3
LUD
PED
2
3
1
BR
2 CPFC\ 1
RD
1 +24V1 2
CN13
B24B-PHDSS-B
GY
GND2 1 1 +5V2 9
RD
+24V1 2 2 PPD1 8
BR
PCU PWB PED 3
BR BL
3 GND2 7
BL
CPFC\ 4 4 +5V2 6
BL BR BR
+5V2 5 5 LUD 5
GY GY
+24V1 6 6 GND2 4
CN9 GY BL BL
9604S-08C GND2 7 7 +5V2 3
8FE-ST-VK-N BR BR
1 DSW-F RRC\ 8 8 PED 2
DSW-L 8 BR GY GY
2 DSW-F LUD 9 9 GND2 1
DSW-L 7
3 GND2 +24V1 10
GND2 6 BL
4 GND2 +5V2 11
GND2 5
5 +5V2 TRC\ 12
+5V2 4
6 GND2 GND 13
GND2 3 BR
7 MM\ CSS 14
MM\ 2
8 MM-T GND2 15
MM-T 1 GY
GND2 16
PPD1 17
BR
LUMB 18
+5V2 19
BR
LUMA 20
CFM1\ 21
GND2 22
+24V1 23
2 1 4
GND2 24
3 6
Signal
name
CPFC CPFC Paper feed clutch Paper freed tray section roller ON/ Electromagnetic clutch
OFF control
LUM LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed DC brush motor Selection of Rotation
tray. mode/ Brake mode
PED PED Defector Paper empty detection
LUD LUD Defector Paper tray upper limit detection

Name Function Remark
1 Take-up roller Picks up paper and transports it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Feed paper in the machine.
3 Separation roller Rotates simultaneously with the paper feed roller to prevent against overlapped feed.
For the manual feed tray, the separation pad is used instead of the roller.
4 Paper upper limit sensor Detects the top surface of paper and stops paper at the feed position. Except for BPT
5 Paper sensor Detects paper presence.
(Paper empty, upper limit detection: ON / Paper presence detection: OFF)
6 Lift-up motor Lifts the paper feed base up to the paper feed position (upper limit detection position). Except for BPT
C. Operational descriptions [Paper size detection]

[Paper feed operation] (1) Paper width detection VR (MPT/BPT/Machine tray)
(1) Preliminary operation except for the manual feed Width detection is performed by calculating the voltage (A/D con-
version value) of the slide VR in linkage with the side guide plate.
tray
1) Load paper and insert the tray, and the tray sensor will be Paper width and paper size
turned on. (The range is set to Standard value ± 6 [mm].)
2) The lift-up motor rotates. Width detection Standard
Paper size Range (mm)
3) The upper limit sensor turns on. pattern value (mm)
(2) Paper feed operation A A3/A4 297.0 303.0- 291.0
B WLT/LT 279.4 285.4 - 273.4
1) The take-up roller descends.
C B4/B5 257.0 263.0 - 251.0
2) The take-up roller rotates to feed paper.
D LG/LTR/Foolscap 215.9 221.9 - 209.9
3) At the same time the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to E A4R 210.0 216.0 - 204.0
the transport section.
F Executive-R 184.1 190.1 - 178.1
4) At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent against
G B5R 182.0 188.0 - 176.0
overlapped feed.
(2) Paper length sensor
(MPT/2nd and 3rd steps of 3-step paper feed desk)
Length detection is performed by combination of cassette size
sensors 1 - 4.
CSS1
CSS2
CSS4
CSS3
Paper length and paper size

Vertical size Detection SW status AB series Inch series Detection width Same range
detection pattern CSS1 CSS2 CSS3 CSS4 size size range size
1 ON ON OFF ON B5 EXTRA 147.0 - 198.0 Postcard
Monarch
2 OFF ON OFF ON A4 LT 198.0 - 237.0 DBL P/C
C5
DL
3 OFF ON ON ON B5R EX-R 237.0 - 274.0 COM-10
ISO-B5
4 OFF OFF ON ON A4R LTR 274.0 - 314.0
5 ON OFF ON ON Foolscap Extra 314.0 - 347.0
6 ON OFF ON OFF B4 LGL 347.0 - 389.0
7 ON ON ON OFF A3 WLT 389.0 - 432.8
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Tray not installed

(3) Paper detection method of each tray
1) Machine 1st tray
Paper detection is performed by VR in linkage with both side
guides.
2) Multi-purpose tray
Paper detection is performed by VR in linkage with both side
guides and the detector in linkage with the rear edge plate.
Width detection Vertical detection
Paper size
pattern pattern
B5 C 1
A4 A 2
B5R G 3
A4R E 4
Foolscap D 5
B4 B 6
A3 A 7
LT B 2
EX-R F 3
LTR D 4
LGL D 6
WLT B 7
For the other than above, the paper size is considered as "Extra."
3) 2nd and 3rd steps of 3-step paper feed tray
Paper detection is performed by the detector in linkage with
the rear edge plate.
CSS1
CSS2
CSS4
CSS3
Paper size for automatic detection

Vertical size Detection SW status Detection width
AB series size Inch series size
detection pattern CSS1 CSS2 CSS3 CSS4 range
1 ON ON OFF ON B5 EXTRA 147.0 - 198.0
2 OFF ON OFF ON A4 LT 198.0 - 237.0
3 OFF ON ON ON B5R EX-R 237.0 - 274.0
4 OFF OFF ON ON A4R LTR 274.0 - 314.0
5 ON OFF ON ON Foolscap EXTRA 314.0 - 347.0
6 ON OFF ON OFF B4 LGL 347.0 - 389.0
7 ON ON ON OFF A3 WLT 389.0 - 432.8
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Tray not installed

[Paper remaining quantity detection]
(1) Paper remaining quantity detection
Paper remaining quantity detection is common in each tray except for the manual feed tray. Remaining quantity is indicated in 3 steps plus
paper empty (4 steps in total).
(2) Detection method
Paper remaining quantity is detected by the number of times of changing of the remaining quantity sensor from when the tray starts lifting up
to when the upper limit sensor turns on.
(Remaining quantity sensor status change when the tray is moving up and remaining quantity)
Paper empty is detected by

the paper empty sensor.
MCPED
When paper empty is detected (Paper empty sensor)
Rotating plate
Paper remaining quantity
detection actuator
1/3 area
sensor logic LOW MCSPD
(Paper remaining quantity sensor)
Paper remaining quantity at 1/3
2/3 area
sensor logic HIGH
3/3 area
sensor logic LOW
Indication of remaining quantity Sensor status

Paper quantity: 100% Paper quantity sensor: OFF
Paper quantity: 66% Paper quantity sensor: ON
Paper quantity: 33% Paper quantity sensor: OFF (2nd time)
Paper quantity: 0% Paper sensor: OFF

When
calling
Paper feed 1 Pick-up roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
section 2 Paper feed roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
3 Separation roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
Paper feed roller/Separation pad/Torque limiter section (Include Desk, Multi purpose): 100K or 1 years
2
1
4
3
(2) Maintenance and parts replacement a-1. Pick-up roller
No. Unit Parts a-2. Paper feed roller

a 1 Pick-up roller ✕ a-3. Separation roller
2 Paper feed roller ✕ a-4. Torque limiter
3 Separation roller ✕
1) Pull out No. 1 paper feed tray unit.
4 Torque limiter ✕
5 Paper feed cassette upper limit
detection
6 Paper feed cassette paper
empty detection
7 Cassette detection PWB
8 Lift-up motor
a-7
a-8 a-5
a-6
a-2 a-1 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper guide.
a-4 a-3

3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pickup roller and the a-7. Cassette detection PWB
paper feed roller. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
4) Disengage the pawl, and remove the separation roller and the
torque limiter.
2) Remove the connector, and remove the cassette detection
PWB.
a-5. Paper feed cassette upper limit detection a-8. Lift-up motor
a-6. Paper feed cassette paper empty detection 1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
1) Pull out No. 1 paper feed tray unit, and remove the paper
guide.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the pickup roller arm.
3) Remove the paper feed roller and each part.
4) Remove the pickup roller shaft, and remove the pickup roller
guide.
5) Remove the actuator.
6) Remove the connector, the paper feed cassette upper limit
detection, and the paper feed cassette paper empty detection.
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the lift-up
motor unit.

3) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the spring. 4. Transport section/Paper exit reverse
4) Remove the screw, and remove the lift-up motor.
section
A. General
In this paper transport section, paper fed from each paper feed
port is transported to the resist roller section, where the lead edge
of the paper is aligned with the lead edge of images on the OPC
drum. Images are transferred onto paper in the transfer section,
and the paper is discharged face-up or face-down through the fus-
ing section.

SMR-06V+SMP-06V-NC
BR
1 /POMXA 1
BR
2 /POMA 2
BR
3 /POMB 3
BR
4 /POMXB 4
RD
5 +24V1 5
RD
6 +24V1 6
SMP-03V-BC+SMR-03V-B 179228-3
BR BL BL
1 POD1 1 1 POD1
GY BR BR
2 GND2 2 2 GND2
BL GY GY
3 +5V2 3 3 +5V2
179228-3
BL
3 +5V2
BR
1 POD2
GY
2 GND2
179228-3
BL
CN4 3 +5V2
BR
B32B-PHDSS-B 1 POD3
BR GY
/POMXB 1 2 GND2
BL
+5V2 2
BR RD
/POMB 3
POD1 4
BR
BR RD
SFPS-41T-187 DSW-L
/POMA 5
GND2 6
GY
BR
POD3
/POMXA 7 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
BL
+5V2
+24V1
8
9
RD
RD
BR
3 +24V1 1 POD2 5
POD2 10
BR
RD
GY
2 VFM2\
1 GND2
2
3
POM
+24V1 11
GND2 12
GY
POD1
GND2 13
BL
+5V2
CFM2\
14
15
VFM2
BR
POD3 16
+24V1 17
GY
GND2 18
+24V1
CFM2\
19
20
MM
RD
+24V1 21
VFM2\
+24V1
22
23
RD RRC
GY
GND2 24
(NC) 25
GND2
DSW-L
26
27
RD 4
DSW-L 28
(NC) 29
(NC)
(NC)
30
31
TRC
DSW-F 32 2
CN9
GY HVR
PCU PWB 9604S-08C 8FE-ST-VK-N PWB
DSW-F 1 8 DSW-L
DSW-F 2 7 DSW-L
GND2 3 6 GND2
GND2 4 5 GND2
+5V1 5 4 +5V2 PPD1
GND2 6 3 GND2
MM\ 7 2 MM\
MM-T 8 1 MM-T
CN13
B24B-PHDSS-B
BR
1 RRC\ 2
1
RD
GND2 1 2 +24V1 1
+24V1
PED
2
3
BR
4 5
CPFC\ 1 TRC1\ 3
4
+5V2 2 (NC) 2
5 RD
RD 3 +24V1 1
+24V1 6
GND2 7
BR PHNR-09-H+BU09P-TR-P-H PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 179228-3(AMP)
RRC\ 8
BL BL BL
LUD 9 1 +5V2 9 1 +5V2 3 1 +5V2
RD BR BR BR
+24V1 10 2 PPD1 8 2 PPD1 2 2 PPD1
GY GY GY
+5V2 11 3 GND2 7 3 GND2 1 3 GND2
BR
TRC\ 12 4 +5V2 6
GND 13 5 LUD 5 3
CSS 14 6 GND2 4
GY
GND2
GND2
15
16
7 +5V2
8 PED
3
2
GY HVR
PPD1 17
BR
9 GND2 1 PWB
LUMB 18
+5V2 19
BL CFM1
LUMA 20
BR
CFM1\ 21
GY
GND2 22
RD PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
+24V1 23 TSR-04V-K PHR-3
GY GY RD RD
GND2 24 1 GND2 +24V1 1 3 +24V1 1
RD DRAWER CFM1\ 2 BR BR
2 +24V1 2 CFM1\ 2
GY GY GY
3 GND2 PWB GND2 3 1 GND2 3
BR
4 CFM1\
Signal
name
POD1 POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Paper exit detection from fusing Transmission Paper transport system sensor
type
POD2 POD2 Paper exit detector 2 Paper pass detection from paper exit Transmission Paper transport system sensor
type
POD3 POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Paper exit detection to upper section Transmission Paper transport system sensor
paper exit tray (Full detection) type
POM POM Paper exit motor Drives the paper exit roller. Stepping Selection of Normal speed/
motor High speed/ Reverse rotation
VFM2 VFM2 Fusing cooling fan motor Discharges heat generated in the DC brushless PWM control
fusing section. motor
CFM1 CFM1 Fusing cooling fan motor Discharges heat generated in the DC brushless PWM control
fusing section to cool it. motor

Signal
name
RRC RRC Resist roller clutch Resist roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
TRC TRC Paper transport roller clutch Paper transport roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
MM MM Main motor Drives the paper transport and resist roller DC brushless Paper pass
motor
No. Name Function

1 Transport roller 15 Transports paper to the transport resist roller.
2 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the transport timing of paper to adjust the
relationship between images and paper.
4 Paper exit and transport roller Transports paper from the fusing roller to the paper exit roller.
5 Paper exit roller Discharges paper to the paper exit tray. / Switchbacks paper.
[Paper transport path and paper exit]
Paper transport path with an option installed
1.
Option Model name

Desk AR-D27
Duplex unit AR-DU4
Finisher AR-FN6
2.
Option Model name

Desk AR-D27
Duplex unit AR-DU3
Finisher AR-FN7
Male bin stacker AR-MS1
Punch unit AR-PN1

3. Paper transport in duplex printing (with AR-DU3/DU4 installed)
(1) Switchback operation and paper exit to the left tray
1) Paper transported from the fusing section is sent to the paper exit section of the machine.
2) When the male bin stacker (AR-MS1) or the finisher (AR-FN5) is installed, the paper entry gate solenoid (FGS) selects the paper entry
gate to discharge paper outside the machine.
3) The paper exit sensor (POD2) detects the rear edge of paper, and the paper exit motor (POM) is rotated reversely.
4) Paper is taken into the machine again, passed over the reverse gate, and transported to the duplex unit.
5) When duplex printing is made, the ADU gate solenoid switches to the upper side of the ADU paper exit gate to switch the paper path to
the ADU.
6) When paper is discharged to the left tray or when paper is transported to the console finisher (AR-FN7), the ADU gate solenoid switches
to the upper side of the ADU paper exit gate to switch the paper path to the ADU.
(2) Paper transport speed in duplex printing

The transport speed may be doubled in duplex printing depending on the paper position.
The positions of double speed are as follows:
1) From when the rear edge of paper passes the fusing section to when switchback operation is started.
2) From switchback operation, after the lead edge of paper passes APPD1, until a certain amount is transported.
3) After that, paper is stopped at the ADU paper feed position, and fed to the laser printer again.
4. Transport with AR-FN6 installed
The AR-FN6 is provided with the decurler to improve alignment capability of finishing.
The decurler makes decurling against curling of paper by means of the difference in rigidity of the upper roller (metal) and the lower roller
(sponge).
Metal
Sponge

When
calling
Transport 1 Resist roller ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
section/ 2 Transport rollers ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper exit 3 Transport paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
reverse 4 Paper dust remover unit ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ P/G No.: [14]-51
section 5 Paper transport detection
2
4
1
2
5
(2) Maintenance and parts replacement

No. Unit Parts
a 1 Paper dust remover unit ❍
a-1
b Resist roller unit 1 Resist roller ✕❍
2 Paper transport roller
3 Paper transport detection
4 High voltage resistor PWB
c Left door unit 1 Suction fan motor
2 High voltage resistor PWB
3 Drawer PWB
d Paper exit 1 Paper exit detection 1
d-6
reverse unit 2 Paper exit motor d-5
3 Left door open/close
d-2
detection
d-3
4 Exhaust heat fan motor
5 Paper exit detection 2 d-1
6 Paper exit full detection d-4
7 After-fusing roller d-8
8 Paper exit roller d
d-7
b-4
c-2
c-1 b
b-1
c-3
b-2
b-3
c

a-1. Paper dust remover unit b-1. Resist roller
1) Open the front door. 1) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.
2) Remove the resist roller unit.
3) Remove the parts, and remove the resist roller.
4) Remove the gear, the parallel pin, and the E-ring.
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.
b-2. Paper transport roller

3) Remove the parts, and remove the paper transport roller.
b. Resist roller unit

2) Remove the screw, and remove the resist roller unit. Discon-
nect the connector.
b-3. Paper transport detection

b-4. High voltage resistor PWB
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper dust cleaner guide.

4) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the paper 3) Remove the connector, the screw, and the washer, and
transport detector. remove the suction fan motor.
5) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the high 4) Remove the screw, and remove the high voltage resistor PWB.
voltage resistor PWB.
∗ When installing the fan, check the left door indication arrow and
note the fan direction.
c. Left door unit c-3. Drawer PWB
1) Remove the screw, and remove the left door unit. 1) Remove the left door unit.
2) Remove the left door transport paper guide.
3) Remove the screw, and the reverse gate unit and remove the
angle.
c-1. Suction fan motor

c-2. High voltage resistor PWB
1) Remove the left door unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the transfer lock pawl.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the left door transport paper
guide.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the angle.
5) Remove the connector, the screw, and remove the drawer
PWB.

d. Paper exit reverse unit 6) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet.
1) Pull out the left door. 7) Remove the screw, and remove the front right upper cabinet.
8) Remove the front door.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
9) Remove the E-ring and the parts.

10) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the paper
exit reverse unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit upper cabinet.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the left rear cabinet.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the front left upper cabinet.
d-1. Paper exit detection 1

1) Remove the paper exit reverse unit.
2) Remove the actuator. Remove the connector, and remove the
paper exit detection 1.

d-2. Paper exit motor 4) Remove the connector, the exhaust heat fan, the paper exit
1) Remove the paper exit reverse unit. detection 2, the paper exit full detection.
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the paper
exit motor.
∗ When installing the fan, check the indication arrow and note the
d-3. Left door open/close detection fan direction.
d-7. After-fusing roller
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the left
door open/close detection.
2) Remove the E-ring and the parts.
3) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the paper
exit drive frame.
d-4. Exhaust heat fan motor

d-5. Paper exit detection 2
d-6. Paper exit full detection
2) Remove the screw, and remove the exhaust duct.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit upper paper 4) Remove the bearing, the E-ring, and the parts.
guide reinforcement plate.
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the fusing rear roller. Remove
the bearing.

d-8. Paper exit roller
2) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit upper paper
guide unit.
3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper exit roller. Remove
the bearing, the gear, and the parallel pin.

5. Laser scanner section A. General
Image data sent from the MFP (image process circuit) through the
mother board and PCU are converted into laser beams to expose
the drum surface.
5 1
2
6
10
BD PM
PCU 3
PWB 4 8
MFP MOTHER CN2
SLD30R-1 7
CN16 CN2
CONTROL BOARD 30 +12V2 S32B-PHDSS-B S32B-PHDSS-B
29
28
PCU_VCCW
GND TEST3 1
BR
32 TEST3
9
BR
PWB PWB 27
26
DTR_PCU
GND
TEST2
GND2
2
3
GY
31
30
TEST2
GND2
CN1
S11B-PH-K-S
BR 45 sheets (35 sheets)
25 DSR_PCU /SYNC 4 29 /SYNC RD RD
GY +24V1 11 3 +24V1 1
24 GND GND2 5 28 GND2 BR BR
23 TXD_PCU GND2 6
GY
27 GND2
VFM1\ 10
GY
2 VFM1\ 2
GY VFM1
GY GND2 9 1 GND2 3
22 GND GND2 7 26 GND2 RD
BR +24V1 8 POWER SOURCE
21 RXD_PCU LSU_S/H 8 25 LSU_S/H BR
BR VFM1\ 7 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H SECTION
20 POF VRB 9 24 VRB GY RD
GY GND2 6
19 MSW_MON GND2 10 23 GND2 RD 3 +24V1 1
GY +24V1 5 BR
CN1 CN2
18 GND GND2 11
BR
22 GND2 PMCLK\ 4
BR 2 VFM1\ 2
GY VFM1
17 RES_PCU TEST 12 21 TEST BR 1 GND2 3
BR READY(READY\) 3
16 GND VIDEO 13 20 VIDEO BR
LBR START\ 2
15 HSYNC /VIDEO 14 19 /VIDEO GY
BR GND2 1
14 GND /LDON 15 18 /LDON PHR-5
GY
13 DTEN GND2 16 17 GND2
GY 1 PMCLK
12 BUR_PR GND2 17 16 GND2
2 READY
11
10
GND2
VIDEO1
+5V2
GND2
18
19
BL
GY
15
14
+5V2
GND2
LSU 3 START\
BL 4 GND2
9 VIDEO0 +5V2 20 13 +5V2
RD 5 +24V1
8 GND +24V1 21 12 +24V1 CN3
RD
7 +5V1 +24V1 22 11 +24V1 S4B-PH-K-S B4B-PH-K-S
BR BR
6 +5V2 /VFM1 23 10 /VFM1 GND2 1 4 GND2
GY LB
5 +5V2 GND2 24 9 GND2 SYNC\ 2 3 SYNC\
BR BR
4 +5V2 /START 25 8 /START GND2 3 2 GND2
BR BL
3 +5V2 /VFM1 26 7 /VFM1 +5V2 4 1 +5V2
BR
2 +5V2 /PMCLK 27 6 /PMCLK
BR
1 +12V1 /READY 28 5 /READY
GY
GND2 29 4 GND2
GY
GND2 30 3 GND2
BL
+5V LD 31 2 +5V LD
GY
GND2 32 1 GND2
Signal
Code Name Type Function/Operation NOTE
name
PM PM Polygon mirror (motor) Reflection of the laser beam though constant rotation of the motor.
BD BD PWB Detects the laser scan start timing. This device is used to detect a
laser trouble.
No. Name Code, signal name Function

RW Control signal +5VLD 5V power for laser diode
RW Control signal /READY Polygon mirror motor READY signal ("L" in the constant speed rotation)
RW Control signal /PMCLK Clock signal for driving the polygon mirror motor
RW Control signal /START Polygon mirror motor drive start signal
RW Control signal /VIDEO VIDEO (Image signal)
RW Control signal /SYNC Sync signal (SYNC) from BD, sync signal for 1 line

No. Name Function
1 Laser control PWB Controls laser beam flashing and the output value.
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams to focus.
3 Incidence reflection mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams.
4 No. 1 mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams.
5 fθ lens 1 Deflects laser beams so that the laser scan speeds on the both ends of the drum and that at the
6 fθ lens 2 center of the drum are the same.
7 BD PWB Detects the timing of laser scan start. This device is used to detect a laser trouble.
8 No. 2 mirror Converges laser beams to focus.
9 Plane lens Assures the optical path for laser beams.
10 Convergence lens for BD Converges laser beams onto the BD PWB.
C. Operational descriptions a-1. LSU

1) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet.
[Laser optical path]
∗ The LSU must not be disassembled in the market.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the right noise cover.
(1) Polygon motor

Number
Model RPM Bearing
of mirrors
35PPM 14 17000RPM OIL Superior in
silence.
45PPM 14 22000RPM OIL
(2) Outline of LSU specifications
Effective scan width: 297mm
Resolution: 600dpi
Beam diameter: Main scan = 60 - 85 μm 3) Remove the connector, and remove the screw.
Sub scan = 75 - 110 μm
Laser power: 0.23±0.01mW (45 PPM)
0.19±0.01mW (35 PPM)
LD wave length: 770 - 795nm

No. Unit Parts
a 1 LSU
a-1

4) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet. 8) Remove the screw, and remove the main switch mounting
plate.
9) Remove the power unit.
5) Remove the connector, the screw, and the angle. Remove the
snap band.
∗ Do not disconnect the LSU side.
10) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the duct
holding cover.
6) Pull out the No. 1 paper feed tray unit, and push up and
remove the front door.
7) Release the lock, and pull out the left door. Remove the screw,
and remove the front cover right.
11) Remove the screw, and remove the LSU.

6. Scanner section A. General
There are following three methods of scanning documents in this
machine.
a. Place a document on the table glass. The copy lamp unit is
operated to radiate copy lamp light onto the document, scan-
ning the document with the CCD.
b. The SPF feeds a document. The lamp illuminates the docu-
ment and the image is scanned into the CCD that converts it
from A/D.
c. The SPF feed a document. The LED's of the CIS unit (attached
to the SPF) aluminates the back side of the document. The CIS
scans the information.

11
MIM
6
2
1 CCD PWB
3
4
CL1
5
MHPS
10
CN1 CN3 CN1

TX24-100R-LT-H1 CN2
IL-FPR-40S-VF-E1500 TX25-100P-LT-H1
S5B-PH-K-S
40 GND2
MIMA 1
39 GND2 MIMB 2
38 GND2 /MIMA 3
37 GND2 /MIMB 4
36 1_DATA1+ +24V3 5
35 1_DATA1-
34 GND2
33 1_DATA0+
32 1_DATA0-
31 GND2
30 1_CLK+
29 1_CLK-
28 GND2
27 /1_DBL+
26 /1_DBL-
25 GND2
24 FRM_CCD1
23 PAGE1
22 CLK_CCD1 SCN SCN
21 ADD_CCD1
20 TXD_CCD1
19 RXD_CCD1
18 RES_CCD1 JNT cnt
17 GND2
16 +3.3V3
15 +3.3V3
14 GND2 PWB PWB
13 +5VCCD
12 +5VCCD
(1/2) (1/3)
11 +5VCCD
10 +5VCCD
9 +5VCCD
8 +5VCCD
7 +5VCCD
6 +5VCCD
5 GND2
4 +10VCCD
3 +10VCCD
2 GND2
1 GND2
CN1 CN2
SLD5R-1 SLD5S-1
GND2 5 1 GND2
GND2 4 2 GND2
/CL1 3 3 /CL1 CN11
+24V3 2 4 +24V3 S3B-PH-K-S S3B-EH
LB
+24V3 1 5 +24V3 MHPS 1 1 MHPS
GY
GND2 2 2 GND2
BL
+5V2 3 3 +5V2
10 4 12 9 7 8 11
5 3 1 6
Code Signal name Name Function/Operation Type Note

MIM MIM Scanner (reading) motor Drives the scanner (reading) section. Stepping motor
MHPS MHPS Scanner home position Scanner home position detection Transmission type Sensor
sensor detector
CL1 CL1 Copy lamp Document exposure lamp
CCD PWB CCD PWB Front document image scan (Document table/
SPF mode)
Converts the document images (optical
signals) into electrical signals.

No. Name Function
1 Copy lamp unit Lights up to radiate documents. A xenon lamp (operating on 3.15KV) is employed.
2 Reflector This mirror converges lights on documents.
3 No. 1 mirror Secures the optical path between a document and No. 2 mirror.
4 No. 2 mirror Secures the optical path between No. 1 mirror and No. 3 mirror.
5 No. 3 mirror Secures the optical path between No. 2 mirror and the CCD.
6 CCD/Lens unit The reduction optical type CCD (Charge Coupled Device) of 7,450 pixels is employed. The scan resolution
is 600dpi. Converts photo energy reflected by the mirrors into electric energy.
7 White balance sheet Serves as the reference sheet of white for scanning with the CCD/Lens unit. If dust or dirt is attached to
this sheet, white streaks may be produced.
8 Table glass A document is set on this glass. The glass surface is coated for protection against static electricity.
A document is set to the top left corner.
9 SPF scan glass The copy lamp unit is fixed, and a document is moved over this glass to scan line by line. The glass surface
is coated for protection against static electricity. If dust or dirt is attached to this sheet, black streaks may
be produced.
10 Mirror home position Detects the home position of the mirror base unit.
sensor (MHPS)
11 Scan motor Drives the mirror base and the copy lamp unit.
12 DSPF white balance Serves as the reference sheet of white for scanning with the CIS unit.
sheet If dust or dirt is attached to this sheet, white streaks may be produced.
(1) CCD/lens unit
This machine employs the reduction optical-type line CCD (Charge Coupled Device) of scan resolution of 600dpi and 7450 pixels.
CCD scan is performed by shifting the scan positions sequentially by the carriage unit (lamp and mirror) scan or moving the document with
the SPF.
Lights reflected by the document are reflected by each mirror to form images on CCD elements through the reduction-type lens. The CCD
converts the optical energy into electrical energy (analog). (Photoelectric conversion)
(2) CIS unit
The image sensor which scans back document images is attached to the SPF. The close-contact type image sensor (Contact Image Sen-
sor) with scan resolution of 600dpi and 7196 pixels is employed.
For the CIS to scan documents, the scan position is sequentially shifted by shifting the document by the SPF, and the LED light in the unit is
radiated to the back of the document, and photo energy is converted into electric energy (analog signal).
CIS
Auto-focus lens
Lens center line
LED PWB
Glass
CIS UNI
Focus point

(3) Image signal flow (4) Carriage (lamp unit) shift (scan) speed
The image signal converted into electric energy (analog signal) is The carriage scan speed depends on the copy magnification ratio.
A-D converted on the CCD PWB. Image processes such as white Speed up to 171% = 110mm/s
balance and shading correction are performed on the scanner
Speed of 172% - 400% = 55mm/s
control PWB. The image signal is then sent through the mother
board to the MFP control PWB. (5) Timing chart
In the MFP control PWB, image process is performed according to Platen timing chart
the setting content of the operation panel. The image data are
converted into laser lighting signals (VIDEO signals), and sent MM
through the mother PWB and the PCU to the LSU (Laser Scan Feed Return
Unit). MIMD
Home position Home position
In the LSU, the VIDEO signals are converted into laser beams, MHPS
which are radiated onto the drum. Scan
CCD
PSW
SPF duplex timing chart
SPFM
1030mS
SRRC
SPPD4
94mS
SPOD
55mS
181mS
CCD
CIS

When
calling
Scanner Mirror/Lens/Reflector/Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
section Table glass/Dust-proof glass/OC ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
White reference glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Drive belt/Drive wire/Pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 1
5
2
5
4
3
4

No. Unit Parts
a Scanner unit 1 OC ❍
2 Dust-proof glass ❍
a-1
3 Table glass ❍
4 White reference glass ❍
5 Mirror ❍ a-2
6 Rails ✩
7 Drive wire ✕ a-3
8 Pulley ✕
9 Drive belt ✕ c-1
b
10 Scan motor a-6 b-1
11 OC open sensor a-4 b-2
a-5
12 Mirror home position sensor
13 Scanner control PWB a-6
14 Scanner interface PWB
b Lamp unit 1 Reflector ❍
2 Mirror ❍
a-9
3 Lamp a-10
a-8
4 Inverter PWB a-11 a-7
c CCD lens 1 CCD lens c
PWB unit a-13
a-8
a-12 b-4
b-3
a-14
a-7

a. Scanner unit a-6. Rails
a-1. OC 1) Remove the table glass.
1) Remove the OC cover. 2) Grease up the rails.
2)
1)
1)
3)
4)
3)
a-7. Drive wire

a-8. Pulley
a-2. Dust-proof glass
a-9. Drive belt
a-3. Table glass
1) Remove the table glass.
a-4. White reference glass
2) Check the drive wire, pulley and drive belt.
1) Remove the table glass holder and the white reference glass
holder, and remove the table glass and the white reference
glass.
4)
6) 5)
4) 1)
1)
3)
2)
a-10. Scan motor

1) Remove the scanner rear cabinet and the rear lower cabinet.
a-5. Mirror
2) Clean mirror.
3) 4)
3)
2)
1)
1)

2) Pull out the harness from the scanner control PWB. a-14. Scanner interface PWB
3) Remove the scan motor. 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the PWB cover and the harness cover.
3)
2)
1)
a-11. OC open sensor 3) Remove the scanner interface PWB.

1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the OC open sensor.
2)
1)
3)
a-12. Mirror home position sensor b. Lamp unit

1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the mirror home position sensor. 2) Remove the scan lamp unit.
4) 1)
3)
1)
2)
3) 1)
a-13. Scanner control PWB

1) Remove the scanner rear lower cabinet. 2)
2) Disconnect the connector and earth band, and pull out the
scanner control PWB.
2)
5)
2)
2)
1) 4)
3)
1)
∗ When the scanner control PWB is replaced, the EEPROM must

be replaced.

b-1. Reflector b-4. Inverter PWB
b-1. Mirror 1) Remove the table glass.
1) Remove the table glass. 2) Hold with your hand and remove the screw. Remove the con-
2) Clean the reflector and the mirror. nector and remove the inverter PWB.
b-3. Lamp
2) Slide the lamp unit base to the notch section.
c. CCD lens PWB unit

2) Remove the dark-box cover.
1) 1)
2)
1) 1)
1)
3) Flip the notch section Mylar and remove the screw. Slide the
lamp holder to the front side, and remove it upward from the
rear side. Remove the connector.
3) Remove the CCD lens PWB unit.

Note: Only the 2 screws marked in red may be used to remove
the CCD. Do not touch any others as they are set in the
factory. Failure to follow this warning will result in damaged
components and the whole assembly needs to be replaced.
1)
2)
3)

4) Clean the CCD lens and the CCD.
Note for CCD lens PWB unit installation
<1> Adjust the CCD unit adjustment value listed in the table
below with the scribed line on the lens base.
CCD unit adjustment value
(+) direction
Reference line
(-) direction
1 scale: 1.4mm
7. DSPF section
CCD adjustment value

+4 scales 5.0~
+3 scales 3.6~4.9
+2 scales 2.2~3.5
+1 scale 0.8~2.1
Reference -0.6~0.7
-1 scale -2.0~ -0.7
-2 scales -3.4~ -2.1
-3 scales -4.8~ -3.5
-4 scales ~ -4.9
<2> Make a sample copy at the above position, and measure
the magnification ratio. A. General
<3> Change the installing position in the horizontal direction to Sheet documents are automatically fed and transported for contin-
adjust the magnification ratio. uous scanning.
• When the copy image is longer than the original, shift to the The DSPF (MX-EFX1) supports duplex sheet to scan both of the
positive (+) direction. front and the back surfaces at a time.
• When the copy image is shorter than the original, shift to the
negative (-) direction.
∗ 1 scale of the scribed line corresponds to 0.3% of magnifica-
tion ratio.
∗ If this adjustment is not satisfactory, make a fine adjustment
with SIM 48-1.
(Refer to the adjustment described below.)
c-1. CCD lens

2) Remove the dark-box cover.
3) Remove the lens cover.

SCOV
OCSW
SDSS SPLS2
4
SPED
SPLS1
SPFS 7
SPPD SPFVR
SPFM 3
SPFC
9
SRRC
8
10
5
2
STMP
12
SPOD
CIS unit
SOCD
11
1
CN1 CN3
TX24-100R-LT-H1 TX25-100P-LT-H1
CNC CN10
CND CN3
PHNR-6-H+BU6P-TR-P-H B26B-PHDSS-B S28B-PHDSS
B6B-PH-K-S 9604S-35F
6 /B 1 2 /B +24V3 7 1 +24V3
VLED 35
5 +24V3 2 4 +24V3 +24V3 8 2 +24V3
DGND 34
4 B 3 1 B GND2 5 3 GND2
VAS 33
3 A 4 3 A GND2 6 4 GND2
DGND 32
2 +24V3 5 5 +24V3 5 +5V1
VDS 31
1 /A 6 6 /A +5V2
GND2
4
9
6
7
+5V2
GND2
SCN DGND
SCN
30
29
1754873+179228-3 VAREF 17 8 VAREF
DGND 28
+5V1 1 SPPD 19 9 SPPD
SPED
GND2
2
3
SPFC
SPED
18
21
10
11
SPFC
SPED
JNT LGATE
DGND
CLK
27
26
25
1754873+179228-3 SDSS 12 12 SDSS
CNB DGND 24
+5V2
SCOV
1
2
1 +5V1 11
B22B-PHDSS-B
5 +5V
SCOV
SRRC
SPWS
23
14
24
13
14
15
SCOV
SRRC
SPWS
PWB CIS DATA
DGND
23
22
GND2 3 2 SPED 10 16 SPED
SPFS 16 16 SPFS
(1/2) LD 21
1754873+179228-3 3 GND2 9 1 GND2 DGND 20
+5V2
SPPD
1
2
4
5
6
+5V2
SCOV
GND2
8
7
6
7
18
+5V2
SCOV
GND2 SPFMO0 3
17
18
19
GND2
GND2
SPFMO0
cnt SCLK
DGND
19
18
GND2 3 2 /LST 17
7 +5V2 5 +5V2 SPOD 25 20 SPOD
8 DGND 16
/SPFMA 2 21 /SPFMA
SMP-02V-NC+SMR-02V-N
1 +24V3 1
8
9
10
SPPD
GND2
+24V3
4
3
2
14
3
11
SPPD
GND2
+24V3
SOCD
SPFMA
26
1
22
23
SOCD
SPFMA
PWB SD0
DGND
SD1
15
14
13
2 /SDSS 2 11 /SDSS 1 SPLS1 22 24 SPLS1 12
15 /SDSS DGND
/SPFMB 11 25 /SPFMB 11
9 +5VPOD SD2
4 GND2 SPLS2 20 26 SPLS2 10
DGND
20 SPOD SPFMB 13 27 SPFMB 9
B3B-PH-K-S PHNR-6-H+BU6P-TR-P-H SD3
10 +5V2 SPFSET 15 28 SPFSET 8
+5VPOD 1 6 +5VPOD 1 DGND
GND2 10
GND2 2 5 GND2 2 22 SOCD SD4 7
CN7 CN1
SPOD 3 4 SPOD 3 6 GND2 DGND 6
S26B-PHDSS B26B-PHDSS
3 +5V2 4 12 +24V3 2_DATA1- 2_DATA1- 1 SD5 5
1754873+179228-3 1
2 SOCD 5 19 /SPFC 2_DATA1+ 2_DATA1+ 2 DGND 4
+5V2 1 2
1 GND2 6 13 +24V3 2_DATA0- 2_DATA0- 3 SD6 3
SOCD 2 3
17 /SRRC 2_DATA0+ 2_DATA0+ 4 DGND 2
GND2 3 4
21 (NC) 2_CLK- 2_CLK- 5 SD7 1
5
PHNR-2-H+BU2P-TR-P-H 2_CLK+ 6
2 +24V3
1 /SPFC
1
2
SPF 6
7
8
2_CLK+
2_DBL-
2_DBL+
2_DBL-
2_DBL+
7
8
9 GND2 GND2 9
10 FRM_CCD2 FRM_CCD2 10
3 +24V3
2 (NC)
1 /SRRC
1
2
3
PWB 11
12
CLK_CCD2
PAGE2
CLK_CCD2
PAGE2
11
12
13 ADD_CCD2 ADD_CCD2 13
14 TXD_CCD2 TXD_CCD2 14
SMR-03V-NC+SMP-03V-N 15 RES_CCD2 RES_CCD2 15
16 RXD_CCD2 RXD_CCD2 16
1 VAREF 1
17 +3.3V +3.3V 17
2 SPWS 2
CNA 18 +3.3V +3.3V 18
3 GND2 3
B12B-PHDSS-B 19 +24V3 +24V3 19
1754873+179228-3 1 VAREF 20 GND2 GND2 20
+5V2 1 2 SPWS 21 +12V1 +12V1 21
SPLS1 2 9 GND2 22 GND2 GND2 22
GND2 3 5 +5V2 23 +5V2 +5V2 23
4 SPLS1 24 GND2 GND2 24
1754873+179228-3 12 GND2 25 +5V2 +5V2 25
+5V2 1 7 +5V2 26 /CIS_SET /CIS_SET 26
SPLS2 2 6 SPLS2
GND2 3 10 GND2
11 +24V3
3 /SPFS
SCN
2 +24V3 1
1 /SPFS 2
SRA-01T-3.2
c
GY
cnt
SRA-21T-3
a
GY GY
b
FG PWB
SRA-21T-3
CN6
B4B-PH-K-S 179228-4+175694-4
RD
+24V3 1 1 +24V3
BR
/STMPS 2 2 /STMPS
LB
/STSET 3 3 /STSET
GY
GND2 4 4 GND2

4
9 2 3 6 7
12
1 5 10 8
11
Signal
name
SCOV SCOV SPF cover switch SPF cover open/close detection Transmission type Sensor
SPFM SPFM1 SPF paper feed motor, paper Drives the paper feed roller and the Stepping motor
transport motor transport roller. (SPF)
SPFC SPFC SPF paper feed clutch SPF paper feed section roller ON/OFF Electromagnetic clutch
control
SRRC SRRC SPF resist roller clutch SPF resist roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic clutch
SPED SPED SPF document set detector SPF document presence detection Transmission type Sensor
SPPD SPPD SPF document paper pass detector SPF document paper pass detection 1 Transmission type Sensor
SPFS SPFS SPF document pickup solenoid SPF document pickup Solenoid
STMP STMP FAX finish stamp solenoid Drives the FAX document finish stamp. Solenoid
SPLS1 SPLS1 SPF document length detector 1 SPF document length detection (Short) Transmission type Sensor
SPLS2 SPLS2 SPF document length detector 2 SPF document length detection (Long) Transmission type Sensor
SPFVR SPFVR SPF document size (Width) SPF document size (Width) detection Volume resistor Other
detection analog data detector detector
SOCD SOCD SPF open/close detector SPF unit open/close detection Transmission type Sensor
SPOD SPOD SPF paper exit detector SPF paper exit detection Transmission type Sensor
No. Name Function

1 CIS unit This is an image sensor unit to scan the back of a document. An image sensor (CIS: Contact
Image Sensor) of 7,196 pixels is employed. The scan resolution is 600dppi. LED lights in the
unit are reflected onto the document. Lights reflected from the document are passed through
the lens to form images on the photoelectric conversion elements.
The photo energy is converted into electric energy.
2 Document resist roller This roller makes synchronization between the document lead edge and the scan start
position.
3 Document resist front sensor Detects that a document reaches the resist roller.
(SPPD)
4 Document set sensor Detects that a document is set on the tray.
5 Document feed roller Feeds documents.
6 Separation plate The rubber plate prevents against duplicated feed of documents.
7 Document length sensor Detects the document length to detect the document size.
(SPLS1/SPLS2)
8 Document width detection volume Detects the document width to detect the document guide.
9 SPF motor Transports a document in the SPF.
10 Document take-up roller Picks up a document and transport it to the document feed roller.
11 Document exit roller Discharges a document.
12 Document exit sensor (SPOD) Detects document exit.
C. Operational descriptions Document

Scan mode Magnification ratio
(1) Document feed, transport, scan, paper exit, and transport speed
operating speed Single surface scan/ 100% or above 220mm/sec
Duplex scan
The document fed by the take-up roller is sent through the paper
Single surface scan/ 101% or above 110mm/sec
feed roller and the transport roller to the resist roller section.
Duplex scan High image quality 110mm/sec
In the resist roller section, the document lead edge and the scan
FAX 167.1mm/sec
start position are synchronized. The document is transported to
the scan section. After being scanned, the document discharged
to the document exit tray by the paper exit roller.
The document transport speed varies depending on the scan
mode and the scan magnification ratio as shown below.

When
calling
DSPF 1 Pick-up roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Note 2
section 2 Paper feed roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Note 2
3 Separation mylar lower ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Note 2
4 Separation pad ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Note 2
5 PS roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
6 Paper exit roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
7 Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Clean with air.
Note 2: Replacement reference: Replace by using the SPF counter value as an indication.
Paper feed section pickup roller, paper feed roller, separation pad, separation lower mylar lower:
100K or 1 year
7
7
4
1
3
2
6
5

No. Unit Parts
a SPF unit 1 SPF document stopper solenoid
2 SPF document resist front a-4
sensor a-3 a-8
3 SPF paper feed cover sensor a-2 a-7
a-6
4 SPF document set sensor a-21
5 SPF control PWB a-9
a-22
6 SPF original length sensor 1 a-15 a-10
a-17
7 SPF original length sensor 2 a-14
8 SPF original width detection a-13
volume PWB
9 Pick-up roller ❍
10 Paper feed roller ❍
11 CIS unit
12 CIS control PWB a-5
13 SPF open sensor a-20
a-18 a-1
14 SPF original exit sensor
15 Paper exit roller ❍ a-16 a-19
16 SPF motor a-11
a-12
17 Resist roller
18 Resist roller clutch
19 SPF original paper feed solenoid
20 SPF original paper feed clutch
21 Separation mylar lower ❍
22 Separation pad ❍

a. SPF unit 2) Remove the stopper solenoid.
1) Remove the rear cabinet of the scanner section.
2) Disconnect the connector.
3) Disconnect the grounding wire.
2)
1)
1)
5)
5) a-2. SPF document resist front sensor

3) 4)
5) a-3. SPF paper feed cover sensor
a-4. SPF document set sensor
3)
2) 1) Remove the upper transport unit cover.
1)
7) 2) Remove the sensors.
1)
6)
1)
4) Slide the SPF unit to the bottom, then remove it.
3)
4)
2)
4) 4)
3)
3)
4)
1) 3)
2)
a-5. SPF control PWB
2)
1) Remove the SPF PWB, and remove the SPF control PWB.
1)
2)
3)
a-1. SPF document stopper solenoid 3) 4)
1) Remove the upper transport unit cover.
4) 3)
4)
2) 5)
1)
1)

a-6. SPF original length sensor 1 (SPF original width detection volume installation)
a-7. SPF original length sensor 2 <1> Extend the original guide to the maximum position.
1) Remove the OC cover. <2> Adjust so that the mark on the width detection pinion gear is
fitted with the mark on the volume mounting plate.
2)
1)
1)
3)
4)
3)
2) Remove the original length sensor cover, and remove the sen-
sor.
1)
2)
1)
4) <3> Fix the mounting plate with the screw.

∗ When the rotational volume sensor is replaced, the sensor value
must be adjusted to the paper size (mark on the tray).
4)
(Refer to the SIM 53-6 or 53-7.)
3)
a-9. Pick-up roller
a-10. Paper feed roller
3)
2) Remove the paper feed roller cover.
3) Remove the hook of each roller, and remove each roller.
a-8. SPF original width detection volume PWB
1) Remove the OC cover. 1) 2)
2) Remove the original length sensor cover.
3) Remove the volume cover and remove the volume.
1)
2) 4)
1)
3)
4)
3)

a-11. CIS unit a-13. SPF open sensor
a-12. CIS control PWB 1) Remove the open sensor.
2) Remove the CIS unit.
1)
2)
a-14. SPF original exit sensor

1) Remove the paper exit sensor.
1)
2)
∗ When the CIS unit is replaced, the CIS shading adjustment must
be performed. (Refer to the descriptions of ADJUSTMENTS.)
3) Remove the harness, the cover, the earth wire, and remove
the CIS control PWB.
a-15. Paper exit roller

1) Remove the original paper feed unit.
2) Remove the paper exit roller gear.
5)
4)
2) 3)
For easy installation of the cover, slide the earth line to the con-
nector side when attaching. 1)
Note: Never touch the screws marked (a). These screws are for
3) Remove the paper exit frame, and remove the paper exit roller.
factory use only. The CIS is adjusted in the factory with
special tools. 5)
6)
a a a
3)
7)
2)
1)
3)
4)
3)

a-16. SPF motor 5) Remove the SPF motor.
1) Remove the OC cover.
2)
2) Remove the SPF lower cover. 1)
1) 1)
1) 3)
1) 1) 1)
2)
3)
1)
4)
a-17. Resist roller

a-18. Resist roller clutch
1) Remove the SPF resist roller unit.
3) Remove the original paper feed unit.
2)
1) 2)
2)
2)
3)
2)
2)
2)
2) Remove the SPF resist roller and the SPF resist roller clutch.
2)
2)
4) Remove the SPF drive unit.
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)

a-19. SPF original paper feed solenoid a-21. Separation mylar lower
a-20. SPF original paper feed clutch a-22. Separation pad
1) Remove the SPF paper feed unit. 1) Remove the upper transport unit.
2) Remove the SPF paper guide. 2) Loosen the screw, and remove the separation pad unit.
1)
1)
2)
3) Remove the screw, and remove the separation plate and the
front separation plate.
3) Remove the SPF pickup unit.
4) Remove the separation Mylar lower, and the separation pad.
2)
1)
1) 1)
4) Remove the original paper feed solenoid and the SPF original 8. Operation panel section
paper feed clutch.
3)
2) 4)
1)
A. General
This section describes various types of settings, display and oper-
ation.
The LCD display section is controlled by the MFP CONTROL
PWB.
The touch panel, operation keys and LED display are controlled by
the SCANNER CONTROL PWB.

FG
SRA-21T-3
ORSLED
B3B-EH
+5V1 1
GND2 2
TOUCH OCSW 3
OCSW
LCD
ORSPD
1 CCFL
2
3
CN3 CN1
TX25-100P-LT-H1 TX24-100R-LT-H1
GND2 1 1 GND2
GND2 2 2 GND2
/1_DBL- 3 3 /1_DBL-
/1_DBL+ 4 4 /1_DBL+
1_CLK- 5 5 1_CLK-
1_CLK+ 6 6 1_CLK+
1_DATA0- 7 7 1_DATA0-
1_DATA0+ 8 8 1_DATA0+
1_DATA1- 9 9 1_DATA1-
1_DATA1+ 10 10 1_DATA1+
GND2 11 11 GND2
GND2 12 12 GND2
GND2 13 13 GND2
GND2 14 14 GND2
GND2 15 15 GND2
GND2 16 16 GND2
(NC) 17 17 (NC)
+12V1 18 18 +12V1
+24V3 19 19 +24V3
+24V3 20 20 +24V3
PDSEL1 21 21 PDSEL1
PDSEL2 22 22 PDSEL2
/KEYIN 23 23 /KEYIN
SEG0 24 24 SEG0
GND2 25 25 GND2
GND2 26 26 GND2
LcdS+ 27 27 LcdS+
LcdS- 28 28 LcdS-
LcdM+ 29 29 LcdM+
LcdM- 30 30 LcdM-
LcdCP1+ 31 31 LcdCP1+
LcdCP1- 32 32 LcdCP1-
LcdCP2- 34 34 LcdCP2-
LcdD0+ 35 35 LcdD0+
LcdD0- 36 36 LcdD0-
LcdD1+ 37 37 LcdD1+
CN2 38 LcdD1-
LcdD1- 38
52271-1379
LcdD2+ 39 39 LcdD2+
1DISP
LcdD2- 40 40 LcdD2-
2YD CN1 CN5 LcdD3+ 41 41 LcdD3+
3LP 52271-3079 30FMN-BT
LcdD3- 42 42 LcdD3-
4CP XH 30 1XH
GND2 43 43 GND2
5+3.3V /YL 29 2/YL
GND2 44 44 GND2
6GND /XL 28 3/XL
YH 45 45 YH
7M YH 27 4YH CN6
/XL 46 46 /XL
8D0 /CCFT 26 5/CCFT S6B-PH-K-S
/STSET 47 47 /STSET
9D1 +24V3 25 6+24V3 +5V1 1
/STMPS 48 48 /STMPS
10D2 GND2 24 7GND2 GND2 2
GND2 49 49 GND2
11D3 TH 23 8TH OCSW 3
GND2 50 50 GND2
12+24V GND2 GND2
13VEE LVDS LcdD3-
22
21
9
10LcdD3-
GND2 51 51 GND2
+24V3
/LED0
4
5
GND2 52 52 GND2
PWB LcdD3+
LcdD2-
20
19
11
12
LcdD3+
LcdD2-
+12V1 53 53 +12V1
/LED1 6
CN4 +12V1 54 54 +12V1
FFC-4PIN 52271-0469 LcdD2+ 18 13LcdD2+
GND2 55 55 GND2
/YL 4 1 /YL LcdD1- 17 14LcdD1-
FFC-30Pin +5V2 56 56 +5V2
XH 3 2 XH LcdD1+ 16 15LcdD1+
GND2 57 57 GND2
YH 2 3 YH LcdD0- 15 16LcdD0-
+5V2 58 58 +5V2
/XL 1 4 /XL LcdD0+ 14 17LcdD0+
GND2 59 59 GND2
LCD-VEE 13 18LCD-VEE
+3.3V 60 60 +3.3V
3.3V 12 193.3V
FRM_CCD1 61 61 FRM_CCD1
LcdDIS 11 20LcdDIS
CLK_CCD1 62 62 CLK_CCD1
GND2 10 21GND2
CN3 TXD_CCD1 63 63 TXD_CCD1
INV S3B-PH-K-S(LF)
/CCFT 3
S3B-PH-SM4-TB(LF)
1 /CCFT
LcdCP2-
LcdCP2+
9
8
22
23
LcdCP2-
LcdCP2+
RES_CCD1 64 64 RES_CCD1
RXD_CCD1 65 65 RXD_CCD1
PWB GND 2 2 GND GND2
LcdCP1-
7
6
24
25
GND2
LcdCP1-
ADD_CCD1 66 66 ADD_CCD1
+24V 1 3 +24V GND2 67 67 GND2
LcdCP1+ 5 26LcdCP1+
53259-0417 PAGE1 68 68 PAGE1
LcdM- 4 27LcdM-
1 CCFT+ GND2 69 69 GND2
LcdM+ 3 28LcdM+
2 NC GND2 70 70 GND2
3 NC
LcdS-
LcdS+
2
1
29
30
LcdS-
LcdS+ SCN /CL1 71 71 /CL1 SCN
4 /CCFT
JNT PDSEL0
+5V2
72
73
72 PDSEL0
73 +5V2
cnt
PWB PD
SEG1
74
75
74 PD
75 SEG1
PWB
CN1 CN4
52610-2471 T24FAZ-SMT-TF SEG2 76 76 SEG2
GND2 24 1 GND2 GND2 77 77 GND2
CN2 78 /F0
S6B-PH-K-S PDSEL0 23 2 PDSEL0 /F0 78
B6B-PH-SM4-TB(LF)(SN)
PDSEL1 22 3 PDSEL1 GND2 79 79 GND2
PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0
PDSEL2 21 4 PDSEL2 /F1 80 80 /F1
PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1
+5V2 20 5 +5V2 GND2 81 81 GND2
PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2
PD 19 6 PD /F2 82 82 /F2
+5V2 4 4 +5V2
PD 5 5 PD
+5V2 17 8 +5V2 /F3 84 84 /F3
GND2 6 6 GND2
/KEYIN 16 9 /KEYIN GND2 85 85 GND2
SEG0 15 10 SEG0 /BZR 86 86 /BZR
MFP SEG1 14
FFC-24Pin
11 SEG1 GND2 87 87 GND2
SEG2 SEG2 +5V1 88 88 +5V1
OPE /F0
13
12
12
13 /F0 Lcd DIS 89 89 Lcd DIS
PWB /F1
/F2
11
10
14
15
/F1
/F2
+3.3V
GND2
90
91
90 +3.3V
91 GND2
/F3 9 16 /F3 LCD-VEE 92 92 LCD-VEE
GND2 8 17 GND2 TH 93 93 TH
GND2 7 18 GND2 /CCFT 94 94 /CCFT
GND2 6 19 GND2 /YL 95 95 /YL
(NC) 5 20 (NC) XH 96 96 XH
(NC) 4 21 (NC) +24V3 97 97 +24V3
/BZR 3 22 /BZR +24V3 98 98 +24V3
+5V1 2 23 +5V1 GND2 99 99 GND2
GND2 1 24 GND2 GND2 100 100 GND2

Signal
name
LCD LCD unit Display the each memu and the information.
TOUCH Touch panel Various adjustments and setting operation are
performed.
ORSLED Document size detection light Generates the document size detection signal.
emitting PWB
ORSPD Document size detection light Generates the document size detection signal.
receiving PWB
OCSW OCSW SPF open/close detector Document size detection trigger Transmission type Sensor
CCFL CCFL LCD backlight LCD backlight CCFL cool CRT
No. Name Function

1 LVDS/INV PWB Generates the LCD display signal and a high voltage for the backlight.
2 Operation control PWB Controls the display operation panel.
C. Maintenance and parts replacement 3) Remove the document size detection PWB (Light emitting
side)
No. Unit Parts
a Original detection 1 Original size detection PWB 1)
1)
unit (Light emitting side) 1)
2 Original size detection PWB
(Light receiving side)
b Operation panel 1 MFP operation PWB
unit 2 LVDS PWB
3 LCD INV-J PWB 2)
4 LCD unit 3)
5 Touch panel
a-1
a-2
b-1 a-2. Original size detection PWB (Light receiving side)
1) Remove the operation panel lower cabinet.
2) Remove the original size detection PWB (Light receiving side)
b-3
b-2
b-5 2)
b-4 2)
1)
2)
a. Original detection unit
a-1. Original size detection PWB (Light emitting side)
3)
2) Remove the original detection unit (Light emitting side).
b. Operation panel unit
1) Remove the original exit tray.
3) 2)
4)
2)
1)
1)

2) Remove the scanner left cabinet. b-1. MFP operation PWB
1) Remove the earth terminal.
2) Remove the MFP operation PWB
2)
1)
1)
3) Remove the scanner right cabinet.
b-1. LVDS PWB

1) Disconnect each cables.
2) Remove the LVDS PWB.
2)
1)
1)
4) Remove the operation panel lower cabinet.
Note for installation

∗ Tighten the ground screw and ground connector as shown in the
below illustration. Improper placement will cause problems.
1)
2)
1)
1)
5) Remove the harnesses.
1)
OK
1)
∗ Do not set the ground cable in this position.
2)
1)
6) Remove the operation panel unit.
1)
NG
1)
2)

b-3. LCD INV-J PWB b-5. Touch panel
1) Disconnect each cables. 1) Disconnect the flat cable.
2) Remove the LCD INV-J PWB. 2) Remove the earth wire.
3) Remove the LCD unit.
b-4. LCD unit

1) Disconnect each cables.
2) Remove the LCD cover. 5) Remove the touch panel.
3) Remove the LCD unit.

9. Filter
A. Maintenance and parts replacement
When
calling
Filters 1 Ozone filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ P/G No.: [12]-2

No. Unit Parts
a 1 Ozone filter ▲
a-1. Ozone filter
1) Remove the paper exit tray cabinet cover, and remove the
ozone filter.

10. Drive section
When
calling
Drive section 1 Gears (Specified position) ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
(2) Maintenance and parts replacement a. Drive unit
No. Unit Parts 1) Remove the screw, and remove the left door.
a Drive unit 1 Gears ✕✩
2 Paper cassette paper feed clutch
3 Paper transport clutch
4 Resist roller clutch
b 1 Drum motor
2 Main motor
a-1
a-1
a-1
a-4
b-1
a-3
b-2
a-2

3) Remove the screw, and remove the slide rail. ∗ Remove the resist roller unit, and apply grease to the bottom
section of the PS front roller section brake.
PS front roller
section
4) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the main Apply grease FLOIL G484
drive unit.
a-2. Paper cassette paper feed clutch
a-3. Paper transport clutch
a-4. Resist roller clutch
1) Remove the main drive unit.
2) Remove the parts.
a-1. Gears
1) Remove the main drive unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the drive cover.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the drive cover.

4) Remove the connector, the paper cassette paper feed clutch 11. Power section
unit, the paper transport clutch unit, and the resist roller clutch
unit. A. Maintenance and parts replacement
No. Unit Parts
a Power unit 1 Reactor PWB (200V only)
Filter PWB (Taiwan only)
2 PowerPWB
3 RelayPWB
b 1 Main switch
2 Cooling fan motor
3 Fuse PWB
4 High voltage PWB
5) Remove the parts.
b-2
b-4
a-1
b-3
b-1
a-2 a-3
a
b-1. Drum motor a. Power unit

1) Remove the main switch mounting plate.
b-2. Main motor
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right noise cover.
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the drum
motor and the main motor.

4) Remove the connector, and remove the screw. a-1. Reactor PWB (200V only) / Filter PWB (Taiwan only)
2) Remove the connector and the PWB supporter, and remove
the filter PWB.
(200V only)
(Taiwan only)
6) Remove the connector, the screw, and the angle. Remove the
snap band.
a-2. Power PWB

2) Remove the connector, the screw, and the PWB supporter,
and remove the power PWB.

a-3. Relay PWB 3) Remove the screw, and remove the main switch mounting
1) Remove the power unit. plate.
2) Remove the connector and the bushing, and remove the filter
PWB mounting plate.
4) Remove the connector, and remove the main switch.
3) Remove the connector and the PWB supporter, and remove

the relay PWB.
b-2. Cooling fan motor

2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the duct
holding cover.
b-1. Main switch

1) Pull out the No. 1 paper feed tray unit, and push up and
remove the front door.
2) Release the lock, and pull out the left door. Remove the screw,
and remove the front cover right. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the cooling fan motor.
fan direction.

b-3. Fuse PWB 3) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the high
1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet. voltage PWB.
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the inlet 12. PWB
mounting plate.
No. Unit Parts
a 1 MFP controller PWB
2 HDD (Option)
3 PCU PWB
4 Mother PWB
a-1
3) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the fuse a-2
PWB.
a-3 a-4
b-4. High voltage PWB a-1. MFP controller PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP controller PWB unit.
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the PCU 2) Remove the connector.
PWB unit.

3) Release the lock, and remove the MFP controller PWB unit. 2) Remove the connector, and remove the screw.
3) Pull out the HDD unit.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the HDD cover.

5) Remove the screw, and remove the HDD angle.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the MFP controller PWB.
a-3. PCU PWB

a-2. HDD (Option)


2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the PCU 10) Remove the screw, and remove the mother PWB.
PWB.
∗ When replacing the PCU PWB, replace the EEPROM on the
PCU PWB which is to be replaced.
13. Fan motor

No. Unit Parts
Ţ 1 Controller cooling fan motor 1
a-4. Mother PWB 2 Controller cooling fan motor 2
1) Remove the fusing unit. 3 Ozone exhaust fan motor
3) Remove the front cover right.
4) Remove the HDD cover.
a-2
5) Remove the MFP controller PWB unit.
6) Remove the cooling duct. a-3
7) Remove the controller duct.

8) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the main
duct, the sub duct, and the box cooling duct lower. a-1
a-1. Controller cooling fan motor 1

a-2. Controller cooling fan motor 2
9) Remove the screw, and remove the controller box upper.

2) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet. 10) Remove the snap band, the screw, and the connector, and
remove the fan fixing plate.
11) Remove the screw, and remove the controller cooling fan
motor 1.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit upper cabinet.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the left rear cabinet. ∗ When installing the fan, note the fan direction.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the front left upper cabinet. 12) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the control-
ler cooling fan motor 2.
6) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet.
7) Remove the screw, and remove the front right upper cabinet.
∗ When installing the fan, note the fan direction.
8) Remove the front door.
a-3. Ozone exhaust fan motor
3) Remove the paper exit upper cabinet, the left rear cabinet, and
the front left upper cabinet.
4) Remove the paper exit tray cabinet, the front right upper cabi-
net, and the front door.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the controller duct.
6) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the ozone
exhaust fan motor.
9) Remove the screw, and remove the cooling fan duct upper.
fan direction.

[8] ADJUSTMENTS 7) Check the developing doctor gap. If the clearance is within the
specified range, fix the screw with screw lock.
8) After completion of the job, apply screw lock.
No. Section Adjustment item
1 Process A Doctor gap adjustment
section B MG roller main pole position adjustment
C High voltage output adjustment
2 Image A Adjustments <1> LSU right angle
check, on the engine adjustment
adjustment side <2> Print off-center
adjustment
<3> Each tray resist 20mm
amount setting
<4> Self print lead edge 20mm
adjustment
<5> Front/rear and left/right
void amount setting
B Adjustment <1> OC scan distortion
on the adjustment
scanner side <2> SPF height adjustment
<3> SPF scan distortion
adjustment
<4> OC scan magnification
ratio adjustment
<5> SPF scan
magnification ratio
<6> OC scan lead edge
adjustment
<7> SPF scan lead edge
adjustment
<8> Original off-center
adjustment
3 Scanner A OC scan distortion adjustment
section B Vertical image distortion balance
adjustment
C Vertical image distortion balance
adjustment <Adjustment specification>
D Vertical (sub scanning direction) distortion Ambient
adjustment Specification
temperature
E Height adjustment of original detection light Both sides 0.45±0.03mm 5 - 30°C
emitting unit (Position at 20 - 50mm)
F Original size detection photo sensor check Center 0.45 - 0.60mm
G Original size detection photo sensor
adjustment B. MG roller main pole position adjustment
H Image density adjustment This adjustment is performed in the following cases:
I DSPF width detection adjustment • When developer is scattered.
• When an uneven image is produced.
1. Process section 1) Remove the developer cartridge and the developing unit from
the machine.
A. Doctor gap adjustment
2) Remove the DV cover and the developer from the developing
This adjustment is performed in the following cases: unit.
• When developer is scattered. 3) Remove the DVF handle and put the developing unit on a flat
• When an uneven image is produced. surface.
1) Remove the developer cartridge and the developing unit from 4) Bind a string to a needle.
the machine. 5) Hold the string and move the needle toward the MG roller.
2) Remove the DV cover and the developer from the developing (Since the MG roller diameter is small, use of a clip cannot
unit. make an accurate adjustment.)
3) Remove the DVR cover, the DVF handle, the idle correction 6) With the needle tip 2 - 3 mm apart from the MG roller surface,
plate assembly, and the HG gear 22T, insert a thickness gauge mark the point on the MG roller in the elongated line of the
(0.46mm) as shown in the figure below, and check that the needle.
clearance is within the specified range. (Keep the needle and the MG roller apart from each other.)
If the clearance is not within the specified range, adjust the doctor 7) Measure the distance from the marking position to the P sur-
gap in the following procedures. face of the developing unit, and check that the distance is
4) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A. within the specified range.
5) Insert the thickness gauge (0.46mm) again as shown in the If the distance is not within the specified range, perform the adjust-
figure below. ment in the following procedures.
6) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction and tighten 8) Loosen the fixing screw of the main pole fixing plate.
the fixing screw.
MX-M350/M450 N/U ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 1

9) Move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction and adjust. C. High voltage output adjustment
(1) Developing bias output check and setup
1) Remove the rear cabinet to allow checking of the high voltage
monitor output pin.
2) Execute the simulation of the target high voltage.
(See the table below.)
3) Select the mode to be set with 10-key, and press START key.
4) Enter the set value with 10-key and press START key. The set
value is outputted for 30 sec.
5) Apply a high voltage tester between the measurement pin and
the frame.
Note: Take care not to short the measuring pin and the frame.
6) The unit stops after 30 sec of output.
<Adjustment specification>
Specification
Marking position Measure from 54.2mm
the P surface above.
Default High voltage

Measurement
Set range probe
Monitor output voltage Set value pin
impedance
MC grid MAIN GRID AUTO AE mode 45PPM: -650V±5V 45PPM: 645 200~900 CN2-7 100MΩ
(SIM 8-2) 35PPM: -620V±5V 35PPM: 615
CHARACTER Text mode -650V±5V 645 200~900
MIX Text/Photo mode -650V±5V 645 200~900
PHOTO Photo mode -650V±5V 645 200~900
PRINTER Printer mode -650V±5V 645 200~900
FAX Fax mode -650V±5V 645 200~900
Transfer current FRONT Front 45PPM: 267 0~620
(THV+ (SIM 8-6) 35PPM: 220
BACK Back 45PPM: 310 0~620
35PPM: 267
Developing bias DV AUTO AE mode 45PPM: -500V±5V 485 0~745 CN2-1 100MΩ
BIAS (SIM 8-1) 35PPM: -470V±5V
CHARACTER Text mode -500V±5V 485 0~745
MIX Text/Photo mode -500V±5V 485 0~745
PHOTO Photo mode -500V±5V 485 0~745
PRINTER Printer mode -500V±5V 485 0~745
FAX Fax mode -500V±5V 485 0~745
PLUS Positive bias +150V±5V 150 0~255
Separation voltage SHV FRONT Front 45PPM: +0.22±0.1V 45PPM: 160 0~240 CN2-3 10MΩ
(SIM 8-17) 35PPM: +1.37V±0.1V 35PPM: 120
BACK Rear 45PPM : +0.22±0.1V 45PPM: 160 0~240
35PPM: +1.37V±0.1V 35PPM: 120
Transfer voltage THV -800V±10V 780 0~1250 CN2-5 10GΩ
(SIM 8-17)

2. Image check, adjustment A. Adjustments on the engine side
(1) Copy image check <1> LSU right angle adjustment
1) Place a test chart (UKOG-0089CSZZ) on the reference posi- Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
tion of the OC, and make a copy. ment.
2) Place a test chart (made as shown below) face-down on the • Nothing special
(D)SPF, set the document guide, and make a copy. (Single → Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
Single) ment.
3) Place a test chart (made as shown below) face-up on the • Print off-center adjustment
DSPF, set the document guide, and make a copy. (Duplex → • Print lead edge adjustment
Single) • Front/rear and left/right void amount setting
Making of SFP test chart 1) Execute SIM64-1.
a. Use standard paper of A3. 2) The print pattern "71" is printed.
b. Mark to the full width of the paper so that each void/image 3) Check the output print.
loss can be checked. 4) Loosen two fixing screws of the LSU unit
c. At that time, mark so that the front /rear and the top/bottom (M4 screws which are fixing the LSU and the top plate).
can be identified. 5) Adjust the LSU fixing position with the adjustment memory as
d. Draw a center line in the paper transport direction to identify the reference.
the off center. 6) Tighten two fixing screws of the LSU unit.
7) Print again in the grid pattern and check the print.
8) Repeat procedures 4) to 7) until the specification is satisfied.
SIMULATION 64-1
Center line
SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT :1 1. PRINT START
2. PRINT PATTERN:87 3. DENSITY :1 1
4. MULTI : 1 5. MODE :1
6. LEVEL : 1 7. DUPLEX :1
Standard paper of A3
4) Check each output copy.

(Image distortion/ each void/ lead edge position/ Off-center/
Magnification ratio/ Density/ Dirt, etc.)
5) If there is no problem in copy images, the image check is com-
pleted.
(2) Division of adjustment positions
1) If there is any problem in checked images, perform self-print
and the adjustment positions (scanner side/ engine side) are
divided.
*: If there is any problem in the copy image and no problem in
the self print, an adjustment on the scanner side is required.
If there is any problem on the copy image and any problem in
the self print, an adjustment on the engine side is required.
(3) Adjustment procedures
Perform the adjustment procedures as described below. <Right angle check method>
1 LSU right angle adjustment SIM64-1: Pattern “71” <1> Make self-print of pattern 71.
2 Print off-center adjustment SIM50-10 <2> Draw a line perpendicular to the sub scan direction (paper
3 Each tray resist amount setting SIM51-2 transport direction) with a square.
4 Print lead edge adjustment SIM50-5 The point of intersection of the perpendicular line and the
5 Front/rear and left/right void SIM50-1 horizontal line is regarded as the starting point.
amount setting <3> Measure distance A (between the self-printed line and the
6 OC scan distortion adjustment perpendicular line drawn with a square) at a position of
7 SPF height adjustment 220mm from the starting point.
8 SPF scan distortion SIM51-2 <4> Check that distance A satisfies the following specification.
adjustment
9 Scan magnification ratio SIM48-1 A
A
10 SPF/DSPF scan magnification SIM48-1
ratio
11 OC scan lead edge adjustment SIM50-1 Print
lead edge 220mm
12 SPF scan lead edge SIM50-6
adjustment
13 Original off-center adjustment SIM50-12

<2> Print off-center adjustment
Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
a b ment.
• LSU right angle adjustment (If there is no distortion in self print,
Print lead edge the adjustment is not required.)
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
ment.
• Each tray resist amount setting
• Print lead edge adjustment
<Specification> • Front/rear and left/right void amount setting
Measuring 1) Execute SIM50-10.
Specification Set value
point 2) Set the paper feed tray and the magnification ratio for the
Print Self print θ = 90° ± 0.13° θ changes about 0.25 adjustment.
distortion pattern 71 degrees for 1 scale of 3) After entering the adjustment values, press START key, and
adjustment adjustment. (A shifts printing is started.
about 1mm.) 4) Check the off-center (distance from the paper edge) of the
printed copy. Repeat procedure 2) until the specification is
satisfied.
SIMULATION 50-10
PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS
START.
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.COPY START
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
2
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)
3.TRAY1 50 4.TRAY2 50 5.TRAY3 50
6.TRAY4 50 7.BPT 50 8.ADU 50
Measurement Set value

Adjustment position Specification
reference Default Range
Tray 1 Tray 1 Output pattern 0±1.5mm 50 0 - 99 Set value 1: 0.1mm shift
Tray 2 Tray 2 center line
Tray 3 Tray 3/LCC left
Tray 4 Tray 4/LCC right
MFT Manual feed
ADU Duplex
• For the duplex mode (Single → Duplex), add 10 to the above set value.
• When the print line is shifted toward a from the paper center, decrease the value.
• When the print line is shifted toward b from the paper center, increase the value.
Print lead edge

b
<3> Each tray resist amount setting 3) Press [START] key.

When [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
* This adjustment is executed when there is any lead edge vari-
paper feed and copying are performed.
ation or skew for each tray.
4) Adjust the resist quantity so that paper is transferred stably.
ment. SIMULATION 51-2
• LSU right angle adjustment (If there is no distortion in self print, RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START.
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
the adjustment is not required.)
2.TRAY1 60 3.TRAY2 50 4.DESK 50
• Print off-center adjustment 5.BPT 55 6.ADU 50 1
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust- 7.SPF(HIGH) 60 8.SPF(LOW) 75
ment.
• Print lead edge adjustment
• Front/rear and left/right void amount setting
1) Execute SIM 51-2.
2) Enter the resist adjustment value with 10-key.

Default
Set MX- MX- [Output pattern]
Item
range M350U/ M450U/
M350N M450N
2 TRAY1 Tray 1 resist 0 - 99 65 60
adjustment value
3 TRAY2 Tray 2 resist 55 50
adjustment value
4 DESK Desk resist 55 50 A
adjustment value
5 BPT Manual tray resist 60 55
adjustment value <5> Front/rear and left/right void amount setting
6 ADU ADU resist 55 50 Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
adjustment value ment.
When the set value is increased, the warp amount of paper is • LSU right angle adjustment (If there is no distortion in self print,
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp the adjustment is not required.)
amount of paper is decreased. • Print off-center adjustment
<4> Self print lead edge adjustment • Resist amount adjustment
Items which must have been completed before this adjust- • Print lead edge adjustment
ment. Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
• LSU right angle adjustment (If there is no distortion in self print, ment.
the adjustment is not required.) • OC scan lead edge adjustment
• Print off-center adjustment • SPF scan lead edge adjustment
• Resist amount adjustment 1) Execute SIM 50-1.
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust- (Lead edge image loss/void area adjustment)
ment. 1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment value (LEAD EDGE)
• Front/rear and left/right void amount setting and the paper lead edge void adjustment value (DENA) as fol-
• OC scan lead edge adjustment lows.
• SPF scan lead edge adjustment (Standard set value)
Lead edge image loss: 1.5mm (LEDA: 15)
2) Set the lead edge void adjustment value (DENA) as specified Paper lead edge void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35)
below. ∗ Set LEAD to 15. (Enter 15 as the adjustment value of LEAD,
and press [P] key.) (0.1mm/step)
(Standard set value) Paper lead edge void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35)
∗ Set DENA to 35. (Enter 35 as the adjustment value of
∗ Set the adjustment value of DENA to 35. (Enter 35 as the
DENA, and press [P] key.) (0.1mm/step)
adjustment value of DENA, and press [P] key.)
2) Make a copy at the normal ratio (100%) and check the lead
3) Check the lead edge void area on the self print pattern
(SIM67-1). edge void area and the image loss. (Enter 100 as the set value
of the copy magnification ratio (MAGNIFICATION), and press
(Enter 1 and press [START] key.)
[START] key.)
4) If the adjustment result is not satisfactory, perform the follow-
ing procedures.
ing procedures.
∗ If the lead edge void area is not 3.5mm:
∗ If the lead edge void are is not 3.5mm:
Change the adjustment value of RRCB and perform the
adjustment. (Change the adjustment value of RRCB and
press [START] key.)
press [START] key.) (1msec/step)
(Shift for the adjustment value change: 0.1mm/step)
∗ If the lead edge image loss is not 1.5mm:
SIMULATION 50-5 Change the adjustment value of RRCA and perform the
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-20, AND PRESS START. adjustment. (Change the adjustment value of RRCA and
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START press [START] key.)
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)
LEAD EDGE: 2.RRCB 50 3.SIDE2 ADJ. 50
2 (Shift for the adjustment value change: 0.2mm/step)
RESIST: 4.T1 50 5.T2 50 6.DESK 50 (Rear edge void area adjustment)
7.BPT 50 8.ADU 50 Adjust so that the rear edge void area is 3.5mm. (Change the
OFF CENTER: 9.T1 50 10.T2 50 11.T3 50 12.T4 50
13.BPT 50 14.ADU 50 adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE, and press [START] key.)
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
(VOID SETTING) 15.LEAD_EDGE(DENA) 50
16.TRAIL_EDGE(DENB) 30 17.FRONT/REAR 30 Set the adjustment value of SIDE to 20. (Enter 20 as the adjust-
ment value of SIDE, and press [P] key.)
<Specification> When the adjustment value is changed, the image position is
shifted in the front/rear frame direction.
Set position Specification Set value
(Front/rear frame direction void area adjustment)
Self print lead Print start A = 4.0mm or less Shift of
edge position A of (Lead and tail 0.175mm Adjust so that the total of the front/rear direction void areas is
adjustment the output total: 8.0mm or (35ppm) / 7.0mm. (Change the adjustment values of FRONT/REAR, and
SIM 50-5 pattern 1 less) 0.225mm press [START] key.)
(45ppm) for Front frame void area = 3.5mm Rear frame void area = 3.5mm
set value 1. If, as shown above, the front and the rear void areas are not even,
use SIM 50-5 to adjust the image off-center position.

SIMULATION 50-1
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START.
2.MAGNIFICATION 100 2
(ADJUSTMENT DATA) 3.RRCA 50 4.RRCB 50 10.SIDE2 ADJ. 50
(IMAGE LOSS SETTING) 5.LEAD 15 6.SIDE 20
(VOID SETTING) 7.LEAD_EDGE(DENA) 35
8.TRAIL_EDGE(DENB)35 9.FRONT/REAR 32
Fixing screw
<Specification> (M4 x 8)
Set
Set position Specification
value
Lead edge void Output pattern A = 4.0mm or Shift of
adjustment “71” print void less 0.1mm
“LEAD EDGE quantity A (A and B total: for set [Fig. 1] [Fig. 2]
VOID (DENA)” 8.0mm or less) value 1. First copy image First copy image
Rear edge void Output pattern B = 4.0mm or
adjustment “71” print void less
“TAIL EDGE VOID quantity B (A and B total:
(DENB)” 8.0mm or less) Image Image
Side edge void Output pattern C and D total:
adjustment “71” print void 8.0mm or less Paper Paper
“FRONT/REAR” quantity C + D
Difference Difference
Print
lead edge A
• In the case of Fig. 1
Shift cam A in the direction A by the difference in the copy image.
For one scale (one groove), shift by 0.5mm.
After shifting, tighten the fixing screw (M3 x 12) of cam A and
make a copy again, and check the copy again to insure that there
B. Adjustment on the scanner side is no distortion.
<1> OC scan distortion adjustment • In the case of Fig. 2
Items which must have been completed before this adjust- Shift cam A in the direction B by the difference in the copy image.
ment. For one scale (one groove), shift by 0.5mm.
• Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self After shifting, tighten the fixing screw (M3 x 12) of cam A and
print, no need to adjust.) make a copy again, and check the copy again to insure that there
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust- is no distortion.
ment. After adjustment, tighten the fixing screw (M3 x 12) and the scan-
• OC scan off-center ner fixing screw (M4 x 8).
• OC scan lead edge adjustment ∗ If the above adjustment does not fix the problem, perform the
1) Make a test chart as shown below. (Make a self-print pattern MB rail adjustment.
71.) ∗ After the OC distortion adjustment, perform SIM53-8 SPF scan-
ning position automatic adjustment.
<2> SPF height adjustment
ment.
• Nothing special
2) Make a copy from the table glass, and check it. ment.
At that time, set the test chart correctly. If it is set in a distorted • Nothing special
position, the adjustment cannot be made correctly. 1) Close the (D)SPF.
3) If the output value is not in the specified range, perform the fol- 2) Check to confirm that the dove and the reference plate in the
lowing adjustment. figure below are in contact with the table glass (point a) and
4) Adjust the distortion. the side guide (point b). (Place copy paper under the dove and
Use a level gauge to check that the scanner is installed hori- pull it out.) If they are not in contact, adjust with the set screw.
zontally.
Make a copy and check it. If there is any distortion as shown in
Fig. 1 or Fig. 2, loosen the scanner fixing screw (M4 x 8) and
the cam A fixing screw (M3 x 12) and adjust.

4) Execute SIM51-2 to check the SPF set value.
a a Change the set value of the SPF resist amount to the following
value.
7 SPF (HIGH) 60
8 SPF (LOW) 75
SIMULATION 51-2
RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START.
2.TRAY1 60 3.TRAY2 50 4.DESK 50
b 5.BPT 55 6.ADU 50
7.SPF(HIGH) 60 8.SPF(LOW) 75
1
5) Though the SPF resist amount is the above value, if there is
any distortion in SPF scan, adjust the SPF installing position in
the following procedures.
6) Loosen the nut which is fixing the adjustment set screw of the
hinge R, and adjust the adjustment set screw.
7) Make a copy again, and check again that the value is in the
specified range.
b 8) Tighten the nut to fix the adjustment screw.
a
a b
a
a b
b
b
<Specification>
Adjustment a
Specification
position
Distance between 3-point contact Hinge <Specification>
dove (Reference (Left front/Left rear/Right adjustment set
plate) and table front when viewed from screw Specification Adjustment position
glass the front) Skew feed Within ±3mm Hinge R adjustment screw
∗ After the SPF distortion adjustment, perform SIM53-8 SPF
<3> SPF scan distortion adjustment
scanning position automatic adjustment.
ment. <4> OC scan magnification ratio adjustment
• Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
print, no need to adjust.) ment.
• OC scan distortion adjustment • Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self
• SPF height adjustment print, no need to adjust.)
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust- • OC scan distortion adjustment
ment. Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
• SPF off-center ment.
• SPF lead edge adjustment • OC scan lead edge adjustment
• Front/rear and left/right void amount setting • Original off-center adjustment
1) Make a test chart as shown below. (Print a self-print pattern 1) Place a print of self-print pattern (A3 or WLT) 70 or a scale on
71.) the table glass.
2) Make a copy with DSPF. 2) Close the original cover, and make a copy.
3) Check that it is in the specified range. 3) Check that the value is within the specification.
4) If the value is not within the specified range, execute SIM48-1
(item 3, 4).
5) Make a copy again and check again that the value is within the
specification.

SIMULATION 48-1 SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START. MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START.
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.COPY START 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.COPY START
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
3.CCD(MAIN) 50 4.CCD(SUB) 50
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
2
5.SPF(MAIN) 50 6.SPF(SUB) 50 7.CIS(MAIN) 50 2 5.SPF(MAIN) 50 6.SPF(SUB) 50 7.CIS(MAIN) 50
Select other than 0 - 2,

<Specification> and press [START] key.
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Adjustment Adjustment
Specification SIMULATION 48-1
position value
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
Main scan direction ±0.5% SIM48-1 Set value 1: START.
magnification ratio (3, 4) 0.1% change 4.CCD(SUB) 50
CCD (MAIN)
Sub scan direction Press [START] key.
Select 1, and Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
magnification ratio press [START] key. or terminate copying.
CCD (SUB)
<5> SPF scan magnification ratio SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
ment.
Press [START] key, or
• Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self Select 0, and press [START] key.
press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
print, no need to adjust.)
• OC scan distortion adjustment SIMULATION 48-1
• SPF scan distortion adjustment MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
• OC scan magnification ratio
1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4
• SPF height adjustment 5.BPT 6.LCC 1
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust- (ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE)
ment.
Select 2, and Press [START] key, or
• SPF scan lead edge adjustment
press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
• Original off-center adjustment
1) Set a chart of print pattern 70 on SPF/DSPF. SIMULATION 48-1
2) Make a copy. (In the case of DSPF back copy, make a single MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT.
copy in the duplex mode.) (MAGNIFICATION)
3) Check that the output paper satisfies the specifications. INPUT 25-400(%) 100
4) If the value is not within the specified range, execute SIM48-1
<Specifications>
(item 5, 6).
5) Make a copy again, and check that the output paper satisfies Adjustment Adjustment
Specifications
the specifications. position value
SPF sub scan direction ±0.5% SIM 48-1 Set value 1:
magnification ratio (5, 6) 0.1% change
SPF (SUB)
DSPF main scan
(back) direction
magnification ratio
CIS (MAIN)
∗ The SPF main scan direction magnification ratio is common with
OC.

<6> OC scan lead edge adjustment
Items which must have been completed before this adjust- <Document> Output result
Rear edge void Lead edge void
ment. Document set reference
• Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self

Adjust
print, no need to adjust.) with
Adjust
RRCA.
• OC scan distortion adjustment with
RRCB.
• SPF scan distortion adjustment Image loss
FR void
(SIDE)
• OC scan magnification ratio adjustment
ment.
• SPF scan lead edge adjustment
• Original off-center adjustment Paper transport direction Image loss
(LEAD)
1) Set an original on the original table. *: For output, select the right side tray.
2) Enter SIM 50-1.
3) Make a copy.
<7> SPF scan lead edge adjustment
4) Select the number to be set on the right of the LCD, and per-
ment.
form the adjustment of each item.
• Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self
5) Select "4: RRC-B" so that the distance between the paper lead
print, no need to adjust.)
edge and the copy image lead edge is within 4.0mm. Change
the value with 10-key and perform the copy adjustment. • SPF scan distortion adjustment
6) Select "5: DEN-B" so that the white spot in the latter half of • SPF scan lead edge adjustment
copy (rear edge void) is within 4.0mm. Change the value with • SPF magnification ratio adjustment
10-key and perform the copy adjustment. Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
(The rear void adjustment is changed by the step of 0.1mm.) ment.
• When the rear edge void is too small, increase the value. • SPF/DSPF off-center adjustment
• When the rear edge void is too great, decrease the value. 1) Make a copy of a chart which indicates the image loss amount
7) Select "3: RRC-A," change the value with 10-key, and adjust of each side with SPF/DSPF.
the document scan start position. 2) Execute SIM50-6 and change the values.
8) Press [CA] key to cancel the simulation.
SIMULATION 50-6
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS
SIMULATION 50-1
START.
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.COPY START 2
2.MAGNIFICATION 100 2 2.MAGNIFICATION 100
(ADJUSTMENT DATA) 3.RRCA 50 4.RRCB 50 10.SIDE2 ADJ. 50 (ADJUSTMENT DATA)3.SIDE1 50 4.SIDE2 50
(IMAGE LOSS SETTING) 5.LEAD 15 6.SIDE 20 (IMAGE LOSS SETTING)
(VOID SETTING) 7.LEAD_EDGE(DENA) 35 SIDE1: 5.LEAD_EDGE 15 6.FRONT/REAR 20 7.TRAIL_EDGE 0
8.TRAIL_EDGE(DENB)35 9.FRONT/REAR 32 SIDE2: 8.LEAD_EDGE 15 9.FRONT/REAR 20 10.TRAIL_EDGE 0
<Specification> <Set values 1>

Set Set
Item Content Specification Default Item Default
range range
(Lead edge adjustment value) 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-6 –
3 RRCA Document scan 4.0mm or 0 - 99 50 Set value selection
start position less 1: 0.1mm 1 COPY START Copy START (Default) – –
4 RRCB Resist roller 4.0mm or shift 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification ratio 25 - –
clutch ON timing less 200%
adjustment value (Lead edge adjustment value)
10 SIDE2 ADJ. Correction value 1 - 99 50 3 SIDE1 Front surface document 0 - 99 50
for RRCB when
scan start position
refereeing from
adjustment value
ADU
(Image loss set value)
4 SIDE2 Back surface document
5 LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 15 Set value
scan start position
loss set value 1: 0.1mm adjustment value
6 SIDE Side image loss 20 shift (Image loss set value: SIDE 1)
set value 5 LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 15
(Void set value) image loss set value
7 LEAD_EDGE Lead edge void Total 8mm 0 - 99 35 Set value 6 FRONT_REAR Front surface side edge 20
(DENA) set value or less 1: 0.1mm image loss set value
8 TRAIL_EDGE Rear edge void Total 8mm shift 7 TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 20 0
(DENB) adjustment value or less image loss set value
9 FRONT/ Front/Rear void Total 8mm 32 (Image loss set value: SIDE 2)
REAR adjustment value or less 8 LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 15
image loss set value
9 FRONT/REAR Back surface side edge 20
10 TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 20 0

<Display values 1> • For the duplex mode (Single → Duplex), add 10 to the above set
value.
Normal display NOW COPYING
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. • When the print line is shifted toward a from the paper center,
decrease the value.
Jam JAM
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY. • When the print line is shifted toward b from the paper center,
increase the value.
<Set values 2>
<Specifications>
1 TRAY1
Machine (OC mode) Single ±1.5mm
2 TRAY2
Duplex ±1.7mm
3 TRAY3
Overall (DSPF) Single S - S ±2.8mm
4 TRAY4
Single D - S ±3.5mm
5 Manual feed
Duplex S - D ±3.0mm
∗ With the above + 10, the SPF enters the duplex mode (DD), Duplex D - D ±3.5mm
making duplex copy.
<Set values 3> 3. Scanner section
Set range 25 - 200%
A. OC scan distortion adjustment
<8> Original off-center adjustment (MB-B rail height adjustment)
Items which must have been completed before this adjust- • This adjustment requires a high-level preciseness.
ment. It is easier to perform the scanner unit distortion adjustment pre-
• Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self viously described.
print, no need to adjust.) Before performing this adjustment, the following adjustment must
• OC scan distortion adjustment have been completed.
• SPF scan distortion adjustment • LSU right angle adjustment
• OC scan magnification ratio 1) Make a test chart as shown below. (Print a self-print pattern
• SPF scan lead edge adjustment 71.)
ment.
• Nothing special
1) Set an original on the original table.
3) Select the paper feed tray and the magnification ratio.
4) After entering the adjustment value, pres START key, and 2) Make a copy from the table glass, and check it.
printing is started. At that time, set the test chart correctly. If it is set in a distorted
5) Check the off-center (distance from the paper lead edge) of position, the adjustment cannot be made correctly.
the printed copy. Repeat procedure 2 until the printed copy 3) If the output value is not in the specified range, perform the fol-
satisfies the specifications. lowing adjustment.
4) Remove the front cabinet in front of the scanner, and check
a that installing position of the MB rail.
5) Loosen the screw at the right of the MB rail to adjust.
Print lead edge
b
Specification ± 1.5mm
SIMULATION 50-12
ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS
START.
0.TRAY SELECT 1
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
1.COPY START 2
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)
3.PLATEN 50 4.SPF SIDE1 50 5.SPF SIDE2 50
Measurem Set value <Specifications>

Adjustment position ent Specification Measurement
Default Range
reference Specification Set value
point
Original PLATEN OC mode Copy As shone in 50 0 – 99 Set value
off-center SPF SPF front output the table 1: 0.1mm OC scan Angle θ in the θ = 90°±0.13° 1 scale = about
SIM50-12 SIDE1 surface center line below. shift distortion above figure 0.25°shift in θ
adjustment adjustment
SPF SPF back
SIDE2 surface
adjustment

B. Vertical image distortion balance adjustment D. Vertical (sub scanning direction) distortion
(Copy lamp unit installing position adjustment [Winding pulley position
adjustment) adjustment]
1) Insert the front/rear mirror base drive wire into the frame This adjustment is executed in the following cases:
groove and press and fix it with the wire holder. At that time, do • When the mirror base drive wire is replaced.
not tighten the wire fixing screw. Change the direction of the
• When the lamp unit, or No. 2/3 mirror holder is replaced.
lamp positioning plate. (F and R)
• When a copy shown below is made.
2) Push the copy lamp unit onto the positioning plate, and tighten
the wire fixing screw.
La Lb
Paper
exit
direction
Original Copy
1) Set A3 white paper on the original table as shown below.
A3
white paper
<Note for assembling the copy lamp unit>

After fixing, manually shift the copy lamp unit a few times to check
that it moves smoothly.
C. Vertical image distortion balance adjustment

Glass holding plate Fit the paper edge and
(No. 2/3 mirror base unit installing and the glass holding plate edge
position adjustment)
This adjustment is to adjust the parallelism of the mirror base to 2) With the original cover open, make a normal (X 1.0) copy.
the OPC drum surface and the original surface. 3) Measure the black distance at the lead edge and the rear edge
1) Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley to bring mirror base of the copy paper.
B into contact with mirror base positioning plate.
If, at that time, the front frame side and the frame side of mirror
base B are brought into contact with the mirror base position-
ing plate simultaneously, the parallelism is correct and there is
no need for adjustment.
Paper exit direction

La : Lead edge black background section
Lb : Rear edge black background section
If La = Lb, the procedures 4) through 7) are not required.

4) Loosen the fixing screw of the front or the rear frame mirror 5) After completion of adjustment, press the original detection
base drive pulley. light emitting unit fully downward with your finger and release
it. Check that the original detection light-emitting unit moves
•If La < Lb, turn the rear frame mirror base drive pulley in
up smoothly.
direction B.
(Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.) <Specification>
•If La > Lb, turn the rear frame mirror base drive pulley in Specification Adjustment position
direction A. Original size 32±0.5mm Height adjustment SIM 41-3
(Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.) detection position screw
Rear side F. Original size detection photo sensor check

A 1) Execute SIM 41-1.
2) Put A3 (or WLT) paper on the table glass, and check that all
the sensor displays (except for OCSW) on the LCD are high-
B lighted.
3) Gradually move the unit to the left, and check that the high-
lighted sensor displays turn off one by one sequentially.
SIMULATION 41-1
Adjust screw
PD SENSOR CHECK..
Front side
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
G. Original size detection photo sensor

5) Tighten the fixing screw of the mirror base drive pulley.
adjustment
6) Perform procedures 1) through 3). 1) Execute SIM 41-2.
∗ At that time, check that the scanner mirror base is at the
7) If La is not equal to Lb, perform procedures 4) and 5).
If La = Lb, the adjustment is completed. home position.
Repeat procedures 1) through 6) until La = Lb. 2) Open the document cover. Select 1 without placing paper on
the table glass, and press START.
E. Height adjustment of original detection light 3) When COMPLETE is displayed on the LCD, press SYSTEM
emitting unit SETTINGS to return to the initial screen.
1) Execute SIM 41-3. 4) Place A3 (or WLT) paper on the table glass, select 2 and press
2) Open the original cover. Press the original detection light-emit- START.
ting unit gradually with your finger to check the height at which When COMPLETE is displayed, the adjustment is normally
OCSW display on the LCD is highlighted. completed.
∗ If ERROR is displayed, the error PD sensor is displayed.
SIMULATION 41-2
PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS START.
(PLEASE OPEN THE ORIGINAL COVER.)
1. NO ORIGINAL
2. A3 ORIGINAL
1
Select 1 and
32±0.5mm press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 41-2
PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT.
NO ORIGINAL ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR at PD1 PD2...")
A3 ORIGINAL ··· INCOMPLETE
Select 2 and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]

3) Open the original detection light-emitting unit gradually to (Error) key.
check the height at which OCSW display turns to the normal
state.
SIMULATION 41-2
4) If the heights are out of the specified range in procedures 2) PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT.
and 3), adjust the height of the original detection light emitting NO ORIGINAL ··· COMPLETE
unit by shifting the adjustment screw. A3 ORIGINAL ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR at PD1 PD2...")
SIMULATION 41-3
<Specification>
PD SENSOR DATA DISPLAY.
OCSW Specification Adjustment
PD1[128]: 200 PD2[128]: 200
PD3[128]: 50 PD4[128]: 52 Document size detection photo COMPLETE SIM 41-2
PD5[128]: 51 PD6[128]: 50 sensor adjustment
PD7[128]: 52

H. Image density adjustment (1) Copy mode
The image density adjustment is required for the following copy a. Test chart setting
quality mode by using the simulation. 1) Place a test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the original table as
There are two methods; the collective adjustment and the individ- shown below.
ual adjustment of the copy quality mode. 2) Place several sheets of A3 (11 x 17) white paper
• Copy mode (Sharp’s specified paper) on the test chart at the rear refer-
Individual ence.
Copy quality mode Collective Adjustment
adjustment
Binary Auto mode SIM46-2
value Character mode SIM46-9
mode Character/Photo mode SIM46-10
Photo mode SIM46-11
• FAX mode
Individual
Adjustment
adjustment
Normal Binary value AUTO SIM46-12 SIM46-13
mode mode EXP1.0
EXP2.0
EXP3.0 UKOG-0162FCZZ
EXP4.0
EXP5.0
Small text Binary value AUTO SIM46-14
mode mode EXP1.0
EXP2.0
EXP3.0
EXP4.0
EXP5.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Half tone AUTO
mode EXP1.0
EXP2.0
EXP3.0 Test chart comparison
EXP4.0
UKOG- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
EXP5.0
0162FCZZ
Fine mode Binary value AUTO SIM46-15
DENSITY No.
mode EXP1.0
UKOG- 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0
EXP2.0
0089CSZZ
EXP3.0
DENSITY No.
EXP4.0
KODAK GRAY 1 2 3 4 19 A
EXP5.0
SCALE
Half tone AUTO
mode EXP1.0 SHARP
EXP2.0 CORPORATION
EXP3.0 MADE IN JAPAN
EXP4.0 b. Density adjustment procedure
EXP5.0 <1> Collective adjustment of two or more copy quality modes
Super fine Binary value AUTO SIM46-16
Normally this adjustment is performed with SIM 46-2. In this
mode mode EXP1.0
method, two or more copy density adjustments in different modes
EXP2.0
can be adjusted collectively.
EXP3.0
EXP4.0 1) Execute SIM 46-2.
EXP5.0 (Binary value mode)
Half tone AUTO
Quality mode Linked simulation data
mode EXP1.0
AE3.0 (AE)
EXP2.0
EXP3.0 CH3.0 (Character) SIM46-9
EXP4.0 MIX3.0 (Character/Photo) SIM46-10
EXP5.0 PH3.0 (Photo) SIM46-11
600dpi Binary value AUTO SIM46-45
mode mode EXP1.0
EXP2.0
EXP3.0
EXP4.0
EXP5.0
Half tone AUTO
mode EXP1.0
EXP2.0
EXP3.0
EXP4.0
EXP5.0

<2> Individual adjustment of each copy quality mode
SIMULATION 46-2 This adjustment is used when a different density level for different
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START. copy quality mode is required. SIM 46-5 to -7 and SIM 46-9 to -11
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
are used.
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. AE 3.0 50 4. CH 3.0 50
1 1) Execute the simulation corresponding to the copy quality
5. MIX 3.0 50 6. PHOTO 3.0 50
mode to be adjusted.
Select other then 0 - 2, and
press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 46-9
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START.
SIMULATION 46-2 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START.
3. AE 3.0
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. 1.0 50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
1
50 6. 2.5 50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50
Select 1,
and press Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, Select other than 0 - 2, and
[START] key. or terminate copying. press [START] key. Press
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 46-2
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). NOW COPYING. SIMULATION 46-9
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
START.
3. 1.0 50
Select 1,
and press Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
SIMULATION 46-2 [START] key. or terminate copying.
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY) SIMULATION 46-9
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). NOW COPYING.
5. BPT 1
Select 2, and press [START] key. Press [START] key,
or press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 46-2
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 3-6, AND PRESS START. SIMULATION 46-9
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
3. AE 3.0
5. MIX 3.0
4. CH 3.0
6. PHOTO 3.0
1 (FEED TRAY)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4
2) Press the COPY button to make a copy.

5. BPT 1
Check that the copy density is as shown in the table below. Select 2, and press [START] key. Press [START] key, or
If not, change the adjustment value. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
• Adjustment spec
SIMULATION 46-9
Chart Adjustment Chart Adjustment EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 3-11, AND PRESS START.
Mode EXP. (EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
No. level No. level
3. 1.0 4. 1.5 5. 2.0
Character 3 3 Copied 2 Not copied 6. 2.5 7. 3.0 8. 3.5
Character/ 3 3 Copied 2 Not copied 9. 4.0 10. 4.5 11. 5.0 1
Photo
Photo 3 3 Copied 2 Not copied 2) Press the COPY button to make a copy
Auto 3 Copied 2 Not copied Check that the copy density is as shown in the table below. If not,
If the copy density is too light, increase the adjustment value. change the adjustment value.
If the copy density is too dark, decrease the adjustment value. For the auto mode, there is only one adjustment value. For the
Adjustment range: 30 - 170 other modes, the adjustment value for each density level must be
adjusted.
(2) Adjusting the print quality in fax mode
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
• The CCD unit has been replaced.
• U2 trouble has occurred.
• The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
• The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
• The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
• The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
• One or more parts of the scanner (reading) section have been
replaced.

(Fax mode image density adjustment items) 2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 46-12.
Simulation for
adjustment SIMULATION 46-12
Image mode Individual- EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET). SELECT 0-2, AND PRESS
All-mode START.
mode
adjustment
adjustment
2.FAX EXP.LEVEL 50
1
Fax mode Auto Binary mode 46-12 46-13
print density mode Select other than 0 - 1, and
press [START] key.
adjustment Manual Binary mode Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
(standard
mode) SIMULATION 46-12
Fax mode Auto Binary mode 46-14 EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET), INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
PRESS START.
print density mode
adjustment
Half tone
mode
2.FAX EXP.LEVEL 50
(small- Manual Binary mode
character Select 1, and Press [START] key.
Half tone press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
mode) mode or terminate copying.
Fax mode Auto Binary mode 46-15 SIMULATION 46-12

print density mode Half tone EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET). NOW PRINTING.
adjustment mode
(fine mode) Manual Binary mode
Half tone Select 0, and Press [START] key, or
mode press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Fax mode Auto Binary mode 46-16
SIMULATION 46-12
print density mode Half tone
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET).SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS
adjustment mode START.
(super fine Manual Binary mode (FEED TRAY)
mode) Half tone 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4
mode 5.BPT
Fax mode Auto Binary mode 46-45
print density mode Half tone
adjustment mode Set
Item Default
(600dpi Manual Binary mode range
mode) Half tone 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection – –
mode 1 COPY START Copy START (Default)
(Fax mode density) 2 FAX EXP. LEVEL FAX mode print density 0 - 99 50
The print density settings should be normally left at defaults but 3) Select the adjustment item (FAX EXP. LEVEL) using the
should be adjusted according to user requests, if any. numeric keypad.
4) Press the Start key.
a. Adjust the fax mode print density for all modes at once
5) Press the Start key (A copy is created.)
1) Set the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the original table so
that it aligns with the front frame. Then put four or five pieces Check the print density.
of A3 (11" x 17") paper . If the print density is not at an acceptable level, do the follow-
ing steps.
6) Enter the print adjustment value using the numeric keypad.
7) Press the P or Start key
This applies the adjustment value.
Pressing the Start key starts print operation as well as apply-
ing the adjustment value.
8) Check the print density.
Repeat steps 6 to 8 until an acceptable print density is obtained.
00
Note: Adjusting the Fax print density through this simulation
changes the print density settings for all Fax modes to the
density level applied by carrying out this simulation.
The Fax mode print density settings for individual Fax
modes adjusted through Simulations 46-13, -14, -15, -16
and -45 are changed to the print density level applied by
this simulation.

b. Adjust the fax mode print density (standard mode/
Set
small-character mode/super fine mode/600dpi mode) Item Default
range
This adjustment is intended to the print mode for each Fax mode
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection – –
individually. In manual mode, the print density setting for each print
1 PRINT START Print start (Default)
density adjustment level (1 to 5) can be adjusted to a custom den-
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection
sity level.
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
1) Set the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the original table so
4 1.0 Exposure level 1
that it aligns with the front frame. Then put four or five pieces
of A3 (11" x 17") paper . 5 2.0 Exposure level 2
SIMULATION 46-14
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE).SELECT 0-14,AND PRESS START.
2.EXP LEVEL 1
3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
1
6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50
00
9.AUTO(H) 50 10.1.0(H) 50 11.2.0(H) 50
12.3.0(H) 50 13.4.0(H) 50 14.5.0(H) 50

and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
2) Go through the simulation modes that correspond to the Fax

modes for which to adjust the print density (i.e., the modes SIMULATION 46-14
specified in Simulations 46-13, -14, -15, -16, or -45). EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
START.
4.1.0 50
SIMULATION 46-13
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS Select 1, Press [START] key.
START. and press Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
[START] key. or terminate copying.
2.EXP LEVEL 1
1
SIMULATION 46-14
3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50 EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). NOW PRINTING.
6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50
Press [START] key,

Select 0, and press [START] key. or press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 46-14
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
SIMULATION 46-13 (FEED TRAY)
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4
PRESS START. 5.BPT 1
4.1.0 50
Select 2, and Press [START] key or
Select 1, Press [START] key. press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
and press Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
SIMULATION 46-14
SIMULATION 46-13 EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). SELECT 3-14, AND PRESS START.
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). NOW PRINTING. (EXP.LEVEL SELECT)
3.AUTO 4.1.0 5.2.0
6.3.0 7.4.0 8.5.0 1
9.AUTO(H) 10.1.0(H) 11.2.0(H)
Press [START] key, or 12.3.0(H) 13.4.0(H) 14.5.0(H)
Select 0, and press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 46-13
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS
START.
(FEED TRAY)
5.BPT
1
(ABOVE +20:DSPF MODE)

SIMULATION 46-13
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 3-8, AND PRESS START.
(EXP.LEVEL SELECT)
3.AUTO 4.1.0 5.2.0
6.3.0 7.4.0 8.5.0 1

Set (2) When replacing the original width detection
Item Default volume.
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection – – Execute SIM53-6 to perform the machine DSPF original tray size
1 PRINT START Print start (Default) adjustment.
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection 1) Extend the guide to MAX. position, select 1, and press START.
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50 When COMPLETE is displayed, press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
4 1.0 Exposure level 1 key to return to the initial screen.
5 2.0 Exposure level 2 2) Move the guide to A4R position, select 2, and press START.
6 3.0 Exposure level 3 When COMPLETE is displayed, press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
7 4.0 Exposure level 4 key to return to the initial screen.
8 5.0 Exposure level 5 3) Move the guide to A5R position, select 3, and press START.
9 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone) When COMPLETE is displayed, press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
10 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1 key to return to the initial screen.
(Half-tone) 4) Move the guide to MIN. position, select 4, and press START.
11 2.0 (H) Exposure level 2 When COMPLETE is displayed, the adjustment is completed.
(Half-tone) If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) - 4), repeat the adjustment
12 3.0 (H) Exposure level 3 again.
(Half-tone)
13 4.0 (H) Exposure level 4 SIMULATION 53-6
(Half-tone) SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
14 5.0 (H) Exposure level 5 1.MAX.POSITION
(Half-tone) 2.POSITION 1
3) Using the numeric keypad, select the number that corre-

3.POSITION 2 1
4.MIN.POSITION
sponds to the adjustment item. Choose from numbers 3 to 8
(14). Select 1, and
• Auto mode
• Manual mode (print density adjustment level)
SIMULATION 53-6
For manual mode, select the number that corresponds to the
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
print density level (1 to 5). (Choose from numbers (4 to 8) (10- MAX.POSITION ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
14)).
4) Press the Start key
Select 2, and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
5) Press the Start key. (A copy is created.)
I. DSPF width detection adjustment

SIMULATION 53-6
(1) When replacing DSPF unit SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
POSITION 1 ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
1) Use SIM53-7 to enter the value indicated on the side of the
right hinge of the DSPF unit.
SIMULATION 53-7
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT(MANUAL). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS SIMULATION 53-6
START. SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
1.MAX.POSITION: 66 POSITION 2 ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
2.POSITION 1 : 456
3.POSITION 2 : 713 1 Select 4, and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
4.MIN.POSITION: 791
SIMULATION 53-6
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
MIN.POSITION ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
SIMULATION 53-7
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT(MANUAL). INPUT VALUE 0-1023, AND
PRESS START.
1.MAX.POSITION 66

[9] SIMULATION
1. Outline and purpose
The simulation has the following functions to grasp the machine
operating status, identify the trouble position and causes in an ear-
lier stage, and make various setups and adjustments speedily for
improving the serviceability of the machine.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setup of specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Various counters check, setup, and clear
6) Machine operating status (operation history) data check, clear
7) Transfer of various data (adjustments, setup, operations,
counters)
The operating procedures and the displays differ depending on the
form of the operation panel of the machine.
2. Code-type simulation
A. Operating procedures and operations
∗ Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON → Program key ON → Asterisk (*) key ON
→ CLEAR key ON → Asterisk (*) key ON → Ready for input of
a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key → START key ON
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key → START key ON
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item.
Press START key or EXECUTE key to start the simulation
operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main
code and the sub code, press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key.
∗ Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
1) Press CA key.
MX-M350/M450 N/U SIMULATION 9 - 1

START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES Is it the same
simulation ?
Standby for entry of SIM YES

Is there a sub code ?
sub code
Press the SYSTEM
NO SETTINGS key
Enter SIM sub code with
the 10-key. YES
he
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START button. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
YES Press the EXECUTE button
Operation check ?
and OK button.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?

Operating conditions
check ? and OK button.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.

Data clear ?
and OK button.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE button

adjustment values. and OK button.

B. Simulation list Code
Function (Purpose)
(1) Main/ Sub Main Sub
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner motor
Code and the related circuit.
Function (Purpose)
Main Sub 13 0 Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. (Only
1 1 Used to check the operations of the scanner (read) when FAX is installed.)
unit and its control circuit. 14 0 Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/LCC/U2/
2 Used to check the operation of sensor and PF troubles.
detector in the scanning (read) section and the 15 0 Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-01, 02, 03, F3-12,
related circuit. 22" (large capacity paper feed tray, paper feed
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic trays 1, 2) troubles.
document feeder unit and the control circuit. 16 0 Used to cancel the self-diag U2 troubles.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and 17 0 Used to cancel the PF troubles (when the copy
detectors in the automatic document feeder unit inhibit command from the host computer is
and the related circuits. received).
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the 21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
automatic document feeder unit and the control
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section
circuits. and each operation mode. (Used to check the
3 2 Used to check the operation of sensor and maintenance timing.)
detector in the finisher and the related circuit. 2 Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the troubles. (When the number of misfeed is
finisher and the control circuit. considerably great, it is judged as necessary for
6 Used to adjust the stacking capacity of the finisher. repair. The misfeed rate is obtained by dividing this
(Used to adjust the alignment plate (jogger) stop count value with the total counter value.)
position in the finisher paper width direction. The 3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed
adjustment is made by changing the alignment count of each position. (If the misfeed count is
plate home position in the paper width direction by considerably great, it may be judged as necessary
software.) to repair.)
10 Console finisher adjustment 4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
20 Used to check the mail bin stacker sensor. 5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit
21 Used to check the operations of the mail bin (section).
stacker loads. 6 Used to output the list of the setting and
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft switch,
detectors in the paper feed section (desk paper counters).
feed/large capacity tray) and the related circuit. 7 Used to display the key operator code. (This
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the simulation is used when the customer forgets the
paper feed section (desk paper feed/large capacity key operator code.)
tray) and the related circuit. 8 Used to check the number of use of the finisher,
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the SPF, and the scan (reading) unit.
the operation panel, and control circuit. 9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp each paper feed section.
and the control circuit. 10 Used to check the system configuration (option,
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp internal hardware).
and the control circuit. 11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of
6 1 Used to check the operation of the paper transport FAX. (Only when FAX is installed)
system loads and the control circuit. 12 Used to check the SPF misfeed positions and the
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor number of misfeed at each position. (When the
and its control circuit. number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. judged as necessary for repair.)
6 Used to set the intermittent aging cycle. 13 Used to check the operating time of the process
8 Used to set the warm-up time display YES/NO. section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner bottle).
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the 19 Used to check the values of the counters related to
developing voltage of each color and the control the scan mode and the Internet FAX mode.
circuit. 30 OSA vendor ID display (Application
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main Communication Module)
charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the 31 OSA vendor ID display (External account module)
control circuit. 23 2 Used to check the trouble history of paper jam and
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the misfeed. (If the number of misfeed and troubles is
transfer voltage and the control circuit. considerably great, it may be judged as necessary
17 Used to check and adjust the operation of the to repair.)
transfer voltage and the related circuit. (Transfer 80 Used to check the operations of the sensors and
belt cleaning mode) detectors in the paper feed and transport section.
9 1 Used to check and adjust the operation of the load 24 1 Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed
(clutch/solenoid) in the duplex section and the history, the trouble counter, and the trouble history.
control circuit. (The counters are cleared after completion of
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and maintenance.)
detectors in the duplex section and its control 2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of
circuit. prints) of each paper feed section.

Code Code
Function (Purpose) Function (Purpose)
Main Sub Main Sub
24 3 Used to clear the number of use of the finisher, 30 1 Used to check the operation of sensors and
SPF, and the scan (reading) unit. detectors in other than the paper feed section and
4 Used to reset the maintenance counter. the operations of the related circuits.
5 Used to reset the developer counter. (The 2 Used to check the operation of sensors and
developer counter of the DV unit which is installed detectors in the paper feed section and the related
is reset.) circuits.
6 Used to reset the copy counter. 40 1 Used to check the operation of the manual feed
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (Perform this tray paper size detector and the related circuit.
simulation when the OPC drum is replaced.) (The operation of the manual feed tray paper size
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the detector can be monitored with the LCD display.)
self print mode print counter. 2 Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is width detector detection level.
installed) 7 Used to enter the manual paper feed tray paper
11 Used to reset the OPC drum rotation time, and the width adjustment value.
DV unit rotation time counter. The developer 11 Used to check the multi-purpose tray width
counter in the DV unit installed is reset. detection level.
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan 12 Used to adjust the multi-purpose tray width
mode and the Internet FAX mode. detection level.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing 41 1 Used to check the operation of the document size
section (toner concentration, humidity and toner sensor and the related circuit. (The operation of
concentration sensor, humidity sensor, the document size sensor can be monitored with
temperature sensor output can be monitored.) the LCD display.)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner 2 Used to adjust the document size sensor sensing
concentration when replacing developer. level.
26 3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. 3 Used to check the operation of the document size
Setting must be made according to the auditor use sensor and the related circuit. (The document size
conditions. sensor output level can be monitored with the LCD
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter display.)
and the maintenance counter. 43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, document operation mode.
detection, etc.) of the destination. 44 1 Used to set enable/disable of correction operations
10 Used to set the network scanner trial mode. in the image forming (process) section.
18 Used to set YES/NO of toner save operation. (This 4 Used to set the target image (reference) density
function is valid only in Japan and UK versions. level in the developing bias voltage correction.
(Depends on the destination setting of SIM26-6.) 9 Used to check the data related to the image
For the other destinations, the same setting can be forming section correction (process correction)
made by the user program P22.) result (corrected main charger grid voltage, the
30 Used to set the operation mode conforming to the developing bias voltage, and the laser power
CE mark (Europe safety standards). (Conforming voltage in each print mode). (This simulation
to soft start when driving the fusing heater lamp.) allows to check that correction is performed
normally or not.)
35 Used to set whether the same continuous troubles
are displayed as one trouble or the series of 14 Used to check the output level of the temperature
troubles with SIM 22-4 when the same troubles sensor and the humidity sensor.
occur continuously. 16 Used to check the toner concentration control
38 Used to set CONTINUE/STOP of printing when data.
maintenance timing is over and the count value 46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in all the copy
reaches 110% of replacement timing (life). modes (Auto, Text, Text/Photo, and Photo mode).
41 Used to set the automatic magnification ratio 9 Used to adjust the print density for each density
selection (AMS) in the pamphlet mode. level (display value) in the copy mode (binary - Text
50 Black-White reverse YES/NO setting (Except for mode). An optional print density can be set for
UK) each density level (display value).
52 Used to set whether non-print paper (insertion 10 Used to adjust the print density for each density
paper, cover paper) (blank image print paper) is level (display value) in the copy mode (binary -
counted up or not. Text/Photo mode). An optional print density can be
68 Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the CA key set for each density level (display value).
cancel function of print stop. 11 Used to adjust the print density for each density
27 1 Used to set the specifications for operations in level (display value) in the copy mode (binary -
case of communication trouble between the host Photo mode). An optional print density can be set
for each density level (display value).
computer and MODEM (machine side). (When
communication trouble occurs between the host 12 Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode
computer MODEM and the machine, the self diag (all modes).
display (U7-00) is printed and setting for inhibition 13 Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode
of print or not is made.) (each normal mode). (Only when FAX is installed.)
5 Used to enter the machine tag No. (This function 14 Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode
allows to check the tag No. of the machine with the (each fine mode). (Only when FAX is installed.)
host computer.)

Code Code
Main Sub Main Sub
46 15 Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode 51 2 Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper on
(each super fine mode). (Only when FAX is the resist roller of each section (each paper feed,
installed.) duplex feed and SPF paper feed of the copier).
16 Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode (This adjustment is required when the print image
(each ultra fine mode). (Only when FAX is position variations are considerably great or when
installed.) paper jams occur frequently.)
17 Used to set the gain in shading correction. 53 6 Used to adjust the DSPF width detection level.
18 Used to adjust the gamma (density gradient) in the 7 Used to enter the SPF width detection adjustment
copy mode. value.
19 Used to set the auto mode operation specifications 8 Used to adjust the document scan start position.
in each mode (copy, scan, FAX). (Used to adjust the scanner scan position in the
20 Used to adjust the copy density correction in the SPF mode front scan.)
SPF copy mode for the document table copy 55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control
mode. The adjustment is made so that the copy operations. (PCU PWB)
density becomes the same as that of the 2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner
document table copy mode. control operations. (Scanner control PWB)
21 Used to adjust the scanner exposure level in all the 3 Used to set the specifications of the controller
scanner modes. operations. (MFP control PWB)
22 Used to adjust the scanner exposure level in the 56 1 Used to transfer the MFP controller data. (Used to
normal text mode. repair the PWB.)
23 Used to adjust the scanner exposure level in the 60 1 Used to check the MFP control (DRAM) operations
fine text mode. (read/write).
24 Used to adjust the scanner exposure level in the 61 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (write)
super fine text mode. unit (LSU).
25 Used to adjust the scanner exposure level in the 2 Used to adjust the laser power (absolute value) in
ultra fine text mode. the copy mode.
27 Used to adjust the gamma (density gradient) of the 3 Used to adjust the laser power (absolute value) in
network scanner mode. the FAX mode.
31 Used to adjust sharpness of the copy mode. 4 Used to adjust the laser power (absolute value) in
39 Used to adjust sharpness of the FAX mode. the printer mode.
45 Used to adjust the image density in the FAX mode 62 1 Used to format the hard disk. (Only in the model
(600dpi). with a disk installed)
46 Used to adjust sharpness of the scanner mode. 2 Used to check the operation of the hard disk (read/
48 1 Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio (in the write). (Only in the model with a disk installed)
main scanning and the sub scanning directions). (Partial check)
5 Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio in the 3 Used to check the operation of the hard disk (read/
sub scanning direction. write). (Only in the model with a disk installed) (All
6 HSYNC cycle adjustment areas check)
49 1 Firmware updating 6 Used to check the operations of the hard disk.
50 1 Used to adjust the copy image position and the (The self diag operation of the SMART function is
executed.) (Only in the model with a disk installed)
void area (image loss) adjustment on print paper in
the copy mode. (The similar adjustment can be 7 Used to check the operations of the hard disk.
performed with SIM 50-5 and 50-2 (Simplified (The result of the self diag operation of the SMART
method).) (Document table mode) function is printed out.) (Only in the model with a
2 Used to adjust the document scan position, the disk installed)
image print position, and the void area (image 8 Used to format the hard disk (the system area
loss). (Simple adjustment) (This adjustment is the excluded). (Only in the model with a disk installed)
simple method of SIM 50-1.) (Document table 9 Used to format the hard disk (the system area).
mode) (Only in the model with a disk installed)
5 Used to adjust the print image position and the 10 Used to delete a job complete list (also to delete
void area (image loss) on print paper. (Adjustment job log data) (Only in the model with a disk
as the print engine) (This adjustment is reflected installed)
on all the FAX/printer/copy modes.) 11 Used to delete document filing data. (The
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and void management area (standard folder, user folder) is
area (image loss) on print paper in the copy mode. cleared.) (Only in the model with a disk installed)
(The similar adjustment can be performed with 63 1 Used to check the result of shading correction.
SIM 50-7 (simple method).) (SPF mode) (The shading correction data are displayed.)
7 Used to adjust the copy image position and void 2 Used to execute shading.
area (image loss) on print paper in the copy mode. 7 Used to adjust the white plate scan start position
(The similar adjustment can be performed with for shading. (Document table mode)
SIM 50-6.) (SPF mode) 64 1 Used to check the operation of the printer section
10 Used to adjust the print image off-center position. (self-print operation), (The print pattern, the paper
(Adjusted separately for each paper feed section.) feed mode, the print mode, the print quantity, and
12 Used to adjust the scan image off-center position. the density can be optionally set.)
(Adjusted separately for each scan mode.)
27 Used to adjust the image loss of the scan image in
the FAX/scan mode.

Code Code
Main Sub Main Sub
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display 66 16 Used to check the dial signal (DTMF) output in the
section) detection position. FAX tone dial mode. (The dial number signal set
2 Used to check the result of the touch panel (LCD by SIM 66-13 is outputted.) The send level can be
display) detection position adjustment. (The set to an optional level. Used to check troubles in
coordinates are displayed.) dialing and to check the operation. (Only when
66 1 Used to change and check the FAX soft switch FAX is installed)
functions. (Used to change and check the 17 Used to check the dial signal (DTMF) output in the
functions provided for the FAX soft switches.) FAX tone dial mode. Send level: Max. Used to
(Only when FAX is installed) check the operation. (Only when FAX is installed)
2 Used to clear the FAX soft switch function data and 18 Used to check the dial signal (DTMF) output in the
to set to the default. (Excluding the adjustment FAX tone dial mode. An output is sent at the send
values.) (Only when FAX is installed) level set by the soft switch. Used to check the
3 Used to check the operation of the FAX PWB operation. (Only when FAX is installed)
memory (read/write). (This adjustment is required 19 Used to back-up the HDD data into the Flash
when the PWB is replaced with a new one.) (Only memory (optional FAX expansion memory: AR-
when FAX is installed) MM9). (Only when FAX is installed)
4 Used to check the output operation of data signals 20 Used to read the back-up data by SIM 66-19 to the
in each data output mode of FAX. (Used to check SRAM/HDD. (Only when FAX is installed)
the operation of MODEM. ) Send level: Max. (Only 21 Used to print information related to FAX (various
when FAX is installed) registrations, communication management, file
5 Used to check the output operation of data signals management, system error protocol). (Only when
in each data output mode of FAX. (Used to check FAX is installed)
the operation of MODEM.) An output is sent at the 22 Used to adjust the handset volume. (Only when
send level set by the soft switch. (Only when FAX the FAX is installed.)
is installed) 23 Used to download the FAX program. (Only when
6 Used to print the confidential pass code. (Used FAX is installed)
when the confidential pass code is forgotten.) Not used in the market. (For development)
(Only when FAX is installed) 24 Used to clear the FAST memory data. (Only when
7 Used to print the image memory data (memory FAX is installed)
send/receive). (Only when FAX is installed) 25 Used to register the FAX number for Modem dial-
8 Used to check the output operation of various in. (Only when FAX is installed)
sound signals of FAX. (Used to check the Not used in the market. (For development)
operation of the sound output IC.) Send level: Max. 26 Used to register external telephone numbers for
(Only when FAX is installed) Modem dial-in. (Only when FAX is installed)
9 Used to check the output operation of various Not used in the market. (For development)
sound signals of FAX. (Used to check the 27 Used to register the transfer number for voice
operation of the sound output IC.) An output is sent warp. (Only when FAX is installed)
at the send level set by the soft switch. (Only when Not used in the market. (For development)
FAX is installed) 29 Used to clear data related to an address book
10 Used to clear all data of the image memory (one-touch registration, program registration/
(memory send/receive). The confidential data are expansion, relay memory box registration, each
also cleared at the same time. (Only when FAX is table content).
installed) 30 Used to check the change in the TEL/LIU status.
11 Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 (Only when FAX is installed)
mode 300bps. (Used to check the operation of 31 Used to check the relay operation. (Only when
MODEM.) Send level: Max. (Only when FAX is FAX is installed)
installed) 32 Used to check the receive data (fixed data) from
12 Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 the line. (Only when FAX is installed)
mode 300bps. (Used to check the operation of 33 Used to check the signal (BUSY TONE/CNG/CED/
MODEM.) An output is send at the send level set FNET/DTMF) detection. (Only when FAX is
by the soft switch. (Only when FAX is installed) installed)
13 Used to enter (set) the number of FAX dial signal 34 Used to measure the communication time of test
output test. (The dial number set by this simulation image data. (Only when FAX is installed)
is outputted when the dial signal output test is 35 Modem program rewriting. (Only when FAX is
made by SIM 66-14 - 16. ) (Only when FAX is
installed) Not used in the market. (For
installed) development)
14 Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial
36 Used to check interface between MFPC controller
mode (10pps) and to test the dial signal output. and MDMC. (Check of the data line or the
(The dial number signal set by SIM 66-13 is command line) (Only when FAX is installed)
outputted.) Used to check troubles in dialing and to
39 Used to set the destination specifications. (Only
check the operation. (Only when FAX is installed)
when FAX is installed)
15 Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial
42 PIC program rewriting (Only when FAX is installed)
mode (20pps) and to test the dial signal output.
43 PIC adjustment value writing (Only when FAX is
(The dial number signal set by SIM 66-13 is
installed)
check the operation. (Only when FAX is installed) 67 16 Used to check the operation of the network card.

C. Details
2
2-1
1
Purpose Operation test/Check
Function Used to check the operations of the automatic
1-1
(Purpose) document feeder unit and the control circuit.
Purpose Operation test/Check Section DSPF
Function Used to check the operations of the scanner Item Operation
(Purpose) (read) unit and its control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Section Optical (Image scanning)
1) Select the operation mode with 10-key.
Item Operation
2) Press START key.
Operation/Procedure
The SPF repeat paper feed, transport, and paper exit at the
1) Select the operation mode with 10-key.
speed corresponding to the operation mode.
2) Press START key.
The operation can be stopped by [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
The scanner performs scanning at the speed corresponding to
the operation mode. 1 HIGH SPEED High speed
2 LOW SPEED Low speed
1 TOP SPEED Top speed (220mm/s)
2 HIGH SPEED High speed (168.7mm/s)
SIMULATION 2-1
3 MIDDLE SPEED Middle speed (110mm/s) SPF AGING TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
4 LOW SPEED Low speed (55mm/s) 1. HIGH SPEED
2. LOW SPEED
2
SIMULATION 1-1
SCANNER CHECK. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1. TOP SPEED Press [START] key, and the Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and
2. HIGH SPEED
3. MIDDLE SPEED
1 operation is started. the operation is stopped.
4. LOW SPEED
SIMULATION 2-1
SPF AGING TEST. EXECUTING···.
Press [START] key, and the
operation is started.
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and
scanning is stopped.
1. HIGH SPEED 2
2. LOW SPEED
SIMULATION 1-1
SCANNER CHECK. EXECUTING···. 2-2
1. TOP SPEED
2. HIGH SPEED
3. MIDDLE SPEED Function Used to check the operations of the sensors and
4. LOW SPEED 1 (Purpose) detectors in the automatic document feeder unit
and the related circuits.
Section DSPF
1-2 Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Function Used to check the operation of sensor and
played.
(Purpose) detector in the scanning (read) section and the
related circuit. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
Section Optical (Image scanning) SPFSET SPF sensor
Item Operation SOCD Open/close sensor
Operation/Procedure SCOV Paper feed cover sensor
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed. SPED Document set sensor
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. SPPD Resist front detection sensor
• The scanner (read) unit is in the home position.: "MHPS" section SPOD Document paper exit sensor
is highlighted. SWDn Document width sensor (n → 1 (inside) - 6
(outside))
• The scanner (read) unit is not in the home position.: "MHPS" is
normally displayed. SPLSn Document length sensor (n → 1 (inside) - 2
(outside))
MHPS Optical system home position CISSET CIS installation detection
STSET Stamp unit installation sensor
SIMULATION 1-2 SWD_LEN SPF guide plate position (unit: 0.1mm)
SCANNER SENSOR CHECK.. SWD_AD SPF document width detection volume output AD
MHPS value

Built-in finisher
SIMULATION 2-2 STHP Stapler HP detection
SPF SENSOR CHECK.
POD Tray 2 paper exit detection
SPFSET SOCD SCOV SPED
SPPD SPOD SWD6 SWD5 SCID Staple compiler paper entry detection
SWD4 SWD3 SWD2 SWD1 PID Paper entry detection
SPLS2 SPLS1 CISSET STSET T2PD Tray 2 paper empty detection
SWD_LEN: 2100 SWD_AD: 600 T2DN Tray 2 lower limit detection
T2UP Tray 2 upper limit detection
JRHP Jogger R HP
2-3 JFHP Jogger (F) HP
Purpose Operation test/Check SCID2 Staple compiler paper entry detection 2
Function Used to check the operations of the loads in the STTHP2 Staple rotation HP detection 2
(Purpose) automatic document feeder unit and the control STTHP1 Staple rotation HP detection 1
circuits. STUHP Staple shift HP detection
Section DSPF PSHP Pusher HP detection
Item Operation PPD Paper hold return detection
DSW2 Staple replacement door open detection
Operation/Procedure
DSW1 Compiler jam cancel door open detection
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation
24VM 24V power supply
check with 10-key.
T1PF Tray 1 full detection
2) Press START key. STSP Stapling ready detection
The load selected in procedure 1 is operated. STLS Cartridge inside spare staple empty detection
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation of the load. STNC Cartridge empty detection
1 MOTOR(H) Motor high speed DOPD Interface unit door open detection
MMLK Main drive motor lock detection
2 MOTOR(L) Motor low speed
SCPD Staple compiler paper empty detection
3 SDSS SPF gate solenoid
Console finisher
4 SPFS SPF pick-up solenoid
FSSS Stapler safety switch
5 SPFC SPF paper feed clutch
FJS Joint switch
6 SRRC SPF resist roller clutch FFDSW Front door switch
7 STMPS Stamp solenoid FTCS Upper cover sensor
FFDS Front door sensor
SIMULATION 2-3 FSPS Self prime sensor
SPF LOAD TEST. SELECT 1-7, AND PRESS START. FSUC Stapler connection detection
1.MOTOR(H) 2.MOTOR(L)
FSS Staple sensor
3.SDSS 4.SPFS 5.SPFC 6.SRRC 2 FSTHPS Stapler HP sensor
7.STMPS
FSHPS Slide HP sensor
FLE Lift lock sensor
Press [START] key, and the Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and the FLLLS Lift lower limit sensor
operation is started. operation is stopped.
FULS Lift upper limit sensor
FFE Bookbinding clock sensor
SIMULATION 2-3 FFES Bookbinding paper sensor
SPF LOAD TEST. EXECUTING···. FFRHPS Bookbinding roller HP sensor
1.MOTOR(H) 2.MOTOR(L) FFHPS Bookbinding HP sensor
3.SDSS
7.STMPS
4.SPFS 5.SPFC 6.SRRC
2 FFPS Bookbinding position sensor
FSLS Paper surface sensor
FBES Tray paper sensor
FOBHPS Paper exit belt HP sensor
FAS Alignment tray sensor
3 FRJHPS Alignment HP sensor R
FFJHPS Alignment HP sensor F
FARHPS Bundle roller HP sensor
3-2
FPHPS Paddle HP sensor
Purpose Operation test/Check FES Entry port sensor
Function Used to check the operation of sensor and • The following units are added when the punch unit is installed to
(Purpose) detector in the finisher and the related circuit. the console finisher:
Section Finisher
FPE Punch motor encoder
Item Operation
FPSHPS Punch side register HP
Operation/Procedure
FPUC Punch connection detection
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- FPDS Punch dust sensor
played. FPDSS4 Punch side register sensor 4
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. FPDSS3 Punch side register sensor 3
FPDSS2 Punch side register sensor 2
FPDSS1 Punch side register sensor 1
FPTS Punch timing sensor

(Built-in finisher)
SIMULATION 3-3
SIMULATION 3-3 FINISHER LOAD TEST. SELECT 1- AND PRESS START.
FINISHER SENSOR CHECK.
PID
SCPD
SCID
POD
SCID2
T1PF
PPD
T2UP
2
T2DN T2PD STSP STLS
STNC STHP JFHP JRHP Press [START] key, and the operation Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and
PSHP STUHP STTHP1 is started. the operation is stopped.
STTHP2 DOPD DSW1 DSW2
24VM MMLK
SIMULATION 3-3
(Console finisher) FINISHER LOAD TEST. EXECUTING .
SIMULATION 3-2 2
FINISHER SENSOR CHECK.
FSSS FJS FFDSW FTCS FFDS
FSPS FSUC FSS FSTHPS FSHPS FLE FLLLS
FULS FFE FFES FFRHPS FFHPS FFPS FSLS 3-6
FBES FOBHPS FAS FRJHPS FFJHPS FARHPS FPHPS Purpose Adjustment
FES
Function Used to adjust the stacking capacity of the finisher.
(FPE)(FPSHPS)(FPUC)(FPDS)(FPDSS4)(FPDSS3)(FPDSS2)
(FPDSS1)(FPTS) (Purpose) (Used to adjust the alignment plate (jogger) stop
position in the finisher paper width direction. The
( ) : Added when the punch unit is installed. adjustment is made by changing the alignment
plate home position in the paper width direction by
software.)
3-3
Section Finisher
Purpose Operation test/Check Item Operation
Function Used to check the operation of the load in the Operation/Procedure
(Purpose) finisher and the control circuit.
Enter the adjustment value with 10 digit key pad and press START
Section Finisher key. The jogger moves to LT position (Inch series) or A4 position
Item Operation (AB series) according to the entered value, and stops there.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation SIMULATION 3-6
check with 10-key. FINISHER JOGGER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 40-60, AND PRESS START.
2) Press START key.

The load selected in procedure 1 is operated.
50
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation of the
load. Press [START] key, and the Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and the
operation is started. operation is stopped.
Built-in finisher Stops when the operation is terminated.
1 T2S Tray 2 solenoid
2 T2OM Paper exit motor
SIMULATION 3-6
3 SPS Stopper solenoid FINISHER JOGGER ADJUSTMENT. MOVING....
4 SCRS Roller pressure release solenoid
5 PPS Rear edge h folding solenoid
50
6 SCGS Compiler gate solenoid
7 STTM Staple rotation motor 3-10
8 STUM Stapler shift motor
9 MM Main drive motor Purpose Adjustment
10 EVM Elevator motor Function Console finisher adjustment
(Purpose)
11 STM Staple motor
Section Finisher
12 JRM Jogger motor rear
Item Operation
13 JFM Jogger motor front
14 PSM Pusher motor Operation/Procedure
Console finisher 1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation
1 FFC Folding clutch check with 10-key.
2 FPSM Puncher side register motor 2) Press [START] key.
3 FPNM Punch motor 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
4 FLM Shift motor 4) Press [START] key. (The entered value is stored.)
5 FFSM Stapler motor Set Initial
6 FSM Slide motor Item 1STEP
range value
7 FRJM Alignment motor R 1 Saddle binding position 0 - 400 200 0.0707mm
8 FFJM Alignment motor F adjustment
9 FAM Bundle exit motor 2 Saddle folding position 0 - 400 200 0.0525mm
10 FPM Paddle motor adjustment
11 FFM Transport motor 3 Front alignment position 0 - 20 10 0.367mm
adjustment
4 Rear alignment position 0 - 20 10 0.367mm
adjustment

Set Initial 3-21
Item 1STEP
range value
5 Staple rear one-position 0 - 200 100 0.04374mm
Function Used to check the operations of the mail bin
binding position adjustment
(Purpose) stacker loads.
6 Staple front one-position 0 - 200 100 0.04374mm
Section Mail bin stacker
binding position adjustment
Item Operation
7 Staple 2-position binding 0 - 200 100 0.04374mm
center adjustment Operation/Procedure
8 Staple 2-position binding pitch 0 - 99 50 0.04374mm 1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation
adjustment check with 10-key.
9 Punch center adjustment 47 - 53 50 1mm 2) Press [START] key.
(Slide direction) The load selected in procedure 1 is operated.
10 Punch hole position 0 - 99 50 0.105mm Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation of the load.
adjustment (Paper feed
direction) 1 MM Main motor
2 GSOL1 Gate solenoid 1
SIMULATION 3-10 3 GSOL2 Gate solenoid 2
CONSOLE FINISHER SETTING. SELECT 1-10,AND PRESS START. 4 GSOL3 Gate solenoid 3
1.SADDLE POSITION 2.FOLDING POSITION
3.FRONT ADJUST
5 GSOL4 Gate solenoid 4
4.REAR ADJUST 5.STAPLE REAR 6 GSOL5 Gate solenoid 5
6.STAPLE FRONT 7.STAPLE BOTH 7 GSOL6 Gate solenoid 6
8.STAPLE PITCH
10.PUNCH HOLE
9.PUNCH CENTER 1 8 GSOL7 Gate solenoid 7
Press [START] key, and the operation Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and SIMULATION 3-21
is started. the operation is stopped. MAIL BOX LOAD TEST. SELECT 1-8 AND PRESS START.
1.MM
2.GSOL1
3.GSOL2
2
SIMULATION 3-10
CONSOLE FINISHER SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. 4.GSOL3
1.SADDLE POSITION 5.GSOL4
200 6.GSOL5
7.GSOL6
8.GSOL7
3-20 Press [START] key, and the operation Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and
is started. the operation is stopped.
Function Used to check the mail bin stacker sensor.
(Purpose) SIMULATION 3-21
MAIL BOX LOAD TEST. EXECUTING....
Section Mail bin stacker
1.MM
Item Operation 2.GSOL1
3.GSOL2
2
Operation/Procedure
4.GSOL3
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 5.GSOL4
played. 6.GSOL5
7.GSOL6
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. 8.GSOL7
MPFD1 Tray 1 paper full detection
MPFD4
MPFD5
Tray 4 paper full detection
Tray 5 paper full detection
4
MPFD7 Tray 7 paper full detection 4-2
MPFD8 Tray 8 paper full detection Purpose Operation test/Check
MPID Interface unit paper entry detection Function Used to check the operations of the sensors and
MPPD1 Paper transport sensor 1 (Purpose) detectors in the paper feed section (desk paper
MPPD2 Paper transport sensor 2 feed/large capacity tray) and the related circuit.
MPPD3 Paper transport sensor 3 Section Paper feed
MPPD4 Paper transport sensor 4 Item Operation
MPPD5 Paper transport sensor 5
Operation/Procedure
M24VM 24V power supply
MDD1 Jam cancel door
played.
MDOPD Interface unit door
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
SIMULATION 3-20
MAIL BOX SENSOR CHECK.
MPFD1 MPFD2 MPFD3 MPFD4 MPFD5 MPFD6 MPFD7
MPFD8 MPID MPPD1 MPPD2 MPPD3 MPPD4 MPPD5
M24VM MDD1 MDOPD

<Desk> 4-3
DDRS Desk door sensor
DSPD2 Desk cassette 2 remaining paper quantity sensor
Function Used to check the operations of the loads in the
DSPD1 Desk cassette 1 remaining paper quantity sensor (Purpose) paper feed section (desk paper feed/large capacity
DCSS24 Desk cassette 2 paper rear edge sensor 4 tray) and the related circuit.
DCSS23 Desk cassette 2 paper rear edge sensor 3 Section Paper feed
DCSS22 Desk cassette 2 paper rear edge sensor 2 Item Operation
DCSS21 Desk cassette 2 paper rear edge sensor 1 Operation/Procedure
DLUD2 Desk cassette 2 upper limit sensor
1. Select the number corresponding to the target of operation
DPED2 Desk cassette 2 paper sensor
check with 10-key.
DPFD3 Desk paper transport sensor 3
2. Press [START] key.
DCSS14 Desk cassette 1 paper rear edge sensor 4
The load selected in procedure 1 is operated.
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation of the
load.
DLUD1 Desk cassette 1 upper limit sensor <Desk>
DPED1 Desk cassette 1 paper sensor 1 DLUM2 Desk lift-up motor 2
DPFD2 Desk paper transport sensor 2 2 DLUM1 Desk lift-up motor 1
MCSS4 MP tray size detection 4 3 MCLUM Desk multi lift-up motor
MCSS3 MP tray size detection 3 4 DPFCL Desk paper transport clutch
MCSS2 MP tray size detection 2 5 DPCL2 Desk paper feed clutch 2
MCSS1 MP tray size detection 1 6 DPCL1 Desk paper feed clutch 1
MCSPD MP tray remaining quantity detection 7 MCPCL Desk multi paper feed clutch
MCLUD MP tray upper limit detection 8 DMM Desk transport motor
MCPED MP tray paper empty detection <LCC>
DPFD1 MP tray transport detection
1 TLUM2 LCC lift-up motor 2
2 TLUM1 LCC lift-up motor 1
SIMULATION 4-2
DESK SENSOR CHECK. 3 MCLUM LCC multi lift-up motor
DDRS DPFD1 DPFD2 DPFD3 4 TPFCL LCC transport clutch
MCLUD DLUD1 DLUD2 MCSPD
DSPD1 DSPD2 MCPED DPED1 5 TPCL2 LCC paper feed clutch 2
DPED2 MCSS1 MCSS2 MCSS3 6 TPCL1 LCC paper feed clutch 1
MCSS4 DCSS11 DCSS12 DCSS13 7 MCPCL LCC multi paper feed clutch
DCSS14 DCSS21 DCSS22
DCSS23 DCSS24 8 TMM LCC transport motor
<LCC>
SIMULATION 4-3
TDRS Tandem side door sensor LCC LOAD TEST. SELECT 1- , AND PRESS START.
TTSD Tandem tray sensor 1.
TLUD2 Tandem tray 2 upper limit sensor 2
TLUD1 Tandem tray 1 upper limit sensor
TSPD2 Tandem tray 2 remaining quantity sensor
Press [START] key, and the operation Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and
TSPD1 Tandem tray 1 remaining quantity sensor is started. the operation is stopped.
TPED2 Tandem tray 2 paper sensor
TPED1 Tandem tray 1 paper sensors
TPFD3 Tandem paper transport sensor 3 SIMULATION 4-3
LCC LOAD TEST. EXECUTING....
TPFD2 Tandem paper transport sensor 2 1.
MCSS4 MP tray size detection 4 2
MCSS3 MP tray size detection 3
MCSPD MP tray remaining quantity detection
MCLUD MP tray upper limit detection
MCPED MP tray paper empty detection
TPFD1 MP tray transport detection
SIMULATION 4-2
LCC SENSOR CHECK.
TDRS TTSD TPFD1 TPFD2
TPFD3 MCLUD TLUD1 TLUD2
MCSPD TSPD1 TSPD2 MCPED
TPED1 TPED2 MCSS1 MCSS2
MCSS3 MCSS4

5-3
5
Function Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp
5-1
(Purpose) and the control circuit.
Purpose Operation test/Check Section Optical (Image scanning)
Function Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in Item Operation
(Purpose) the operation panel, and control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Section Operation (Display/Operation key)
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation
Item Operation
check with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [START] key.
The LCD is changed as shown below. (The contrast changes
The load selected in procedure 1 turns ON for 10sec.
every 2sec from the current level to MAX → MIN → the current
level. During this period, each LED is lighted. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation.
The copy lamp or CIS is turned on for 10sec and turned off.
SIMULATION 5-1 NOTE: CIS: only when the DSPF is installed.
SIMULATION 5-3
COPY LAMP TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
After 6.0sec Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, 1.COPY LAMP
and the operation is stopped. 2.CIS 1
SIMULATION 5-1 Press [START] key, and the operation Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and
is started. the operation is stopped after 10sec.
SIMULATION 5-3
5-2 COPY LAMP TEST. EXECUTING···.
1.COPY LAMP
Purpose Operation test/Check 2.CIS 1
Function Used to check the operation of the heater lamp
(Purpose) and the control circuit.
Section Fixing (Fusing)
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation 6
check with 10-key.
2) Press [START] key. 6-1
The load selected in procedure 1 performs ON/OFF operation. Purpose Operation test/Check
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation of the Function Used to check the operation of the paper transport
load. (Purpose) system loads and the control circuit.
The ON/OFF operation of the selected heater lamp is Section Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
repeated every 500ms five times. Item Operation
1 HL1 (LOWER) Heater lamp 1 (Lower) Operation/Procedure
2 HL2 (UPPER) Heater lamp 2 (Upper) 1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation
check with 10-key.
SIMULATION 5-2 2) Press [START] key.
HEATER LAMP TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
The load selected in procedure 1 operates.
1.HL1(LOWER)
2.HL2(UPPER) 2 Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation.
1 MSWPR MSW power relay signal
2 HLPR Heater power relay
Press [START] key, and the operation Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and
3 DCPR DC power relay
is started. the operation is stopped.
The operation is repeated the specified 4 MM Main motor
number of times before stopping. 5 DM Drum motor
6 POM_FW Paper exit motor forward rotation
7 POM_RV Paper exit motor reverse rotation
SIMULATION 5-2
8 CPFC Paper feed clutch
HEATER LAMP TEST. EXECUTING···.
1.HL1(LOWER)
2 9 RRC Resist roller clutch
2.HL2(UPPER) 10 TRC Transport roller clutch
11 FGS_FIN Finisher gate solenoid
12 LUM Tray 1 lift-up motor
13 TRC_DSK Desk clutch sync signal
14 PSPS Separation pawl solenoid
15*1 MCM MP drive motor control signal
16*1 MCPCL MP tray paper feed clutch signal
17*1 MCFCL MP tray transport clutch signal

18*1 MCLUM MP tray lift-up motor signal
19*2 MPFS Manual paper feed solenoid signal
7
20*2 MPFC Manual paper feed clutch signal
21*2 MSS Manual paper feed gate solenoid 7-1
*1: Displayed when OPTION of multi-purpose only. Purpose Setting

*2: Displayed when manual feed OPTION is added. Function Used to set the operating conditions of aging.
(Purpose)
SIMULATION 6-1 Section
FEED OUTPUT CHECK. SELECT 1-22, AND PRESS START. Item Operation
1.MSWPR 2.HLPR 3.DCPR 4.MM 5.DM 6.DSB_FW Operation/Procedure
7.DSB_RV 8.CPFC 9.RRC 10.TRC 11.FGS_FIN
1) Select the number corresponding to the operating condition of
12.LUM
15.MCM
13.TRC_DSK
16.MCPCL
14.PSPS
17.MCFCL 18.MCLUM
2 aging with 10-key.
19.MPFS 20. MPFC 21.MSS 22.MSWS
The combined mode of 0 - 6 mode and 10, 20, or 30 mode can
be set.
Press [START] key, and the Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and the In that case, the number corresponding to one of 0 - 6 mode
operation is started. operation is stopped immediately or after and the number corresponding to one of 10, 10, and 30 mode
repeating the operation several times. are added and the sum number is entered.
SIMULATION 6-1 The condition selected in procedure 1) is set.
FEED OUTPUT CHECK. EXECUTING.... The setting of this simulation is kept valid until the power is turned
1.MSWPR 2.HLPR 3.DCPR 4.MM 5.DM 6.DSB_FW
off.
7.DSB_RV 8.CPFC 9.RRC 10.TRC 11.FGS_FIN
12.LUM
15.MCM
13.TRC_DSK
16.MCPCL
14.PSPS
17.MCFCL 18.MCLUM
2 0 NO MISS FEED DETECTION No jam detection
19.MPFS 20.MPFC 21.MSS 22.MSWS 1 AGING Aging mode
2 AGING/NO MISS FEED No jam detection, aging
DETECTION. mode
6-2 3 AGING/NO MISS FEED No jam detection/ no warm-
DETECTION/NO WARM UP/ up/ no fusing temperature
Purpose Operation test/Check NO TEMPERATURE control, aging mode
Function Used to check the operations of each fan motor CONTROL.
(Purpose) and its control circuit. 4 NO WARM UP. No warm-up
Section Other 5 AGING/INTERVAL. Intermittent aging mode
Item Operation 6 AGING/INTERVAL/NO MISS No jam detection
Operation/Procedure FEED DETECTION. intermittent aging mode
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation +10 NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK. Above +10: No process unit
check with 10-key. (including the developing
2) Press [START] key. unit) detection
The load selected in procedure 1 operates. +20 NO SHADING. Above +20: No shading
+30 NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK/ Above +30: No process unit
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation.
NO SHADING. detection /no shading
1 Fan motor high speed
2 Fan motor low speed SIMULATION 7-1
3 Cooling fan motor (Controller/HDD) AGING TEST SETTING. SELECT 0-36, AND PRESS START.
0.NO MISS FEED DETECTION
SIMULATION 6-2 1.AGING 2
FAN MOTOR CHECK. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. 2.AGING/NO MISS FEED DETECTION.
1.FMHi 3.AGING/NO MISS FEED DETECTION/
2.FMLo
3.CFM-ICU/HDD
2 NO WARM UP/NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
4.NO WARM UP.
5.AGING/INTERVAL.
6.AGING/INTERVAL/NO MISS FEED DETECTION.
Press [START] key, and the operation Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and +10:NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK.
is started. the operation is stopped. +20:NO SHADING.
+30:NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK/NO SHADING.
SIMULATION 6-2
FAN MOTOR CHECK.. Press [START] key to start registration and operation.
The operation mode is kept until the power is turned off or setting is made again.
2.FMLo
2

7-6
8
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
8-1
(Purpose)
Section Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/Check
Item Operation Function Used to check and adjust the operations of the
(Purpose) developing voltage of each color and the control
Operation/Procedure
circuit.
1) Enter the intermittent aging cycle (unit: sec) with 10-key.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/
2) Press [START] key. Transfer/Cleaning)
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. Operation/Procedure
∗ Set range of interval time: 1 - 999 (sec) 1) Enter the number corresponding to the adjustment item with
Set the intermittent aging mode cycle of 7-1 with 10-key. (Unit: 10-key.
sec) 2) Press [START] key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
SIMULATION 7-6
INTERVAL AGING CYCLE SETUP. INPUT TIME AND PRESS START. 4) Press [START] key.
(1-999, UNIT: sec) (The set value is stored, and the output corresponding to the
set value is outputted for 30sec.)
10 Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation.
(The developing bias output voltage adjustment and output check
can be made in each print mode.)
7-8
Default
Purpose Setting Set
Item MX- MX-
Function Used to set the warm-up time display YES/NO. range
M350 M450
(Purpose) 1 AUTO Auto mode 0 - 745 455 485
Item Operation
2 CHARACTER Text mode 485 485
Operation/Procedure 3 MIX Text/Photo mode
1) Select the number corresponding to the warm-up time display 4 PHOTO Photo mode
YES/NO. 5 PRINTER Printer mode
2) Press [START] key, and the number selected in procedure 1) 6 FAX FAX mode
is set. 7 PLUS Reverse developing 0 - 255 150 150
∗ The setting of this simulation is kept valid until the power is bias voltage
turned off.
The warm-up time is displayed in the unit of second. SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS SETTING. SELECT 1-7, AND PRESS START.
1.AUTO 485 2.CHARACTER 485
SIMULATION 7-8
WARM UP TIME DISPLAY.
3.MIX 485 4.PHOTO 485 1
5.PRINTER 485 6.FAX 485 7.PLUS 150
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
2. NO 1
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Press [START] key, Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,

and time count is started. and time count is stopped. SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
1:AUTO (0-745)
SIMULATION 7-8
WARM UP TIME DISPLAY. WARMING UP,PLEASE WAIT.
485
(UNIT:sec)
30 Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Or after 30sec output.
Warm-up is completed. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS SETTING. EXECUTING···.
SIMULATION 7-8
WARM UP TIME DISPLAY. WARM UP COMPLETED.
1:AUTO
485
(UNIT:sec)
60

8-2 4) Press [START] key.
(The set value is stored, and the voltage corresponding to the
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/Check
Function Used to check and adjust the operation of the
(Purpose) main charger grid voltage in each printer mode
and the control circuit. (The transfer output voltage adjustment and output check can be
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/ made in each print mode.)
Transfer/Cleaning) Default
Set
Operation/Procedure Item MX- MX-
range
1) Enter the number corresponding to the adjustment item with M350 M450
10-key. 1 FRONT Long side print mode 0 - 620 220 267
2) Press [START] key. 2 BACK Back side print mode 267 310
SIMULATION 8-6
4) Press [START] key. THV+ SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
(The set value is stored, and the output corresponding to the 1.FRONT 267
set value is outputted for 30sec.) 2.BACK 310 1
(The main charger grid output voltage adjustment and output Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
check can be made in each print mode.)
Default
Set SIMULATION 8-6
Item MX- MX-
range THV+ SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
M350 M450 1.FRONT(0-620)
1 AUTO Auto mode 200 - 900 615 645 267
2 CHARACTER Text mode 645 645
3 MIX Text/Photo mode
4 PHOTO Photo mode Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
5 PRINTER Printer mode
6 FAX FAX mode
SIMULATION 8-6
SIMULATION 8-2 THV+ SETTING. EXECUTING···.
MAIN GRID SETTING. SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START. 1.FRONT
1.AUTO 645 2.CHARACTER 645 267
3.MIX 645 4.PHOTO 645 1
5.PRINTER 645 6.FAX 645
8-17
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Purpose Operation test/Check
Function Used to check and adjust the operation of the
(Purpose) transfer voltage and the related circuit. (Transfer
SIMULATION 8-2
belt cleaning mode)
MAIN GRID SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
1.AUTO (200-900) Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
645 Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 1) Enter the number corresponding to the adjustment item with
Or after 30sec output. 10-key.
SIMULATION 8-2 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
MAIN GRID SETTING. EXECUTING···. 4) Press [START] key.
1.AUTO
645 (The set value is stored, and the voltage corresponding to the
(The transfer output voltage adjustment and output check can be
8-6
made in the transfer belt cleaning mode.)
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/Check
Function Used to check and adjust the operation of the Default
Set
(Purpose) transfer voltage and the control circuit. Item MX- MX-
range
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/ M350 M450
Transfer/Cleaning)/Transfer 1 SHF FRONT AC component 0 - 240 120 160
Operation/Procedure 2 SHV BACK AC component 0 - 240 120 160
1) Enter the number corresponding to the adjustment item with 3 THV- DC component 0 - 1250 780 780
10-key.

9-2
SIMULATION 8-17
TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. Purpose Operation test/Check
1.SHV FRONT 160 Function Used to check the operations of the sensors and
2.SHV BACK 160 1 (Purpose) detectors in the duplex section and its control
3.THV- 780 circuit.
Section Duplex
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 8-17
played.
TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
1.FRONT (0-240) The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
160 ADUSET ADU installation detection
DSW_D ADU cabinet open detection
AINPD ADU paper entry detection
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. APOD ADU paper exit detection
APPD1 ADU paper detection 1
APPD2 ADU paper detection 2
SIMULATION 8-17
TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. EXECUTING···. SIMULATION 9-2
1.FRONT(0-240) ADU SENSOR CHECK.
160 ADUSET DSW_D AINPD APOD APPD1 APPD2
9 10
9-1 10-1
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function Used to check and adjust the operation of the load Function Used to check the operations of the toner motor
(Purpose) (clutch/solenoid) in the duplex section and the (Purpose) and the related circuit.
control circuit. Section Process (Developing)
Section Duplex Item Operation
Item Operation Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the number corresponding to the target of the operation
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of the operation check with 10-key.
check with 10-key. 2) Press [START] key.
2) Press [START] key. The load selected in procedure 1) is operated for 10sec.
The load selected in procedure 1) is operated. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation.
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation. NOTE: Never execute this simulation with toner in the toner hop-
1 ADMEN1 ADU motor 1 control signal per.
2 ADMEN2 ADU motor 2 control signal If executed, excessive toner will enter the developing sec-
3 DGS ADU gate solenoid tion. Be sure to remove the toner motor from the toner hop-
per before execution.
SIMULATION 9-1 1 Toner motor rotation start

ADU OUTPUT CHECK. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. 2 Cancel (The display returns to the main code entry menu.)
1.ADMEN1
2.ADMEN2 1 SIMULATION 10-1
3.DGS
TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION.
ARE YOU SURE?
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to

1.YES 2
2.NO
stop the operations.
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to

SIMULATION 9-1 stop the operations. Or after 10sec.
ADU OUTPUT CHECK. EXECUTING···.
1.ADMEN1
2.ADMEN2 1 SIMULATION 10-1
3.DGS TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION. EXECUTING···.
1

13 15
13-0 15-0
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. (Only Function Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-01, 02, 03, F3-
(Purpose) when FAX is installed.) (Purpose) 12, 22" (large capacity paper feed tray, paper feed
Section FAX trays 1, 2) troubles.
Item Trouble Section LCC
Operation/Procedure Item Trouble
1) Select 1 (YES) with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [START] key. (The trouble display is canceled.) 1) Select 1 (YES) with 10-key.
2) Press [START] key. (The trouble display is canceled.)
1 YES After canceling U1 trouble, the machine returns to
the main code entry standby mode. 1 YES After canceling the LCC trouble, the machine
2 NO Without canceling U1 trouble, the machine returns to the main code entry standby mode.
returns to the main code entry standby mode. 2 NO Without canceling the trouble, the machine
returns to the main code entry standby mode.
SIMULATION 13
U1 TROUBLE CANCELLATION. SIMULATION 15
ARE YOU SURE? LCC TROUBLE CANCELLATION.
1. YES 1 ARE YOU SURE?
2. NO 1. YES 1
2. NO
14
16
14-0
16-0
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/LCC/ Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
(Purpose) U2/PF troubles. Function Used to cancel the self-diag U2 troubles.
Item Trouble Error (Purpose)
Operation/Procedure Section MFP control PWB, PCU PWB, scanner control
PWB
1) Select 1 (YES) with 10-key.
Item Trouble
2) Press [START] key. (The trouble display is canceled.)
Operation/Procedure
1 YES After canceling the trouble other than U1, U2, PF,
1) Select 1 (YES) with 10-key.
and LCC, the machine returns to the main code
entry standby mode. 2) Press [START] key. (The trouble display is canceled.)
2 NO Without canceling the trouble, the machine returns 1 YES After canceling the U2 trouble, the machine returns
to the main code entry standby mode. to the main code entry standby mode.
2 NO Without canceling the trouble, the machine returns
SIMULATION 14 to the main code entry standby mode.
TROUBLE CANCELLATION. (OTHERS)
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES 1 SIMULATION 16
U2 TROUBLE CANCELLATION.
2. NO ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES 1
2. NO

17 22
17-0 22-1
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check
Function Used to cancel the PF troubles (when the copy (Display/Print)
(Purpose) inhibit command from the host computer is Function Used to check the print count value in each
received). (Purpose) section and each operation mode. (Used to check
Section Communication unit (TEL/LIU/MODEM etc.) the maintenance timing.)
Item Trouble Error Item Counter
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select 1 (YES) with 10-key. Various print counter values are displayed.
2) Press [START] key. (The trouble display is canceled.) TOTAL Total counter
1 YES After canceling the PF trouble, the machine returns DRUM Drum counter
to the main code entry standby mode. TONER Toner counter
2 NO Without canceling the trouble, the machine returns DEVE Developer counter
to the main code entry standby mode. MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter
TOTAL OUTPUT Total output quantity
SIMULATION 17 COPIES Copy effective paper counter
PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION. PRINTER Printer counter
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES 1 FAX OUTPUT FAX print counter
2. NO I-FAX OUTPUT Internet FAX print counter
DOC FILING OUTPUT Document filing print counter
RIIGHT SIDE Right paper exit counter
OTHERS Other print counter (List print , etc.)
21 SIMULATION 22-1
COUNTER DATA DISPLAY.
TOTAL: ******** DRUM: ******** TONER: ********
21-1 DEVE: ******** MAINTENANCE: ********
TOTAL OUTPUT: ******** COPIES: ********
Purpose Setting
PRINTER: ******** FAX OUTPUT: ********
Function Used to set the maintenance cycle. I-FAX OUTPUT:******** DOC FILING OUTPUT:********
(Purpose) RIGHT SIDE:******** OTHERS: ********
Item Specifications Counter
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the number corresponding to the maintenance timing 22-2
display.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check
2) Press [START] key. The condition entered in procedure 1) is (Display/Print)
set.
Function Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and
Maintenance timing display Set range (Purpose) troubles. (When the number of misfeed is
0 Default (Differs depending on the model.) 0 - 999 considerably great, it is judged as necessary for
1 - 200 Maintenance display at 1K - 200K repair. The misfeed rate is obtained by dividing this
999 No maintenance display count value with the total counter value.)
Item Trouble
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 21-1
MAINTENANCE CYCLE SETUP. INPUT VALUE 0-999, AND PRESS The paper jam/trouble counter value is displayed.
START.
PAPER JAM Number of paper jams
0: DEFAULT
1-200: MAINTENANCE CYCLE (1K-200K) SPF JAM Number of SPF jams
999: FREE 0 TROUBLE Number of troubles
SIMULATION 22-2
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DATA DISPLAY.
PAPER JAM: ******** SPF JAM: ********
TROUBLE: ********

22-3 Code Description
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check PPD1STD PPD1 remaining jam (Tandem desk feed
(Display/Print) paper)
Function Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed PPD1SAD PPD1 remaining jam (ADU refeed paper)
(Purpose) count of each position. (If the misfeed count is PPD1_PCU PPD1 remaining jam (Timer end of fusing
considerably great, it may be judged as necessary ready standby/high voltage rising completion
to repair.) standby, etc.)
Section Sections other than SPF/DSPF section PPD1PRI PPD1 jam (Image ready is not supplied from
Item Trouble Misfeed ICU.)
Operation/Procedure POD1N POD1 not-reaching jam
The history of paper jams and misfeed is displayed. POD1S POD1 remaining jam
The misfeed history is displayed sequentially from the latest one. POD2N POD2 not-reaching jam
The max. 100 items of misfeed history can be recorded. The data POD2SR POD2 remaining jam (When discharging to
may be used to identify trouble position. the right side of machine.)
The latest 100 items of paper jam history are displayed. (Refer to POD2SL POD2 remaining jam (When discharging to
the jam cause code table below.) the left side of machine.)
(Jam cause code) AINPDN ADU paper entry sensor not-reaching jam
AINPDS ADU paper entry sensor remaining jam
Code Description
APODN ADU paper exit sensor not-reaching jam
NO_JAM_CAUSE No jam. Also used to cancel a jam.
APODS ADU paper exit sensor remaining jam
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed jam
APPD1N ADU transport sensor 1 not-reaching jam
(MCPPD not-reaching: When AR-MU2
installed) APPD1S ADU transport sensor 1 remaining jam
(TPFD1 not-reaching: When AR-D28 APPD2N ADU transport sensor 2 not-reaching jam
installed) (When ADU transport)
(DPFD1 not-reaching: When AR-D27 APPD2S ADU transport sensor 2 remaining jam
installed) (When ADU transport)
DPFD1_ND1 DPFD1 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 1 feed BPT Manual feed tray paper feed jam (APPD2
paper) not-reaching)
DPFD1_ND2 DPFD1 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 2 feed APPD2SM ADU transport sensor 2 remaining jam
paper) (Manual feed tray feed paper)
TPFD1_NTD TPFD1 not-reaching jam (Tandem desk feed DESK2 Desk tray 2 paper feed jam (DPFD3 not
paper) activated)
MCPPD_ST2 MCPPD remaining jam (Machine tray 2 feed DPFD3SD2 DPFD3 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed
paper: When AR-MU2 installed) paper)
TPFD1_ST2 TPFD1 not-reaching jam (Machine tray 2 DESK1 Desk tray 1 paper feed jam (DPFD2 not
feed paper: When AR-D28 installed) activated)
DPFD1_ST2 TPFD1 not-reaching jam (Machine tray 2 DPFD2N2 DPFD2 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 2 feed
feed paper: When AR-D28 installed) paper)
DPFD1_SD1 DPFD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed DPFD2S1 DPFD2 remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed
paper) paper)
DPFD1_SD2 DPFD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed DPFD2S2 DPFD2 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed
paper) paper)
TPFD1_STD TPFD1 remaining jam (Tandem desk feed TTRAY2 Tandem tray 2 paper feed jam (TPFD3 not
paper) activated)
PPD1NMF PPD1 not-reaching jam (Manual feed tray TPFD3S2 TPFD3 remaining jam (Tandem tray 2 feed
paper) paper)
TRAY1 Tray 1 feed paper jam (PPD1 not-reaching) TTRAY1 Tandem tray 1 paper feed jam (TPFD2 not
PPD1NT2 PPD1 not-reaching jam (Machine tray 2 activated)
feed paper) TPFD2N2 TPFD2 not-reaching jam (Tandem tray 2
PPD1ND1 PPD1 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 1 feed feed paper)
paper) TPFD2S1 TPFD2 remaining jam (Tandem tray 1 feed
PPD1ND2 PPD1 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper)
paper) TPFD2S2 TPFD2 remaining jam (Tandem tray 2 feed
PPD1NTD PPD1 not-reaching jam (Tandem desk feed paper)
paper) PPD1_DESK DESK paper feed jam (Preliminary paper
PPD1NAD PPD1 not-reaching jam (ADU refeed paper) feed from the desk, no response in a certain
PPD1SMF PPD1 remaining jam (Manual feed tray feed time after paper feed instruction)
paper) FPID_N Built-in finisher PID not-reaching jam
PPD1ST1 PPD1 remaining jam (Machine tray 1 feed FPID_S Built-in finisher PID remaining jam
paper) FSCID_N Built-in finisher SCID not-reaching jam
PPD1ST2 PPD1 remaining jam (Machine tray 2 feed FSCID_S Built-in finisher SCID remaining jam
paper) FSCID2N Built-in finisher SCID2 not-reaching jam
PPD1SD1 PPD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed FSCID2S Built-in finisher SCID2 remaining jam
paper) FPPD_S Built-in finisher PPD remaining jam
PPD1SD2 PPD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed FSCPD_N Built-in finisher SCPD not-reaching jam
paper)
FSCPD_S Built-in finisher SCPD remaining jam

Code Description 22-5
FPOD_N Built-in finisher POD not-reaching jam Purpose Other
FPOD_S Built-in finisher POD remaining jam Function Used to check the ROM version of each unit
FES_N Console finisher entry port sensor (FES) (Purpose) (section).
not-reaching jam Item Software
FES_S Console finisher entry port sensor (FES) Operation/Procedure
remaining jam
The ROM version of each section can be checked. When there is
FFPS_N Console finisher saddle not-reaching jam any problem in the software, use this simulation to check the ROM
(Not reaching the folding sensor (FFPS).) version of each section and revise the version if necessary.
FFPS_S Console finisher saddle remaining jam
(The folding sensor (FFPS) does not turn S/N Engine section serial number
off.) MFP MFP controller
FSTPL Console finisher staple jam (LANGUAGE) (Language version)
(The stapler does not complete clinching.) BOOT MFP controller boot ROM
FPNCH Console finisher punch jam FAX FAX controller
(The puncher does not complete punching.) NIC Network card
FDOP Console finisher door open jam PCU PCU controller
(During/after paper passing, the front door, SCANNER Scanner controller
joint, or upper cover is opened.) FINISHER Finisher controller
PID_N Mail box PID not-reaching jam DESK Desk/LCC controller
PID_S Mail box PID remaining jam MAIL BIN mail bin controller
MPPD1_N Mail box MPPD1 not-reaching jam PUNCH UNIT Punch unit
MPPD1_S Mail box MPPD1 remaining jam
MPPD2_N Mail box MPPD2 not-reaching jam SIMULATION 22-5
ROM VERSION DATA DISPLAY.
S/N: 0000000000
MPPD3_N Mail box MPPD3 not-reaching jam MFP: 1.00 (LANGUAGE:1.00)
MPPD3_S Mail box MPPD3 remaining jam PCU: 1.00 BOOT: 1.00
MPPD4_N Mail box MPPD4 not-reaching jam SCANNER: 1.00 FAX: 1.00
FINISHER: 1.00 NIC: 1.00
DESK: 1.00 MAIL BIN: 1.00
MPPD5_N Mail box MPPD5 not-reaching jam PUNCH UNIT: 1.00
SIMULATION 22-3
22-6
PAPER JAM HISTORY. Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
(Display/Print)
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,******* Function Used to output the list of the setting and
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,******* (Purpose) adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft switch,
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
counters).
···············
Item Data Adjust/Setting data
(10 lines, 80 digits = 800 characters) Operation/Procedure
When installing or servicing this machine, execute this simulation
22-4 to print and save various setting and adjustment data for next ser-
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check vicing. (For example, memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
(Display/Print) 1) Enter 1 with 10-key.
Function Used to check the trouble (self diag) history. 2) Press [START] key.
(Purpose) The various setting and adjustment data are printed out. (The print
Item Trouble paper cannot be selected optionally.)
Operation/Procedure 0 TRAY SELECT TRAY SELECT auto only (Selection is
The trouble history is displayed. not allowed.)
The trouble history is displayed sequentially from the latest one. 1 PRINT START PRINT START
The max. 100 items can be stored. (The oldest one is deleted
sequentially. The trouble position can be identified by the data.) SIMULATION 22-6
DATA PRINT MODE. SELECT SETTING, AND PRESS START.
SIMULATION 22-4 0. TRAY SELECT :AUTO ONLY
TROUBLE HISTORY. 1. PRINT START 1
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-** Select 1 and press [START] Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-** key. [START] key.
···············
(10 lines, 80 digits = 800 characters) SIMULATION 22-6

DATA PRINT MODE. EXECUTING···.
0. TRAY SELECT :1

22-7 22-10
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check
(Display/Print) (Display/Print)
Function Used to display the key operator code. (This Function Used to check the system configuration (option,
(Purpose) simulation is used when the customer forgets the (Purpose) internal hardware).
key operator code.) Item Specifications Options
Item Data User data Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The system configuration is displayed. (The model names of the
The key operator code is displayed. installed devices and options are displayed.)
MACHINE MX-M350U, MX-M450U/
SIMULATION 22-7 MX-M350N, MX-M450N
KEY OPERATOR CODE DISPLAY.
CODE: *****
SPF (Model code)
FINISHER NONE/ (Model code)
MAIL BIN NONE/ (Model code)
PUNCH NONE/ (Model code)
22-8
DESK/LCC NONE/ (Model code)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check ADU NONE/ (Model code)
(Display/Print) SYSTEM MEMORY Memory capacity (MB)
Function Used to check the number of use of the finisher, HDD Hard disk capacity (MB)
(Purpose) the SPF, and the scan (reading) unit.
ICU Board type
Section Optical (Image scanning) Finisher
NIC NONE/ (Model code)
Item Counter
NSCN NONE/ (Network scanner)
Operation/Procedure PS3 NONE/ (PS3 expansion kit)
The values of the finisher counter, the scanner (read), counter, and FAX NONE/ (Model code)
the SPF related counters are displayed. FAX MEMORY FAX expansion memory capacity (MB)
SPF Document feed quantity HAND SET NONE/ (Model code)
SCAN Number of scans STAMP Finisher stamp NONE/ (Model code)
STAPLER Number of stapling PCU TYPE PCU PWB type (JPN: Japan/
PUNCH Number of punching EX100: EX Japan 100V/
STAMP Number of SPF finish stamps EX200: EX Japan 200V)
(Model code list)

SIMULATION 22-8
Item Display Content
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DATA DISPLAY.
SPF: ******** MACHINE MX-M350U 35-sheet U model (Local printer
SCAN: ******** standard provision model)
STAPLER: ******** PUNCH: ******** MX-M450U 45-sheet U model (Local printer
STAMP: ********
standard provision model)
MX-M350N 35-sheet N model
22-9 MX-M450N 45-sheet N model
SPF ---- Document feed unit not installed
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check MX-EFX1 Duplex document feed unit
(Display/Print) (DSPF) installed
Function Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of FINISHER ---- After-work unit not installed
(Purpose) each paper feed section.
AR-FN6 Built-in finisher installed
Section Paper feed, ADU
AR-FN7 Console finisher installed
Item Counter
MAIL BIN ---- Mail bin not installed
Operation/Procedure AR-MS1 Mail bin installed
The values of the paper feed related counters are displayed. Punch unit ---- Punch unit not installed
TRAY1 Use quantity of tray 1 AR-PN1A Punch unit 2 holes
TRAY2 Use quantity of tray 2 (Multi purpose tray) AR-PN1B Punch unit 3 holes
TRAY3/LCC1 Use quantity of tray 3/LCC left tray AR-PN1C Punch unit 4 holes
(Common to Desk/LCC) AR-PN1D Punch unit 4 holes wide hole
TRAY4/LCC2 Use quantity of tray 4/LCC right tray ADU ---- Duplex module not installed
BPT Use quantity of manual feed tray AR-DU3 Duplex module installed
ADU Use quantity of duplex paper feed AR-DU4 Duplex module + manual feed unit
installed
DESK ---- Paper feed desk not installed
SIMULATION 22-9
PAPER FEED COUNTER DATA DISPLAY. AR-MU2 Multi-purpose tray installed
TRAY1: ******** TRAY2: ******** AR-D27 Paper feed desk installed
TRAY3/LCC1:******** TRAY4/LCC2:******** AR-D28 Tandem desk installed
BPT: ******** ADU: ********
ICU TYPE-U/S For U/S model board
TYPE-U/FP For U/FP model board
TYPE-N For N model board
MEMORY 0MB No expansion memory
***MB Expansion memory ***MB

Item Display Content 22-12
HDD 0MB Hard disk not installed Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check
****MB Hard disk installed (Display/Print)
NIC ---- NIC not installed Function Used to check the SPF misfeed positions and the
MX-NBX2/ NIC installed (Purpose) number of misfeed at each position. (When the
NBX3 number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be
PS3 ---- PS3 expansion kit not installed judged as necessary for repair.)
expansion kit AR-PK6 PS3 expansion kit installed Section DSPF
FAX ---- FAX expansion kit not installed Item Trouble
AR-FX12 FAX expansion kit installed Operation/Procedure
Network ---- Network expansion kit not The history of paper jam and misfeed is displayed.
scanner installed
The misfeed history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
MX-NSX1 Network expansion kit installed
The max. 20 items are recorded. (The oldest one is sequentially
Expansion ---- Expansion memory for FAX not deleted.) This data can be used to identify the trouble position.
memory installed
The latest 20 data of document jam history are displayed. (Refer to
AR-MM9 Expansion memory for FAX 8MB
the jam code below.)
(AR-MM9) installed
(Jam cause code)
Handset ---- handset not installed
AR-HN5 Handset installed Code Description
Finish stamp ---- Finish stamp unit not installed NO_JAM_CAUSE No jam. Also used to cancel a jam.
AR-SU1 Finish stamp unit installed SPPD_N SPPD not-reached jam
SPPD_S SPPD remaining jam
SIMULATION 22-10 STD_N STD not-reached jam
SYSTEM INFORMATION. STD_S STD remaining jam
MACHINE:******* SPOD_N SPOD not-reached jam
SPF:*******
SPOD_S SPOD remaining jam
FINISHER:******* MAIL BIN:******* PUNCH:******
DESK/LCC:******* ADU:******* SPSDSCN Exposure start timer end
SYSTEM MEMORY:**MB HDD:***MB ICU:******
NIC:******* NSCN:****** PS3:******
SIMULATION 22-12
FAX:******* FAX MEMORY:**MB HAND SET:*******
SPF JAM HISTORY.
STAMP:*******
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
PCU TYPE:*******
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
22-11 (10 lines, 80 digits = 800 characters)

(Display/Print) 22-13
Function Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check
(Purpose) FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) (Display/Print)
Section FAX Function Used to check the operating time of the process
Item Data (Purpose) section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner bottle).
Operation/Procedure Item Counter
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter Operation/Procedure
are displayed. The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section
FAX SEND Number of FAX send (OPC drum, DV unit (developer), toner motor (toner bottle)) are
FAX RECEIVE Number of FAX receive displayed.
FAX OUTPUT Number of FAX print DRUM OPC drum Count value (counts)
SEND IMAGES Send quantity Rotating time (sec)
SEND TIME Send time TONER Toner motor Count value (counts)
RECEIVE TIME Receive time Rotating time (sec)
DEVE DV unit Count value (counts)
SIMULATION 22-11 Rotating time (sec)
FAX COUNTER DATA DISPLAY.
FAX SEND: ******** FAX RECEIVE : ********
FAX OUTPUT:******** SIMULATION 22-13
SEND IMAGES: ******** SEND TIME: ********:**:** PROCESS DATA DISPLAY.
RECEIVE TIME: ********:**:** DRUM: ********(counts) **********(sec.)
TONER: ********(counts) **********(sec.)
DEVE: *********(counts) **********(sec.)

22-19 22-31
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check Purpose Setting value display/Check
(Display/Print) Function OSA vendor ID display (External account module)
Function Used to check the values of the counters related to (Purpose)
(Purpose) the scan mode and the Internet FAX mode. Section –
Section Scanner Operation/Procedure
Item Counter When the product key for OSA (external account kit) is effective,
Operation/Procedure vendor ID is displayed. (MAX.: 1 code)
The values of the counters related to the scan mode and the Inter- ∗ APPLICATION NAME: Application name (Max.36 characters)
net FAX mode are displayed. ∗ VENDOR ID: Vendor ID (10 digits)
NETWORK SCANNER Document scan quantity
ORIGINAL COUNTER (OC, SPF total quantity) SIMULATION 22-31
OSA VENDOR DISPLAY(EXTERNAL ACCOUNT)
MAIL COUNTER Number of mail send APPLICATION NAME VENDOR ID
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send *******************: **********
SMB COUNTER Number of SMB send
INTERNET-FAX ORIGINAL Document scan quantity
COUNTER (OC, SPF total quantity)
INTERNET-FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
INTERNET-FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX
receive
INTERNET-FAX OUTPUT Internet FAX print quantity
SCAN TO HDD Scan to HDD record quantity
INTERNET-FAX SEND Number of internet FAX
IMAGES sending page 23
SCAN SEND IMAGES Number of scan sending page
23-2
SIMULATION 22-19
NETWORK SCANNER AND INTERNET-FAX COUNTER DISPLAY.
(Display/Print)
NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL COUNTER: ********* Function Used to check the trouble history of paper jam and
MAIL COUNTER: ******** (Purpose) misfeed. (If the number of misfeed and troubles is
FTP COUNTER: ******** considerably great, it may be judged as necessary
INTERNET-FAX ORIGINAL COUNTER: ********
to repair.)
INTERNET-FAX SEND: ********
INTERNET-FAX RECEIVE: ******** Item Trouble
INTERNET-FAX OUTPUT: ******** Operation/Procedure
SMB COUNTER: ********
1) Select "1. PRINT START."
SCAN TO HDD: ********
INTERNET-FAX SEND IMAGES: ******** 2) Press [START] key.
SCAN SEND IMAGES: ******** The trouble history of paper jam and misfeed is printed.
This data can be cleared by SIM 24-1.
22-30
SIMULATION 23-2
Purpose Setting value display/Check JAM/TROUBLE DATA PRINT MODE SELECT SETTING, AND
PRESS START.
Function OSA vendor ID display (Application
0. TRAY SELECT AUTO ONLY
(Purpose)
Section
Communication Module)
–
1. PRINT START 1
Operation/Procedure
When the product key for OSA (Application Communication Mod- Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or
[START] key.
ule) is effective, vendor ID is displayed. (MAX.: 8 code)
∗ APPLICATION NAME: Application name (Max.36 characters)
∗ VENDOR ID: Vendor ID (10 digits) SIMULATION 23-2
JAM/TROUBLE DATA PRINT MODE.. EXECUTING....
SIMULATION 22-30 0. TRAY SELECT :1
OSA VENDOR DISPLAY(APPLICATION COMMUNICATION)
APPLICATION NAME VENDOR ID
0
*******************: **********
*******************: **********
*******************: **********
*******************: ********** 23-80
*******************: **********
*******************: ********** Purpose Operation test/Check
*******************: ********** Function Used to check the operations of the sensors and
*******************: ********** (Purpose) detectors in the paper feed and transport section.
Section Paper feed, paper transport
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
1) Select "2. PRINT PATTERN."
3) Select "1" (Paper transport time data) with 10-key.

The list of the ON time of the sensors and the detectors of the SIMULATION 24-1
paper transport section is printed. When a paper jam or misfeed is JAM/ TROUBLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-3, AND
PRESS START.
generated, the ON time of each sensor and detector is checked to
1. PAPER JAM
check if the operation of the sensor and the detector, paper feed,
and transport are normal or not.
2. SPF JAM 1
3. TROUBLE
0 TRAY SELECT AUTO Auto only (No selection allowed)
ONLY
1 PRINT START Print execution Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key.
Print of the set data is executed.
2 PRINT PATTERN Print pattern
1. Paper transport time data SIMULATION 24-1
* COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
ARE YOU SURE?
SIMULATION 23-80 1. YES
2. NO
1
DATA PRINT MODE. SELECT SETTING, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT :AUTO ONLY
1. PRINT START * = PAPER JAM, SPF JAM, TROUBLE
2. PRINT PATTERN:1 1
24-2
Select 1 and Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Purpose Data clear
press [START] key. or [START] key.
Function Used to clear the number of use (the number of
(Purpose) prints) of each paper feed section.
SIMULATION 23-80 Section Paper feed
DATA PRINT MODE. EXECUTING.... Item Counter
0. TRAY SELECT :1
Operation/Procedure
0 1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key.
Select 2 and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
or [START] key. The confirmation to clear is opened.
3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key.
SIMULATION 23-80 YES: Clear
DATA PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
(PRINT PATTERN)
NO: Not clear
INPUT 1. 4) Press [START] key.
1 1 TRAY1 Tray 1 use quantity
2 TRAY2 Tray 2 use quantity
3 TRAY3/LCC1 Tray 3/LCC left tray use quantity
4 TRAY4/LCC2 Tray 4/LCC right tray use quantity
24 5 BPT Manual feed tray use quantity
6 ADU Duplex feed quantity
24-1
SIMULATION 24-2
Purpose Data clear PAPER FEED COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-6, AND PRESS
Function Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed START.
(Purpose) history, the trouble counter, and the trouble history. 1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2
(The counters are cleared after completion of 3. TRAY3/LCC1
5. BPT
4. TRAY4/LCC2
6. ADU
1
maintenance.)
Item Counter
Operation/Procedure Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key.
1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key.

2) Press [START] key. SIMULATION 24-2
The confirmation to clear is opened. * COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES: Clear
1. YES
2. NO
1
NO: Not clear
* = TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3/LCC1, TRAY4/LCC2, BPT,
ADU
1 PAPER JAM Number of paper jams
2 SPF JAM Number of SPF jams
3 TROUBLE Number of troubles

24-3
SIMULATION 24-4
Purpose Data clear MAINTENANCE COUNTER DATA CLEAR. PRESS START.
Function Used to clear the number of use of the finisher, 1. MAINTENANCE
(Purpose) SPF, and the scan (reading) unit.
Section
1
Item Counter
Operation/Procedure Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key.
SIMULATION 24-4
The confirmation to clear is opened. * COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key. ARE YOU SURE?
YES: Clear 1. YES
2. NO
1
NO: Not clear
4) Press [START] key. * = MAINTENANCE
1 SPF SPF paper pass quantity

24-5
2 SCAN Number of times of document scan
3 STAPLER Number of times of stapling Purpose Data clear
4 PUNCH Number of times of punching Function Used to reset the developer counter. (The
5 STAMP Number of times of SPF finish stamp (Purpose) developer counter of the DV unit which is installed
is reset.)
SIMULATION 24-3
Transfer/Cleaning)
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS
START. Item Counter Developer
1. SPF
Operation/Procedure
2. SCAN
3. STAPLER
1 1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key.
4. PUNCH
5. STAMP
The confirmation to clear is opened.
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or
[START] key. YES: Clear
NO: Not clear
SIMULATION 24-3
* COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 1 DV CARTRIDGE Developer cartridge
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
2. NO
1 SIMULATION 24-5
DEVELOPER COUNTER DATA CLEAR. PRESS START.
1. DV CARTRIDGE
* = SPF, SCAN, STAPLER, PUNCH, STAMP
1
24-4
Purpose Data clear
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key.
Function Used to reset the maintenance counter.
(Purpose)
Item Counter SIMULATION 24-5
Operation/Procedure ARE YOU SURE?
1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key. 1. YES
2. NO
1
The confirmation to clear is opened. * = DV CARTRIDGE
YES: Clear 24-6
NO: Not clear Purpose Data clear
4) Press [START] key. Function Used to reset the copy counter.
1 MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Purpose)
Item Counter Copy
Operation/Procedure
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear

1 COPY Copy effective paper counter 3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key.
YES: Clear
SIMULATION 24-6 NO: Not clear
COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR. PRESS START.
1. COPY
After replacing the OPC drum, be sure to clear the OPC drum
1 counter.
1 PRINTER Printer counter (Print mode)
2 OTHERS Other effective paper counter (Self print mode)
SIMULATION 24-9
SIMULATION 24-6 PRINTER/OTHERS COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-2, AND
* COUNTER DATA CLEAR. PRESS START.
1. PRINTER
ARE YOU SURE?
2. OTHERS 1
1. YES
2. NO
1
* = COPY Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key.
24-7 SIMULATION 24-9

Purpose Data clear
ARE YOU SURE?
Function Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (Perform this
(Purpose) simulation when the OPC drum is replaced.)
1. YES
2. NO
1
Transfer/Cleaning) * = PRINTER, OTHERS
Item Counter Photo conductor
Operation/Procedure 24-10
1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key. Purpose Data clear
2) Press [START] key. Function Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is
The confirmation to clear is opened. (Purpose) installed)
3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key. Section FAX
Item Counter
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear Operation/Procedure
4) Press [START] key. 1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key.
After replacing the OPC drum, be sure to clear the OPC drum 2) Press [START] key.
counter. The confirmation to clear is opened.
1 DRUM OPC drum counter 3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key.
YES: Clear
SIMULATION 24-7 NO: Not clear
DRUM COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1, AND PRESS 4) Press [START] key.
START.
1. DRUM 1 FAX SEND Number of times of FAX send
1 2 FAX RECEIVE Number of times of FAX receive
3 FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity
4 SEND IMAGES Send quantity
5 SEND TIME Send time
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key. 6 RECEIVE TIME Receive time

* COUNTER DATA CLEAR. FAX COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-6, AND PRESS START.
1. FAX SEND
ARE YOU SURE?
2. FAX RECEIVED
1. YES
2. NO
1 3. FAX OUTPUT
1
4. SEND IMAGES
5. SEND TIME
* = DRUM 6. RECEIVE TIME
24-9
Purpose Data clear
Function Used clear the printer mode print counter and the
(Purpose) self print mode print counter. SIMULATION 24-10
Section Printer ARE YOU SURE?
Item Counter 1. YES
2. NO
1
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key. * = FAX SEND, FAX RECEIVED, FAX OUTPUT, SEND IMAGES,
2) Press [START] key. SEND TIME, RECEIVE TIME

24-11 10 MAIL SEND IMAGES MAIL send quantity counter
11 FTP SEND IMAGES FTP send quantity counter
Purpose Data clear
12 DOC FILING OUTPUT Document filing print counter.
Function Used to reset the OPC drum rotation time, and the
(Purpose) DV unit rotation time counter. The developer
SIMULATION 24-15
counter in the DV unit installed is reset.
NETWORK SCANNER AND INTERNET-FAX COUNTER CLEAR.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/ SELECT1-3, AND PRESS START.
Transfer/Cleaning) 1. NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL COUNTER
Item Counter Developer 2. MAIL COUNTER 1
3. FTP COUNTER
Operation/Procedure
4. INTERNET-FAX ORIGINAL COUNTER: ********
1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key. 5. INTERNET-FAX SEND: ********
2) Press [START] key. 6. INTERNET-FAX RECEIVE: ********
7. INTERNET-FAX OUTPUT: ********
8. SCAN TO HDD: ********
3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key. 9. INTERNET-FAX SEND IMAGES: ********
YES: Clear 10. MAIL SEND IMAGES: ********
11. FTP SEND IMAGES: ********
NO: Not clear
12. DOC FILING OUTPUT: ********
1 DRUM ROTATION OPC drum rotation time
2 DV ROTATION DV unit rotation time

TIMER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS START. * COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
1. DRUM ROTATION ARE YOU SURE?
2. DV ROTATION 1 1. YES
2. NO
1
* = NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL, MAIL, FTP, INTERNET-
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key. FAX ORIGINAL COUNTER, INTERNET-FAX SEND,
INTERNET-FAX RECEIVE, INTERNET-FAX OUTPUT, SCAN
TO HDD, INTERNET-FAX SEND IMAGES, MAIL SEND
SIMULATION 24-11 IMAGES, FTP SEND IMAGES, DOC FILING OUTPUT
* TIMER DATA CLEAR.
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
2. NO
1
25
* = DRUM ROTATION, DV ROTATION
25-1
24-15
Purpose Data clear Function Used to check the operations of the developing
Function Used to clear the counters related to the scan (Purpose) section (toner concentration, humidity and toner
(Purpose) mode and the Internet FAX mode. concentration sensor, humidity sensor,
Item Counter temperature sensor output can be monitored.)
Operation/Procedure Section Process (Developing section)
1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key. Item Operation
2) Press [START] key. Operation/Procedure
The confirmation to clear is opened. Press [START] key.
3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key. The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate, and the
toner concentration detection level and the humidity sensor detec-
YES: Clear
tion level and the temperature sensor detection level are dis-
NO: Not clear played.
1 NETWORK SCANNER Document scan quantity SIMULATION 25-1
ORIGINAL COUNTER counter in the network scanner TONER SENSOR OUTPUT MONITOR. PRESS START.
mode HUMIDITY AREA : 70.0 - 72.5
2 MAIL COUNTER Number of times of mail send
DEVE REFERENCE : 128
3 FTP COUNTER Number of times of FTP send
4 INTERNET-FAX ORIGINAL Internet FAX document scan
COUNTER quantity (Total quantity of OC Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and the
operation is stopped immediately or after 2 min.
and SPF)
5 INTERNET-FAX SEND Number of times of Internet
FAX send SIMULATION 25-1
6 INTERNET-FAX RECEIVE Number of times of Internet DV MONITOR. EXECUTING···.
FAX receive HUMIDITY AREA : 70.0 - 72.5
7 INTERNET-FAX OUTPUT Internet FAX print quantity
8 SCAN TO HDD SCAN TO HDD record quantity
9 INTERNET-FAX SEND Internet FAX send quantity
IMAGES counter

25-2 (Default: 1)
Purpose Setting SIMULATION 26-3

Function Used to make the initial setting of toner AUDITOR SETUP. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
(Purpose) concentration when replacing developer. 1.P10
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/ 2.VENDOR
3.OTHERS
1
Transfer/Cleaning)
4.VENDOR-EX
Operation/Procedure 5.VENDOR-EX+
The developing motor rotates for 2 min and the toner concen-
trations sensor makes sampling of toner concentration 16 26-5
times, and the detection level is displayed. Purpose Setting
After the developing motor stops, the average value of toner Function Used to set the count mode of the total counter
concentration sampling is set as the reference toner concen- (Purpose) and the maintenance counter.
tration level. Item Specifications Counter
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the Operation/Procedure
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
1) Select the number corresponding to the counter to be set with
error code of EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference
10-key.
toner concentration level is not set normally.
(Default: 118)
3) Select the count mode with 10-key.
2) The humidity near the developing tank at the developing
adjustment is registered. 4) Press [START] key.
Set the count-up (1 or 2) for A3/WLT paper.
SIMULATION 25-2 (Select the target counter.)
AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START. 1 TOTAL COUNTER Total counter
HUMIDITY AREA : 70.0 - 72.5 2 MAINTENANCE (DRUM) Maintenance counter/ OPC
COUNTER drum counter
3 DV COUNTER Developer counter
(Count-up)
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, and the 1 1 COUNT UP 1 count-up
operation is stopped immediately or after 2 min. 2 2 COUNT UP 2 count-up Default

AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. EXECUTING···. A3(LEDGER) COUNT UP MODE SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS
HUMIDITY AREA : 70.0 - 72.5 START.
TEMPERATURE AREA: 70.0 - 72.5 1. TOTAL COUNTER 2
2. MAINTENANCE(DRUM) COUNTER 2
1
3. DV COUNTER 2
26 SIMULATION 26-5
A3(LEDGER) COUNT UP MODE SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS
26-3 START.
Purpose Setting
1. TOTAL COUNTER
(1: 1COUNT UP, 2: 2COUNT UP)
2
Function Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
(Purpose) Setting must be made according to the auditor use
conditions. 26-6
Section Auditor
Purpose Setting
Item Specifications
Function Used to set the specifications (paper, document
Operation/Procedure (Purpose) detection, etc.) of the destination.
1) Select the number corresponding to the auditor mode with 10- Item Specifications Destination
key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the destination with 10-
1 P10 Built-in auditor mode key.
2 VENDOR Coin vendor mode 2) Press [START] key.
3 OTHERS Other After completion of setting, the machine is automatically reset.
4 VENDOR-EX Coin vendor mode (without temporarily
1 USA United States of America
charge)
2 CANADA Canada
5 VENDOR-EX+ Coin vendor mode (without temporarily
3 INCH Inch series EX
charge) + Document filing function enable
4 JAPAN Japan
6 VENDOR-EX Coin vendor mode (No temporary charge)
5 AB_B AB series B5
(MULTI JOB) + (JOB queueing)
6 EUROPE Europe
7 VENDOR-EX Coin vendor mode (No temporary charge)
7 UK UK
+ (MULTI JOB) + Document filing enable + (JOB
8 AUSTRALIA Australia
queueing)

9 AB_A AB series A5 0 NO CE mark control NO (Normal operation)
10 CHINA China 1 YES CE mark control YES (Heater lamp soft start
Since this simulation cannot change the Fax destination, use SIM operation)
66-2 to change the FAX destination. (Default: 1 for Europe, 0 for the others)

DESTINATION SETUP. SELECT 1-10, AND PRESS START. CE MARK CONTROL SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
1.USA 2.CANADA 3.INCH 0. NO
4.JAPAN 5.AB_B
6.EUROPE 7.UK 8.AUSTRALIA
1 1. YES
0
9.AB_A 10.CHINA
26-10 26-35
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function Used to set the network scanner trial mode. Function Used to set whether the same continuous troubles
(Purpose) (Purpose) are displayed as one trouble or the series of
Item Operation troubles with SIM 22-4 when the same troubles
Operation/Procedure occur continuously.
1) Select START/END of the network scanner trial mode with 10- Section
key. Item Specifications
Max. 500 menus can be scanned. 1) Select the number corresponding to the operation mode with
10-key.
0 END Trial mode cancel Default
1 START Trial mode start
0 ONCE When two or more troubles of a same kind occur
continuously, the troubles are displayed as one
SIMULATION 26-10
NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS trouble in the trouble history of SIM22-4.
START. 1 ANY When two or more troubles of a same kind occur
0.END
1.START
0 continuously, the troubles are displayed straightly
as two or more troubles in the trouble history of
SIM22-4.
(Default: 0)
26-18
SIMULATION 26-35
Purpose Setting TROUBLE MEMORY MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS
Function Used to set YES/NO of toner save operation. (This START.
(Purpose) function is valid only in Japan and UK versions.
(Depends on the destination setting of SIM26-6.)
0. ONCE
1. ANY
0
For the other destinations, the same setting can be
made by the user program P22.)
Item Specifications Operation mode
26-38
Operation/Procedure
1) Select YES/NO of the toner save mode with 10-key. Purpose Setting
Function Used to set CONTINUE/STOP of printing when
(Purpose) maintenance timing is over and the count value
0 YES Toner save mode is set. reaches 110% of replacement timing (life).
1 NO Toner save mode is not set. Default Section Other
Item Specifications
SIMULATION 26-18 Operation/Procedure
TONER SAVE MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
1) Select the number corresponding to the operation mode with
0. YES
10-key.
1. NO
1 2) Press [START] key.
0 PRINT CONTINUE Print continue
1 PRINT STOP Print stop
26-30 (Default: 0)

Function Used to set the operation mode conforming to the LIFE OVER SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
(Purpose) CE mark (Europe safety standards). (Conforming 0. PRINT CONTINUE
to soft start when driving the fusing heater lamp.) 1. PRINT STOP
0
Item Specifications Operation mode (Common)
Operation/Procedure
10-key.

26-41 • Effective paper counter
Purpose Setting
SIMULATION 26-52
Function Used to set the automatic magnification ratio BLANK PAPER COUNT UP SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS
(Purpose) selection (AMS) in the pamphlet mode. START.
Section 0. NO (NO COUNT UP)
1. YES (COUNT UP)
1
Item Specifications Operation mode (Common)
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the number corresponding to whether AMS operation is
automatically performed or nor in the center binding mode with
26-68
the 10-key.
2) Press [START] key. Purpose Setting
Function Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the CA key
0 NO AMS/APS selection allowed (Purpose) cancel function of print stop.
1 YES AMS is forcibly operated. Section
(Default: 1 for Europe and UK, 0 for the others) Item Specifications Operation
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 26-41
PAMPHLET MODE AMS SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS 1) Select ENABLE/DISABLE of the CA key cancel function of
START. print stop with 10-key.
0. NO
1. YES
0 2) Press [START] key.
0 DISABLE Disable
1 ENABLE (PRINT STOP) Enable
(Default: 1)
26-50
Function Black-White reverse YES/NO setting (Except for CA KEY CANCEL MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS
(Purpose) UK) START.
Item Specifications Operation 0. DISABLE
1. ENABLE (PRINT STOP)
1
Operation/Procedure
1) Select ENABLE/DISABLE of the B/W reverse mode with 10-
key.
0 DISABLE B/W reverse mode DISABLE
27
1 ENABLE B/W reverse mode ENABLE Default
27-1
SIMULATION 26-50 Purpose Setting

B/W REVERSE MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS Function Used to set the specifications for operations in
START. (Purpose) case of communication trouble between the host
0. DISABLE
1. ENABLE
1 computer and MODEM (machine side). (When
communication trouble occurs between the host
computer MODEM and the machine, the self diag
display (U7-00) is printed and setting for inhibition
of print or not is made.)
26-52
Section Communication unit (TEL/LIU/MODEM etc.)
Purpose Setting Item Specifications Operation mode
Function Used to set whether non-print paper (insertion Operation/Procedure
(Purpose) paper, cover paper) (blank image print paper) is 1) Select the number corresponding to the operation mode with
counted up or not. 10-key.
Section Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
Item Specifications Operation mode
Operation/Procedure 0 YES Though a communication trouble occurs between
the host computer and the MODEM (machine side),
1) Select YES/NO of the non-print paper count-up with 10-key.
there is no effect on the machine operations.
2) Press [START] key. 1 NO When a communication trouble occurs between the
Non-print paper means an insert paper (without copying) in the host computer and the MODEM (machine side), the
OHP insertion mode, a cover (without copying) in the cover inser- self diag display (U7-00) is displayed and printing is
tion mode, back surface, and white paper in the duplex exit mode inhibited.
(CA, etc.).
(Default: 0)
0 NO (NO COUNT UP) No count up
1 YES (COUNT UP) Count up SIMULATION 27-1
DISABLING OF U7-00 TROUBLE. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
(Default: 0 for Japan and Australia, 1 for the other) 0. YES
The target counters are as follows: 1. NO
0
• Copies counter
• Printer counter
• Department management counter
• Total counter

27-5 CSS1 Tray 1 insertion detection
PED Tray 1 paper empty detection
Purpose Setting
LUD Tray 1 upper limit detection
Function Used to enter the machine tag No. (This function
(Purpose) allows to check the tag No. of the machine with the MCSET MP unit detection
host computer.) MCDRS MP unit side door open detection
Section Communication unit (TEL/LIU/MODEM etc.) MCPPD MP tray transport detection
Item Specifications Operation mode MCLUD MP tray upper limit detection
Operation/Procedure MCPED MP tray paper empty detection
MCSPD MP tray remaining quantity detection
1) Enter the tag number with 10-key.
SIMULATION 27-5
TAG # SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
PRESENT: 00010000 MP Tray size (The detection size of MP tray is displayed.)
NEW: 00009999 MPFSET Manual feed tray detection
MPED Manual feed tray paper empty detection
MPLD Manual feed length detection
MPLS1 Manual feed pull-out sensor 1
MPLS2 Manual feed pull-out sensor 2
30 Bypass Tray size (The detection size of manual feed tray is
displayed.)
30-1
SIMULATION 30-2
TRAY SENSOR CHECK..
Function Used to check the operation of sensors and CSS PED LUD
(Purpose) detectors in other than the paper feed section and MCSET MCDRS MCPPD MCLUD MCPED MCSPD MCSS1 MCSS2
the operations of the related circuits. MCSS3 MCSS4 (MP Tray size: A4 )
Item Operation MPFSET MPED MPLD MPLS1 MPLS2
(Bypass Tray size: A3 )
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of sensors and detectors are displayed.
PPD1 Resist roller front paper detection
POD1 After-fusing transport detection 1
40
POD2 After-fusing transport detection 2
POD3 Paper full detection 40-1
DSWL Cabinet open detection Purpose Operation test/Check
DSWF Front door Function Used to check the operation of the manual feed
(Purpose) tray paper size detector and the related circuit.
SIMULATION 30-1 (The operation of the manual feed tray paper size
SENSOR CHECK.. detector can be monitored with the LCD display.)
PPD1 POD1 POD2 POD3 DSWL Section Paper feed
DSWF
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
30-2 The operating conditions of sensors and detectors are displayed.
Function Used to check the operation of sensors and The paper width size detection level is displayed.
(Purpose) detectors in the paper feed section and the related MPLD Manual tray length detection
circuits. MPLS1 Manual tray pull-out detection 1
Section Paper feed MPLS2 Manual tray pull-out detection 2
Item Operation BYPASS_WIDTH Manual feed guide plate position
Operation/Procedure BYPASS_AD Manual feed width detection volume
The operating conditions of sensors and detectors are displayed. output AD value
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. Bypass Tray width (Manual tray detection size is displayed.)
size A4/A3, 11 x, B5/B4, 8.5 x , A4R, B5R,
A5R, 5.5x, 7.25x, EXTRA
SIMULATION 40-1
BYPASS TRAY SENSOR CHECK..
MPLD MPLS1 MPLS2

BYPASS_WIDTH: 2100 BYPASS_AD: 600
(Bypass Tray width size: A4/A3)

40-2 40-7
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper Function Used to enter the manual paper feed tray paper
(Purpose) width detector detection level. (Purpose) width adjustment value.
Section Paper feed Section Paper feed
Item Operation Item Operation
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width. 1) Select the number corresponding to the set item with 10-key.
2) Select MAX POSITION with 10-key. 2) Press [START] key.
3) Press [START] key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The max. width detection level is recognized. 4) Press [START] key.
4) Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 1 MAX. POSITION Max. width
5) Set the manual paper feed guide to A4R size width. 2 POSITION 1 Adjustment point 1
6) Select POSITION with 10-key. 3 POSITION 2 Adjustment point 2
7) Press [START] key. 4 MIN. POSITION Min. value
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
8) Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. SIMULATION 40-7
9) Set the manual paper feed guide to A5/A5R size width. BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1. MAX. POSITION : 66
10) Select POSITION2 with 10-key. 2. POSITION 1 : 447
11) Press [START] key. 3. POSITION 2 : 704
The A5R width detection level is recognized. 4. MIN. POSITION : 916 1
12) Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
13) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width. Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
14) Select MIN POSITION with 10-key.

The min. width detection level is recognized. BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING. INPUT VALUE 0-1023, AND PRESS
START.
If the above procedures are not completed normally, "ERROR" is
1. MAX. POSITION
displayed. If completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. 66
SIMULATION 40-2
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1. MAX. POSITION 40-11
2. POSITION 1
3. POSITION 2 1 Purpose Operation test/Check
4. MIN. POSITION Function Used to check the multi-purpose tray width detec-
(Purpose) tion level.
Select 1 and press [START] key.
Section Paper feed
Item Operation
SIMULATION 40-2 Operation/Procedure
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
MAX. POSITION ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
The operating conditions of sensors and detectors are displayed.
Select 2 and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

The paper width detection level is also displayed.
MCSS1 Tray 3 size detection 1
SIMULATION 40-2 MCSS2 Tray 3 size detection 2
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. MCSS3 Tray 3 detection size 3
POSITION 1 ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
MCSS4 Tray 3 size detection 4
Multi Purpose (MPT width direction detection size is
Select 3 and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Tray displayed.) A4/A3, 11X, B5/B4, 8.5X, A4R,
B5R, A5R, 5.5X, 7.25X, EXTRA
SIMULATION 40-2
POSITION 2 ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
SIMULATION 40-11
TRAY3 SENSOR CHECK..
Select 4 and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

MCSS1 MCSS2 MCSS3 MCSS4
(Multi Purpose Tray width size: A4/A3)
SIMULATION 40-2
MIN. POSITION ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")

40-12 41-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the multi-purpose tray width Function Used to adjust the document size sensor sensing
(Purpose) detection level. (Purpose) level.
Section Paper feed Section Other
Item Operation Item Operation
1) Open the paper feed tray 2 paper feed guide to the max. width 1) Open the document cover and select NO ORIGINAL with 10-
position. key without placing any document on the document table.
2) Select MAX POSITION with 10-key. 2) Press [START] key.
3) Press [START] key. The sensor level is set without document on the document
The max. width detection level is recognized. table.
4) Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 3) Place an A3 document on the document table, and select A3
5) Open the paper feed tray 3 paper feed guide to the min. width ORIGINAL with 10-key.
position. 4) Press [START] key.
6) Select MIN POSITION with 10-key. The sensor level is set when detection the document.
7) Press [START] key. If the above procedures are not completed normally, "ERROR" is
The min. width detection level is recognized. displayed. If completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
If the above procedures are not completed normally, "ERROR" is

SIMULATION 41-2
displayed. If completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS START.
(PLEASE OPEN THE ORIGINAL COVER.)
SIMULATION 40-12
MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS
1. NO ORIGINAL
2. A3 ORIGINAL
1
START.
1.MAX. POSITION
2.MIN. POSITION 1 Select 1 and

Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. SIMULATION 41-2
SIMULATION 40-12 NO ORIGINAL ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR at PD1 PD2...")
MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT. A3 ORIGINAL ··· INCOMPLETE
MAX. POSITION ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
Select 2 and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
(Error) key.
SIMULATION 41-2
SIMULATION 40-12
MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
NO ORIGINAL ··· COMPLETE
MIN. POSITION ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
A3 ORIGINAL ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR at PD1 PD2...")
41-3
41 Purpose Operation test/Check
Function Used to check the operation of the document size
41-1 (Purpose) sensor and the related circuit. (The document size
Purpose Operation test/Check sensor output level can be monitored with the LCD
Function Used to check the operation of the document size display.)
(Purpose) sensor and the related circuit. (The operation of Section Other
the document size sensor can be monitored with Item Operation
the LCD display.) Operation/Procedure
Section Other The detection output level (A/D value) of the document sensors
Item Operation (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
Operation/Procedure ∗ The value in [ ] on the side of each sensor name indicates the
The operating conditions of sensors and detectors are displayed. threshold value.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. The light receiving value (A/D value) and the threshold value (A/D
value) of PD1 - PD7 are in the range of 1 - 255. The default of
OCSW Document cover Open: Normal display threshold value is 128.
status Close: Highlighted
OCSW Original cover status Open: Normal display
PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
sensor status Document present: Highlighted Close: Highlighted
PD1 - 7 PD sensor detection level The value in [ ] indicates the
adjustment threshold value (SIM41-2 adjustment
SIMULATION 41-1
value).
PD SENSOR CHECK..
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7

PD SENSOR DATA DISPLAY. PROCESS CORRECTION VALUE SETTING. INPUT VALUE 0-255
OCSW AND PRESS START.
PD1[128]: 200 PD2[128]: 200 BIT0:Vg1, BIT1:Ld1, BIT2:Vg2, BIT3:Ld2
PD3[128]: 50
PD5[128]: 51
PD4[128]: 52
PD6[128]: 50
BIT4:Vb1, Vb2
BIT5:Vg3, Vb3, Ld3
111
PD7[128]: 52 BIT6:Vbr
BIT7:Vg4, Vb4, Ld4
44-4
43
Purpose Setup
Function Used to set the target image (reference) density
43-1
(Purpose) level in the developing bias voltage correction.
Purpose Setting Section Process
Function Used to set the fusing temperature in each (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
(Purpose) operation mode. Item Data
Section Fixing (Fusing) Operation/Procedure
Item Operation 1) Select the number corresponding to the setting mode with 10-
Operation/Procedure key.
1) Select the number corresponding to the setting mode with 10- 2) Press [START] key.
key. 3) Enter the set value.
2) Press [START] key. 4) Press [START] key.
3) Enter the set value.
Item
1 TEMP. AREA *1 Process environment temperature
Item Default forcible setting value
1 INSIDE NORMAL Heater inside/normal 190 (0 - 13 /normal: 0)
2 OUTSIDE NORMAL Heater outside/normal 190 2 HUMIDITY AREA *1 Process environment humidity
3 INSIDE PREHEAT Heater inside/preheat 150 forcible setting value
4 OUTSIDE PREHEAT Heater outside/preheat 150 (0 - 14 /normal: 0)
3 S_WT Vb rising correction standby time
(0 - 180 sec/default: 90)
SIMULATION 43-1
FUSER TEMPERATURE SET. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
4 Vb1 Vb correction amount (first rotation)
1. INSIDE NORMAL 190 (0 - 150V/default: 50)
2. OUTSIDE NORMAL 190 5 Vb2 Vb correction amount (second
3. INSIDE PREHEAT 150
4. OUTSIDE PREHEAT 150
1 rotation) (0-50V/default: 15)
*1: Only when this value is 0, control is made with the actual mea-
surement value of the process thermistor (temperature/humid-
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. ity). When it is not 0, control is made with the forcible setting
value.
SIMULATION 43-1
FUSER TEMPERATURE SET. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. SIMULATION 44-4
1. INSIDE NORMAL PROCESS CONTROL VALUE SETTING. SELECT 1-5 AND PRESS
START.
190 1.TEMP. AREA 0
2.HUMIDITY AREA 0
3.S_WT 90
3
4.Vb1 50
5.Vb2 15
44 Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
44-1
SIMULATION 44-4
Purpose Setting PROCESS CONTROL VALUE SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS
START.
Function Used to set enable/disable of correction 3.S_WT
(Purpose) operations in the image forming (process) section. 90
Section Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
When bit =1, correction is made.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Vg4 Vg3
Vb1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Vb4 Vbr Vb3 Ld2 Vg2 Ld1 Vg1
Vb2
Ld4 Ld3

44-9 DEV REF Development adjustment
registration value
HUM Humidity correction value
(Display/Print)
(TARGET) Target value of humidity
Function Used to check the data related to the image
correction
(Purpose) forming section correction (process correction)
result (corrected main charger grid voltage, the TMP Temperature correction value
developing bias voltage, and the laser power (TARGET) Target value of temperature
voltage in each print mode). (This simulation correction
allows to check that correction is performed LIFE Environment correction value
normally or not.) (TARGET) Target value of environment
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/ correction
Transfer/Cleaning)
SIMULATION 44-16
Item Data Operation data (Machine condition)
TONER CONTROL STANDARD LEVEL DISPLAY.
Operation/Procedure HUMIDITY AREA: 11
INT HUMIDITY AREA: 7
DRUM ROTATION TIME Drum rotation time (sec) TEMPERATURE AREA: 6
DEVE ROTATION TIME Developer rotation time (sec) INT TEMPERATURE AREA: 6
TARGET LEVEL=DEV REF+HUM(TARGET)+TMP(TARGET)+LIFE(TARGET)
Vg1 - Vg4 Grid voltage correction value
133 = 118 + 10(10) + 0(0) + 5(5)
Vb1 - Vb4 Developing bias correction value
Ld1 - Ld4 Laser power correction value
DESTINATION 1 Machine CRUM destination (1-9)
DESTINATION 2 CRUM destination (1-9)
46
SIMULATION 44-9
PROCESS CONTROL DATA DISPLAY. 46-2
DRUM ROTATION TIME:01234567(sec)
DEVE ROTATION TIME:01234567(sec) Purpose Adjustment
Vg1:30(V) Vg2:30(V) Vg3:30(V) Vg4:30(V) Function Used to adjust the copy density in all the copy
Vb1:30(V) Vb2:10(V) Vb3:30(V) Vb4:10(V) (Purpose) modes (Auto, Text, Text/Photo, and Photo mode).
Ld1: 0 Ld2: 0 Ld3: 0 Ld4: 0
DESTINATION1:1 Item Picture quality Density
DESTINATION2:1 Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the copy mode to be
adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 6.)
44-14
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check 3) Enter the copy density level with 10-key.
(Display)
Set
Function Used to check the output level of the temperature Item Default
range
(Purpose) sensor and the humidity sensor.
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing)
selection
Item Operation
1 COPY START Copy START (Default)
Operation/Procedure
The output levels of the temperature thermistor and the humidity 3 AE 3.0 AE mode 0 - 99 50
thermistor in the developing unit are displayed.
4 CH 3.0 Text mode 3.0
TH-DV Developing temperature thermistor 0 - 255 5 MIX 3.0 Text/Photo mode 3.0
HUS-DV Developing humidity thermistor 0 - 255 6 PHOTO 3.0 Photo mode 3.0
4) Press P key or [START] key.
SIMULATION 44-14 The adjustment value is set.
SENSOR DATA DISPLAY MONITOR.
TH-DV: 255 When [START] key is pressed, copying is performed and the
HUS-DV: 255 adjustment value is simultaneously set.
Check the density of the printed copy image.
Normal display NOW COPYING.
44-16
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check Jam JAM
(Display) Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
Function Used to check the toner concentration control
NOTE: When the copy image density is adjusted with this simula-
(Purpose) data.
tion, the copy image densities of all the copy modes are
Section Image process (Developing)
changed to the copy image density level set with this simu-
Item Operation lation.
Operation/Procedure That is, the copy image density of each copy mode set with
HUMIDITY AREA Humidity area SIM 46-9, 10, 11 is changed to the copy image density
INT HUMIDITY AREA Humidity area in development level adjusted with this simulation.
adjustment To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
TEMPERATURE AREA Temperature area dures.
INT TEMPERATURE AREA Temperature area in 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
development adjustment 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
TARGET LEVEL Toner control reference value tray selection mode.)

3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be 46-9
used with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
Function Used to adjust the print density for each density
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 (Purpose) level (display value) in the copy mode (binary -
2 TRAY2 TRAY2 Text mode). An optional print density can be set
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 for each density level (display value).
4 TRAY4 TRAY4 Item Picture quality Density
5 BPT Manual feed Operation/Procedure
NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value 1) Select the number corresponding to the copy density adjust-
in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When ment level with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 11.)
START key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and 2) Press [START] key.
copying is performed. 3) Enter the copy density level with 10-key.
Set
SIMULATION 46-2 Item Default
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START. range
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. AE 3.0 50 4. CH 3.0 50
1 1 COPY START Copy START (Default)
5. MIX 3.0 50 6. PHOTO 3.0 50 2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection
3 1.0 Exposure level 1.0 0 - 99 50
Select other then 0 - 2, and
press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 4 1.5 Exposure level 1.5
5 2.0 Exposure level 2.0
SIMULATION 46-2 6 2.5 Exposure level 2.5
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 7 3.0 Exposure level 3.0
3. AE 3.0
50 8 3.5 Exposure level 3.5
Select 1, 10 4.5 Exposure level 4.5
[START] key. or terminate copying. 11 5.0 Exposure level 5.0
SIMULATION 46-2
4) Press [P] key or [START] key.
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). NOW COPYING. The adjustment value is set.
When [START] key is pressed, copying is perfumed and the
adjustment value is set simultaneously.
Select 0, and Press [START] key, or Check the density of printed copy image.
SIMULATION 46-2 ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. Jam JAM
(FEED TRAY)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
5. BPT 1 To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
dures.
Select 2, and press [START] key. Press [START] key, or
press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
SIMULATION 46-2 tray selection mode.)
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 3-6, AND PRESS START. 3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) used with 10-key.
3. AE 3.0
5. MIX 3.0
4. CH 3.0
6. PHOTO 3.0
1 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
5 BPT Manual feed
NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value
in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
START key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
copying is performed.

46-10
SIMULATION 46-9
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START. Purpose Adjustment
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START Function Used to adjust the print density for each density
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. 1.0 50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
1 (Purpose) level (display value) in the copy mode (binary -
6. 2.5 50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
Text/Photo mode). An optional print density can be
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50 set for each density level (display value).
Item Picture quality
Select other than 0 - 2, and
press [START] key. Press
Operation/Procedure
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 1) Select the number corresponding to the copy density adjust-
ment level with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 11.)
SIMULATION 46-9
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS 2) Press [START] key.
START. 3) Enter the copy density level with 10-key.
3. 1.0 50
Set
Item Default
Select 1,
range
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
and press 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection
SIMULATION 46-9 2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). NOW COPYING. 3 1.0 Exposure level 1.0 0 - 99 50
Select 0, and Press [START] key, or 6 2.5 Exposure level 2.5
press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 7 3.0 Exposure level 3.0
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 11 5.0 Exposure level 5.0
5. BPT 1 4) Press [P] key or [START] key.
The adjustment value is set.
press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. When [START] key is pressed, copying is perfumed and the
SIMULATION 46-9 Check the density of printed copy image.
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 3-11, AND PRESS START. Normal display NOW COPYING.
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
3. 1.0 4. 1.5 5. 2.0 ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
6. 2.5 7. 3.0 8. 3.5 Jam JAM
9. 4.0 10. 4.5 11. 5.0 1 Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
dures.
1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
tray selection mode.)
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
used with 10-key.
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
5 BPT Manual feed

46-11
SIMULATION 46-10
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START. Purpose Adjustment
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START Function Used to adjust the print density for each density
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. 1.0 50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
1 (Purpose) level (display value) in the copy mode (binary -
6. 2.5 50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
Photo mode). An optional print density can be set
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50 for each density level (display value).
Item Picture quality Density
Select other than 0 - 2, and Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the copy density adjust-
ment level with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 11.)
SIMULATION 46-10
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS 2) Press [START] key.
START. 3) Enter the copy density level with 10-key.
3. 1.0 50
Set
Item Default
Select 1,
range
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
and press 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection
SIMULATION 46-10 2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). NOW COPYING. 3 1.0 Exposure level 1.0 0 - 99 50
Select 0, and Press [START] key, or 6 2.5 Exposure level 2.5
press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 7 3.0 Exposure level 3.0
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 11 5.0 Exposure level 5.0
5. BPT 1 4) Press [P] key or [START] key.
press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. When [START] key is pressed, copying is perfumed and the
SIMULATION 46-10 Check the density of printed copy image.
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). SELECT 3-11, AND PRESS START. Normal display NOW COPYING.
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
3. 1.0 4. 1.5 5. 2.0 ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
6. 2.5 7. 3.0 8. 3.5 Jam JAM
9. 4.0 10. 4.5 11. 5.0 1 Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
dures.
used with 10-key.
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
5 BPT Manual feed

SIMULATION 46-11 The adjustment value is set.
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOTO2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
When [START] key is pressed, printing is perfumed and the
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. 1.0 50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
1 Check the density of printed image.
6. 2.5 50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50 Normal display NOW PRINTING.
press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Jam JAM
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
SIMULATION 46-11 NOTE: When the FAX print image density is adjusted with this sim-
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOTO2). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS ulation, the print image densities of all the FAX modes are
START. changed to the image density level set with this simulation.
3. 1.0 50 That is, the print image density of each FAX mode set with
SIM 46-13, 14, 15 is changed to the print image density
Select 1,
level adjusted with this simulation.
[START] key. or terminate copying. To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
dures.
SIMULATION 46-11
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOTO2). NOW COPYING. 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
Select 0, and Press [START] key,
press [START] key. or press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. used with 10-key.
SIMULATION 46-11
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
(FEED TRAY) 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 3 TRAY3 TRAY3
5. BPT 1 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
5 BPT Manual feed
press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value
SIMULATION 46-11
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
3. 1.0 4. 1.5 5. 2.0 SIMULATION 46-12
6. 2.5 7. 3.0 8. 3.5
9. 4.0 10. 4.5 11. 5.0 1 EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET). SELECT 0-2, AND PRESS
START.
2.FAX EXP.LEVEL 50
1
46-12 Select other than 0 - 1, and
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode
(Purpose) (all modes). SIMULATION 46-12
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET), INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
PRESS START.
Operation/Procedure 2.FAX EXP.LEVEL 50
1) Select the adjustment item of FAX EXP. LEVEL with 10-key.
2) Press [START] key. Select 1, and Press [START] key.
press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
3) Enter the print density level with 10-key. or terminate copying.
Set SIMULATION 46-12

Item Default
range EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET). NOW PRINTING.
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection
2 FAX EXP. LEVEL FAX mode print density 0 - 99 50 Select 0, and Press [START] key, or
SIMULATION 46-12
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET).SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS
START.
(FEED TRAY)
5.BPT

46-13
SIMULATION 46-13
Purpose Adjustment EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS
Function Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode START.
(Purpose) (each normal mode). (Only when FAX is installed.) 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
2.EXP LEVEL 1
1
3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
Operation/Procedure 6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50
1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following
adjustment items with 10-key.
∗ Manual mode (Print density adjustment level) and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
∗ Auto mode
3) Enter the print density level with 10-key. EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
PRESS START.
Item
Set
Default 4.1.0 50
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection Select 1, Press [START] key.
1 PRINT START Print start (Default) [START] key. or terminate copying.
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50 SIMULATION 46-13
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). NOW PRINTING.
7 4.0 Exposure level 4 Press [START] key, or
Select 0, and press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
4) Press [P] key or [START] key. SIMULATION 46-13
The adjustment value is set. EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS
START.
When [START] key is pressed, printing is perfumed and the (FEED TRAY)
adjustment value is set simultaneously. 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 1
Check the density of printed image. 5.BPT
(ABOVE +20:DSPF MODE)
Normal display NOW PRINTING.
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. Select 2, and Press [START] key, or
Jam JAM press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

SIMULATION 46-13
To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce- EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 3-8, AND PRESS START.
dures. (EXP.LEVEL SELECT)
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. 3.AUTO 4.1.0 5.2.0

6.3.0 7.4.0 8.5.0 1
used with 10-key.
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
5 BPT Manual feed
When the sum of the above set value (1 - 5) and 20 is set, the
mode is changed to the duplex print mode.

46-14
SIMULATION 46-14
Purpose Adjustment EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE).SELECT 0-14,AND PRESS START.
Function Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
(Purpose)
Item
(each fine mode). (Only when FAX is installed.)
Picture quality
2.EXP LEVEL 1
3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
1
6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50
Operation/Procedure 9.AUTO(H) 50 10.1.0(H) 50 11.2.0(H) 50
1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following 12.3.0(H) 50 13.4.0(H) 50 14.5.0(H) 50
adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 14.)
∗ Normal mode (Print density adjustment level) Select other than 0 - 2,
∗ Normal mode (Print density adjustment level) (Half-tone
mode)
SIMULATION 46-14
∗ Auto mode EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
∗ Auto mode (Half-tone mode) START.
2) Enter the print density level with 10-key. 4.1.0 50
Set Select 1, Press [START] key.
Item Default and press Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
range [START] key. or terminate copying.
SIMULATION 46-14
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). NOW PRINTING.
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
Press [START] key,
4 1.0 Exposure level 1 Select 0, and press [START] key. or press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
6 3.0 Exposure level 3 SIMULATION 46-14
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
8 5.0 Exposure level 5 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4
9 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone) 5.BPT 1
10 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1 (Half-tone)
11 2.0 (H) Exposure level 2 (Half-tone) Select 2, and Press [START] key or
13 4.0 (H) Exposure level 4 (Half-tone) SIMULATION 46-14
14 5.0 (H) Exposure level 5 (Half-tone) EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). SELECT 3-14, AND PRESS START.
(EXP.LEVEL SELECT)
3) Press [P] key or [ATART] key.
3.AUTO 4.1.0 5.2.0
The entered value is set. 6.3.0 7.4.0 8.5.0 1
When [START] key is pressed, printing is performed and the 9.AUTO(H) 10.1.0(H) 11.2.0(H)
adjustment value is set simultaneously. 12.3.0(H) 13.4.0(H) 14.5.0(H)
Check the density of print image.

Jam JAM
dures.
used with 10-key.
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
5 BPT Manual feed

46-15
SIMULATION 46-15
Purpose Adjustment EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE).SELECT 0-14,AND PRESS
(Purpose) (each super fine mode). (Only when FAX is
installed.)
2.EXP LEVEL 1 1
3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
Item Picture quality 6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50
∗ Normal mode (Print density adjustment level) and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
mode) SIMULATION 46-15
∗ Auto mode EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
PRESS START.
∗ Auto mode (Half-tone mode)
3.AUTO 50
3) Enter the print density level with 10-key. Select 1,
Set [START] key. or terminate copying.
Item Default
range
SIMULATION 46-15
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE). NOW PRINTING.
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
4 1.0 Exposure level 1 Select 0, and press [START] key.
7 4.0 Exposure level 4 EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS
START.
(FEED TRAY)
9 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone)
5.BPT
1
Select 2, and Press [START] key or
12 3.0 (H) Exposure level 3 (Half-tone) press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE). SELECT 3-14, AND PRESS
START.
The entered value is set. (EXP.LEVEL SELECT)
When [START] key is pressed, printing is performed and the 3.AUTO 4.1.0 5.2.0 1
adjustment value is set simultaneously. 6.3.0 7.4.0 8.5.0
9.AUTO(H) 10.1.0(H) 11.2.0(H)
Check the density of print image. 12.3.0(H) 13.4.0(H) 14.5.0(H)
Jam JAM
dures.
used with 10-key.
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
5 BPT Manual feed

46-16
SIMULATION 46-16
Purpose Adjustment EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE).SELECT 0-14,AND PRESS
(Purpose) (each ultra fine mode). (Only when FAX is
installed.) 2.EXP LEVEL 1 1
3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
Item Picture quality 6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50
adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 14.) Select other than 0 - 2,
and press [START] key.
∗ Normal mode (Print density adjustment level) Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

SIMULATION 46-16
mode) Select 1, EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
∗ Auto mode and press
PRESS START.
[START]
key. 3.AUTO 50
3) Enter the print density level with 10-key. Press [START] key.
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
or terminate copying.
Set
Item Default
range SIMULATION 46-16
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE). NOW PRINTING.
Select 0, and
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection press [START] key.
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
5 2.0 Exposure level 2 EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS
START.
(FEED TRAY)
7 4.0 Exposure level 4 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 1
8 5.0 Exposure level 5 5.BPT
13 4.0 (H) Exposure level 4 (Half-tone) EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE). SELECT 3-14, AND PRESS
START.
(EXP.LEVEL SELECT)
4) Press [P] key or [START] key. 3.AUTO 4.1.0 5.2.0 1
The entered value is set. 6.3.0 7.4.0 8.5.0
9.AUTO(H) 10.1.0(H) 11.2.0(H)
When [START] key is pressed, printing is performed and the 12.3.0(H) 13.4.0(H) 14.5.0(H)
Check the density of print image.
Normal display NOW PRINTING. 46-17
Jam JAM Purpose Setting
Function Used to set the gain in shading correction.
(Purpose)
Section Optical (Image scanning) CCD, CIS
dures.
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
tray selection mode.) 1) Enter the number corresponding to the adjustment item
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be 2) Press [START] key.
used with 10-key. 3) Enter the shading gain change value with 10-key.
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.) 4) Press [START] key.
There is normally no need to change the shading gain with this
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
simulation.
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
Only when the scanned image density is unsatisfactory though
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
shading is performed, the above procedure is performed.
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
5 BPT Manual feed Item Set range Default
1 CCD ODD 0 - 255 80
2 CCD EVEN
START key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and 3 CIS 128

Exposure level
SIMULATION 46-17
CCD/CIS SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP. SELECT 1-3, AND Item
PRESS START. 3 AUTO Auto
1.CCD ODD 80 2.CCD EVEN 80
3.CIS 128 4 1.0 Exposure level 1
SIMULATION 46-17 9 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone)
CCD SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP. INPUT VALUE 0-255,AND
PRESS START.
1.CCD ODD 80 11
12
2.0 (H)
3.0 (H)
Exposure level 2 (Half-tone)
Exposure level 3 (Half-tone)
46-18 14 5.0 (H) Exposure level 5 (Half-tone)
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the gamma (density gradient) in the Normal display NOW PRINTING.
(Purpose) copy mode. ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Item Picture quality Density Jam JAM
Operation/Procedure Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
(Copy mode selection) (Gamma adjustment)
1) Select the number corresponding to the copy mode to be After completion of the above procedures, perform the following
adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 18.) procedures.
2) Press [START] key. 1) Enter the gamma level with 10-key.
(Print mode selection in the FAX mode) 2) Enter [P] key or [START] key.
1) Enter 2 with 10-key. When [START] key is pressed, printing is performed and the
2) Press [START] key. adjustment value is set simultaneously.
3) Select the number corresponding to one of the following Check the gamma density (copy density in the low density
adjustment items. (Select one of 3 - 14.) area and the high density area) of printed copy image. The
greater the adjustment value is, the greater the gamma value
∗ Normal mode (Print density adjustment level)
is, resulting in a higher contrast.
(Copy condition setting in this simulation)
mode)
∗ Auto mode
dures.
Set 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
Item Default
range tray selection mode.)
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection 3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
1 PRINT START Print start (Default) used with 10-key.
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
3 OC_AE AE mode (OC) 0 - 127 64
4 OC_CHARA Text mode (OC) 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
5 OC_MIX Text/Photo mode (OC) 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
6 OC_PHOTO Photo mode (OC) 3 TRAY3 TRAY3
7 SPF1_AE AE mode (SPF1) 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
8 SPF1_CHARA Text mode (SPF1) 5 BPT Manual feed
9 SPF1_MIX Text/Photo mode (SPF1) NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value
10 SPF1_PHOTO Photo mode (SPF1) in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
11 SPF2_AE AE mode (SPF2) START key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
12 SPF2_CHARA Text mode (SPF2) copying is performed.
13 SPF2_MIX Text/Photo mode (SPF2)
14 SPF2_PHOTO Photo mode (SPF2)
15 CIS_AE AE mode (CIS)
16 CIS_CHARA Text mode (CIS)
17 CIS_MIX Text/Photo mode (CIS)
18 CIS_PHOTO Photo mode (CIS)

SIMULATION 46-18
GAMMA SETUP(COPIER). SELECT 0-18, AND PRESS START. 1 AE MODE AE mode
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START 2.EXP LEVEL 1 2 AE STOP MODE (COPIER) AE fixed mode (Copier)
3.OC_AE 64 4.OC_CHARA 5.OC_MIX 64 3 AE STOP MODE (SCANNER) AE fixed mode (Scanner)
6.OC_PHOTO 64
4 AE STOP MODE (FAX) AE fixed mode (FAX)
7.SPF1_AE 64 8.SPF1_CHARA 64 9.SPF1_MIX 64
10.SPF1_PHOTO 64
11.SPF2_AE 64 12.SPF2_CHARA 64 13.SPF2_MIX 64 Set
Mode Item Default
14.SPF2_PHOTO 64 value
15.CIS_AE 64 16.CIS_CHARA 64 17.CIS_MIX 64 AE 1 Image quality priority mode 2
18.CIS_PHOTO 64 mode (Normal mode)
Select other than 0 - 2, ∗ Gamma is sharp to provide
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. high contrast images.
2 Toner consumption priority mode
SIMULATION 46-18 ∗ Gamma is mild to provide low
GAMMA SETUP. INPUT VALUE 0-127, AND PRESS START. contrast images.
3.OC_AE
AE 0 AE fixed OFF 1 (COPIER)
64 fixed 1 AE fixed ON 0
mode (SCANNER/
Select 1,
and press Press [START] key.
FAX)
AE fixed OFF: The automatic density (exposure) control is per-
SIMULATION 46-18 formed in real time. (The density level is changed
GAMMA SETUP. NOW PRINTING. in real time according to the document pattern.)
AE fixed ON: The density at the lead edge of the document is
scanned, and the overall density (exposure) level is
Press [START] key, or determined according to the scanned density level.
Select 0, and press [START] key.
press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. (Overall density level fixed)
SIMULATION 46-18
SIMULATION 46-19
GAMMA SETUP(COPIER). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
EXP.MODE SETUP. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
1.AE MODE 2
2.AE STOP MODE(COPIER) 1
5.BPT
1 3.AE STOP MODE(SCANNER)0
4.AE STOP MODE(FAX) 0
Select 1, and
Select 2, and Press [START] key, or press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

GAMMA SETUP(COPIER). SELECT 3-14, AND PRESS EXP.MODE SETUP. INPUT VALUE 1-2, AND PRESS START.
START. 1.AE MODE
(EXP.LEVEL SELECT) 2
3.AUTO 4.1.0 5.2.0 1
6.3.0 7.4.0 8.5.0
Select 2, 3, or 4 and Press [START] key, or
9.AUTO(H) 10.1.0(H) 11.2.0(H)
12.3.0(H) 13.4.0(H) 14.5.0(H)
SIMULATION 46-19
EXP.MODE SETUP. INPUT VALUE 0-1, AND PRESS START.
2.AE STOP MODE(COPIER)
46-19 1
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to set the auto mode operation specifications
(Purpose) in each mode (copy, scan, FAX).
Operation/Procedure
(Toner save operation YES/NO setting in the auto mode)
1) Select "1. AE MODE" with 1-key.
3) Select the number corresponding to the operation specifica-
tions with 10-key.
When [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set.
(Operation setting in the auto copy mode)
1) Select the number corresponding to the mode with 10-key.
(Select one of 2 - 4.)
10-key.

46-20
SIMULATION 46-20
Purpose Adjustment OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS START.
Function Used to adjust the copy density correction in the
(Purpose) SPF copy mode for the document table copy
2.EXP LEVEL
3.SPF(ODD)
1
128 1
mode. The adjustment is made so that the copy 4.SPF(EVEN) 128
5.DSPF 128
density becomes the same as that of the
document table copy mode. Select other than 0 - 2, and press [START] key.
Section SPF Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Item Picture quality Density SIMULATION 46-20

Operation/Procedure OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-255, AND PRESS
START.
(Adjustment mode selection)
3.SPF(ODD)
128
adjusted with 10-key. Press [START] key.
Select 1,
SPF odd pixel (Front surface copy), SPF even pixel (Front sur- and press
[START] key.
face copy), SPF (Back surface copy) (Select one of 3 - 5.)
2) Press [SATART] key. SIMULATION 46-20
OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. NOW PRINTING.
(Copy density level adjustment)
1) Enter the density correction value with 10-key. Select 0, and Press [START] key or
(Copy condition setting in this simulation) SIMULATION 46-20
OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce- (FEED TRAY)
dures. 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. 5.BPT 1
2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed Select 2, and Press [START] key or
tray selection mode.) press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 46-20
used with 10-key. OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 3-8, AND PRESS START.
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.) (EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
3.1.0 4.1.5 5.2.0
6.2.5
9.4.0
7.3.0
10.4.5
8.3.5
11.5.0
1
46-21
Set
Item Content Default
range Purpose Adjustment
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection – – Function Used to adjust the scanner exposure level in all
1: TRAY1 (Purpose) the scanner modes.
2: TRAY2 Item Picture quality Density
3: TRAY3 Operation/Procedure
4: TRAY4
1) Select "SCANNER EXP. LEVEL" with 10-key.
5: Manual feed
1 PRINT START Print start (Default) – – 2) Press [START] key.
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection – – 3) Enter the image density adjustment value.
3: Exposure level 1.0 4) Press [P] key or [START] key.
4: Exposure level 1.5 NOTE: When this simulation is performed to adjust the scan image
5: Exposure level 2.0 densities, all the image densities in all the scan modes are
6: Exposure level 2.5 changed to the image density level set with this simulation.
7: Exposure level 3.0 That is, the image densities set with SIM 46-22, 23, 24, 25,
8: Exposure level 3.5 and 45 are changed to the image density level set with this
9: Exposure level 4.0 simulation.
10: Exposure level 4.5
11: Exposure level 5.0 Set
Item Default
3 SPF (ODD) SPF (front) (odd pixel) 0 - 255 128 range
4 SPF (EVEN) SPF (front) (even pixel) 0 SCANNER EXP. LEVEL Image density level 0 - 99 50
5 DSPF DSPF (Back surface) NOTE: Only the set value is changed and no printing is performed.
• "Set value - 128" is added to the shading adjustment value (SIM
46-17).

46-23
SIMULATION 46-21
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(AUTO SET), PRESS START. Purpose Adjustment
0.SCANNER EXP.LEVEL 50 Function Used to adjust the scanner exposure level in the
0 (Purpose) fine text mode.
Press [START] key. Press [START] key, or
Operation/Procedure
press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following
SIMULATION 46-21
∗ Normal mode (Image density adjustment level)
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(AUTO SET), INPUT VALUE 0-99, ∗ Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) (Half-tone
AND PRESS START. mode)
0.SCANNER EXP.LEVEL 50 ∗ Auto mode
46-22
3) Enter the image density adjustment value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment 4) Press [START] key or press [P] key.
Function Used to adjust the scanner exposure level in the
(Purpose) normal text mode.
Item Picture quality Density Set
Item Default
Operation/Procedure range
0 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 0 - 5.) 1 1.0 Exposure level 1
∗ Normal mode (Image density adjustment level)
∗ Auto mode
3) Enter the image density adjustment value with 10-key. 6 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone)
4) Press [START] key or press [P] key. 7 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1 (Half-tone)
The adjustment value is set. 8 2.0 (H) Exposure level 2 (Half-tone)
Set 9 3.0 (H) Exposure level 3 (Half-tone)
Item Default 10 4.0 (H) Exposure level 4 (Half-tone)
range
0 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50 11 5.0 (H) Exposure level 5 (Half-tone)
1 1.0 Exposure level 1 NOTE: Only the set value is changed and no printing is performed.
4 4.0 Exposure level 4 EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(FINE). SELECT 0-11,AND PRESS
5 5.0 Exposure level 5 START.
NOTE: Only the set value is changed and no printing is performed.

0.AUTO 50 1.1.0 50
3.3.0 50 4.4.0 50
2.2.0 50
5.5.0 50
1
6.AUTO(H) 50 7.1.0(H) 50 8.2.0(H) 50
9.3.0(H) 50 10.4.0(H) 50 11.5.0(H) 50
SIMULATION 46-22
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(NORMAL). SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS
START.
0.AUTO 50 1.1.0 50 2.2.0 50 Select other than 0 - 11, and Press [START] key, or
3.3.0 50 4.4.0 50 5.5.0 50 1 press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 46-23
Select other than 0 - 5, and Press [START] key, or press EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(FINE). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
press [START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. PRESS START.
0.AUTO
50
SIMULATION 46-22
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(NORMAL), INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
PRESS START.
0.AUTO 50

46-24 46-25
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the scanner exposure level in the Function Used to adjust the scanner exposure level in the
(Purpose) super fine text mode. (Purpose) ultra fine text mode.
Item Picture quality Density Item Picture quality Density
1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following 1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following
adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 0 - 11.) adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 0 - 11.)
∗ Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) ∗ Normal mode (Image density adjustment level)
∗ Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) (Half-tone ∗ Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) (Half-tone
mode) mode)
∗ Auto mode ∗ Auto mode
∗ Auto mode (Half-tone mode) ∗ Auto mode (Half-tone mode)
3) Enter the image density adjustment value with 10-key. 3) Enter the image density adjustment value with 10-key.
4) Press [START] key or press [P] key. 4) Press [START] key or press [P] key.
The adjustment value is set. The adjustment value is set.
Set Set
Item Default Item Default
range range
0 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50 0 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
1 1.0 Exposure level 1 1 1.0 Exposure level 1
6 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone) 6 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone)
7 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1 (Half-tone) 7 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1 (Half-tone)
NOTE: Only the set value is changed and no printing is performed. NOTE: Only the set value is changed and no printing is performed.

EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(SUPER FINE). SELECT 0-11,AND EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(ULTRA FINE). SELECT 0-11,AND
PRESS START. PRESS START.
0.AUTO 50 1.1.0 50 2.2.0 50 0.AUTO 50 1.1.0 50 2.2.0 50
3.3.0 50 4.4.0 50 5.5.0 50 1 3.3.0 50 4.4.0 50
6.AUTO(H) 50
5.5.0
7.1.0(H) 50
50
8.2.0(H) 50
6.AUTO(H) 50 7.1.0(H) 50 8.2.0(H) 50
9.3.0(H) 50 10.4.0(H) 50 11.5.0(H) 50 9.3.0(H) 50 10.4.0(H) 50 11.5.0(H) 50
Select other than 0 - 11, and Press [START] key, or

Select other than 0 - 11, and Press [START] key, or press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 46-25
SIMULATION 46-24 EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(ULTRA FINE). INPUT VALUE 0-99,
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(SUPER FINE). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START.
AND PRESS START.
0.AUTO
50
0.AUTO
50

46-27 Set
Item Default
range
Purpose Adjustment
1 OC_AE AE mode (OC) 1-5 3
Function Used to adjust the gamma (density gradient) of the
2 OC_CHARA Text mode (OC)
(Purpose) network scanner mode.
3 OC_MIX Text/Photo mode (OC)
4 OC_PHOTO Photo mode (OC)
Operation/Procedure
5 SPF1_AE AE mode (SPF1)
(Scanner mode selection)
6 SPF1_CHARA Text mode (SPF1)
1) Select the number corresponding to the scanner mode to be 7 SPF1_MIX Text/Photo mode (SPF1)
8 SPF1_PHOTO Photo mode (SPF1)
9 SPF2_AE AE mode (SPF2)
(Gamma adjustment) 10 SPF2_CHARA Text mode (SPF2)
1) Enter the gamma level with 10-key. 11 SPF2_MIX Text/Photo mode (SPF2)
2) Press [START] key. 12 SPF2_PHOTO Photo mode (SPF2)
The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the gamma is, 13 CIS_AE AE mode (CIS)
resulting in a higher contrast. 14 CIS_CHARA Text mode (CIS)
15 CIS_MIX Text/Photo mode (CIS)
Set
Item Default 16 CIS_PHOTO Photo mode (CIS)
range
1 OC_Fine.HT Fine text (Half-tone) (OC) 0 - 127 64 ∗ SPF1: DSPF front surface (CCD)
2 OC_SFine.HT Super fine (Half-tone) ∗ SPF2: DSPF back surface (CCD)
(OC)
3 OC_UFine.HT Ultra fine (Half-tone) (OC) SIMULATION 46-31
SHARPNESS LEVEL SETUP. SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS START.
4 SPF1_Fine.HT Fine text (Half-tone)
1.OC_AE 3 2.OC_CHARA 3 3.OC_MIX 3
(SPF1) 4.OC_PHOTO 3 5.SPF1_AE 3 6.SPF1_CHARA 3
5 SPF1_SFine.HT Super fine (Half-tone) 7.SPF1_MIX 3 8.SPF1_PHOTO 3 9.SPF2_AE 3
(SPF1) 10.SPF2_CHARA 3 11.SPF2_MIX 3 12.SPF2_PHOTO 3
6 SPF1_UFine.HT Ultra fine (Half-tone) 13.CIS_AE 3 14.CIS_CHARA 3 15.CIS_MIX 3
(SPF1) 16.CIS_PHOTO 3
7 SPF2_Fine.HT Fine text (Half-tone)
(SPF2) Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
8 SPF2_SFine.HT Super fine (Half-tone)
(SPF2)
SIMULATION 46-31
9 SPF2_UFine.HT Ultra fine (Half-tone)
SHARPNESS LEVEL SETUP. INPUT VALUE 1-5, AND PRESS
(SPF2) START.
10 CIS_Fine.HT Fine text (Half-tone) (CIS) 1.OC_AE
11 CIS_SFine.HT Super fine (Half-tone)
(CIS)
12 CIS_UFine.HT Ultra fine (Half-tone) (CIS)
46-39
SIMULATION 46-27 Purpose Adjustment
GAMMA SETUP(SCANNER). SELECT 1-12, AND PRESS START.
Function Used to adjust sharpness of the FAX mode.
1.OC_Fine.HT 64 2.OC_SFine.HT 64 3.OC_UFine.HT 64
4.SPF1_Fine.HT 64 5.SPF1_SFine.HT 64 6.SPF1_UFine.HT 64
(Purpose)
7.SPF2_Fine.HT 64 8.SPF2_SFine.HT 64 9.SPF2_UFine.HT 64 Item Picture quality
10.CIS_Fine.HT 64 11.CIS_SFine.HT 64 12.CIS_UFine.HT 64 Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the sharpness level with 10-key.
46-31
The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the sharpness is.
Purpose Adjustment Default: 3 (Normal), 1 (Halftone)
Function Used to adjust sharpness of the copy mode.
(Purpose)
Operation/Procedure
(Copy mode selection)
(Sharpness adjustment)
The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the sharpness is.

FAX SHARPNESS LEVEL SETUP. SELECT 1-12, AND PRESS EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(600dpi). SELECT 0-14, AND PRESS START.
START. 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
1:OC_NORMAL 3 2:OC_FINE 3 3:OC_FINE(H) 1
2.EXP LEVEL 1
4:OC_SFINE 3 5:OC_SFINE(H) 1 6:OC_UFINE 3
7:OC_UFINE(H) 1 8:OC_600 3 9:OC_600(H) 3 3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
10:SPF1_NORMAL 3 11:SPF1_FINE 3 12:SPF1_FINE(H) 1 6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50 1
13:SPF1_SFINE 3 14:SPF1_SFINE(H) 1 15:SPF1_UFINE 3 9.AUTO(H) 50 10.1.0(H) 50 11.2.0(H) 50
16:SPF1_UFINE(H) 1 17:SPF1_600 3 18:SPF1_600(H) 1 12.3.0(H) 50 13.4.0(H) 50 14.5.0(H) 50
19:SPF2_NORMAL 3 20:SPF2_FINE 3 21:SPF2_FINE(H) 1
22:SPF2_SFINE 3 23:SPF2_SFINE(H) 1 24:SPF2_UFINE 3 Select other than 0 - 2,
25:SPF2_UFINE(H) 1 26:SPF2_600 3 27:SPF2_600(H) 1 and press [START] key.
28:CIS_NORMAL 3 29:CIS_FINE 3 30:CIS_FINE(H) 1
31:CIS_SFINE 3 32:CIS_SFINE(H) 1 33:CIS_UFINE 3
SIMULATION 46-45
34:CIS_UFINE(H) 1 35:CIS_600 3 36:CIS_600(H) 1
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(600dpi),INPUT VALUE 0-99,AND PRESS
START.
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 3.AUTO 50
Select 1, and Press [START] key.
SIMULATION 46-39 Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
press [START] key. or terminate copying.
FAX SHARPNESS LEVEL SETUP. INPUT VALUE 1-3, AND PRESS
START.
1:OC_NORMAL SIMULATION 46-45
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(600dpi). NOW PRINTING.

46-45 Select 0, and press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the image density in the FAX mode SIMULATION 46-45
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(600dpi). SELECT 1-5,AND PRESS START.
(Purpose) (600dpi).
(FEED TRAY)
Item Picture quality 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4
Operation/Procedure 5:BPT 1
∗ Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
∗ Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) (Half-tone
mode)
SIMULATION 46-45
∗ Auto mode
EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(600dpi). SELECT 3-8,AND PRESS START.
∗ Auto mode (Half-tone mode) (EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
2) Press [START] key. 3.AUTO
6.3.0
4.1.0
7.4.0
5.2.0
8.5.0
1
3) Enter the image density adjustment value with 10-key.
9.AUTO(H) 10.1.0(H) 11.2.0(H)
4) Press [START] key or press [P] key. 12.3.0(H) 13.4.0(H) 14.5.0(H)
Set
Item Default
range 46-46
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust sharpness of the scanner mode.
(Purpose)
Operation/Procedure
10 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1 (Half-tone) 2) Press [START] key.
11 2.0 (H) Exposure level 2 (Half-tone) The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the sharpness is.
12 3.0 (H) Exposure level 3 (Half-tone) Set range: 1 - 3
13 4.0 (H) Exposure level 4 (Half-tone) Default: 3 (Normal), 1 (Halftone)

(Copy magnification ratio adjustment)
SIMULATION 46-46 1) Select the number corresponding to the copy magnification
SCANNER SHARPNESS LEVEL SETUP. SELECT 1-28, AND PRESS
ratio adjustment mode to be adjusted with 10-key. (Select one
START.
1:OC_NORMAL 3 2:OC_FINE 3 3:OC_FINE(H) 1 of 3 - 7.)
4:OC_SFINE 3 5:OC_SFINE(H) 1 6:OC_UFINE 3 2) Press [START] key.
7:OC_UFINE(H) 1
8:SPF1_NORMAL 3 9:SPF1_FINE 3 10:SPF1_FINE(H) 1 3) Enter the copy magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
11:SPF1_SFINE 3 12:SPF1_SFINE(H) 1 13:SPF1_UFINE 3 key.
14:SPF1_UFINE(H) 1
15:SPF2_NORMAL 3 16:SPF2_FINE 3 17:SPF2_FINE(H) 1
18:SPF2_SFINE 3 19:SPF2_SFINE(H) 1 20:SPF2_UFINE 3 When the [START] key is pressed, copying is performed and
21:SPF2_UFINE(H) 1 the adjustment value is set simultaneously.
22:CIS_NORMAL 3 23:CIS_FINE 3 24:CIS_FINE(H) 1
25:CIS_SFINE 3 26:CIS_SFINE(H) 1 27:CIS_UFINE 3 The copy magnification ratio in the sub scan direction can be
28:CIS_UFINE(H) 1 adjusted by changing the scan speed (motor RPM).
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Jam JAM
SIMULATION 46-46 Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
SCANNER SHARPNESS LEVEL SETUP. INPUT VALUE 1-3, AND The greater the value is, the greater the correction is. One step
PRESS START. corresponds to 0.1% adjustment.
1:OC_NORMAL 3 (Copy condition setting in this simulation)
∗ To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
dures.
48 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
48-1 3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray of the
Purpose Adjustment selected paper with 10-key. (Select one of 1 - 5.)
Function Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio (in the 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
(Purpose) main scanning and the sub scanning directions).
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
Operation/Procedure 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
(Adjustment mode selection) 5 BPT Manual feed
When the total of the above set value (1 - 5) and 10 is entered, the
mode is changed to the duplex mode.
∗ The copy magnification ratio can be set with the following
Item Set range Default 1) Enter 2 with 10-key.
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-5 – 2) Press [START] key.
selection
3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key.
1 COPY START Copy START – –
(Default)
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 25 - 400% – Set range 25 - 400%
ratio NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering the adjustment
3 CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 0 - 99 50 value, the adjustment value is set. When [START] key is
magnification ratio pressed instead, the adjustment value is set and copying is
adjustment (CCD) performed.
4 CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
5 SPF (MAIN) SPF front surface
magnification ratio
adjustment (Main
scan)
6 SPF (SUB) SPF front surface
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
scan)
7 CIS (MAIN) SPF back surface
magnification ratio
adjustment (CIS
main scan)

SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START. SIMULATION 48-5
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.COPY START MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS START.
2.MAGNIFICATION 100 2 0.MIR(220) 50 1.MIR(169) 50
5.SPF(MAIN) 50 6.SPF(SUB) 50 7.CIS(MAIN) 50
2.MIR(110) 50
4.SPF(220) 50
3.MIR(55) 50
5.SPF(110) 50
0
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Select other than 0 - 5, and Press [START] key, or
SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
SIMULATION 48-5
START.
4.CCD(SUB) 50 SCAN MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
PRESS START.
Select 1, and
Press [START] key.
0.MIR(220)
50
SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING. 48-6
Purpose Adjustment
Select 0, and press [START] key. Function HSYNC cycle adjustment
(Purpose)
SIMULATION 48-1 Item Picture quality
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START. Operation/Procedure
(FEED TRAY)
1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 (Adjustment mode selection)
5.BPT 6.LCC 1 1) Select the number corresponding to the HSYNC cycle to be
(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE) adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 3.)
press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Set
Item Default
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection – –
SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. 1 COPY START Copy START (Default) – –
(MAGNIFICATION) 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification ratio 25 - 400 –
INPUT 25-400(%) 100 3 CIS CIS HSYNC cycle 40 - 60 50
(HSYNC cycle adjustment)
1) Select the number corresponding to the HSYNC cycle to be
48-5
adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 3.)
Purpose Adjustment 2) Press [START] key.
Function Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio in the 3) Enter the HSYNC cycle adjustment value with 10-key.
(Purpose) sub scanning direction.
When the [START] key is pressed, copying is performed and
the adjustment value is set simultaneously.
Operation/Procedure
When the sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjust-
ment with SIM 48-1 cannot provide a satisfactory result if a differ-
ent magnification ration is set and a copy is made, perform this Jam JAM
simulation. Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in reduction (Copy condition setting in this simulation)
copy, change the adjustment value of the high speed mode. When ∗ To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in enlargement dures.
copy, change the adjustment value of the low speed mode.
1) Select the number corresponding to the adjustment mode with
10-key.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray of the
3) Enter the copy adjustment value with 10-key. selected paper with 10-key. (Select one of 1 - 5.)
The scanner/SPF motor rotation sped adjustment value is 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
entered.
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
Set 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
range 3 TRAY3 TRAY3
0 MIR (220) Mirror motor (220mm/sec) 0 - 99 50 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
1 MIR (169) Mirror motor (168.7mm/sec) 5 BPT Manual feed
2 MIR (110) Mirror motor (110mm/sec)
3 MIR (55) Mirror motor (55mm/sec)
mode is changed to the duplex mode.
4 SPF (220) SPF motor (220mm/sec)
5 SPF (110) SPF motor (110mm/sec)

∗ The copy magnification ratio can be set with the following 2) Enter the file/folder number of firmware that tries to be
1) Enter 2 with 10-key. updated with 10-key, and press [START] key.
2) Press [START] key. 3) If selecting the file, "FIRMWARE UPDATE.. ARE YOU SURE
3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key. ?" is displayed. ([1]: execute, [2]: get back)
4) Press [START] key. ∗ If the operation is normally completed, "COMPLEATE" is

displayed. When the error occurs, "ERROR" is displayed.
Set range 25 - 400%
SIMULATION 49-1
SIMULATION 48-6
FIRMWARE UPDATE.
HSYNC CYCLE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-3, AND PRESS START.
SELECT FIRMUP FILE, AND PRESS START. 0
1. FILE1.sfu
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
3.CIS 50
2 2. FILE2.sfu
3. FILE3.sfu
.
and press [START] key. .
19. >>NEXT Page
SIMULATION 48-6
HSYNC CYCLE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
START.
3.CIS 50
50
Select 1, and Press [START] key.
50-1
HSYNC CYCLE ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
Function Used to adjust the copy image position and the
(Purpose) void area (image loss) adjustment on print paper
in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment can be
Press [START] key, or performed with SIM 50-5 and 50-2 (Simplified
press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. method).) (Document table mode)
Item Picture quality Image position
SIMULATION 48-6
Operation/Procedure
HSYNC CYCLE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY) (Lead edge image loss/void area adjustment)
1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment value (LEAD EDGE)
5.BPT 1 and the paper lead edge void adjustment value (DENA) as fol-
(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE) lows.
(Standard set value) Lead edge image loss: 1.5mm (LEDA:
press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 15)
Paper lead edge void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35)
SIMULATION 48-6 ∗ Set LEAD to 15. (Enter 15 as the adjustment value of LEAD,
HSYNC CYCLE ADJUSTMENT. and press [P] key.) (0.1mm/step)
(MAGNIFICATION) ∗ Set DENA to 35. (Enter 35 as the adjustment value of
INPUT 25-400(%) 100 DENA, and press [P] key.) (0.1mm/step)
2) Make a copy at the normal ratio (100%) and check the lead
edge void area and the image loss. (Enter 100 as the set value
of the copy magnification ratio (MAGNIFICATION), and press
49 [START] key.)
ing procedures.
49-1
∗ If the lead edge void are is not 3.5mm:
Purpose Setting/update Change the adjustment value of RRCB and perform the
Function Firmware updating adjustment. (Change the adjustment value of RRCB and
(Purpose) press [START] key.) (1msec/step)
Section — ∗ If the lead edge image loss is not 1.5mm:
Operation/Procedure Change the adjustment value of RRCA and perform the
adjustment. (Change the adjustment value of RRCA and
1) Before proceeding to the SIM 49-1 screen, insert the USB
press [START] key.)
memory to the main unit.
∗ File and folder of the USB memory are displayed. (When the
(Rear edge void area adjustment)
foldername is longer than 34 characters, it is not completely
displayed.) Adjust so that the rear edge void area is 3.5mm. (Change the
adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE, and press [START] key.)
∗ If the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A USB MEM-
ORY DEVICE CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE, PLEASE (Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
USE FAT (12/16) FORMAT" is displayed. Set the adjustment value of SIDE to 20. (Enter 20 as the adjust-
∗ Non compliant to FAT32. If it's inserted, "CAN NOT SUP- ment value of SIDE, and press [P] key.)
PORT FAT32. PLEASE USE FAT (12/16) FORMAT" is dis- When the adjustment value is changed, the image position is
played. shifted in the front/rear frame direction.

(Front/rear frame direction void area adjustment)
SIMULATION 50-1
Adjust so that the total of the front/rear direction void areas is
7.0mm. (Change the adjustment values of FRONT/REAR, and 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.COPY START
press [START] key.) 2.MAGNIFICATION 100 2
Front frame void area = 3.5mm Rear frame void area = 3.5mm (ADJUSTMENT DATA) 3.RRCA 50 4.RRCB 50 10.SIDE2 ADJ. 50
(IMAGE LOSS SETTING) 5.LEAD 15 6.SIDE 20
If, as shown above, the front and the rear void areas are not even, (VOID SETTING) 7.LEAD_EDGE(DENA) 35
use SIM 50-5 to adjust the image off-center position. 8.TRAIL_EDGE(DENB) 35 9.FRONT/REAR 32
Set Select other than 0 - 2, and press [START] key.

Item Content Default Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-5 – SIMULATION 50-1
selection LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
1 COPY START Copy START (Default) – – START.
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 25 - –
3.RRCA 50
ratio 400% Select 1, and Press [START] key.
(Lead edge adjustment value) press [START] key.
3 RRCA Document scan start 0 - 99 50
SIMULATION 50-1
position LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
4 RRCB Resist roller clutch ON
timing adjustment
value
Select 0, and press [START] key. Press [START] key or
10 SIDE2 ADJ. Correction value for 1 - 99 50 press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
RRCB when refereeing
SIMULATION 50-1
from ADU
(Image loss set value) (FEED TRAY)
5 LEAD Lead edge image loss
set value
0 - 99 15 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4
5.BPT
1
6 SIDE Side image loss set 20
value press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
(Void set value)
7 LEAD_EDGE Lead edge void set 0 - 99 35 SIMULATION 50-1
(DENA) value LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT.
8 TRAIL_EDGE Rear edge void
(DENB) adjustment value
(MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%)
100
9 FRONT/REAR Front/Rear void 32
adjustment value
50-2
NOTE: When [P] is pressed after entering an adjustment value,
the adjustment value is set. When [START] key is pressed Purpose Adjustment
instead, the adjustment value is set and copying is per- Function Used to adjust the document scan position, the
formed.) (Purpose) image print position, and the void area (image
loss). (Simple adjustment) (This adjustment is the
simple method of SIM 50-1.) (Document table
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. mode)
Jam JAM Item Picture quality Image position
Operation/Procedure
(Copy condition in this simulation) (Lead edge image loss/void area adjustment)
∗ To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce- 1) Set the RRGB value of SIM 50-1 to 80 - 99.
dures. 2) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment value (LEAD EDG)
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. and the paper lead edge void adjustment value (DENA) to the
2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed values specified below.
tray selection mode.) (Standard set value) Lead edge image loss: 1.5mm
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray of the Paper lead edge void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35)
target paper with 10-key. ∗ Set the adjustment value of LEAD to 15. (Enter 15 as the
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.) adjustment value of LEAD and press [P] key.
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 ∗ Set the adjustment value of DENA to 35. (Enter 35 as the
adjustment value of DENA and press [P] key.)
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 3) Set the adjustment value of L1 to 0. (Enter 0 as the adjustment
value of L1, and press [P] key.)
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
5 BPT Manual feed 4) Set the adjustment value of L2 to 0. (Enter 0 as the adjustment
value of L2, and press [P] key.)
∗ To set the magnification ratio, perform the following procedure.
5) Make a copy at 400%, and calculate the values of L1 and L2.
1) Enter 2 with 10-key. (Enter 100 as the set value (MAGNIFICATION) of the copy
2) Press [START] key. magnification ratio, and press [START] key.) (Place a scale on
3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key. the document table and make a copy.)
4) Press [START] key. L1 = Distance (mm) from the image lead edge position to the
scale position of 10mm x 10
Set range 25 - 400 (%)
L2 = Distance (mm) from the image lead edge position to the
paper lead edge x 10

6) Enter the above values as the set values of L1 and L2. (Enter (Copy condition in this simulation)
the adjustment values of L1 and L2, and press [P] key.) ∗ To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
If the adjustment result is not satisfactory, perform the above pro- dures.
cedures again from the beginning, or use SIM 50-1 to adjust. 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
NOTE: If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
dures, through the adjustment values are changed individ- tray selection mode.)
ually, the normal adjustment cannot be made.
Perform procedures 3) to 6) continuously. target paper with 10-key.
(Rear edge void area adjustment) 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
Adjust so that the rear edge void area is 3.5mm. (Change the 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE, and press [START] key.) 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment) 3 TRAY3 TRAY3
Set the adjustment value of SIDE to 20. (Enter 20 as the adjust- 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
ment value of SIDE, and press [P] key.) 5 BPT Manual feed
When this adjustment value is changed, the image position is ∗ To set the magnification ratio, perform the following procedure.
(Front/rear frame direction void area adjustment) 2) Press [START] key.
Adjust so that the total of the front/rear direction void areas is 3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key.
7.0mm. (Change the adjustment values of FRONT/REAR, and
press [START] key.)
Front frame void area = 3.5mm Rear frame void area = 3.5mm Set range 25 - 400 (%)
If, as shown above, the front and the rear void areas are not even,
use SIM 50-5 to adjust the image off-center position. SIMULATION 50-2
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS
Set START.
range 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1.COPY START
2. MAGNIFICATION 400
2
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-5 – (ADJUSTMENT) 3.L1 320 4.L2 105
selection (IMAEG LOSS SETTING) 5.LEAD 15 6.SIDE 20
1 COPY START Copy START – – (VOID SETTING) 7.LEAD_EDGE(DENA) 35
(Default) 8.TRAIL_EDGE(DENB) 35 9.FRONT/REAR 32
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 25 - 400 Select other than 0 - 2, and press [START] key.
ratio 400% Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
(Lead edge adjustment value) SIMULATION 50-2

3 L1 Distance from the 0 - 999 – LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
image lead edge to START.
the scale of 10mm. 3.L1 320
(Platen 400%, Select 1,
Press [START] key.
0.1mm increment) and press Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
4 L2 Distance from the –
paper lead edge to SIMULATION 50-2
the image lead edge LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). NOW COPYING.
(0.1mm increment)
(Image loss set value)
5 LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 15 Select 0, and press [START] key.
loss set value
6 SIDE Side image loss set 20 SIMULATION 50-2
value LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS
(Void set value) START.
7 LEAD_EDGE Lead edge void set 0 - 99 35 (FEED TRAY)
1
(DENA) value
5.BPT

(DENB) adjustment value press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
9 FRONT/REAR Front/Rear void 32
adjustment value SIMULATION 50-2
NOTE: When [P] is pressed after entering an adjustment value, LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC).
the adjustment value is set. When [START] key is pressed (MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%)
100
instead, the adjustment value is set and copying is per-
formed.)
Jam JAM

50-5 (Table 1)
Purpose Adjustment Default

Set
Function Used to adjust the print image position and the Item MX- MX-
range
(Purpose) void area (image loss) on print paper. (Adjustment M350 M450
as the print engine) (This adjustment is reflected 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-5 –
on all the FAX/printer/copy modes.) selection
Item Picture quality 1 PRINT START Print start (Default) – –
(Lead edge adjustment value)
Operation/Procedure
2 RRCB Resist roller clutch 0 - 99 50
(Print image off-center position adjustment)
ON timing
1) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be adjustment value
adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 9 - 14.) (Table 1) 3 SIDE2 ADJ. Correction value for 50
2) Press [START] key. RRCB when
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. refereeing from ADU
4) Press [P] key or [START] key. When [START] key is pressed, (Resist adjustment value)
the adjustment value is set and printing is performed. (Table 2) 4 T1 Tray 1 adjustment 0 - 99 65 60
Check the off-center of the self-print patter of print-out. 5 T2 Tray 2 adjustment 55 50
(Shift for the adjustment value change: 0.1mm/step) 6 DESK Tray 4 adjustment 55 50
7 BPT Manual feed tray 60 55
The greater the adjustment value is, the more the print image is
adjustment
shifted to the front.
8 ADU Adjustment when 55 50
(Lead edge void area adjustment) paper is fed again
1) Set the lead edge void adjustment value (DENA) as specified from ADU
below. (Off-center set value) Self print
(Standard set value) Paper lead edge void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35) 9 T1 Tray 1 adjustment 0 - 99 50
∗ Set the adjustment value of DENA to 35. Enter 35 as the 10 T2 Tray 2 adjustment
adjustment value of DENA, and press [P] key. 11 T3 Tray 3 adjustment
2) Check the lead edge void area on the self print pattern. 12 T4 Tray 4 adjustment
(Enter 1 and press [START] key.) 13 BPT Manual feed tray
adjustment
14 ADU Adjustment when
ing procedures.
paper is fed again
∗ If the lead edge void area is not 3.5mm: from ADU
(Void set value)
15 LEAD_EDGE Lead edge void set 0 - 99 35
press [START] key.)
(DENA) value
(Front/rear frame direction void area adjustment) (DENB) adjustment value
Adjust so that the total of the front/rear direction void areas is 17 FRONT/REAR Front/Rear void 32
7.0mm. (Change the adjustment values of FRONT/REAR, and adjustment value
press [START] key.)
Front frame void area = 3.5mm Rear frame void area = 3.5mm (Table 2)
(Paper resist adjustment) Normal display NOW PRINTING.

adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 4 - 8.) (Table 1) Jam JAM
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (Table 3)
4) Press [P] key or [START] key. When [START] key is pressed, 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
the adjustment value is set and printing is performed. (Table 2) 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
If the relative positions of paper and print images vary or a paper 3 TRAY3 TRAY3
jam occurs, change the adjustment value. 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
(Print condition setting in this simulation) 5 BPT Manual feed
dures.
used with 10-key. (Select one of 1 - 5.) (Table 3)
NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering the adjustment
value in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
[START] key is pressed instead, the adjustment value is set
and copying is performed.

(Rear edge image loss adjustment)
SIMULATION 50-5
1) Use the SPF at 100% to make a duplex copy, and check that
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START the rear edge image loss is 1.5mm on the front and the back
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)
LEAD EDGE: 2.RRCB 50 3.SIDE2 ADJ. 50
2 surfaces. (Select the duplex mode in the paper selection mode
of SIM 50-6.) (Enter 100 as the copy magnification ratio set
RESIST: 4.T1 60 5.T2 50 6.DESK 50
7.BPT 55 8.ADU 50 value (MAGNIFICATION), and press [START] key.)
OFF CENTER: 9.T1 50 10.T2 50 11.T3 50 12.T4 50 If the adjustment value is not satisfactory, perform the following
13.BPT 50 14.ADU 50
procedure.
(VOID SETTING) 15.LEAD_EDGE(DENA) 35 2) Change the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE. Change the
16.TRAIL_EDGE(DENB) 35 17.FRONT/REAR 32 adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE, and press [START] key.
Select other than 0 - 1, and press [START] key. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. obtained.
SIMULATION 50-5 (Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
Set the adjustment value of the front surface and the back surface
START.
2.RRCB 50 (FRONT/REAR) to 20. (Enter 20 as the adjustment value of
FRONT/REAR, and press [P] key.)
Select 1,
Press [START] key. When the adjustment value is changed, the image position is
SIMULATION 50-5
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. NOW PRINTING. value, the adjustment value is set. When [START] key is
pressed instead, the adjustment value is set and copying is
performed. (Table 2)

press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. ∗ To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
dures.
SIMULATION 50-5 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
(FEED TRAY)
1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 1 tray selection mode.)
5.BPT 3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE) used with 10-key. (Table 3)
50-6 ∗ To set the copy magnification ratio, perform the following proce-
dure.
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the copy image position and void
(Purpose) area (image loss) on print paper in the copy mode. 2) Press [START] key.
(The similar adjustment can be performed with 3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key.
SIM 50-7 (simple method).) (SPF mode) 4) Press [START] key.
Set range 25 - 200 (%)
Operation/Procedure
(Table 1)
(Lead edge image loss adjustment) (Table 1)
1) Set the front and back surface image loss adjustment values Set
Item Default
(LEAD EDGE) as specified below: range
(Standard set value) Lead edge image loss: 1.5mm (LEAD: 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-5 –
1.5)Paper lead edge: 3.5mm (DENA: 35) selection
∗ Set the adjustment value of LEAD to 15. (Enter 15 as the 1 COPY START Copy START (Default) – –
adjustment value of LEAD EDGE, and press [P] key.) 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification ratio 25 - –
2) Make a duplex copy at 100% with the SPF, and check that the 200%
lead edge (image loss) is 1.5mm either on the front surface (Lead edge adjustment value)
and the back surface. (Select the duplex mode in the paper 3 SIDE1 Front surface document 0 - 99 50
selection mode of SIM 50-6.) (Table 3) (Enter 100 as the copy scan start position
magnification ratio set value (MAGNIFICATION), and press adjustment value
[START] key.) 4 SIDE2 Back surface document
If the adjustment result is not satisfactory, perform the following scan start position
procedures: adjustment value
3) Change the adjustment values of SIDE1 and SIDE2, and per- (Image loss set value: SIDE 1)
form the adjustment. (Change the adjustment values of SIDE1 5 LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 15
and SIDE2, and press [START] key.) image loss set value
SIDE1: SPF front surface document lead edge scan position 6 FRONT_REAR Front surface side edge 20
adjustment value image loss set value
SIDE2: SPF back surface document lead edge scan position 7 TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 20 0
adjustment value image loss set value
(The image scan start timing is determined with the detection
timing of the document lead edge by the detector SPPD.)
Repeat procedures 2) and 3) until a satisfactory result is obtained.

Set 50-7
Item Default
range
Purpose Adjustment
(Image loss set value: SIDE 2)
Function Used to adjust the copy image position and void
8 LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 15 (Purpose) area (image loss) on print paper in the copy mode.
image loss set value (The similar adjustment can be performed with
9 FRONT/REAR Back surface side edge 20 SIM 50-6.) (SPF mode)
image loss set value Item Picture quality
10 TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 20 0 Operation/Procedure
(Lead edge image loss adjustment)
(Table 2) 1) Set the front and back surface image loss adjustment values
Normal display NOW COPYING. (LEAD EDGE) as specified below:
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. (Standard set value) Lead edge image loss: 1.5mm (LEAD:
Jam JAM 1.5)Paper lead edge void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35)
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY. ∗ Set the adjustment value of LEAD to 15. (Enter 15 as the
adjustment value of LEAD EDGE, and press [P] key.)
(Table 3)
2) Set the adjustment value of L4 to 0. (Enter 0 as the adjustment
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 value of L4, and press [P] key.
2 TRAY2 TRAY2 3) Set the adjustment value of L5 to 0. (Enter 0 as the adjustment
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 value of L5, and press [P] key.
4 TRAY4 TRAY4 4) Make a copy at 200% with the SPF, and calculate the values of
5 BPT Manual feed L4 and L5. (Enter 200 as the set value of the copy magnifica-
When the total of the above set value and 10 is entered, the mode tion ratio set value (MAGNIFICATION) and press [START]
is changed to the duplex mode (DD), and a duplex copy is made. key.)
L4 = Distance (mm) from the image lead edge position to the
SIMULATION 50-6 scale of 10mm x 10
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS L5 = Distance (mm) from the image lead edge position to the
START.
paper lead edge x 10
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
2 5) Enter the above values as the set values of L4 and L5. (Enter
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)3.SIDE1 50 4.SIDE2 50 the adjustment values of L4 and L5, and press [P] key.)
(IMAGE LOSS SETTING) (The image scan start timing is determined with the detection
SIDE1: 5.LEAD_EDGE 15 6.FRONT/REAR 20 7.TRAIL_EDGE 0 timing of the document lead edge by the detector SPPD.)
SIDE2: 8.LEAD_EDGE 15 9.FRONT/REAR 20 10.TRAIL_EDGE 0 If the adjustment result is not satisfactory, perform the above pro-
Select other than 0 - 2, and press [START] key.
cedures again or adjust with SIM 50-1.
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. NOTE: If the adjustment result of the above procedures is not sat-
isfactory, though the adjustment value is changed individu-
SIMULATION 50-6
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
ally, the adjustment cannot be completed normally.
START. Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
3.SIDE1 50 (Rear edge image loss adjustment)
Select 1, Adjust so that the rear edge image loss is 3.5mm. (Change the
Press [START] key.
and press Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE, and press [START] key.)
SIMULATION 50-6 (Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). NOW COPYING. Set the adjustment value of SIDE to 20. (Enter 20 as the adjust-
ment value of SIDE, and press [P] key.)
When the adjustment value is changed, the image position is
Press [START] key or shifted in the front/rear frame direction.
SIMULATION 50-6 value, the adjustment value is set. When [START] key is
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS pressed instead, the adjustment value is set and copying is
START. performed. (Table 2)
(FEED TRAY)
1 (Copy condition setting in this simulation)
5.BPT ∗ To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE) dures.
press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
SIMULATION 50-6 3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). used with 10-key. (Table 3)
(MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-200(%)
100 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
∗ To set the copy magnification ratio, perform the following proce-

dure.

SIMULATION 50-7
Set range 25 - 200 (%)
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS
(Table 1) START.
Set
0.TRAY SELECT 1
2.MAGNIFICATION 200
1.COPY START 2
Item Default
range (ADJUSTMENT DATA) 3.L4 160 4.L5 160
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-5 –
(IMAGE LOSS SETTING)
selection SIDE1: 5.LEAD_EDGE 15 6.FRONT/REAR 20 7.TRAIL_EDGE 0
1 COPY START Copy START (Default) – – SIDE2: 8.LEAD_EDGE 15 9.FRONT/REAR 20 10.TRAIL_EDGE 0
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 25 - –
Select other than 0 - 2, and press [START] key.
ratio 200% Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
(Lead edge adjustment value)
SIMULATION 50-7
3 L4 Distance from the 0 - 999 –
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.). INPUT VALUE 0-999, AND
front surface image
PRESS START.
lead edge to the scale
of 10mm (SPF: 200%)
3.L4 50
4 L5 Distance from the – Select 1,
Press [START] key.
back surface image and press Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
lead edge to the scale
of 10mm (SPF: 200%) SIMULATION 50-7
(Image loss set value: SIDE 1) LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.). NOW COPYING.
5 LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 15
edge image loss set Select 0, and press [START] key. Press [START] key or
value
6 FRONT_REAR Front surface side 20 SIMULATION 50-7
edge image loss set LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.). SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS
value START.
7 TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 20 0 (FEED TRAY)
1
edge image loss set
5.BPT
value
(Image loss set value: SIDE 2)
8 LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 15 Select 2, and Press [START] key, or
edge image loss set press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
value
9 FRONT/REAR Back surface side 20 SIMULATION 50-7
edge image loss set LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.).
value (MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-200(%)
100
10 TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 20 0
edge image loss set
value
50-10
(Table 2)
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the print image off-center position.
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. (Purpose) (Adjusted separately for each paper feed section.)
Jam JAM Item Picture quality Image position
Operation/Procedure
(Table 3) (Print image off-center position adjustment)
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 NOTE: This simulation cannot provide an accurate adjustment. Do
2 TRAY2 TRAY2 not use.
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 1) Enter the number corresponding to the number of the paper
4 TRAY4 TRAY4 feed tray to be adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 8.)
5 BPT Manual feed Item Set range Default
When the total of the above set value and 10 is entered, the mode 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-5 –
is changed to the duplex mode (DD), and a duplex copy is made. selection
1 COPY START Copy START (Default) – –
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 25 - 400% 100
ratio
(Off-center adjustment value)
3 TRAY1 Tray 1 adjustment 0 - 99 50
4 TRAY2 Tray 2 adjustment
7 BPT Manual feed tray
adjustment
8 ADU Adjustment when
paper is fed again from
ADU

3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. SIMULATION 50-10
4) Press [P] key or [START] key. When [START] key is pressed,
START.
the adjustment value set and copying is performed. 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.COPY START
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
2
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. (ADJUSTMENT DATA)
Jam JAM 3.TRAY1 50 4.TRAY2 50 5.TRAY3 50
6.TRAY4 50 7.BPT 50 8.ADU 50
(Image off-center adjustment) press [START] key.
2) Press [START] key. The adjustment pattern is printed. SIMULATION 50-10
PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
3) Check the off-center of the printed image.
PRESS START.
(UNIT: 0.1mm/step When the adjustment value is increased,
the print image is shifted to the front direction.)
3.TRAY1 50
NOTE: This adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-5. Select 1,
(Copy condition setting in this simulation) [START] key. or terminate copying.
∗ To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce- SIMULATION 50-10
dures. PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
used with 10-key. (Select one of 1 - 5)
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.) SIMULATION 50-10
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 START.
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
(FEED TRAY)
1
4 TRAY4 TRAY4 5.BPT
(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE)
5 BPT Manual feed
mode is changed to the duplex print mode. 50-12
∗ To set the copy magnification ratio, perform the following proce- Purpose Adjustment
dure. Function Used to adjust the scan image off-center position.
1) Enter 2 with 10-key. (Purpose) (Adjusted separately for each scan mode.)
2) Press [START] key. Section
3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key. Item Picture quality Image position
(Select the scan mode to be adjusted.)
Set range 25 - 400 (%)
1) Enter the number corresponding to the scan mode to be
NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering the adjustment adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 5.)
[START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and Item Set range Default
copying is performed. 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-5 –
selection
1 COPY START Copy START – –
(Default)
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 25 - 400% 100
ratio
(Resist adjustment value)
3 PLATEN OC mode 0 - 99 50
adjustment
4 SPF SIDE1 SPF front surface
adjustment
5 SPF SIDE2 SPF back surface
adjustment

(Scan off-center position adjustment)
1) Enter the scan image position adjustment value with 10-key. SIMULATION 50-12
START.
0.TRAY SELECT 1
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
1.COPY START 2
Normal display NOW COPYING. (ADJUSTMENT DATA)
3.PLATEN 50 4.SPF SIDE1 50 5.SPF SIDE2 50
Jam JAM
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY. Select other than 0 - 2, and press [START] key.
Check the off-center of the printed image.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is SIMULATION 50-12
ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
obtained.
PRESS START.
(UNIT: 0.1mm/step When the adjustment value is increased, the 3.PLATEN 50
print image is shifted to the front direction.)
Select 1,
(Copy condition setting in this simulation) and press Press [START] key.
[START] key.
∗ To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce- or terminate copying.
dures. SIMULATION 50-12

1) Enter 0 with 10-key. ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be Select 0, and press [START] key. Press [START] key or
used with 10-key. (Select one of 1 - 6)
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.) SIMULATION 50-12
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 START.
2
3
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY2
TRAY3
(FEED TRAY)
1
5.BPT
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE)
5 BPT Manual feed
When the total of the above set value (1 - 5) and 10 is entered, the Select 2, and Press [START] key, or
∗ To set the copy magnification ratio, perform the following proce-
dure. SIMULATION 50-12
ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT.
(MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%)
100
50-27
Set range 25 - 400 (%)
Purpose Adjustment
NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering the adjustment Function Used to adjust the image loss of the scan image in
value in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When (Purpose) the FAX/scan mode.
[START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
Operation/Procedure
(Select the scan mode to be adjusted.)
1) Enter the number corresponding to the adjustment item with
10-key.
Item Set range Default

FAX send
1 OC (LEAD_EDGE) OC lead edge 0 - 10 3
2 OC (FRONT/REAR) OC side (Unit 1mm) (3mm)
3 OC (TRAIL_EDGE) OC rear edge
4 SPF (LEAD_EDGE) SPF lead edge
5 SPF (FRONT/REAR) SPF side
6 SPF (TRAIL_EDGE) SPF rear edge
7 CIS (LEAD_EDGE) CIS lead edge
8 CIS (FRONT/REAR) CIS side
9 CIS (TRAIL_EDGE) CIS rear edge

Item Set range Default Default
Set
Scanner mode Item MX- MX-
range
M350 M450
10 OC (LEAD_EDGE) OC lead edge 0 - 10 0
(Unit 1mm) (0mm) 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-5 –
11 OC (FRONT/REAR) OC side selection
12 OC (TRAIL_EDGE) OC rear edge 1 PRINT START Copy start (Initial – –
13 SPF (LEAD_EDGE) SPF lead edge value)
14 SPF (FRONT/REAR) SPF side 2 TRAY1 Tray 1 resist 0 - 99 65 60
adjustment value
15 SPF (TRAIL_EDGE) SPF rear edge
3 TRAY2 Tray 2 resist 55 50
16 CIS (LEAD_EDGE) CIS lead edge
adjustment value
17 CIS (FRONT/REAR) CIS side 4 DESK Desk resist 55 50
18 CIS (TRAIL_EDGE) CIS rear edge adjustment value
5 BPT Manual tray resist 60 55
SIMULATION 50-27 adjustment value
ORIGINAL IMAGE LOSS SETTING(FAX/SCN). SELECT 1-18, AND 6 ADU ADU resist 55 50
PRESS START. adjustment value
[FAX] 1 7 SPF (HIGH) SPF resist 60 60
1.OC(LEAD_EDGE) 3 2.OC(FRONT/REAR) 3 3.OC(TRAIL_EDGE) 3
adjustment value
4.SPF(LEAD_EDGE) 3 5.SPF(FRONT/REAR) 3 6.SPF(TRAIL_EDGE) 3
(High speed)
7.CIS(LEAD_EDGE) 3 8.CIS(FRONT/REAR) 3 9.CIS(TRAIL_EDGE) 3
[SCN] 8 SPF (LOW) SPF resist 75 75
10.OC(LEAD_EDGE) 0 11.OC(FRONT/REAR) 0 12.OC(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 adjustment value
13.SPF(LEAD_EDGE) 0 14.SPF(FRONT/REAR) 0 15.SPF(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 (Low speed)
16.CIS(LEAD_EDGE) 0 17.CIS(FRONT/REAR) 0 18.CIS(TRAIL_EDGE) 0
(Resist adjustment)
1) Enter the resist adjustment value with 10-key.
SIMULATION 50-27
ORIGINAL IMAGE LOSS SETTING(FAX/SCN). INPUT 0-10, AND
paper feed and copying are performed.
PRESS START.
1.OC(LEAD_EDGE) Normal display NOW PRINTING.
3 ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Jam JAM

51 ∗ To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
dures.
51-2 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
Function Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper on tray selection mode.)
(Purpose) the resist roller of each section (each paper feed, 3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
duplex feed and SPF paper feed of the copier). used with 10-key.
(This adjustment is required when the print image 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
position variations are considerably great or when
paper jams occur frequently.) 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
Section Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport) 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
Item Operation 3 TRAY3 TRAY3
Operation/Procedure 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
(Select the scan mode to be adjusted.) 5 BPT Manual feed
1) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be When the total of the above set value (1 - 5) and 10 is entered, the
adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 2 - 12.) mode is changed to the duplex print mode.
[START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and

RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START. SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START 1.MAX.POSITION
2.TRAY1 60 3.TRAY2 50 4.DESK 50 2.POSITION 1
5.BPT 55 6.ADU 50 1 3.POSITION 2 1
7.SPF(HIGH) 60 8.SPF(LOW) 75 4.MIN.POSITION
Select other than 0 - 1, and Select 1, and

press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
START. MAX.POSITION ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
2.TRAY1 60
Select 1, Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
Press [START] key.
and press or terminate copying.
[START] key.
SIMULATION 53-6
SIMULATION 51-2 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. NOW PRINTING. POSITION 1 ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)

press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
SIMULATION 51-2 POSITION 2 ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY) Select 4, and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
5.BPT
SIMULATION 53-6
(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE) 1 SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
MIN.POSITION ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
53 53-7
(Display/Print)
53-6
Function Used to enter the SPF width detection adjustment
Purpose Adjustment (Purpose) value.
Function Used to adjust the DSPF width detection level. Section DSPF
(Purpose) Item Operation
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item Operation
1) Enter the number corresponding to the set item with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the SPF paper feed guide to the max. position. Item Set range Default
1 MAX. POSITION Max. width 0 - 1023 66
2) Select "MAX. POSITION" with 10-key.
2 POSITION 1 Adjustment position 1 456
3 POSITION 2 Adjustment position 2 713
The max. width detection level is recognized.
4 MIN. POSITION Min. width 791
5) Set the SPF paper feed guide to A4R size position. 2) Press [START] key.
6) Select POSITION 1 with 10-key. 3) Enter the set value with 10key.
The A4R width detection level is recognized. SIMULATION 53-7
8) Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT(MANUAL). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS
9) Set the SPF paper feed guide to A5R size position. START.
1.MAX.POSITION: 66
10) Select POSITION 2 with 10-key. 2.POSITION 1 : 456
11) Press [START] key. 3.POSITION 2 : 713 1
The A5R width detection level is recognized. 4.MIN.POSITION: 791

13) Set the SPF paper feed guide to the min. position. Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
14) Select "MIN. POSITION" with 10-key.

The min. width detection level is recognized. SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT(MANUAL). INPUT VALUE 0-1023, AND
PRESS START.
If the above procedures are not completed normally, ERROR is
displayed. When completed normally, COMPLETE is displayed.
1.MAX.POSITION 66

53-8
55
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the document scan start position.
55-1
(Purpose) (Used to adjust the scanner scan position in the
SPF mode front scan.) Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure Function Used to set the specifications of the engine control
(Purpose) operations. (PCU PWB)
(Automatic adjustment)
Section
1) Select 1 or 2 with 10-key.
Item Operation Specifications
Operation/Procedure
(Manual feed adjustment)
This simulation is used to change and check the engine soft SW.
1) Enter the adjustment value with 10key.
Set this setting to the default.
There is no need to change this setting in the market.
When an adjustment error occurs, the trouble code (E7-17) is dis-
played simultaneously with “COMPLETED.”
SIMULATION 55-1
Set ENGINNE SOFT SW. SETTING. SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS START.
Item Default
range
1 AUTO Automatic adjustment – –
2 MANUAL Manual feed adjustment 1 - 70 32
1
(Direct entry of a number) (1 count:
0.1mm)
SIMULATION 53-8
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START. SIMULATION 55-1
1.AUTO ENGINNE SOFT SW. SETTING. INPUT DATA No(1-8), AND PRESS
2.MANUAL. 32 START. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SOFT SW-1:
00001001
Select 2, and Select 1, and Press
press [START] key. press [START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
55-2
SIMULATION 53-8
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT EXECUTING.... Purpose Setting
1. AUTO Function Used to set the specifications of the scanner
1 (Purpose) control operations. (Scanner control PWB)
Section
Item Operation Specifications
Normal completion Trouble occurrence
Operation/Procedure
<Normal completion>
This simulation is used to change and check the scanner soft SW.
SIMULATION 53-8 Set this setting to the default.
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT COMPLETED.
1. AUTO There is no need to change this setting in the market.
1
SIMULATION 55-2
SCANNER SOFT SW. SETTING. SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS START.
<Trouble occurrence>
SIMULATION 53-8 TROUBLE !! (E7-17) 1

SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT COMPLETED.
1. AUTO
1 Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key.
Press [START] key, or SIMULATION 55-2

SCANNER SOFT SW. SETTING. INPUT DATA No(1-8), AND PRESS
START. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SIMULATION 53-8 SOFT SW-1:
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-70, AND 00001001
PRESS START.
2. MANUAL 32

55-3 3) The confirmation menu is opened to confirm YES/NO of data
transfer. Select one.
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set the specifications of the controller 1 YES Data transfer is executed.
(Purpose) operations. (MFP control PWB) 2 NO Data transfer is not executed.
Section 4) Press [START] key.
Item Operation Specifications After completion of transfer, the transfer result is displayed.
Operation/Procedure If there is no error, the machine is automatically reset after com-
This simulation is used to change and check the controller soft pletion of data transfer.
SW. Set this setting to the default. If there is an error, "NG" is displayed. (The machine is not reset.)
There is no need to change this setting in the market. When restoring from HDD, fit the configurations of the Flash ROM
and the optional Flash ROM at back-up.
SIMULATION 55-3
MFP SOFT SW. SETTING. SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS START. SIMULATION 56-1
DATA COPY. SELECT 1-7, AND PRESS START.
1.ALL(EEPROM,SRAM,FlashROM) → HDD
1 2.HDD → ALL(EEPROM,SRAM,FlashROM)
1
3.EEPROM → HDD
4.HDD → EEPROM
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key. 5.SRAM(+FAX Memory,+Option Memory) → HDD
6.HDD → SRAM(+FAX Memory,+Option Memory)
7.FontROM → HDD
SIMULATION 55-3
MFP SOFT SW. SETTING. INPUT DATA No(1-8), AND PRESS Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key.
START. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SOFT SW-1:
00001001 SIMULATION 56-1
EEPROM → HDD DATA COPY.
ARE YOU SURE?.
1. YES
2. NO 1
56
56-1
Purpose Data transfer
Function Used to transfer the MFP controller data. (Used to SIMULATION 56-1
(Purpose) repair the PWB.) EEPROM → HDD DATA COPY.
COMPLETE (or NG)
Section MFP controller
Item Data transfer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the data transfer mode
with 10-key.
1 ALL (EEPROM, SRAM, All the contents of memory are
FlashROM) → HDD transferred to HDD. (Similar to 60
execution of items 3 and 5.)
2 HDD → ALL The HDD contents are transferred 60-1
(EEPROM, SRAM, to all the memories. (Similar to
FlashROM) execution of items 4 and 6.) Purpose Operation test/Check
3 EEPROM → HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD Function Used to check the MFP control (DRAM)
4 HDD → EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM (Purpose) operations (read/write).
5 SRAM (+ FAX Memory, Transfer from SRAM to HDD. Section ICU
+ Option Memory) → When, however, the FAX memory Item Operation
HDD or an option memory (for FAX Operation/Procedure
memory) * is installed, the 1) Enter the number corresponding to the memory to be checked
contents of the Fax memory are with 10-key.
also transferred to HDD.
1 MFP DRAM ERDH image memory
6 HDD → SRAM (+ FAX Transfer from HDD to SRAM.
Memory, + Option → When, however, the FAX memory 2 ASIC DRAM ASIC image memory
Memory) or an option memory (for FAX 2) Press [START] key.
memory) * is installed, the The memory read/write operation is started.
contents HDD are transferred to
After starting the operation, "NOW CHECKING" is displayed dur-
the FAX memory as well as the
ing checking. When read/write is normally completed, "OK" is dis-
SRAM.
played. If an error occurs, "NG" is displayed.
7 FontROM → HDD Transfer from the font ROM to
HDD
*: When Flash ROM or OP_Flash ROM is not installed, transfer
is not made.

61-2
SIMULATION 60-1
DRAM TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. Purpose Adjustment
1. MFP DRAM Function Used to adjust the laser power (absolute value) in
2. ASIC DRAM 1 (Purpose) the copy mode.
Section Scanner (write) unit (LSU)
Item Operation
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 60-1
10-key.
DRAM TEST. ···NOW CHECKING Set Default
1. MFP DRAM Item
range MX-M350 MX-M450
1 AE Auto exposure 67 - 150 76 93
mode
Check completion Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 2 CHARA. Text mode
3 MIX Text/Photo mode
SIMULATION 60-1 4 PHOTO Photo mode
DRAM TEST. ···OK (or NG) 2) Press [START] key.
1. MFP DRAM
4) Enter [START] key.
NOTE: Be sure to set the default value. If not, a trouble may occur
in the LSU.
61 SIMULATION 61-2
LASER POWER SETTING(COPY). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
61-1 1.AE 93 2.CHARA. 93

3.MIX 93 4.PHOTO 93
1
Function Used to check the operation of the scanner (write)
(Purpose) unit (LSU). Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key.
Item Operation
SIMULATION 61-2
Operation/Procedure LASER POWER SETTING(COPY). INPUT VALUE 67-150, AND PRESS
Used to check if the LSU delivers output of the sync signal START.
(HSYNC/) or not. 1.AE
93
"NOW CHECKING" is displayed during checking. When the test is
normally completed, "OK" is displayed. If an error occurs, "NG" is
displayed.
61-3
LSU TEST. PRESS START. Function Used to adjust the laser power (absolute value) in
1. LSU
1 (Purpose) the FAX mode.
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
10-key.
SIMULATION 61-1
LSU TEST. ···NOW CHECKING
1. LSU 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Set range 67 - 150
Default 76 (MX-M350)
Check completion Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 93 (MX-M450)
SIMULATION 61-1 NOTE: Be sure to set the default value. If not, a trouble may occur
LSU TEST. ···OK (or NG) in the LSU.
1. LSU

LASER POWER SETTING(FAX). PRESS START. HDD FORMAT.
1.FAX 93 ARE YOU SURE?
1 1. YES
2. NO 1
Press [START] key.
SIMULATION 61-3
SIMULATION 62-1
LASER POWER SETTING(FAX). INPUT VALUE 67-150, AND PRESS
HDD FORMAT. EXECUTING···.
START.
1.FAX
93 Completion Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 62-1
61-4
HDD FORMAT. OK. (or NG)
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the laser power (absolute value) in
(Purpose) the printer mode.
62-2
Item Operation Purpose Operation test/Check
Operation/Procedure Function Used to check the operation of the hard disk (read/
(Purpose) write). (Only in the model with a disk installed)
(Partial check)
10-key.
Section MFP controller (HDD)
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
Set range 67-150 1) Select YES/NO of hard disk read/write check.
Default 76 (MX-M350)
1 YES Execution
93 (MX-M450)
2 NO Cancel
NOTE: Be sure to set the default value. If not, a trouble may occur
in the LSU. During testing, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When test is com-
pleted normally, "OK" is displayed. If not, "NG" is displayed.
SIMULATION 61-4
LASER POWER SETTING(PRINTER). PRESS START. SIMULATION 62-2
1.PRINTER 93 HDD R/W TEST.
1 ARE YOU SURE?

1. YES
2. NO 1
Press [START] key.
SIMULATION 61-4
LASER POWER SETTING(PRINTER). INPUT VALUE 67-150, AND SIMULATION 62-2
PRESS START. HDD R/W TEST. EXECUTING···.
1.PRINTER
93
Completion Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 62-2
62 HDD R/W TEST. OK. (or NG)
62-1
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to format the hard disk.
(Purpose) (Only in the model with a disk installed)
Item Clear
Operation/Procedure
1) Select YES/NO of hard disk format.
1 YES Execution
2 NO Cancel
During formatting, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When formatting is
completed normally, "OK" is displayed. If not, "NG" is displayed.

62-3
SIMULATION 62-6
Purpose Operation test/Check SMART OFFLINE TEST.
Function Used to check the operation of the hard disk (read/ 1. SHORT SELF-TEST
(Purpose) write). (Only in the model with a disk installed) 2. EXTENDED SELF-TEST
(All areas check)
1
Item Operation
Press [START] key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select YES/NO of hard disk read/write check.
SIMULATION 62-6
1 YES Execution *. EXECUTING···.
2 NO Cancel
During testing, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When test is com-
pleted normally, "OK" is displayed. If not, "NG" is displayed. Completion Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

HDD R/W TEST(ALL). *. COMPLETE.. (result: 0)
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
2. NO 1 * = SHORT SELF-TEST, EXTENDED SELF-TEST
Press [START] key.

62-7
Function Used to check the operations of the hard disk.
SIMULATION 62-3
(Purpose) (The result of the self diag operation of the
HDD R/W TEST(ALL). EXECUTING···.
SMART function is printed out.) (Only in the model
with a disk installed)
Item Clear
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 62-3
HDD R/W TEST(ALL). OK. (or NG) 0 TRAY SELECT Tray select auto only (Selection inhibited)
1 PRINT START Print start
62-6 The result of the hard disk operation check (the self diag operation
of the SMART function) is printed out.
Function Used to check the operations of the hard disk.
SIMULATION 62-7
(Purpose) (The self diag operation of the SMART function is
SMART ERROR LOG PRINT OUT. SELECT SETTING, AND PRESS
executed.) (Only in the model with a disk installed)
START.
Item Clear
0. TRAY SELECT :AUTO ONLY
1. PRINT START
1
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the self diag check mode.
Select 1 and Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
1 SHORT SELF-TEST Partial test press [START] key. or [START] key.
2 EXTENDED SELF-TEST All areas test

SMART ERROR LOG PRINT OUT. EXECUTING···
During the self diag operation, "EXECUTING" is displayed.
0. TRAY SELECT :1
If the self diag is completed normally, "0" is displayed. If not, any
value but 0 is displayed.
0

62-8 NOTE: When executed, this function also deletes the complete
queues of E-MAIL, FAX and Internet FAX, reservation data
Purpose Data clear associated with the image send function, bulletin board
Function Used to format the hard disk (the system area data, and confidential data.
(Purpose) excluded). (Only in the model with a disk installed)
Section MFP controller (HDD) SIMULATION 62-10
Item Clear JOB COMPLETE DATA CLEAR. (WITH JOB LOG DATA)
Operation/Procedure ARE YOU SURE?
1.YES
1) Select YES/NO of hard disk (the system area excluded) for- 2.NO 1
mat.
1 YES Execution
2 NO Cancel Press [START] key.

During formatting, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When formatting is SIMULATION 62-10
JOB COMPLETE DATA CLEAR. (WITH JOB LOG DATA)
EXECUTING···.
SIMULATION 62-8
HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA).
ARE YOU SURE?
1.YES
2.NO 1 SIMULATION 62-10
JOB COMPLETE DATA CLEAR. (WITH JOB LOG DATA)
OK. (or NG)
Press [START] key.
62-11
SIMULATION 62-8
HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA). EXECUTING···. Purpose Data clear
Function Used to delete document filing data. (The
(Purpose) management area (standard folder, user folder) is
Completion Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. cleared.) (Only in the model with a disk installed)
Item Clear
SIMULATION 62-8
HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA).. OK. (or NG) Operation/Procedure
1) Select YES/NO of deleting the document filing data.
1 YES Execution
62-9 2 NO Cancel
Purpose Data clear 2) Press [START] key.
Function Used to format the hard disk (the system area). During formatting, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When formatting is
(Purpose) (Only in the model with a disk installed) completed normally, "OK" is displayed. If not, "NG" is displayed.
Section MFP controller (HDD) NOTE: When executed, this function internally executes the same
Item Clear function as SIM66-10;deleting reservation data, bulletin
Operation/Procedure board data, and confidential data.
1) Select YES/NO of hard disk (the system area) format.
SIMULATION 62-11
1 YES Execution DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR.
2 NO Cancel ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
2. NO 1
62-10 Press [START] key.
Purpose Data clear

Function Used to delete a job complete list (also to delete SIMULATION 62-11
(Purpose) job log data) (Only in the model with a disk DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR. EXECUTING···.
installed)
Item Clear
Operation/Procedure
1) Select YES/NO of deleting the job complete list. SIMULATION 62-11
DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR.
1 YES Execution OK. (or NG)
2 NO Cancel
During formatting, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When formatting is

63 SIMULATION 63-2
SHADING EXECUTION. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS START.
1. OC SHADING
63-1
2. DSPF SHADING
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check 1
(Display/Print)
Function Used to check the result of shading correction.
Press [START] key.
(Purpose) (The shading correction data are displayed.)
Item Operation SIMULATION 63-2
Operation/Procedure SHADING EXECUTING···.
1. OC SHADING
CCD data
Values Description
ODD GAIN Od pixel gain adjustment value
EVEN GAIN Even pixel gain adjustment value
MAX All pixel MAX SIMULATION 63-2
MIN All pixel MIN SHADING COMPLETED.
AVE All pixel average 1. OC SHADING 1
OFFSET All offset
CIS data : Only when DSPF installed
Values Description 63-7
GAIN Gain adjustment value Purpose Adjustment
MAX Pixel MAX Function Used to adjust the white plate scan start position
MIN Pixel MIN (Purpose) for shading. (Document table mode)
AVE Pixel average Section Laser (Exposure)
OFFSET Black offset Item Operation
DEV Standard deviation Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 63-1 2) Press [START] key.
SHADING DATA DISPLAY.
(CCD) 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
ODD GAIN: 128 4) Press [START] key.
EVEN GAIN: 128 OFFSET: 126 MAX.: 128
MIN.: 128 AVE.: 128
When a shading error occurs, this adjustment value is
changed.
(CIS)
GAIN: 128 OFFSET: 128 MAX.: 128 Item Set range Default
MIN.: 128 AVE.: 128 DEV.: 128 1 CCD CCD scan 1 - 16 6
SIMULATION 63-7
63-2 SHADING POSITION ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START.
1. CCD 6
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to execute shading.
1
(Purpose)
Section Optical (Image scanning) Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key.
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure SIMULATION 63-7
1) Enter the number corresponding to the shading mode to be SHADING POSITION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-16, AND
executed. PRESS START.
1 OC SHADING OC analog level correction and shading

1. CCD
6
correction (Document table mode)
2 DSPF SHADING DSPF analog level correction and
shading correction
During execution, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When execution is
completed normally, "COMPLETED" is displayed.

5 MODE Print mode
64 1. STANDARD 1. Standard
2. SMOOTHING 2. Smoothing ON
3. TONER SAVE 3. Smoothing ON
64-1
4. HALF TONE 3. Toner save ON
Purpose Operation test/Check 5. SMOOTHING + TONER 4. Half tone ON
Function Used to check the operation of the printer section SAVE 5. Smoothing + toner save
6. SMOOTHING + HALF TONE 6. Smoothing + half tone
(Purpose) (self-print operation), (The print pattern, the paper
7. TONER SAVE + HALF TONE 7. Toner save + half tone
feed mode, the print mode, the print quantity, and 8. SMOOTHING + TONER 8. Smoothing + toner save +
the density can be optionally set.) SAVE + HALF TONE half tone
Item Operation 6 LEVEL (Parameter of print image
Operation/Procedure process)
7 DUPLEX Duplex
(Various print patterns output) (Table 1)
1. NO 0: NO (Simplex)
1) Select PRINT PATTERN with 10-key. 2. YES 1: YES (Duplex)
2) Enter the number corresponding to the print pattern to be (Note 1) Print pattern
printed with 10-key.
Engine
3) Press [START] key. No Controller Pattern Note
pattern
4) Select PRINT START with 10-key. 1 ❍ For off-center adjustment
5) Press [START] key. 2 ❍ Main scanning direction 1 by 5
(Print condition setting in this simulation) 3 ❍ Main scanning direction 1mm-
pitch
dures. 4 ❍ Main scanning direction 3 by 3
5 ❍ Sub scanning direction 1 by 1
1) Select TRAY SELECT with 10-key.
target paper with 10-key.
9 ❍ Right oblique 1 by 2
10 ❍ Right oblique 1 by 5
∗ To adjust the print density, perform the following procedures. 11 ❍ Right oblique 2 by 4
1) Select DENSITY with 10-key. 12 ❍ Right oblique 3 by 3
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. 13 ❍ Left oblique 1 by 2
3) Press [START] key. 14 ❍ Left oblique 1 by 5
15 ❍ Left oblique 2 by 4
∗ To set the print quantity, perform the following procedures.
1) Select MULTI with 10-key. 17 ❍ Dot 1 by 1
2) Enter the print quantity with 10-key. 18 ❍ Dot 3 by 3
3) Press [START] key. 19 ❍ Dot
∗ To set the print quality mode, perform the following procedures. 20 ❍ Solid black
21 ❍ Main scanning direction 1 by 1
1) Select MODE with 10-key.
2) Enter the number corresponding to the print quality mode with
10-key.
∗ To set the print level, perform the following procedures. 26 ❍ Sub scanning direction 5 by 1
1) Select LEVEL with 10-key. 27 ❍ Sub scanning direction 4 by 2
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. 28 ❍ Sub scanning direction 3 by 3
3) Press [START] key. 29 ❍ Right oblique 2 by 1
NOTE: In some print patterns, changing the level may not change 30 ❍ Right oblique 5 by 1
the picture quality. 31 ❍ Right oblique 4 by 2
∗ To set duplex/simplex print, perform the following procedures. 32 ❍ Right oblique 3 by 3
1) Select DUPLEX with 10-key.
2) Enter the number corresponding to the operation mode with
10-key.
37 ❍ Dot 1 by 1
(Table 1)
38 ❍ Dot 3 by 3
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 39 ❍ Dot
1. TRAY1 1: Tray 1
40 ❍ Solid white
2. TRAY2 2: Tray 2
3. TRAY3 3: Tray 3 50 ❍ All surface 1 by 1 (Vertical)
4. TRAY4 4: Tray 4 51 ❍ All surface 1 by 1 (Horizontal)
5. BPT 5: Manual feed 52 ❍ All surface 1 by 2 (Vertical)
1 PRINT START Print execution (Printing of the set 53 ❍ All surface 1 by 2 (Horizontal)
data is executed.)
54 ❍ All surface 1 by 3 (Vertical)
2 PRINT PATTERN Print pattern (Note 1)
3 DENSITY Graphic density (Valid only when
55 ❍ All surface 1 by 3 (Horizontal)
No. 79, 80 or 84 is selected.) 56 ❍ All surface 1 by 4 (Vertical)
4 MULTI Print quantity 57 ❍ All surface 1 by 4 (Horizontal)

Engine
No Controller Pattern Note SIMULATION 64-1
pattern
SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START.
58 ❍ All surface 1 by 5 (Vertical) 0. TRAY SELECT :1 1. PRINT START
59 ❍ All surface 1 by 5 (Horizontal) 2. PRINT PATTERN:87 3. DENSITY :1 1
60 ❍ All surface 2 by 2 (Vertical) 4. MULTI : 1 5. MODE :1
61 ❍ All surface 2 by 2 (Horizontal) 6. LEVEL : 1 7. DUPLEX :1
62 ❍ All surface 2 by 3 (Vertical)
63 ❍ All surface 2 by 3 (Horizontal) Select 1, and Select other than 1, and Press [START] key, or
64 ❍ All background press [START] key. press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
65 ❍ Special pattern
66 ❏ For every other 1 block width
(2) SIMULATION 64-1
128 pixels/ 32 gradations SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
67 ❏ For every other 1 block width (PRINT PATTERN)
68 ❏
128 pixels/ 16 gradations
For every other 1 block width
INPUT 1-98.
71
69 ❍ 1-dot pattern (3) SIMULATION 64-1
SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
70 ❍ Print adjustment pattern with
(DENSITY)
scale (Vertical)
1-255 100
71 ❍ Grid pattern
72 ❍ Slant line 45 degrees
(4) SIMULATION 64-1
73 ❍ Slant line 26.6 degrees SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
74 ❍ Slant line 63.4 degrees (MULTI COUNT)
75 ❍ ID/BG pattern 1-999 1
76 ❍ Dot pattern 12.5%
77 ❍ Dot pattern 28% (5) SIMULATION 64-1
78 ❍ Dot pattern 50% SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 1-8, AND PRESS START.
(MODE)
79 ❏ All surface effort diffusion
1.STANDARD 2.SMOOTHING 3.TONER SAVE 4.HALF TONE
background
5.SMOOTHING+ TONER SAVE 6.SMOOTHING+ HALF TONE
80 ❍ All surface dither process 7.TONER SAVE+ HALF TONE
background 8.SMOOTHING+ TONER SAVE+ HALF TONE 1
81 ❍ For every other 1 block width
128 pixels/ 32 gradations (6) SIMULATION 64-1
82 ❍ For every other 1 block width SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
128 pixels/ 16 gradations (LEVEL)
83 ❍ For every other 1 block width 1-5 3
84 ❍ Memory check pattern (0) SIMULATION 64-1
85 ❍ Cleaning check pattern SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
86 ❍ Offset check pattern (FEED TRAY)
87 ❍ Text pattern A Note *
1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 5.BPT 1
88 ❍ Text pattern B Note *
89 ❍ Text pattern C Note * (7) SIMULATION 64-1
90 Toner quantity measuring chart SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
91 Radiation chart (DUPLEX)
98 Data printing 1.NO 2.YES 1
❏: Error diffusion process
SIMULATION 64-1
Note*: Since the "DENSITY" of an actual copy or printer output SELFT PRINT MODE.. EXECUTING···
differs, they differ from the output of self print. 0. TRAY SELECT :1
2. PRINT PATTERN:87 3. DENSITY :1
4. MULTI :
6. LEVEL :
1
1
5. MODE
7. DUPLEX
:1
:1
0

2) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
65 10-key.
(Example) When the bit of 5 is to be changed, enter 5.
65-1 The set value of 1/0 is alternatively changed every time when
Purpose Adjustment the target key is pressed.
Function Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display 3) After completion of setting of all the bits, press [START] key.
(Purpose) section) detection position.
Section Operation (Display/Operation key) SIMULATION 66-1
FAX SOFT SW. SETTING. SELECT 2-120, AND PRESS START.
Item
Operation/Procedure
Touch the four cross marks (+) sequentially. The coordinates of
pressed positions are set.
When the coordinates setting is completed normally, the display
turns gray. When all the four points are set, the display returns to Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key or [START] key.
the normal state.
SIMULATION 66-1
SIMULATION 65-1
FAX SOFT SW. SETTING. INPUT DATA No(1-8), AND PRESS
START.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SOFT SW-2:
66-2
Purpose Data clear
65-2
Function Used to clear the FAX soft switch function data
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check (Purpose) and to set to the default. (Excluding the
(Display/Print) adjustment values.) (Only when FAX is installed)
Function Used to check the result of the touch panel (LCD Section FAX
(Purpose) display) detection position adjustment. (The Item Data
coordinates are displayed.)
Operation/Procedure
Section Operation (Display/Operation key)
1) Set the destination code with 10-key.
Item
Operation/Procedure Japan 00000000 Finland 00111100
U.S.A. 10110101 Norway 10000010
When the touch panel is touched, the X and Y coordinate values of
the touched point and the coordinate values of the specified point Australia 00001001 Denmark 00110001
are displayed. The coordinate values set with SIM 65-1 are used U.K. 10110100 Netherlands 01111011
as the reference. France 00111101 Italy 01011001
Germany 00000100 Switzerland 10100110
SIMULATION 65-2 400 500 600
Sweden 10100101 Austria 00001010
40
Newzealand 01111110 Indonesia 01010100
100
100
200 300
China 00100110 Thailand 10101001
Singapore 10011100 Malaysia 01101100
140
600 TW 11111110 India 01010011
Other1 11111101 Philippines 10001001
180
200
Other2 11111100 Hongkong 01010000
Ohter3 11111011
The codes other than the above are recognized as Japan.
66 3) The confirmation menu of YES/NO of clear is displayed.
Select one.
66-1 1 YES FAX soft SW is cleared.
Purpose Setting 2 NO Not cleared.
Function Used to change and check the FAX soft switch 4) Press [START] key.
(Purpose) functions. (Used to change and check the
The soft switch (except for the adjustment values) is cleared
functions provided for the FAX soft switches.)
according to the destination selected in procedure 1).
(Only when FAX is installed)
NOTE: When the FAX BOX is not installed, initialization including
Section FAX
the adjustment value is performed. (The adjustment value
Item
is stored in the FAX BOX.)
Operation/Procedure
Setting of soft switches other than SW1 can be changed and
checked.
1) Enter the soft switch number to be checked or changed with
10-key.
The current set state is displayed.

FAX SOFT SW. CLEAR(WITHOUT ADJUSTMENT VALUE). FAX PWB MEMORY CHECK INPUT 1-13, AND PRESS START.
INPUT COUNTRY CODE, AND PRESS START. 1. All Memory Device Check (once)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2. MFP SRAM(once) 3. MFP SRAM(repeat)
4. MFP FLASH+ OP.FLASH(once)
5. MFP FLASH+ OP.FLASH(repeat)
6. MODEM EEPROM(once) 7. MODEM EEPROM(repeat)
8. MODEM SRAM(G/A)(once) 9. MODEM SRAM(G/A)(repeat)
10. MODEM SDRAM1(once) 11. MODEM SDRAM1(repeat)
Press [START] key. 12. MODEM SDRAM2(once) 13. MODEM SDRAM2(repeat)
SIMULATION 66-2 Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

FAX SOFT SW. CLEAR.
ARE YOU SURE?
JAPAN SIMULATION 66-3
1:YES
1 FAX PWB MEMORY CHECK
MFP SRAM: CHECKING
2:NO
MFP FLASH: NO CHECK
MFP OP.FLASH: NO CHECK
MODEM EEPROM: NG:A0010000
66-3 MODEM SRAM(G/A):NO CHECK
MODEM SDRAM1: NG A11
Purpose Operation test/Check MODEM SDRAM2: OK
Function Used to check the operation of the FAX PWB
(Purpose) memory (read/write). (This adjustment is required When "repeat" is selected and
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed.
when the PWB is replaced with a new one.) (Only
when FAX is installed)
When Check is "once," the display stops at the result display.
Section FAX
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to
Item Data
the initial display.
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the number corresponding to the memory to be checked
66-4
with 10-key.
2) Press [START] key. Purpose Operation test/Check
Function Used to check the output operation of data signals
In the case of All, all memories are checked only once.
(Purpose) in each data output mode of FAX. (Used to check
Check connection wire list the operation of MODEM. ) Send level: Max. (Only
NO CHECK Not checked yet. when FAX is installed)
CHECKING Checking Section FAX
OK Check complete OK Item Operation
NG Check complete NG Operation/Procedure
The error address or the data line is displayed individually. 1) Enter the number corresponding to the output mode with 10-
Target memory of check key.
MFP SRAM SRAM 2) Press [START] key.
MFP FLASH FLASH ROM The output is delivered at the max. send level.
MFP OP.FLASH 1 NOSIGNAL No signal 17 12.0 V33 12.0 V33
MODEM EEPROM 2 33.6 V34 26.4 V34 18 14.4 V17 14.4 V17
MODEM SRAM (G/A) 3 31.2 V34 31.2 V34 19 12.0 V17 12.0 V17
MODEM SDRAM1 4 28.8 V34 28.8 V34 20 9.6 V17 9.6 V17
MODEM SDRAM2 5 26.4 V34 26.4 V34 21 7.2 V17 7.2 V17
When "repeat" is selected, the operation is repeated until the 6 24.0 V34 24.0 V34 22 9.6 V29 9.6 V29
result is "NG" or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed. 7 21.6 V34 21.6 V34 23 7.2 V29 7.2 V29
8 19.2 V34 19.2 V34 24 4.8 V27t 4.8 V27t
9 16.8 V34 16.8 V34 25 2.4 V27t 2.4 V27t
10 14.4 V34 14.4 V34 26 0.3 FLG 0.3 FLG
11 12.0 V34 12.0 V34 27 CED 2100 CED 2100
12 9.6 V34 9.6 V34 28 CNG 1100 CNG 1100
13 7.2 V34 7.2 V34 29 0.3 V21 0.3 V21
14 4.8 V34 4.8 V34 30 ANSam ANSam
15 2.4 V34 2.4 V34 31 RINGER RINGER
16 14.4 V33 14.4 V33 32 No RBT No RBT
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution,
execution is stopped.
When a number is entered and [START] key is pressed during
execution, the kind of signal can be changed.

1 NOSIGNAL No signal 17 12.0 V33 12.0 V33
SIMULATION 66-4
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS 2 33.6 V34 26.4 V34 18 14.4 V17 14.4 V17
START. 3 31.2 V34 31.2 V34 19 12.0 V17 12.0 V17
1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 1 4 28.8 V34 28.8 V34 20 9.6 V17 9.6 V17
2.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34 5 26.4 V34 26.4 V34 21 7.2 V17 7.2 V17
9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 11.12.0 V34 12.9.6 V34
13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33 6 24.0 V34 24.0 V34 22 9.6 V29 9.6 V29
17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17 7 21.6 V34 21.6 V34 23 7.2 V29 7.2 V29
21.7.2 V17 22.9.6 V29 23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t
8 19.2 V34 19.2 V34 24 4.8 V27t 4.8 V27t
25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 27.CED 2100 28.CNG 1100
29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 31.RINGER 32.No RBT 9 16.8 V34 16.8 V34 25 2.4 V27t 2.4 V27t
10 14.4 V34 14.4 V34 26 0.3 FLG 0.3 FLG
11 12.0 V34 12.0 V34 27 CED 2100 CED 2100
12 9.6 V34 9.6 V34 28 CNG 1100 CNG 1100
13 7.2 V34 7.2 V34 29 0.3 V21 0.3 V21
SIMULATION 66-4
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS 14 4.8 V34 4.8 V34 30 ANSam ANSam
START. EXECUTING···. 15 2.4 V34 2.4 V34 31 RINGER RINGER
Same
1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 1 16 14.4 V33 14.4 V33 32 No RBT No RBT
display 2.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34
9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 11.12.0 V34 12.9.6 V34
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution,
13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33 execution is stopped.
17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17
When a number is entered and [START] key is pressed during
21.7.2 V17 22.9.6 V29 23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t
25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 27.CED 2100 28.CNG 1100 execution, the kind of signal can be changed.
29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 31.RINGER 32.No RBT
SIMULATION 66-5
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS
Enter 2 and press [START] key. START.
1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 1
SIMULATION 66-4 2.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS 9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 11.12.0 V34 12.9.6 V34
START. EXECUTING···. 13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33
1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 2 17.12.0 V33

21.7.2 V17
18.14.4 V17
22.9.6 V29
19.12.0 V17
23.7.2 V29
20.9.6 V17
24.4.8 V27t
2.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34 25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 27.CED 2100 28.CNG 1100
9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 11.12.0 V34 12.9.6 V34
13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33
17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17
21.7.2 V17 22.9.6 V29 23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t
25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 27.CED 2100 28.CNG 1100
SIMULATION 66-5
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS
START. EXECUTING···.
SIMULATION 66-4
Same 1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 1
display 2.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS 9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 11.12.0 V34 12.9.6 V34
START. 13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33
1.NOSIGNAL
2.26.4 V34
2.33.6 V34
6.24.0 V34
3.31.2 V34
7.21.6 V34
4.28.8 V34
8.19.2 V34
2 17.12.0 V33
21.7.2 V17
18.14.4 V17
22.9.6 V29
19.12.0 V17
23.7.2 V29
20.9.6 V17
24.4.8 V27t
9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 11.12.0 V34 12.9.6 V34 25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 27.CED 2100 28.CNG 1100
13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33 29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 31.RINGER 32.No RBT
17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17
21.7.2 V17 22.9.6 V29 23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t
25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 27.CED 2100 28.CNG 1100 Enter 2 and press [START] key.
SIMULATION 66-5
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS
66-5 START. EXECUTING···.

1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 2
2.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34
Function Used to check the output operation of data signals 9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 11.12.0 V34 12.9.6 V34
(Purpose) in each data output mode of FAX. (Used to check 13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33
the operation of MODEM.) An output is sent at the 17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17
21.7.2 V17 22.9.6 V29 23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t
send level set by the soft switch. (Only when FAX 25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 27.CED 2100 28.CNG 1100
is installed) 29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 31.RINGER 32.No RBT
Section FAX
Item Operation Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the number corresponding to the output mode with 10- SIMULATION 66-5
key. SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS
START.
The output is delivered at the send level set with the soft switch. 1.NOSIGNAL
2.26.4 V34
2.33.6 V34
6.24.0 V34
3.31.2 V34
7.21.6 V34
4.28.8 V34
8.19.2 V34
2
9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 11.12.0 V34 12.9.6 V34
13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33
17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17
21.7.2 V17 22.9.6 V29 23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t
25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 27.CED 2100 28.CNG 1100

66-6 66-8
Purpose User data output/Check (Display/Print) Purpose Operation test/Check
Function Used to print the confidential pass code. (Used Function Used to check the output operation of various
(Purpose) when the confidential pass code is forgotten.) (Purpose) sound signals of FAX. (Used to check the
(Only when FAX is installed) operation of the sound output IC.) Send level: Max.
Section FAX (Only when FAX is installed)
Item Data Section FAX
Operation/Procedure Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
1 PRINT START Print start
1) Enter the number corresponding to the output mode with 10-
The paper is automatically selected with the size saved in the key.
image memory.
The output is delivered at the max. level.
SIMULATION 66-6
PASS CODE PRINT OUT. PRESS START. 1 NONE Mute 11 MESSAGE 9 Message 9
1.PRINT START 2 PAUSE Pause sound 12 MESSAGE 10 Message 10
3 MESSAGE1 Message 1 13 MESSAGE 11 Message 11
Press [START] key.
When there is no print data,
the display returns to the 7 MESSAGE5 Message 5 17 MESSAGE 15 Message 15
original state without printing. 8 MESSAGE6 Message 6 18 ALARM Alarm
(When 1)
9 MESSAGE7 Message 7 19 RINGER Call ring
SIMULATION 66-6 10 MESSAGE8 Message 8 20 EXT.TEL.RINGER External TEL ring
PASS CODE PRINT OUT. EXECUTING···.
When the number is entered during execution, the kind of signal
1.PRINT START
can be changed.
After completion of printing When [START] key is pressed, the voice message is sent. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, it is stopped.
SIMULATION 66-8
66-7
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS
Purpose User data output/Check (Display/Print) START.
1.NONE 2.PAUSE 3.MESSAGE1
Function Used to print the image memory data (memory 4.MESSAGE2 5.MESSAGE3 6.MESSAGE4
(Purpose) send/receive). (Only when FAX is installed) 7.MESSAGE5 8.MESSAGE6 9.MESSAGE7 2
Section FAX 10.MESSAGE8 11.MESSAGE9 12.MESSAGE10
13.MESSAGE11 14.MESSAGE12 15.MESSAGE13
Item Data 16.MESSAGE14 17.MESSAGE15 18.ALARM
Operation/Procedure 19.RINGER 20.EXT.TEL.RINGER
All image data stored in the image memory are printed. Select other 1, and press [START] key.
∗ The confidential receive data are also printed.
SIMULATION 66-8
1 PRINT START Print start MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS
The paper is automatically selected with the size saved in the 1.NONE 2.PAUSE 3.MESSAGE1
image memory. 4.MESSAGE2 5.MESSAGE3 6.MESSAGE4
7.MESSAGE5
10.MESSAGE8
8.MESSAGE6
11.MESSAGE9
9.MESSAGE7
12.MESSAGE10
1
SIMULATION 66-7
IMAGE MEMORY PRINT OUT. PRESS START. Same 16.MESSAGE14 17.MESSAGE15 18.ALARM
1.PRINT START display 19.RINGER 20.EXT.TEL.RINGER
Press [START] key. SIMULATION 66-8

(When 1) MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS
SIMULATION 66-7 1.NONE 2.PAUSE 3.MESSAGE1
IMAGE MEMORY PRINT OUT. EXECUTING···. 4.MESSAGE2 5.MESSAGE3 6.MESSAGE4
1.PRINT START 7.MESSAGE5
10.MESSAGE8
8.MESSAGE6
11.MESSAGE9
9.MESSAGE7
12.MESSAGE10
2
After completion of printing
16.MESSAGE14 17.MESSAGE15 18.ALARM
19.RINGER 20.EXT.TEL.RINGER
SIMULATION 66-8
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS
START.
1.NONE 2.PAUSE 3.MESSAGE1
7.MESSAGE5
10.MESSAGE8
8.MESSAGE6
11.MESSAGE9
9.MESSAGE7
12.MESSAGE10
2

66-9 66-10
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose User data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the output operation of various Function Used to clear all data of the image memory
(Purpose) sound signals of FAX. (Used to check the (Purpose) (memory send/receive). The confidential data are
operation of the sound output IC.) An output is also cleared at the same time. (Only when FAX is
sent at the send level set by the soft switch. (Only installed)
when FAX is installed) Section FAX
Section FAX Item Data
Item Operation Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select YES/NO of image memory clear with 10-key.
1) Enter the number corresponding to the output mode with 10-
1 YES Image memory clear is executed.
key.
2 NO Clear is not executed.
The output is delivered at the send level set with the soft SW.
The SRAM image data management table and image data in the
1 NONE Mute 11 MESSAGE 9 MESSAGE 9
Flash ROM area and HD (except for filing images) are cleared.
2 PAUSE Pause sound 12 MESSAGE10 MESSAGE 10
3 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE 1 13 MESSAGE11 MESSAGE 11
SIMULATION 66-10
IMAGE MEMORY CLEAR
ARE YOU SURE?
6 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE 4 16 MESSAGE14 MESSAGE 14 1. YES
7 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE 5 17 MESSAGE15 MESSAGE 15 2. NO 1
8 MESSAGE6 MESSAGE 6 18 ALARM Alarm
9 MESSAGE7 MESSAGE 7 19 RINGER Call ring Press [START] key to clear.
10 MESSAGE8 MESSAGE 8 20 EXT.TEL.RINGER External TEL ring
SIMULATION 66-10
can be changed.
IMAGE MEMORY CLEAR EXECUTING···.
When [START] key is pressed, the voice message is sent. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, it is stopped.
++++++
1
The processing status of image memory clear is displayed with
SIMULATION 66-9
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS "+."
START.
1.NONE 2.PAUSE 3.MESSAGE1 66-11
7.MESSAGE5
10.MESSAGE8
8.MESSAGE6
11.MESSAGE9
9.MESSAGE7
12.MESSAGE10
2 Purpose Operation test/Check
Function Used to check the output operation of FAX G3
13.MESSAGE11 14.MESSAGE12 15.MESSAGE13 (Purpose) mode 300bps. (Used to check the operation of
MODEM.) Send level: Max. (Only when FAX is
installed)
Select other 1, and press [START] key.
Section FAX
Item Operation
SIMULATION 66-9
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS Operation/Procedure
START. EXECUTING···. 1) Select the number corresponding to the output mode with 10-
1.NONE 2.PAUSE 3.MESSAGE1 key.
7.MESSAGE5 8.MESSAGE6 9.MESSAGE7 1
10.MESSAGE8 11.MESSAGE9 12.MESSAGE10 The signal is sent in the max. send level.
Same 16.MESSAGE14 17.MESSAGE15 18.ALARM 1 NO SIGNAL No signal 4 00000 00000
display 19.RINGER 20.EXT.TEL.RINGER 2 11111 11111 5 010101 010101
Select 2, and press [START] key. 3 11110 11110 6 00001 00001
SIMULATION 66-9 can be changed.
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the
1.NONE 2.PAUSE 3.MESSAGE1 operation is stopped.
7.MESSAGE5
10.MESSAGE8
8.MESSAGE6
11.MESSAGE9
9.MESSAGE7
12.MESSAGE10
2

SIMULATION 66-11
300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS SIMULATION 66-12
START. 300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS
1. NO SIGNAL 2. 11111 3. 11110 4. 00000 START.
5. 010101 6. 00001 1 1. NO SIGNAL 2. 11111 3. 11110 4. 00000 1
5. 010101 6. 00001
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
SIMULATION 66-11
EXECUTING···. START.
1. NO SIGNAL 2. 11111 3. 11110 4. 00000 1 EXECUTING···.
5. 010101 6. 00001 1. NO SIGNAL 2. 11111 3. 11110 4. 00000 1
5. 010101 6. 00001
Same display Select 3 and press [START] key.
SIMULATION 66-11
EXECUTING···. START.
1. NO SIGNAL 2. 11111 3. 11110 4. 00000 3 EXECUTING···.
5. 010101 6. 00001 1. NO SIGNAL 2. 11111 3. 11110 4. 00000 2
5. 010101 6. 00001
66-12
66-13
Function Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 Purpose Setting
(Purpose) mode 300bps. (Used to check the operation of Function Used to enter (set) the number of FAX dial signal
MODEM.) An output is send at the send level set (Purpose) output test. (The dial number set by this simulation
by the soft switch. (Only when FAX is installed) is outputted when the dial signal output test is
Section FAX made by SIM 66-14 - 16. ) (Only when FAX is
Item Operation installed)
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
1) Select the number corresponding to the output mode with 10- Item Data
key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [START] key. 1) Enter the dial number with 10-key.
The signal is sent in the send level set with the soft switch. Use 10-key, [*] key, and [#] key to enter the number. The upper
limit is 20 digits.
1 NO SIGNAL No signal 4 00000 00000
When [CLEAR] key is pressed, the mode returns to the initial
2 11111 11111 5 010101 010101
state.
3 11110 11110 6 00001 00001
can be changed. SIMULATION 66-13
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the DIAL TEST NUMBER SETTING. 0-9:[0-9], *:[*], #:[#]
operation is stopped. INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START.
0123456789*#01234567
66-14
Purpose Setting/Operation test/Check
Function Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial
(Purpose) mode (10pps) and to test the dial signal output.
(The dial number signal set by SIM 66-13 is
Section FAX
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
The dial signal is outputted.

(Dial pulse make time setting)
1) Enter 1 with 10-key. SIMULATION 66-15
DIAL TEST(20PPS). SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
2) Press [START] key. 0. EXECUTE
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1. MAKE TIME 7 ; [+9 ms] 1
0 EXECUTE Execute Select 0 Select 1 and
press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
1 MAKE TIME Dial pulse make time setting (0 - 15) and press or press [START] key.
[START] key.
The dial signal is sent with the set value + 29ms.
SIMULATION 66-15
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the DIAL TEST(20PPS). SELECT 0-15, AND PRESS START.
operation is stopped. [1. MAKE TIME]
7
SIMULATION 66-14
0. EXECUTE Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
1. MAKE TIME 7 ; [+29 ms] 1 SIMULATION 66-15
DIAL TEST(20PPS). EXECUTING···.
Select 0 Select 1 and 1. MAKE TIME 7 ; [+9 ms]
and press press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
[START] key. or press [START] key.
SIMULATION 66-14
66-16
[1. MAKE TIME]
7 Purpose Setting/Operation test/Check
Function Used to check the dial signal (DTMF) output in the
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. (Purpose) FAX tone dial mode. (The dial number signal set
by SIM 66-13 is outputted.) The send level can be
set to an optional level. Used to check troubles in
SIMULATION 66-14
DIAL TEST(10PPS). EXECUTE dialing and to check the operation. (Only when
1. MAKE TIME 7 ; [+29 ms] FAX is installed)
Section FAX
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
66-15
Purpose Setting/Operation test/Check 2) Press [START] key.
Function Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial The dial signal is outputted.
(Purpose) mode (20pps) and to test the dial signal output.
(The dial number signal set by SIM 66-13 is (Dial pulse make time setting)
outputted.) Used to check troubles in dialing and 1) Enter 1 or 2 with 10-key.
to check the operation. (Only when FAX is 2) Press [START] key.
installed) 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section FAX
Item Operation
Item Set range
Operation/Procedure
0 EXECUTE Execution
1 HIGH High group level 0 - 15dB
2 HIGH LOW High group - Low group 0 - 15
The dial signal is outputted.
(Dial pulse make time setting) operation is stopped.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 EXECUTE Execute
1 MAKE TIME Dial pulse make time setting (0 - 15)
The dial signal is sent with the set value + 9ms.
operation is stopped.

The signal is sent in the send level set with the soft SW.
SIMULATION 66-16 When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the
DIAL TEST(DTMF). SELECT 0-2, AND PRESS START. operation is stopped.
0. EXECUTE
1. HIGH 7 (dB) 2. HIGH-LOW 7 1 SIMULATION 66-18
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.) INPUT 0-9, *, #, AND PRESS
Select 1 or 2, and START.
press [START] key.
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
or press [START] key. 1
(When 1)
SIMULATION 66-16
DIAL TEST(DTMF). SELECT 0-15, AND PRESS START. Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
1. HIGH(dB) 7
SIMULATION 66-18
(When 2)
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.) EXECUTING···.
SIMULATION 66-16
DIAL TEST(DTMF). SELECT 0-15, AND PRESS START.
1
1. HIGH(dB) 7
Select 0 and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 66-19
(When 0)
Purpose Data transfer
SIMULATION 66-16 Function Used to back-up the HDD data into the Flash
DIAL TEST(DTMF). EXECUTING···.
(Purpose) memory (optional FAX expansion memory: AR-
1. HIGH 7 (dB) 2. HIGH-LOW 7
MM9). (Only when FAX is installed)
Section FAX
Item Data
66-17 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting 1) Select YES/NO of data transfer (backup).
Function Used to check the dial signal (DTMF) output in the 1 YES Backup is executed.
(Purpose) FAX tone dial mode. Send level: Max. Used to 2 NO Backup is not executed.
Section FAX
This function is valid only when the AR-MM9 is installed.
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure Backup contents
1) Enter the DTMF signal (1 - 9, 0, *, #) to be sent with 10-key. • Address book data (FAX, Mail, Address)
2) Press [START] key. • One-touch dial • Item name
The signal is sent in the max. send level. • FTP expansion • Fine name
• Group expansion • FAX receive select table
operation is stopped. • Program • Internet FAX receive YES/NO
• Use index • Polling allow number
SIMULATION 66-17 • Standard sender • Memory box
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX) INPUT 0-9, *, #, AND • Internet FAX sender registration • Sender name
PRESS START. • FAX sender registration • Soft SW
1 The other contents are not backed up.
SIMULATION 66-19
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (WRITE TO FLASH ROM)
ARE YOU SURE?
SIMULATION 66-17
1. YES
2. NO
1
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX) EXECUTING···.
Press [START] key.
1
SIMULATION 66-19
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (WRITE TO FLASH ROM) EXECUTING...
66-18
Purpose Setting 1
Function Used to check the dial signal (DTMF) output in the
(Purpose) FAX tone dial mode. An output is sent at the send After completion of backup
level set by the soft switch. Used to check the

operation. (Only when FAX is installed)
Section FAX
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the DTMF signal (1 - 9, 0, *, #) to be sent with 10-key.

66-20 66-22
Purpose Data transfer Purpose Setting
Function Used to read the back-up data by SIM 66-19 to the Function Used to adjust the handset volume. (Only when
(Purpose) SRAM/HDD. (Only when FAX is installed) (Purpose) the FAX is installed.)
Section FAX Section FAX
Item Data Item Operation
1) Select YES/NO of data transfer. 1) Enter the number corresponding to the volume with 10-key.
1 YES Backup is executed. 2) Press [START] key.
2 NO Backup is not executed. 1 MIN Small
2) Press [START] key. 2 MIDDLE Medium
3 MAX Large
SIMULATION 66-20 Selection of 1, 2, and 3 can be made during execution.
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (READ FROM FLASH ROM)
ARE YOU SURE?
SIMULATION 66-22
1. YES
2. NO
1 HANDSET VOLUME SETTING SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
1. MIN
Press [START] key.
2. MIDDLE
3. MAX
2
SIMULATION 66-20
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (READ FROM FLASH ROM) EXECUTING... Press [START] key.
1 SIMULATION 66-22
HANDSET VOLUME SETTING SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
EXECUTING···.
After completion of read
1. MIN
2. MIDDLE
3. MAX
2
66-21
(Display/Print)
Function Used to print information related to FAX (various SIMULATION 66-22
(Purpose) registrations, communication management, file HANDSET VOLUME SETTING SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
management, system error protocol). (Only when EXECUTING···.
FAX is installed) 1. MIN
Section FAX
2. MIDDLE
3. MAX
3
Item Data
Operation/Procedure Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
1) Enter the number corresponding to the information (item) to be

printed with 10-key. SIMULATION 66-22
2) Press [START] key. HANDSET VOLUME SETTING SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
1 REGISTERED Various registration information 1. MIN

2 MANAGEMENT Communication management 2. MIDDLE
3. MAX
3
information
3 FILE MANAGEMENT File management information
4 SYSTEM ERROR System error information 66-23
5 PROTOCOL Protocol information
Purpose Setting
Function Used to download the FAX program. (Only when
SIMULATION 66-21
(Purpose) FAX is installed)
FAX INFORMATION PRINT OUT. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
1. REGISTERED 2. MANAGEMENT Not used in the market. (For development)
3. FILE MANAGEMENT 4. SYSTEM ERROR Section FAX
5. PROTOCOL Item
Operation/Procedure
1) Turn OFF the power.
Select other than 0 and 2) Remove the protect pin.
press [START] key.
3) Turn ON the power.
If there is no print data,
the display returns to the 4) Enter the SIM 66-23 mode.
original state without printing.
(When 1) 5) Press [START] key.
SIMULATION 66-21 During operation, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When the operation
FAX INFORMATION PRINT OUT. EXECUTING··· is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
1. REGISTERED If an error occurs, "FAIL" is displayed.
6) Turn OFF the power, and attach the protect pin.
After completion of backup

66-26
SIMULATION 66-23
FAX PROGRAM DOWNLOAD. Purpose Setting
EJECT PROTECT PIN, AND PRESS START. Function Used to register external telephone numbers for
(Purpose) Modem dial-in. (Only when FAX is installed)
Not used in the market. (For development)
Section FAX
Press [START] key.
Item Data
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 66-23
1) Enter the Modem dial-in FAX number (1 - 9, 0, *, #) with 10-
FAX PROGRAM DOWNLOAD. EXECUTING···
key.
After completion of writing SIMULATION 66-26

M-D-IN EXTEL NUMBER SETTING. 0-9:[0-9],*:[*],#:[#]
INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START.
SIMULATION 66-23 0123456789*#01234567
FAX PROGRAM DOWNLOAD.
COMPLETE
POWER OFF, AND SET PROTECT PIN
After failing of writing

66-27
Purpose Setting
Function Used to register the transfer number for voice
SIMULATION 66-23
FAX PROGRAM DOWNLOAD. (Purpose) warp. (Only when FAX is installed)
FAIL Not used in the market. (For development)
CHECK PROTECT PIN Section FAX
Item Data
Operation/Procedure
66-24 1) Enter the voice warp transfer number (1 - 9, 0, *, #) with 10-
key.
Purpose Clear
Function Used to clear the FAST memory data. (Only when
Section FAX SIMULATION 66-27
Item Data V-WP TRANSMIT NUMBER SETTING. 0-9:[0-9],*:[*],#:[#]
Operation/Procedure 0123456789*#01234567
1) Select YES/NO of data clear.
1 YES FAST memory data is cleared.
2 NO Not cleared.
2) Press [START] key. 66-29
Purpose Clear
SIMULATION 66-24
FAST MEMORY DATA CLEAR. Function Used to clear data related to an address book
ARE YOU SURE? (Purpose) (one-touch registration, program registration/
1. YES expansion, relay memory box registration, each
2. NO table content).
Section FAX, Network scanner
Item Data
1) Select YES/NO of data clear.
Purpose Setting
Function Used to register the FAX number for Modem dial- 1 YES Address book data is cleared.
(Purpose) in. (Only when FAX is installed) 2 NO Not cleared.
Not used in the market. (For development) 2) Press [START] key.
Section FAX
Item Data SIMULATION 66-29
Operation/Procedure ADDRESS DATA CLEAR.
1) Enter the Modem dial-in FAX number (1 - 9, 0, *, #) with 10- ARE YOU SURE?
key. 1. YES

2. NO 1
SIMULATION 66-25
M-D-IN FAX NUMBER SETTING. 0-9:[0-9],*:[*],#:[#]
0123456789*#01234567

66-30 66-33
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function Used to check the change in the TEL/LIU status. Function Used to check the signal (BUSY TONE/CNG/
(Purpose) (Only when FAX is installed) (Purpose) CED/FNET/DTMF) detection. (Only when FAX is
Section FAX installed)
Item Operation Section FAX
Operation/Procedure Item Operation
The TEL/LIU state is displayed. Operation/Procedure
When the state is changed, it is highlighted. The detected signal is highlighted.
HS1 Polarity reverse signal SIMULATION 66-33

HS2 Polarity reverse signal SIGNAL DETECT CHECK.
BUSY TONE CNG CED FNET DTMF
RHS Handset hook SW
EXHS External telephone hook SW
SIMULATION 66-30 66-34

TEL/LIU SENSOR CHECK.
HS1 HS2 RHS EXHS Purpose Operation test/Check
Function Used to measure the communication time of test
1 (Purpose) image data. (Only when FAX is installed)
Section FAX
Item Operation
Purpose Operation test/Check Communication test is performed to measure the time (ms).
Function Used to check the relay operation. (Only when Send is made under the following conditions.
Communication means Memory send
Section FAX
Image quality Normal text
Item Operation
Density Light
Operation/Procedure ECM ON
1) Enter the number corresponding to the check item with 10-key. Sender record OFF
SIMULATION 66-34
SIMULATION 66-31 COMMUNICATION TIME DISPLAY.
TEL/LIU SETTING.
INPUT 0-1, AND PRESS START. * * * * * ms
1. MPXA 2. CION 3. MR 4. EC
5. S. 6. CML 7. DP 8.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10001100 66-35
Purpose Setting
Function Modem program rewriting. (Only when FAX is
66-32 (Purpose) installed)
Purpose Operation test/Check Not used in the market. (For development)
Function Used to check the receive data (fixed data) from Section FAX
(Purpose) the line. (Only when FAX is installed) Item Data
Section FAX Operation/Procedure
Item Operation 1) Select YES/NO of Modem program reload.
Operation/Procedure
1 YES Modem block reload is cleared.
When check is completed normally, "OK" is displayed. In case of 2 NO Not reloaded.
an error, "NG" is displayed.
(Display message)
When reload is completed normally, "OK" is displayed. In case of
CHECKING Checking an error, "CHECK SUM" is displayed.
OK Checking completed (OK) The result of Modem reload is displayed.
NG Checking completed (NG)
COMPLETE Reload completed
81 Check sum error
SIMULATION 66-32
82 Write error
RECEIVED DATA CHECK.
CHECKING···.(OK or NG) 83 Delete error
84 Verify error
NG Due to loader NG

SIMULATION 66-35
66-39
MODEM PROGRAM RELOAD. Purpose Setting
ARE YOU SURE?
Function Used to set the destination specifications. (Only
1. YES
2. NO 1 (Purpose) when FAX is installed)
Section FAX
Item Specifications Operation
Press [START] key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the number corresponding to the destination.
SIMULATION 66-35
MODEM PROGRAM RELOAD. EXECITOMG···
LOADER··· xxxxx
MODEM···· xxxxx SIMULATION 66-39
FAX DESTINATION SETUP.
After completion of reloading SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START
0. NO DESTINATION 1
SIMULATION 66-35 1. JAPAN
MODEM PROGRAM RELOAD. 2. U.S.A./CANADA
LOADER···OK 3. EUROPE
MODEM····COMPLETE 4. AUSTRALIA
5. CHINA
6. ASIA&OTHERS
66-36 Press [START] key.
Function Used to check interface between MFPC controller
(Purpose) and MDMC. (Check of the data line or the 66-42
command line) (Only when FAX is installed)
Section FAX Purpose Setting
Item Operation Function PIC program rewriting (Only when FAX is
(Purpose) installed)
Operation/Procedure
Section FAX
1) Enter the number corresponding to the check mode with 10-
Item Operation
key.
Operation/Procedure
1 MFPC ← MDMC (DATA once) Date line once only 1) The confirmation window is displayed. Select whether rewrit-
2 MFPC → MDMC (DATA once) Date line once only ing of the program into PIC installed in the FAX VOX is per-
3 MFPC ← MDMC (DATA repeat) Data line repeat formed or not.
4 MFPC → MDMC (DATA repeat) Data line repeat NOTE: Release the write protect notch.
5 MFPC ← MDMC (CMD once) Command line once only FAX program writing enabled (Jumpers and DIP SW
6 MFPC → MDMC (CMD once) Command line once only depending on the model.)
7 MFPC ← MDMC (CMD repeat) Command line repeat
1 YES Execution
8 MFPC → MDMC (CMD repeat) Command line repeat
2 NO Cancel
When check is completed normally, "OK" is displayed. Incase of
an error, "NG" is displayed. When reload is completed normally, "OK" is displayed. In case of
an error, "NG" is displayed.
When check is "repeat," the operation is continued until the result
is NG or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed. NG cause:
• Write protect is set.
SIMULATION 66-36 • PIC is not installed.
MFPC-MDMC I/F CHECK. INPUT 1-8, AND PRESS START.
• Access error to PIC
1. MFPC<-MDMC(DATA once)
2. MFPC->MDMC(DATA once) 1 SIMULATION 66-42
3. MFPC<-MDMC(DATA repeat) PIC PROGRAM RELOAD.
4. MFPC->MDMC(DATA repeat) ARE YOU SURE ?
5.
6.
MFPC<-MDMC(CMD once)
MFPC->MDMC(CMD once)
1.YES
2.NO
1
7. MFPC<-MDMC(CMD repeat)
8. MFPC->MDMC(CMD repeat)
Press [START] key.
Press [START] key.
SIMULATION 66-42
SIMULATION 66-36 PIC PROGRAM RELOAD EXECUTING ....
MFPC-MDMC I/F CHECK. INPUT 1-8, AND PRESS START.
EXECUTING...
When check is "once" or When check is "repeat" and
"repeat" and the result is "NG": [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key ON:
SIMULATION 66-42
SIMULATION 66-36 PIC PROGRAM RELOAD
MFPC-MDMC I/F CHECK. INPUT 1-8, AND PRESS START. OK
EXECUTING...(OK or NG)

66-43
SIMULATION 66-43
Purpose Setting PIC ADJUSTMENT VALUE WRITING.
Function PIC adjustment value writing (Only when FAX is ENABLE WRITE PIN(for FAX PROGRAM ROM).
(Purpose) installed) SELECT 0-12, AND PRESS START.
0.WRITING for PIC 1.ci_level_judge 2
1
Section FAX
2.ci_cycle_min 10 3.ci_cycle_max 107 4.ci_range 5
Item Operation 5.ci_count 3 6.ci_detect 8 7.fnet_level_judge 1
Operation/Procedure 8.fnet_range 3 9.fnet_time_out 100 10.fnet_count 3
11.poff_time 3 12.mswon_level_judge 3
To execute this simulation, FAX program writing must be allowed.
(Jumpers and DIP SW depending on the model.) The adjustment Select other then 0 , and
values in PIC are changed or rewritten. press [START] key.
1) Enter the number corresponding to the set item with 10-key. or press [START] key.

3) Enter the set value. PIC ADJUSTMENT VALUE WRITING. INPUT VALUE 1-15, AND
4) Press [P] key. PRESS START.
5) Select 0.
1.ci_level_judge(1-15) 2
6) The confirmation window is displayed. Select whether the PIC Select 0
and press
adjustment values are written or not. [START] key.
or select 2.
YES The adjustment values are collectively written into PIC

SIMULATION 66-43
installed in the FAX BOX. PIC ADJUSTMENT VALUE WRITING.
NO No writing ARE YOU SURE ?
When writing of the PIC adjustment values is normally completed, 1.YES 1
2.NO
“OK” is displayed. In case of an error, “NG” is displayed.
Select 1.
Item Content Set range Default
0 WRITING for PIC Writing to PIC – –
1 ci_level_judge Number of sensing 1-15 2 SIMULATION 66-43
PIC ADJUSTMENT VALUE WRITING.
until the CI signal
EXECUTING...
level is setteld.
2 ci_cycle_min CI signal cycle 0-254 10 Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
min. Time
3 ci_cycle_max CI signal cycle 0-254 107 SIMULATION 66-43
max. time PIC ADJUSTMENT VALUE WRITING.
4 ci_range CI signal allowable 0-127 5 OK ( or NG )
range
5 ci_count CI signal 1-15 3
settlement number
of times 67
6 ci_detect CID IN- signal 1-15 8
settlement number 67-16
of times
7 fnet_level_judge Sense number of 1-15 1 Purpose Operation test/Check
times until Function Used to check the operation of the network card.
settlement of (Purpose)
FNET signal level Section MFP controller
8 fnet_range FNET signal 0-74 3 Item Operation Interface/Communication
allowable range Operation/Procedure
9 fnet_time_out FNET time out 76-255 100 During check, "CHECKING" is displayed. When check is com-
time pleted normally, "OK" is displayed. In case of an error, "NG" is dis-
10 fnet_count FNET signal 1-15 3 played.
settlement number
(Display message)
of times
11 poff_time PON signal OFF 0-15 3 CHECKING Checking
time OK Check end (Normal)
12 mswon_level_judge Sense number of 2-15 3 NG Check end (Error)
times until
settlement of SIMULATION 67-16
MSW_ON signal NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CHECK.
level NIC: CHECKING
Check end Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 67-16
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CHECK.
NIC: OK (or NG)

3. Other related items
LCD
MFP
(1) Simulation adjustment value/ Set value data CONTROLLER
Each controller is provided with an EEPROM. The adjustment/set When the value is changed,
it is sent and saved.
values are collected to the MFP controller. If they are changed,
they are sent back and saved.
Saved adjustment value send

(When the power is turned on, etc.)
ENGINE SCANNER
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
● Data saved by the PCU PWB

Counters Adjustment value Other
Drum rotation time counter Developing bias voltage value Serial number
(Accumulated time)
Developer unit rotation time Cleaning mode developing bias voltage value Trouble history
counter
Toner supply time (Block IC CHIP) Main high voltage adjustment Tray 1 size
Drum rotating time (Block IC Transfer charger voltage value LCC size
CHIP)
Total counter Transfer belt cleaning voltage value Manual destination information
Maintenance counter Toner concentration reference value
Developing counter Density correction start set time (Developer unit) Tray 2 destination information
Drum counter Density correction rotation time (Developer tank)
Toner cartridge counter Density correction amount (Developer tank) Tray 1 paper remaining quantity data
Valid paper counter Correction execution direction, upper/lower limit Tray 2 paper remaining quantity data
(Developer tank)
Tray 1 paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction (low Tray 3 paper remaining quantity data
temperature side) correction amount
Tray 2 paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction (low Tray 4 paper remaining quantity data
temperature side) set temperature
Tray 3 paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction (low Final toner concentration sensor output value
temperature side) release temperature
Tray 4 paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction (high Toner cartridge IC CHIP destination
temperature) correction amount
Manual paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction (high Counter mode setting
temperature side) judgment temperature
ADU paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction (high White paper exit count setting
temperature side) judgment voltage
Staple counter Toner concentration temperature correction (high Trouble memory mode setting
temperature side) correction value
Punch counter Toner concentration temperature correction (low Fusing operation mode (Prevention against
temperature side) release time curl)
Main unit right-side paper exit Toner concentration temperature correction (high CE mark conforming operation mode
counter temperature side) toner concentration delay time
Multi-purpose width adjustment value Maintenance cycle
Manual width adjustment value Print stop setting when developer life over
Saddle staple counter Heater lamp temperature (Center, normal control) Saddle alignment operation priority mode
Lead edge adjustment PCU SOFT SW
Led edge void set value
Rear edge void set value
Side edge setting
Print off-center adjustment value
Resist amount adjustment value
Laser power adjustment value
PPD1 sensor adjustment
Process correction inhibit allow set value
Developing bias rising correction wait time
Developing bias rising correction adjustment value
Built-in finisher jogger position adjustment
Saddle adjustment value

● Data saved by the scanner control PWB
Scan counter Document lead edge adjustment value Exposure mode set value
SPF paper pass counter Document off-center adjustment value Scanner serial number
SPF stamp counter Document image loss amount adjustment value Document image loss amount adjustment value
Magnification ratio adjustment value Scanner soft SW
SPF resist amount adjustment value
Exposure motor speed adjustment value
Platen document detection adjustment value
SPF size width detection adjustment value
Touch panel adjustment value
Exposure level adjustment value
ϒ change value
OC/SPF exposure correction value
Shading adjustment value (CCD/CIS)
CCD shading start position adjustment value
● Data saved by the MFP control PWB

Copy counter FAX SOFT SW., etc. Trouble history
Printer counter JAM history
FAX receive counter Destination setting
FAX send counter Language setting
All valid paper counter Toner save mode setting
Trouble counter 13" setting
JAM counter Auditor setting
Counter mode setting
Trouble memory mode setting
Center binding mode AMS setting
PC/MODEM communication trouble detection
YES/NO setting
Tag number set value
Printers set values
Network set value
MFP soft SW

[10] MACHINE OPERATION • When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that
the punched edge is at a position other than the feed slot.
1. Acceptable originals
Hole positions
A stack of up to 50 original sheets (30 original sheets*1 for 8-1/2" x
14" (B4) or larger) of the same size paper can be set in the docu-
ment feeder tray provided the stack height is within the limit shown
below. Hole
A stack of up to 30 mixed size originals can be set if the width of
positions
the originals is the same and the stack height is within the limit
shown below. In this case, however, stapling and duplex will not
function and some special functions may not give the expected Hole positions
result.
*1: For paper heavier than 28 lbs. (105g/m2), only a stack of up to
15 sheets can be set. Setting 16 or more sheets may cause
incorrect scanning of original and scanned image may 2. Standard original placement
become expanded compared with original itself.
orientations
A. Size and weight of acceptable originals
Place originals in the document feeder tray or on the document
glass so that the top and bottom of the original is positioned as
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
or A5 shown in the illustration. If not, staples will be incorrectly posi-
Original size: 11" x 17" tioned and some special features may not give the expected
or A3
result.
(148 x 210 mm) (297 x 420 mm)
[Example 1]
Weight (thickness): Document feeder tray Document glass
14 lbs. or 50g/m 2 34 lbs. or 128g/m 2 Top Top
g/m 2 ... Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 m 2
B. Total number of originals that can be set in

the document feeder tray Bottom Bottom
Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 1/4" or

6.5 mm (for 14 to 21 lbs. or 50 to 80 g/m2 paper). [Example 2]
1/4" or 6.5 mm
or less
Top Top
Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 3/16" or

5.0 mm (for 21 to 34 lbs. or 80 to 128 g/m2 paper).
3/16" or 5.0 mm
or less Bottom
Bottom
<Notes on use of the automatic document feeder>

• Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges. Use of 3. Automatic copy image rotation -
originals out of the specified range may cause an original mis-
feed. rotation copying
• Before loading originals into the document feeder tray, be sure If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different, the
to remove any staples or paper clips. original image will be automatically rotated 90° and copied. (When
• If originals have damp spots from correction fluid, ink or glue an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) If a function is
from pasteups, be sure they are dried before they are fed. If not, selected that is not suitable for rotation, such as enlarging the copy
the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may to greater than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size or staple sorting with the sad-
be soiled. dle stitch finisher, rotation will not be possible.
• Do not use the following originals. These originals may cause
[Example]
incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds, and smudges
on copies. Orientation of original Orientation of paper Copy after rotation
Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper
or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should not be
fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the
feeder should not be damaged, crumpled or folded or have
loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them. Originals with
multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole
punched paper may not feed correctly.
Face down Face down
MX-M350/M450 N/U MACHINE OPERATION 10 - 1

4. Specifications of paper trays
The specifications for types and sizes of paper that can be used in each tray are shown below.
Tray No.
Tray (tray Applicable paper types Applicable paper sizes Paper weight
name)
Paper tray 1 Tray 1 Plain paper (Refer to the next page for • 8-1/2" x 11", A4, B5 16 to 28 lbs. or
applicable plain papers.) 60 to 105g/m²
Multi purpose drawer/ Tray 2/ Plain paper (Refer to the next page for • If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the 16 to 34 lbs. or
bypass tray bypass applicable plain papers.) paper type and paper size, the following 60 to 128g/m²
tray paper sizes can be used with the automatic
detection function: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R
• If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the paper
type and paper size, the following paper
sizes can be used with the automatic
detection function: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,
B5R, A5R, 8-1/2" x 13"
• Non-standard sizes
Special • Thick paper • If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the See the
paper • Labels, transparency film paper type and paper size, the following remarks for
(Refer to paper sizes can be used with the automatic special paper
the next detection function: on the next
page for 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R page.
applicable • If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the paper
special type and paper size, the following paper
papers.) sizes can be used with the automatic
detection function: A4, A4R, B5, B5R
• Non-standard sizes
Postcard • Japanese official postcard
Envelopes can only be fed • Applicable standard size envelopes:
from the multi-purpose COM-10, Monarch, DL, C5, ISO B5,
drawer. Applicable stock CHOKEI 3
weight for envelopes is 20 to • Non-standard size
23 lbs. or 75 to 90g/m²
Stand/3 x 500 Upper Tray 2 Same as multi purpose drawer
sheet paper Middle Tray 3 Plain paper (Refer to the “A. Applicable • If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the 16 to 28 lbs. or
drawer Lower Tray 4 plain paper”.) paper type and paper size, the following 60 to 105g/m²
paper sizes can be used with the automatic
detection function: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
7-1/4" x 10-1/2"
• If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the paper
type and paper size, the following paper
sizes can be used with the automatic
detection function: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,
B5R, 8-1/2" x 13"
Stand/MPD & Upper Tray 2 Same as multi purpose drawer
2000 sheet Lower Tray 3 Plain paper (Refer to the next page for • 8-1/2" x 11", A4 16 to 28 lbs. or
paper drawer applicable plain papers.) 60 to 105g/m²
A. Applicable plain paper

For satisfactory results, plain paper must conform to the following requirements.
Paper in AB system Paper in inch system
A5 to A3 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17"
Plain paper 16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105g/m²
Recycled, colored, pre-punched, pre-printed and letterhead papers must conform to the same conditions as above.

B. Applicable special paper
For satisfactory results, special paper must conform to the following requirements.
Type Remarks
Special paper Thick paper • For 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 8-1/2" x 11" or A5 to A4 sizes, thick paper ranging from 16 to 34 lbs. or 60 to
128g/m² can be used.
• For sizes larger than 8-1/2" x 11" or A4, thick paper ranging from 16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105g/m² can
be used.
• Other thick papers Index stock (65 lbs. or 176g/m²) can be used. Cover stock (110 lbs. or 200 to
205g/m²) can be used but only for 8-1/2" x 11", A4 paper in the portrait orientation.
• For 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" or A5 paper, the orientation must be landscape.
Transparency • Use SHARP recommended paper. Do not use labels other than SHARP recommended labels.
film, labels, and Doing so may leave adhesive residue in the machine, causing paper misfeeds, smudges on prints
tracing paper or other machine trouble.
Postcards • Japanese official postcards can be used.
Envelopes • Applicable standard envelopes: COM-10, Monarch, DL, C5, ISO B5, CHOKEI 3
• Envelopes can only be fed from the tray 2.
Applicable paper stock weight for envelopes is 20 to 23 lbs. or 75 to 90g/m².
5. Printing onto envelopes 2) Lower the two fusing unit pressure adjusting levers marked A
and B in the illustration.
• Do not use envelopes that have metal clasps, plastic snaps,
string closures, windows, linings, self-adhesive patches or syn- A
thetic materials. Attempting to print on these may cause mis- B
feeds, inadequate toner adherence or other trouble.
• Creases or smudging may occur. This is especially true of
embossed surfaces and other irregular surfaces.
• Under high humidity and temperature conditions the glue flaps
on some envelopes may become sticky and be sealed closed
when printed.
Normal position
• Use only envelopes which are flat and crisply folded. Curled or
poorly formed envelopes may be poorly printed or may cause
misfeeds.
A. Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers

Lower pressure position
When feeding envelopes from the multi purpose drawer, damage
to the envelopes or smudges on prints may occur even if enve- A: Rear side of B: Front side of
lopes within specification are used. In this case, the problem may fusing unit fusing unit
be reduced by shifting the fusing unit pressure adjusting levers
from the normal position to the lower pressure position. Follow the 3) Gently close the duplex module.
procedure below. If the machine is not equipped with a duplex module, close the
ŏŐŕņĻ ŃŦġŴŶųŦġŵŰġųŦŵŶųůġŵũŦġŭŦŷŦųġŵŰġŵũŦġůŰųŮŢŭġűŰŴŪŵŪŰůġŸũŦůġŧŪůŪŴũŦťġŧŦŦťŪůŨ side cover.
ŦůŷŦŭŰűŦŴįġŊŧġůŰŵĭġŪůŢťŦŲŶŢŵŦġŵŰůŦųġŢťũŦųŦůŤŦĭġűŢűŦųġŮŪŴŧŦŦťŴġŰųġŰŵũŦų
ŵųŰŶţŭŦġŮŢźġŰŤŤŶųį
1) Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to the left.
Unlatch the module and gently move the module away from
the machine. If the machine is not equipped with a duplex
module, open the side cover similarly.

6. Printer setting
A. System settings
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE PRINTING
PRINT DENSITY LEVEL
DEFAULT SETTINGS
PROHIBIT TEST PAGE PRINTING
Administrator password
A4/LETTER SIZE AUTO CHANGE
PRINTER SETTINGS HEXADECIMAL DUMP MODE

I/O TIMEOUT
ENABLE USB PORT
INTERFACE SETTINGS USB PORT EMULATION SWITCHING
ENABLE NETWORK PORT
NETWORK PORT EMULATION SWITCHING
PORT SWITCHING METHOD
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ENABLE TCP/IP
ENABLE NetWare
NETWORK SETTINGS ENABLE EtherTalk
ENABLE NetBEUI
RESET THE NIC
TANDEM SETTING
PING COMMAND
(1) Printer settings Hexadecimal dump mode

a. Default settings This program is used to output the print data from a computer in
the hexadecimal dump format with corresponding characters
These programs are used to adjust the settings of various printer
(ASCII). This program is used to check proper transmission of
functions.
print data from the computer to the printer.
Prohibit notice page printing Output example of hexadecimal dump mode
This program is used to disable notice page printing.
Normally this program is set to not print a notice page.
Print density level
This program is used to adjust the lightness or darkness of prints.
Five levels are provided for density adjustment. These are repre-
sented by numbers displayed on the touch panel. Among the dis-
played numbers, a smaller value indicates lighter density and a I/O timeout
larger value indicates a darker density. This program is used to set the length of time to wait for an I/O to
Prohibit test page printing complete a job on the parallel port or the network port. If the data
stream to the port does not transmit data for a length of time
This program is used to disable test page printing.
exceeding the timeout, the job will cancel and the next job will start
When the program is turned on, the PRINTER TEST PAGE in the processing.
custom settings cannot be printed.
The I/O timeout setting is used to set the amount of time after
A4/letter size auto change which an I/O timeout will occur when waiting for print data.
If this program is set, and printing onto 8-1/2" x 11" size paper is Default setting: 20 seconds
selected but not available, the printer will automatically substitute NOTE: The allowable range of the time is 1 to 999 seconds.
A4 size paper in place of 8-1/2" x 11" paper if A4 paper is avail-
able. Enable USB port
∗ 8-1/2" x 11" paper cannot be automatically selected in place of This program is used to enable or disable printing from the USB
A4. port.
NOTE: When 8-1/2" x 11" size is specified for a document Default setting: Enable
attached to an E-mail that has been transmitted from a USB port emulation switching
foreign country and A4 size paper is not installed in the If the machine is connected using the USB port, select the emu-
printer, printing cannot be done without operator lated printer language.
intervention. If this program is set, printing will be
The setting items are the same as those of "Parallel port emulation
executed without intervention if a paper tray is loaded with
switching".
A4 paper.
NOTE: It is recommended to set "AUTO" (default setting) unless
(2) Interface settings an error due to this setting occurs frequently.
These programs are used to control data transmitted to the paral-
Enable network port
lel port, USB port or network port of this printer.
This program is used to enable or disable printing from the net-
work port.
Default setting: Enable

Network port emulation switching Enable NetWare
This program is used to specify a printer language to emulate When using this product in a network that uses the NetWare proto-
when the printer is connected to a computer through the network col, set this program.
port. Default setting: Enable
The setting items are the same as those of "Parallel port emulation
Enable EtherTalk
switching".
When using this product in a network that uses the EtherTalk pro-
NOTE: It is recommended to set "AUTO" (default setting) unless
tocol, set this program.
an error due to this setting occurs frequently.
Default setting: Enable
Port switching method
Enable NetBEUI
The machine can use the three ports shown below for printing.
When using this product in a network that uses the NetBEUI proto-
This program is used to select when switching between ports will
take place. "SWITCH AT END OF JOB" or "SWITCH AFTER I/O col, set this program.
TIMEOUT" can be selected. When "SWITCH AT END OF JOB" is Default setting: Enable
selected, the port will be automatically selected after each print job Reset the NIC
is completed. When "SWITCH AFTER I/O TIMEOUT" is selected,
This program is used to reset all setting items of NIC (Network
the port will be automatically selected if the time set in the I/O Tim-
Interface Card) of this product to the factory default settings.
eout program elapses.
NOTE: If any of the [NETWORK SETTINGS] were changed prior
• USB port
to execution of this program, you must turn off the power
• Network port switch after exiting the key operator program, wait briefly,
(2) Network settings and then turn on the power switch to make the factory
default settings take effect.
These programs are set when this product is used as a network
printer. Tandem setting
After you complete the setting for one program, you must exit the This setting is used to configure the IP address and port number of
key operator programs, turn off the main switch, wait briefly, and the client printer when you wish to have two machines (which are
then turn on the main switch again before any other programs can used as TCP/IP network printers) print in tandem.
be set. The program that was set will be effective after the power is Tandem printing is not possible if the other machine is a different
turned on. model than your machine.
NOTE: For setting and modification of "Network settings", be sure The factory default setting for the port number is [50001]. Unless
to consult with the network administrator. you experience difficulty with this setting, it does not need to be
IP address setting changed.
When using this product in a network that uses the TCP/IP proto- The tandem function can also be prohibited, or the reception of
col, use this program to set the IP address (IP address, IP subnet tandem data from the other machine can be prohibited. (Normally
mask, and IP gateway) of this product. The program is set to this is not necessary.)
ENABLE DHCP by factory default setting, which obtains the IP To prohibit the tandem function, select "DISABLING OF MASTER
address setting automatically. When using this product on a TCP/ MACHINE MODE".
IP network, be sure to turn on the "Enable TCP/IP" program below. To prohibit reception of tandem data from the other machine,
If DHCP is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may select "DISABLING OF SLAVE MACHINE MODE".
be changed automatically on occasion. NOTE: To use the tandem function when auditing mode is
If this happens, printing will not be possible. enabled, the same account number must be entered on
both machines. If the same account number is not
Enable TCP/IP
entered, only the server machine may print or the printed
When using this product in a network that uses the TCP/IP proto- pages may not be added to the correct account.
col, set this program. Also set the IP address using the program
"IP address setting" above. PING command
Default setting: Enable This program is used to check if the machine and a computer con-
nected to the network can communicate.
Enter the IP address of the computer that you wish to check and
touch the [START] key. A message will appear indicating whether
or not there was a response from the computer.
B. Printer software, firmware diagram

Firmware
TIFF
PDF Win95/Win98/WinMe/WinNT4.0/Win2K/WinXP
PostScript Application
File Manager Memory PCL6(SPDL2)
PCL5e(SPDL)
GDI(Graphic Module)
Printer Driver
PostScript Others
Status Print Manager Font PJL AUTO PCL5e(SPDL) Adobe
PCL6(SPDL2) PostScript
PPD
Engine I/F Manager Roman Host I/O Manager
Kanji
Serial ImageBus PCI USB 1284 Print Spooler
PCU Soft USB 1284 1284 Port USB Port Ethernet Port
NIC
Engine

C. Configuration report (Test page)
Model name

[11] TROUBLE CODES Trouble
Contents Remark
Trouble
codes detection
F1 02 Finisher transport motor With PCU
1. General abnormality Finisher
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a con- installed
sumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the Mail-bin stacker transport With Mail
machine detects and displays it on the display section. This allows motor abnormality bin stacker
the user and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of installed
a trouble, this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and 03 Console finisher paddle With Console PCU
stops the machine to minimize the damage. motor trouble Finisher
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a installed
trouble.) 06 Console finisher slide motor With Console PCU
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is trouble Finisher
stopped on detection of a trouble.) installed
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be 08 Finisher staple shift motor With PCU
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, trouble Finisher
improving the repair efficiency.) installed
10 Finisher stapler motor trouble With PCU
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
Finisher
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
installed
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con-
sumable part.) Console finisher stapler With Console PCU
motor trouble Finisher
installed
2. Trouble codes list 11 Finisher bundle exit motor With Finisher PCU
Trouble Trouble trouble installed
Contents Remark
codes detection Console finisher bundle exit With Console PCU
C1 00 MC trouble PCU motor trouble Finisher
E6 11 CSI shading trouble (White When the SCANNER installed
correction) scanner is 12 Mail-bin stacker gate trouble With Mail PCU
installed bin stacker
14 CIS communication trouble When the SCANNER installed
scanner is 15 Finisher lift motor trouble With PCU
installed Finisher
E7 01 System data trouble ICU installed
02 Laser trouble PCU Console finisher lift motor With Console PCU
03 HDD trouble With HDD ICU trouble Finisher
installed
installed
06 Decode error trouble ICU 19 Finisher front alignment With PCU
10 Shading trouble (Black When the SCANNER
installed
correction) scanner is
Console finisher front With Console PCU
installed
alignment motor trouble Finisher
11 Shading trouble (White When the SCANNER
installed
correction all pixel scanner is
adjustment) installed 20 Finisher rear alignment With PCU
14 CCD communication trouble When the SCANNER
installed
scanner is
installed Console finisher rear With Console PCU
alignment motor trouble Finisher
17 SPF scanning position
installed
adjustment trouble (Detected
30 Console finisher With Console PCU
only when executing an
adjustment SIM.) communication trouble Finisher
installed
50 LSU connection trouble PCU
31 Console finisher fold sensor With Console PCU
60 Controller skating trouble
trouble Finisher
80 Communication trouble (ICU When the ICU
installed
detection) between ICU and scanner is
32 Communication trouble With Console PCU
scanner installed
between the console finisher Finisher
90 Communication trouble (ICU When the ICU
and the punch unit. installed
detection) between ICU and scanner is
33 Console finisher punch side With Console PCU
PCU installed
registration motor trouble Finisher
F1 00 Finisher communication With PCU
installed
trouble Finisher
34 Console finisher punch motor With Console PCU
installed
trouble Finisher
Mail-bin stacker With Mail PCU
installed
communication trouble bin stacker
35 Console finisher punch side With Console PCU
installed
registration sensor trouble Finisher
installed
MX-M350/M450 N/U TROUBLE CODES 11 - 1

Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble
Contents Remark Contents Remark
codes detection codes detection
F1 36 Console finisher punch With Console PCU H3 00 Fusing section high PCU
timing sensor trouble Finisher temperature trouble (HL1)
installed 01 Fusing section high PCU
37 Console finisher backup With Console PCU temperature trouble (HL2)
RAM trouble Finisher H4 00 Fusing section low PCU
installed temperature trouble (HL1)
38 Console finisher punch With Console PCU 01 Fusing section low PCU
backup RAM trouble Finisher temperature trouble (HL2)
installed H5 01 5-time continuous POD1 not- PCU
39 Console finisher punch dust With Console PCU reaching jam detection
sensor trouble Finisher L1 00 Scanner feed trouble When the SCANNER
installed scanner is
40 Console finisher punch With Console PCU installed
power interruption trouble Finisher L3 00 Scanner return trouble When the SCANNER
installed scanner is
80 Finisher power abnormality With Finisher PCU installed
installed L4 01 Main motor lock detection PCU
Mail-bin stacker power With Mail bin PCU 02 Drum motor lock detection PCU
abnormality stacker 30 Controller fan motor lock
installed detection
81 Console finisher transport With Console PCU L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection PCU
motor abnormality Finisher L8 01 No fullwave signal PCU
installed
02 Full wave signal width PCU
87 Finisher staple rotation motor With Finisher abnormality
trouble installed
U1 01 FAX battery abnormality With FAX Controller
F2 00 Toner control sensor open/ PCU board
sensor trouble installed
02 Toner supply abnormality PCU 02 RTC read abnormality When the ICU
04 Improper cartridge (life cycle PCU (common with FAX, on ICU Fax board is
error, etc.) PWB) installed
05 CRUM error PCU U2 00 EEPROM read/write error Controller
06 CRUM ID error PCU (ICU)
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU 11 Counter check sum error Controller
F3 12 Machine no. 1 tray lift-up PCU (ICU)
trouble 12 Adjustment value check sum Controller
22 Machine tray 2 lift-up trouble Multi- PCU error (ICU)
purpose tray 22 SRAM memory check sum ICU
F6 00 Communication trouble (ICU When the ICU error (ICU)
detection) between ICU and Fax board is 23 SRAM memory individual
FAX installed data check sum error (ICU)
01 FAX expansion flash memory When the ICU 50 HD section individual data
abnormality (ICU detection) Fax board is check sum error (ICU)
installed 80 EEPROM read/write error When the SCANNER
04 FAX modem operation When the FAX (Scanner) scanner is
abnormality Fax board is installed
installed 81 Memory check sum error When the SCANNER
20 FAX write protect cancel When the FAX (Scanner) scanner is
Fax board is installed
installed 90 EEPROM read/write error PCU
21 Combination abnormality of When the FAX (PCU)
the TEL/LIU PWB and the Fax board is 91 Memory check sum error PCU
FAX soft switch installed (PCU)
97 FAX-BOX skating trouble When the FAX U6 00 Desk/LCC communication With Paper PCU
Fax board is trouble feed desk
installed installed
98 Combination error of the When the FAX 01 Desk/LCC No. 1 tray lift-up With Paper PCU
FAX-BOX destination Fax board is trouble feed desk
information and the machine installed installed
destination information
02 Desk No. 2 tray/LCC1 lift-up With Paper PCU
F7 01 FAX board EEPROM read/ When the FAX trouble feed desk
write error Fax board is installed
installed 03 Desk No. 3 tray/LCC2 lift-up With Paper PCU
H2 00 Thermistor open (HL1) PCU trouble feed desk
01 Thermistor open (HL2) PCU installed
10 Desk/LCC transport motor With Paper PCU
trouble feed desk
installed

Trouble Trouble MAIN SUB Details
Contents Remark
codes detection E7 01 Content System data trouble
U7 00 RIC communication trouble Controller Detail When in data storage/acquiring of the
CH -- Door open (CH ON) PCU HDD system area, the HDD responds
00 No developer cartridge PCU an error and does not respond for
01 No toner cartridge PCU 30sec, it is judged as a trouble.
02 No drum cartridge PCU Cause The HDD is not properly installed to the
EE EL Auto developer adjustment Only during PCU ICU PWB.
trouble (Over-toner) DIAG The HDD does not work for the ICU
PWB.
EU Auto developer adjustment Only during PCU
trouble (Under-toner) DIAG ICU PWB abnormality
Check and Check installation of the HDD to the
PC -- Personal counter not Controller
installed remedy ICU PWB.
Check harness connection of the HDD
PF -- RIC copy inhibit signal is Controller
from the ICU PWB.
received.
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check the HDD
-- -- Auditor not ready Controller
read/write.
Replace the HDD.
3. Details of trouble codes Replace the ICU PWB.
E7 02 Content Laser trouble
MAIN SUB Details
Detail BD signal from LSU is kept OFF, or ON.
C1 00 Content MC trouble
Cause The connector of LSU or the harness in
Detail Main charger output abnormality
LSU is disconnected or broken.
(Output open)
The polygon motor does not rotate
Trouble signal is outputted from the
normally.
high voltage transformer.
The laser home position sensor in LSU
Cause The main charger is not installed
is shifted.
properly.
The proper voltage is not supplied to
The main charger is not assembled
the power line for laser.
properly.
Laser emitting diode trouble
Disconnection of connector of high
PCU PWB trouble
voltage transformer.
ICU PWB trouble
High voltage harness disconnection or
Check and Check for disconnection of the LSU
breakage.
remedy connector.
Check and Use the SIM 8-2 to check the main
Use SIM 61-1 to check LSU operation.
remedy charger output.
Check that the polygon motor rotates
Check for disconnection of the main
normally or not.
charger.
Check light emission of laser emitting
Replace the high voltage unit.
diode.
E6 11 Content CSI shading trouble (White correction) Replace the LSU unit.
Details The CIS white reference plate scan Replace the PCU PWB.
level is abnormal when the lamp is on. Replace the ICU PWB.
Cause Abnormal harness installation to CIS 03 Content HDD trouble
unit Detail HDD connection failure
Dirt on the white reference plate. If the HDD responds an error or does
CIS lighting error not respond for 30sec, it is judged as
CIS unit installation trouble an error. (Other than the system area)
CIS unit abnormality Data abnormality in the file
Scanner PWB abnormality management area (when the cluster
Check & Clean the white reference plate. chain is broken)
Remedy Check CIS light quantity (SIM 5-3) and Cause HDD is not installed properly to the ICU
lighting. PWB.
Check CIS unit harness. HDD does not operate properly in the
Check scanner PWB. ICU PWB.
14 Content CIS communication trouble ICU PWB trouble
Details Communication trouble (clock sync) Check and Check installation of HDD to the ICU
between scanner PWB and CIS-ASIC remedy PWB.
Cause Abnormal harness installation to CIS Check connection of the harness of
unit HDD to the ICU PWB.
CIS unit abnormality Use SIM 62-2, -3 to check read/write of
Scanner PWB abnormality HDD.
Check & Check CIS unit harness. Replace HDD.
Remedy Check CIS unit. Replace ICU PWB.
Check scanner PWB.

MAIN SUB Details MAIN SUB Details
E7 06 Content Decode error trouble E7 50 Content LSU connection trouble
Detail A decode error occurs during making of Detail An LSU which does not conform to the
an image. machine is installed.
Cause Data error during input from PCI to PM. Cause LSU connection trouble
PM trouble PCU PWB trouble
Data error during image compression/ LSU trouble
transfer. Check and Check LSU PWB. Check PCU PWB.
ICU PWB abnormality remedy Check connection of the connector and
Check and Check insertion of the PWB. (PCI bus) the harness between PCU and LSU.
remedy If the error occurred in a FAX job, check 60 Content Controller skating trouble
installation of the FAX PWB. Detail Occurrence of an error in controller
For the other cases, check the ICU skating check
PWB. Cause Discrepancy in the combination of the
Replace the ICU PWB. controller PWB and the ROM
10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction) Check and Check the controller PWB.
Details CCD black scan level abnormality remedy Check the combination of the controller
when the copy lamp is off. PWB and the ROM.
Cause Abnormal installation of flat cable to 80 Content Communication trouble (ICU detection)
CCD unit. between ICU and scanner
CCD unit abnormality Details Communication establishment error/
Scanner PWB abnormality Fleming/Parity/Protocol error
Check & Check installation of CCD unit flat Cause Defective connection of slave unit PWB
Remedy cable. connector
Check CCD unit. Defective harness between slave unit
Check scanner PWB. PWB and ICU PWB
11 Content Shading trouble (White correction all Slave unit PWB mother board
pixel adjustment) connector pin breakage
Details CCD white reference plate scan level Check & Check connector and harness of slave
abnormality when the copy lamp is ON. Remedy unit PWB and ICU PWB.
Cause Abnormal installation of flat cable to Check grounding of machine.
CCD unit. 90 Content Communication trouble (ICU detection)
Dirt on mirror, lens, white reference between ICU and PCU
plate Details Communication establishment error/
Copy lamp lighting abnormality Fleming/Parity/Protocol error
Abnormal installation of CCD unit Cause Defective connection of slave unit PWB
CCD unit abnormality connector
Scanner PWB abnormality
Defective harness between slave unit
Check & Clean mirror, lens, and white reference PWB and ICU PWB
Remedy plate. Slave unit PWB mother board
Check copy lamp light quantity (SIM 5- connector pin breakage
3) and lighting. Check & Check connector and harness of slave
Check CCD unit.
Remedy unit PWB and ICU PWB.
Check scanner PWB. Check grounding of machine.
14 Content CCD communication trouble
F1 00 Content Finisher communication trouble
Details Communication trouble (clock sync) Detail Communication cable test error after
between scanner PWB and CCD-ASIC
turning on the power or exiting from
Cause Abnormal installation of harness to SIM.
CCD unit Communication error with the finisher
CCD unit abnormality Cause Improper connection or disconnection
Scanner PWB abnormality of connectors and harness between
Check & Check CCD unit harness. the machine and the finisher.
Remedy Check CCD unit. Finisher control PWB trouble
Check scanner PWB. Control PWB (PCU) trouble
17 Content SPF scanning position adjustment Malfunction by noises
trouble (Detected only when executing Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the
an adjustment SIM.) remedy power.
Details The black Mylar which serves as the Check connectors and harness in the
reference of the SPF scanning position communication line.
is not detected. Replace the finisher control PWB or
Cause Black Mylar installing failure on the PCU PWB.
SPF side
Check & Check the SPF black Mylar.
Remedy

F1 00 Content Mail-bin stacker communication trouble F1 08 Content Finisher staple shift motor trouble
Detail Communication cable test error after Detail Staple motor drive trouble
turning on the power or exiting from Cause Motor lock
SIM. Drive abnormality
Communication error with the Mail-bin Defective connection or disconnection
stacker. between the PWB and the motor.
Cause Improper connection or disconnection Home position sensor abnormality
of connector and harness between the Motor rpm abnormality
machine and the Mail-bin stacker. Finisher control PWB trouble
Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble Check and Use SIM3-3 to check operations of the
Control PWB (PCU) trouble remedy staple motor.
Malfunction by noises 10 Content Finisher stapler motor trouble
Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the Detail Stapler motor operation abnormality
remedy power. Cause Motor lock
Check harness and connector in the Defective connection or disconnection
communication line. between the PWB and the motor.
Replace the Mail-bin stacker PWB or Home position sensor abnormality
PCU PWB. Motor rpm abnormality
02 Content Finisher transport motor abnormality Overcurrent to the motor
Detail Transport motor drive trouble Console finisher control PWB trouble
Cause Motor lock Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
Drive abnormality remedy operation.
Defective connection or disconnection 10 Content Console finisher stapler motor trouble
between the PWB and the motor. Detail Stapler motor operation abnormality
Motor RPM abnormality Cause Motor lock
Overcurrent to the motor
Motor rpm abnormality
Finisher control PWB trouble Overcurrent to the motor
Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the transport Console finisher control PWB trouble
remedy motor operation. Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
02 Content Mail-bin stacker transport motor remedy operation.
abnormality 11 Content Finisher bundle exit motor trouble
Detail Transport motor trouble
Detail Bundle exit motor operation
Cause Motor lock abnormality
Drive abnormality
Cause Motor lock
Defective connection or disconnection Drive abnormality
between the PWB and the motor. Defective connection or disconnection
Motor rpm abnormality between the PWB and the motor.
Overcurrent to the motor Home position sensor abnormality
Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble Motor rpm abnormality
Check and Use SIM3-21 to check the transport Console finisher control PWB trouble
remedy motor operation. Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the bundle exit
03 Content Console finisher paddle motor trouble remedy motor operation and the paddle
Detail Paddle motor operation abnormality solenoid operation, or use SIM 3-2 to
Cause Motor lock check the boomerang rotations sensor.
Motor rpm abnormality 11 Content Console finisher bundle exit motor
Overcurrent to the motor trouble
Console finisher control PWB trouble Detail Bundle exit motor operation
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor abnormality
remedy operation. Cause Motor lock
06 Content Console finisher slide motor trouble Motor rpm abnormality
Detail Slide motor operation abnormality Overcurrent to the motor
Cause Motor lock Console finisher control PWB trouble
Motor rpm abnormality Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
Overcurrent to the motor remedy operation.
Console finisher control PWB trouble 12 Content Mail-bin stacker gate trouble
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor Detail Gate operation abnormality
remedy operation. Cause Gate lock
Defective connection or disconnection
between the PWB and the solenoid.
Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM3-21 to check the transport
remedy gate operation.

F1 15 Content Finisher lift motor trouble F1 30 Content Console finisher communication
Detail Lift motor operation abnormality trouble
Cause Motor lock Detail Communication cable test error after
Motor rpm abnormality turning on the power or exiting from
Overcurrent to the motor SIM.
Finisher control PWB trouble Communication error with the console
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the lift motor finisher
remedy operation. Cause Improper connection or disconnection
15 Content Console finisher lift motor trouble of connector and harness between the
Detail Lift motor operation abnormality machine and the console finisher.
Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Drive abnormality
Defective connection or disconnection Malfunction by noises
between the PWB and the motor. Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the
Upper/lower limit sensor trouble remedy power.
Motor rpm abnormality Check connectors and harness in the
Overcurrent to the motor communication line.
Console finisher control PWB trouble Replace the console finisher control
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor PWB or PCU PWB.
remedy operation. 31 Content Console finisher fold sensor trouble
19 Content Finisher front alignment motor trouble Detail Sensor input value abnormality
Detail Front alignment motor operation Cause Sensor breakage
abnormality harness breakage
Drive abnormality Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the sensor
Defective connection or disconnection remedy operation.
between the PWB and the motor. 32 Content Communication trouble between the
Home position sensor abnormality console finisher and the punch unit.
Motor rpm abnormality Detail Communication err between the
Finisher control PWB trouble console finisher and the punch unit.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor Cause Improper connection or disconnection
remedy operation. of connector and harness between the
19 Content Console finisher front alignment motor console finisher and the punch unit.
trouble Console finisher control PWB trouble
Detail Front alignment motor operation Control PWB (PCU) trouble
abnormality Malfunction by noise
Cause Motor lock Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the
Motor rpm abnormality remedy power.
Overcurrent to the motor Check connectors and harness in the
Console finisher control PWB trouble communication line.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor Replace the console finisher control
PWB.
remedy operation.
20 Content Finisher rear alignment motor trouble 33 Content Console finisher punch side
registration motor trouble
Detail Rear alignment motor operation
abnormality Detail Punch side registration motor operation
abnormality
Cause Motor lock
Drive abnormality Cause Motor lock
Defective connection or disconnection
between the PWB and the motor. Overcurrent to the motor
Home position sensor abnormality Console finisher control PWB trouble
Motor rpm abnormality Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
Finisher control PWB trouble remedy operation.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor 34 Content Console finisher punch motor trouble
remedy operation. Detail Punch motor operation abnormality
20 Content Console finisher rear alignment motor Cause Motor lock
trouble Motor rpm abnormality
Detail Rear alignment motor operation Overcurrent to the motor
abnormality Console finisher control PWB trouble
Cause Motor lock Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
Motor rpm abnormality remedy operation.
Overcurrent to the motor 35 Content Console finisher punch side
Console finisher control PWB trouble registration sensor trouble
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor Detail Sensor input value abnormality
remedy operation. Cause Sensor breakage
Harness disconnection
Console finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the sensor
remedy operation.

F1 36 Content Console finisher punch timing sensor F1 87 Content Finisher staple rotation motor trouble
trouble Detail Front staple rotation motor trouble
Detail Sensor input value abnormality Cause Motor lock
Cause Sensor breakage Drive abnormality
Harness disconnection Defective connection or disconnection
Console finisher control PWB trouble between the PWB and the motor.
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the sensor Home position sensor abnormality
remedy operation. Motor rpm abnormality
37 Content Console finisher backup RAM trouble Overcurrent to the motor
Detail Backup RAM contents are disturbed. Finisher control PWB trouble
Cause Console finisher control PWB trouble Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
Malfunction by noise remedy operation.
Check and Replace the console finisher control F2 00 Content Toner control sensor open/sensor
remedy PWB. trouble
38 Content Console finisher punch backup RAM Detail Toner control sensor output open
trouble Cause Connector harness trouble
Detail Punch unit backup RAM contents are Connector disconnection
disturbed. Sensor trouble
Cause Punch control PWB trouble Check and Check connection of the toner control
Malfunction by noise remedy sensor.
Check and Replace the punch control PWB. Check connection of connector and
harness to the main PWB.
remedy
Check for disconnection of harness.
39 Content Console finisher punch dust sensor
Replace the sensor.
trouble
02 Content Toner supply abnormality
Detail Punch dust sensor detection trouble
Detail Toner control sensor output value
Cause When the punch dust sensor is not
becomes under-toner too earlier.
normally detected.
Cause Connector harness trouble
Check and Sensor breakage
Toner concentration sensor trouble
remedy Harness disconnection
Toner cartridge trouble
Punch control PWB trouble
Check and Check connection of the connector in
40 Content Console finisher punch power
remedy the toner motor section.
interruption trouble
Check connection of connector and
Detail When power interruption of the punch
harness to the main PWB.
unit is detected
Check for disconnection of harness.
Cause Though 24V is supplied to the punch Toner concentration sensor output
unit, the punch unit detects power check SIM25-1.
interruption. Replace the toner cartridge.
Check and Harness disconnection 04 Content Improper cartridge (life cycle error, etc.)
remedy Punch control PWB trouble
Detail An improper process cartridge is
80 Content Finisher power abnormality inserted.
Detail The 24V power is not supplied to the Cause IC chip trouble
finisher PWB. Improper cartridge
Cause Improper connection or disconnection Check and Insert a proper cartridge.
of connector and harness remedy
Finisher control PWB trouble
05 Content CRUM error
Power unit trouble
Detail Communication with IC chip cannot be
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the sensor.
made.
remedy
Cause IC chip trouble
80 Content Mail-bin stacker power abnormality
IC chip contact failure
Detail The 24V power is not supplied to the Improper cartridge
Mail-bin stacker PWB.
Check and Insert a proper cartridge.
Cause Improper connection or disconnection remedy Is the cartridge installed properly?
of connector and harness
06 Content CRUM ID error
Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble
Detail IC chip trouble
Power unit trouble
Cause Improper cartridge
Check and Use SIM3-20 to check the sensor
Check and Insert a proper cartridge.
remedy operation.
remedy
81 Content Console finisher transport motor
abnormality
Detail Transport motor trouble
Cause Motor lock
Overcurrent to the motor
Console finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
remedy operation.

F2 39 Content Process thermistor trouble F6 01 Content FAX expansion flash memory
Detail Output value abnormality of the abnormality (ICU detection)
temperature sensor of temperature/ Details Flash memory cannot be deleted.
humidity sensor Cause Flash memory cannot be deleted.
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor Check & Check the FAX image storage Flash
abnormality Remedy memory.
Temperature/humidity sensor harness Use SIM 66-10 to clear the flash
connection failure memory.
PCU PWB trouble 04 Content FAX modem operation abnormality
Check and Check connection of the harness and Details FAX PWB modem chip operation
remedy the connector of the temperature/ abnormality
humidity sensor. Cause Modem chip operation abnormality in
Replace the temperature/humidity FAX PWB
sensor.
Check & Replace FAX PWB.
Check PCU PWB. Remedy
58 Content Process humidity sensor breakdown
20 Content FAX write protect cancel
Detail Process humidity sensor open or short Detail The write protect JP is released.
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor harness Cause The write protect JP is set to “write
connection failure allow.”
Temperature/humidity sensor
FAX interface PWB trouble
abnormality FAX PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check and Check the write protect JP.
Check and Check connection of the harness and remedy Replace the FAX PWB. Replace the
remedy the connector of the temperature/ FAX interface PWB.
humidity sensor.
21 Content Combination abnormality of the TEL/
Replace the temperature/humidity
LIU PWB and the FAX soft switch
sensor.
Detail Combination abnormality of the TEL/
Check PCU PWB.
LIU PWB and the FAX PWB
F3 12 Content Machine no. 1 tray lift-up trouble
information (soft switch)
Detail LUD does not turn ON in the specified Or the TEL/LIU PWB is not a new one
time. for new MDMC PWB.
Cause LUD trouble Cause The destination of the installed TEL/LIU
No. 1 tray lift-up trouble PWB differs.
Check connection of harness between
The FAX PWB information (soft switch)
the PCVU PWB, lift-up unit, and paper differs.
feed unit. TEL/LIU PWB trouble
Check and Check LUD, and their harness and Check and Check the destination of the TEL/LIU
remedy connectors. remedy PWB.
Check the lift-up unit.
Check the FAX PWB information (soft
F3 22 Content Machine tray 2 lift-up trouble switch).
Detail MCLUD does not turn ON in the Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
specified time. 97 Content FAX-BOX skating trouble
Cause MCLUD trouble The FAX-BOX PWB is not one for the
No. 2 tray lift-up motor trouble AR-FX12. (FAX detection)
Harness disconnection f the PCU Detail The FAX-BOX MODEM controller is not
PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper one for the AR-FX12.
feed unit. Cause The FAX-BOX Modem controller PWB
Check and Check MCLUD, and their harness and information (hard detection) is not for
remedy connectors. the AR-FX12. (The Modem controller
Check the lift-up unit. PWB for the AR-FX5 or the AR-FX6 is
F6 00 Content Communication trouble (ICU detection) used.)
between ICU and FAX Check and Check the FAX-BOX modem controller
Details Communication establishment error/ remedy PWB.
Fleming/Parity/Protocol error Replace it with a modem controller
Cause Slave unit PWB connector PWB for the AR-FX12.
disconnection
Harness abnormality between slave
unit PWB and ICU PWB.
Slave unit PWB mother board
connector pin breakage
Slave unit ROM abnormality/No ROM/
Reverse insertion of ROM/ROM pin
breakable
Check & Check connector harness between
Remedy slave unit PWB and ICU PWB.
Check grounding of machine.
Check slave unit PWB ROM.

F6 98 Content Combination error of the FAX-BOX H3 00··· Content Fusing section high temperature
destination information and the HL1 trouble
machine destination information Detail The fusing temperature exceeds
Detail Combination error of the FAX-BOX 01··· 242°C. (An input voltage of 0.27V or
destination information and the HL2 above is detected.)
machine destination information Fusing temperature control is started,
Cause Because of improper combination and 242°C is detected three or more
between the destination information times continuously in sampling in the
stored in the EEPROM on the FAX- specified interval. (Every 300msec)
BOX PWB and that of the machine (set Cause Thermistor trouble
with SIM 26-6). Control PWB trouble
Check and Check the destination of the FAX-BOX. Fusing section connector
remedy Check the machine destination with disconnection
SIM 26-6. AC power trouble
Use a proper combination of the Check and Use SIM5-2 to check the heater lamp
machine and the FAX-BOX. remedy Blinking operation.
F7 01 Content FAX board EEPROM read/write error If the heater lamp blinks normally:
Details EEPROM access error (read/write) Check the thermistor and its
Cause EEPROM trouble harness.
FAX PWB EEPROM access circuit Check the thermistor input circuit in
trouble the control PWB.
Check & When replacing the EEPROM, use If the heater lamp keep lighting:
Check the AC PWB and the lamp
Remedy SIM66-4/5 (Signal send level) and
SIM66-14/15/16 (Dial test) for control circuit in the control PWB.
adjustment. However, note that all the Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble
soft switches are reset to the initial H4 00··· Content Fusing section low temperature trouble
values. HL1 Detail The set temperature is not reached
No need to adjust when the PWB is within the specified time (3 min) after
replaced. 01··· turning on the power relay, or the
H2 00··· Content Thermistor open HL2 temperature does not reach 80°C
HL1 Fusing unit not installed within 80 sec.
Detail Thermistor is open. When the heater lamp is not turned off
01··· in the specified time (3 min) from
(An input voltage of 2.92V or above is
HL2 detected.) starting warm-up, or the temperature
Fusing unit not installed does not reach 80°C within 80 sec.
After completion of warm-up operation,
Cause Thermistor trouble
a temperature 50°C lower than the
Control PWB trouble
temperature control level is detected 5
Fusing section connector
times continuously in sampling in the
disconnection
specified interval. (every 300msec)
AC power trouble
Cause Thermistor trouble
Fusing unit not installed
Heater lamp trouble
Check and Check harnesses and connectors from
Control PWB trouble
remedy the thermistor to the control PWB.
Thermostat trouble
Use SIM14 to clear the self diag
AC power trouble
display.
Interlock switch trouble
Check and Use SIM5-2 to check the heater lamp
remedy Blinking operation.
If the heater lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and its
harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit in
the control PWB.
If the heater lamp does not light:
Check for heater lamp disconnection
and thermostat disconnection.
Check the interlock switch.
Check the AC PWB and the lamp
control circuit in the control PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

H5 01 Content 5-time continuous POD1 not-reaching L4 30 Content Controller fan motor lock detection
jam detection Detail The motor lock signal is detected
Detail 5-time continuous POD1 not-reaching during rotation of the controller fan
jam detection motor.
Cause A fusing section jam is not properly The motor lock signal is detected
removed. (Jam paper remains.) during rotation of the HDD fan motor.
POD1 sensor trouble, or harness Cause Fan motor trouble
disconnection Improper connection of the harness
Improper installation of fusing unit between the controller PWB and the
Check and Check jam paper in the fusing section. fan motor.
remedy (winding, etc.) Control circuit trouble
Check POD1 sensor harness, and Check and Use SIM 6-2 to check the fan motor
check the fusing unit installation. remedy operation.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Check the harness and the connector
L1 00 Content Scanner feed trouble between the controller PWB and the
Details Scanner feed is not completed within fan motor.
the specified time. L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detection
Cause Scanner unit abnormality Detail It is judged that the polygon motor lock
Scanner wire disconnection signal is not outputted.
Check & Check scanning with SIM 1-1. Lock signal is checked in the interval of
Remedy 10sec after starting the polygon motor,
L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble and it is judged that the polygon motor
Details Scanner return is not completed within does not rotate normally.
the specified time. Cause The LSU connector or harness in the
Cause Scanner unit abnormality LSU is disconnected or broken.
Polygon motor trouble
Scanner wire disconnection
Check & Check scanning with SIM 1-1. Check and Use SIM61-1 to check the polygon
remedy motor operation.
Remedy
Check connector and harness
L4 01 Content Main motor lock detection
connection.
Detail The motor lock signal is detected for
Replace LSU.
1.5sec during rotation of the main
L8 01 Content No fullwave signal
motor.
Detail Full wave signal is not detected.
Cause main motor trouble
Cause The PCU PWB connector or the power
Check connection of harness between
the PCU PWB and the main motor. unit harness is disconnected or broken.
Control circuit trouble PCU PWB trouble
12V power source trouble
Check and Use SIM25-1 to check the main motor
remedy operation. Check and Check connection of the harness and
remedy connector.
Check harness and connector between
the PCU PWB and the main motor. Replace PCU PWB.
Replace the power unit.
02 Content Drum motor lock detection
Replace the controller connection
Detail The motor lock signal is detected for
mother board.
1.5sec during rotation of the drum
02 Content Full wave signal width abnormality
motor.
Detail It is judged as full wave signal
Cause Drum motor trouble
frequency abnormality.
Improper connection of harness
(When the detection cycle is judged as
between the PCU PWB and the drum
69Hz or above or 42.5Hz or below)
motor.
Control circuit trouble Cause The connector or harness of the PCU
PWB and the power PWB is
Check and Use SIM6-1 to check the drum motor
disconnected.
remedy operation.
PCU PWB trouble
Check harness and connector between
Power unit trouble
the PCU PWB and the drum motor.
Check and Check connection of the harness and
remedy connector.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the power unit.

U1 01 Content FAX battery abnormality U2 22 Content SRAM memory check sum error (ICU)
Detail FAX backup SRAM battery voltage fall Detail MFPC section SRAM memory check
Cause Battery life sum error
Battery circuit abnormality Cause SRAM trouble
Check and Check that the battery voltage is about Control circuit runaway due to noises
remedy 2.5V or above. ICU PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Check the battery circuit. Check and Initialize the communication
02 Content RTC read abnormality remedy management table registered in the
(common with FAX, on ICU PWB) SRAM and the FAX soft switch.
Details The value read from RTC on ICU PWB Since the registered data are deleted,
is [EE]h (abnormal). register the data again.
Cause RTC circuit abnormality Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
Battery voltage fall Replace the ICU PWB.
Battery circuit abnormality 23 Content SRAM memory individual data check
Check & Set the time again with key operation, sum error (ICU)
Remedy and check that time advances properly. Detail Check sum error for every data in the
Check RTC circuit. SRAM memory of the MFPC section
Check that battery voltage is about (Communication management table,
2.5V or above. sender registration data, etc.)
Check battery circuit. Cause SRAM trouble
U2 00 Content EEPROM read/write error (ICU) Control circuit runaway due to noises
Detail EEPROM write error ICU PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Cause EEPROM trouble Check and Automatically initialize the data related
EEPROM is not initialized. remedy to the check sum error by turning OFF/
ICU PWB EEPROM access circuit ON the power.
trouble Since the registered data are deleted,
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly register the data again.
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
remedy inserted.
Save the counter/adjustment values Replace the ICU PWB.
with the simulation. U2 50 Content HD section individual data check sum
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. error (ICU)
Replace the ICU PWB. Detail Check sum error for every individual
U2 11 Content Counter check sum error (ICU) data in HD of the MFPC section (One-
Detail Counter data area check sum error touch, Group, Program, etc.)
Cause EEPROM trouble Cause HDD write/read error
Control circuit trouble by noise Control circuit runaway due to noises
ICU PWB HD access circuit trouble
ICU PWB EEPROM access circuit
trouble Check and Automatically initialize the data related
remedy to the check sum error by turning OFF/
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly
remedy inserted. ON the power.
Save the counter/adjustment values Since the registered data are deleted,
register the data again.
with the DIAG simulation.
Use DIAG (SIM16) to cancel U2 Use SIM 16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
trouble. Replace the HD PWB.
Replace the ICU PWB.
12 Content Adjustment value check sum error 80 Content EEPROM read/write error (Scanner)
(ICU) Details Scanner EEPROM write error
Detail Adjustment data area check sum error Cause EEPROM abnormality
Cause EEPROM trouble Scanner PWB EEPROM access circuit
Control circuit trouble by noise abnormality
ICU PWB EEPROM access circuit Check & Check that EEPROM is set properly.
trouble Remedy Record counter/adjustment values with
the simulation to protect the data from
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly
remedy inserted. being deleted.
Save the counter/adjustment values Cancel U2 trouble with SIM 16.
Replace scanner PWB.
with the simulation.
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.

U2 81 Content Memory check sum error (Scanner) U6 02 Content Desk No. 2 tray/LCC1 lift-up trouble
Details Scanner memory check sum error Detail Desk No. 2 tray/LCC lift-up trouble
Cause EEPROM trouble Cause Sensor trouble
EEPROM which is not initialized is Tray trouble
installed. Defective connection or disconnection
Control circuit freeze by noises between the PWB and the motor.
Scanner PWB EEPROM access circuit Desk control PWB trouble
trouble Lift-up motor trouble
Check & Check that EEPROM is set properly. Check and Use SIM4-2 to check the upper limit
Remedy Record counter/adjustment values with remedy sensor detection.
the simulation to protect the data from Use SIM4-3 to check the lift-up motor
being deleted. operation.
Cancel U2 trouble with SIM 16. 03 Content Desk No. 3 tray/LCC2 lift-up trouble
Replace scanner PWB. Detail Desk no. 3 tray lift-up trouble
90 Content EEPROM read/write error (PCU) Cause Sensor trouble
Detail PCU EEPROM write error Tray trouble
Cause EEPROM trouble Defective connection or disconnection
PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit between the PWB and the motor.
trouble Desk control PWB trouble
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly Lift-up motor trouble
remedy inserted. Check and Use SIM4-2 to check the upper limit
Record counter/adjustment values with remedy sensor detection.
the simulation to protect the data from Use SIM4-3 to check the lift-up motor
being deleted. operation.
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. 10 Content Desk/LCC transport motor trouble
Replace the Controller PWB. Detail Desk/LCC transport motor operation
91 Content Memory check sum error (PCU) trouble
Detail PCU memory check sum error Cause Motor lock
Cause EEPROM trouble Drive abnormality
EEPROM which is not initialized is Defective connection or disconnection
installed. between the PWB and the motor.
EEPROM is not initialized. Motor rpm abnormality
PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit Overcurrent to the motor
trouble Desk control PWB trouble
Hang of control circuit due to noises Check and Use SIM4-3 to check the transport
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly remedy motor operation.
remedy inserted. U7 00 Content RIC communication trouble
Save the counter/adjustment values Detail RIC communication trouble
with the simulation. Communication cable test error after
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. turning on the power or exiting SIM.
Replace the Controller PWB. Cause Disconnection of connector and
U6 00 Content Desk/LCC communication trouble harness
Detail Desk/LCC communication error RTC control PWB trouble
Communication cable test error after Control PWB (ICU) trouble
turning on the power or exiting SIM. Noise or interference
Cause Improper connection or disconnection Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the
of connector and harness remedy power.
Desk control PWB trouble Check connector and harness in the
Control PWB (PCU) trouble communication line.
Noise or interference EE EL Content Auto developer adjustment trouble
Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the (Over-toner)
remedy power. Detail The toner concentration output is
Check connection of the harness and detected as 1.5V or below in the auto
connector in the communication line. development adjustment.
01 Content Desk/LCC No. 1 tray lift-up trouble Cause Toner concentration sensor trouble
Detail Desk/LCC No. 1 tray lift-up trouble Charging voltage, developing voltage
Cause Sensor trouble abnormality
Tray trouble Insufficient toner concentration
Defective connection or disconnection Developing unit trouble
between the PWB and the motor. PCU PWB trouble
Desk control PWB trouble Check and Use SIM25-2 to perform auto developer
Lift-up motor trouble remedy adjustment.
Check and Use SIM4-2 to check the upper limit
remedy sensor detection.
Use SIM4-3 to check the lift-up motor
operation.

MAIN SUB Details (2) Power ON trouble detection function
EE EU Content Auto developer adjustment trouble • When the power is turned on, if the stored trouble is H3, H4, H5,
(Under-toner) U1, U2, PF, or U6 (sub code 2, 3), it is immediately judged as a
Detail The toner concentration output is trouble.
detected as 3.5V or above in the auto ∗ E7-50 and 60 are not judged as a storing trouble, (Detected
development adjustment. every time when the power is turned on.)
Cause Insufficient toner concentration
Trouble cancel command
Charging voltage, developing voltage Trouble code Storing
simulation
abnormality
Insufficient toner concentration H3, H4, H5 PCU SIM 14
Developing unit trouble U1 ICU SIM 13
PCU PWB trouble U2 Each block SIM 16
Check and Use SIM25-2 to perform auto developer
PF ICU SIM 17
remedy adjustment.
PF 00 Content RIC copy inhibit signal is received. U6-2, 3 PCU SIM 15
Detail Copy inhibit command from RIM (host) (3) Basic flow of countermeasures
is received.
Cause Judged by the host. Monitors the machine
Check and Inform to the host. conditions.
remedy
Detects/analyzes
4. Other related items the content.
(1) Self diag operation

The machine always monitors its own status. When it detects any Warning
abnormality or a status which requires warning, it performs the self Trouble/Warning
diag operation to display the trouble or warning message as fol-
lows: Trouble
Warning Content This message is displayed to warn
mainly the user to inform that a The machine is stopped.
consumable part is near life, etc. It is
no direct relation with machine
troubles. The content is displayed.
Machine The machine operation may be
operation stopped and may be not.
Message The message may be automatically Warning A consumable NO
clear cleared by replacement or supply of Trouble/Warning part has reached
the consumable part, or may be its lifetime.
cleared by the specified simulation
Trouble YES
operation.
Trouble Content This message is a trouble message Troubleshoot the cause. Replace or supply
related to a machine trouble. the consumable part.
Machine The machine operation is stopped.

operation Repair
Message This message may be automatically
clear cleared by repairing the trouble, or
may be cleared by the specified
Cancel the self-
diagnostic message with
simulation operation.
the diagnostics
(test commands).
Reset
Standby state

(4) List of trouble modes
● Troubles where the machine can be operated under some conditions
When a trouble occurs, the dialogue is displayed and OK button is added to the trouble message.
Operation enable mode
Judgment Copy read Notification
Trouble content Trouble code FAX Email FAX List
block (including Print to
send receive print print
interrupt) FASThost
Scanner section breakdowns (Mirror L1, L3, U2 (80, 81)
Scanner ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
motor, lens, copy lamp)
FAX board breakdown ICU/FAX F6, F7 ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕
FAX power OFF ICU ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕
Network error ICU CE ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕
Staple breakdown PCU F1 (10) Δ2 ❍ ❍ Δ2 Δ2 Δ2 ❍
Paper feed tray breakdown PCU F3, U6 (LCC) Δ3 ❍ ❍ Δ3 Δ3 Δ3 ❍
PCU section breakdowns (Motor, C1, C2, C3, H2, H3, H4,
fusing section, etc.) PCU H5, L4 (excluding L4-30), ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍
L8, U2 (90, 91), F2
After-process breakdown PCU F1 Δ5 ❍ ❍ Δ5 Δ5 Δ5 ❍
Laser breakdown PCU E7 (02 only), L6 ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍
HDD breakdown ICU E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍
CCD breakdowns (Shading, etc.) Scanner E7 (10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
CIS breakdowns (Shading, etc.) Scanner E6 (10, 11, 14) Δ6 Δ6 Δ6 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Scanner communication trouble ICU E7 (80) ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
PCU communication trouble ICU E7 (90) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍
FAX backup battery voltage fall ICU U1 (01, 02) ❍ ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
HDD registration data sum error ICU U2 (50) ❍ ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Thermistor trouble (trouble history) PCU F2 (39, 58) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
● Troubles where the machine cannot be operated
When a trouble occurs, the dialogue is displayed. OK button is not added to the trouble massage, and only setting can be performed. The
message remains displayed until the trouble is canceled.
Operation enable mode
Judgment Copy read Notification
Trouble content Trouble code FAX Email FAX List
block (including Print to
send receive print print
interrupt) FASThost
Memory ICU U2 (00, 11, 12, 22, 23) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍
External communication disable U7, PF
ICU ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍
(RICA)
Image memory trouble, decode error ICU E7 (01, 06) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍
Skating check error ICU/PCU E7 (50, 60) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Controller fan motor trouble ICU L4-30 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
∗ For FAX communication, refer to the “(5) Communication speci-
fication when a trouble occurs.”
∗ The machine may be operated under some conditions.
Δ1: When detected except when in a job, the machine can be
operated in the OC mode.
Δ2: Can be operated except in the staple mode.
Δ3: When detected except in a job, the machine can be operated
except with the breakdown tray.
Δ4: Can be operated with some restriction on the image quality
depending on the destination. (Low density print)
Δ5: When detected except in a job, can be operated except in the
trouble paper exit section.
Δ6: When detected except in a job, can be operated in the single
surface scan mode.

(5) Communication specification when a trouble occurs
The image send/receive specifications when a trouble occurs are as shown below.
Send FAX call FAX LAN LAN
Trouble Print Precaution
reservation request call-in send receive
PCU breakdowns (Excluding C1, There is a risk that the memory is full.
C2, C3, H2, H3, H4, H5, L4, L8, U2- ❍ × ❍ ❍ Note ❍ ❍ Note
90, U2-91, and skating check error)
Scanner breakdowns (L1, L3, U2-
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
80, U2-81)
F6, F7 (FAX breakdown) × ❍ × × ❍ ❍
F1 (Paper exit section breakdown) ❍ Δ4 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
F3, U6 (Paper feed tray breakdown) ❍ Δ2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
E7 (01, 06) (ICU breakdown) × × × × ❍ ❍
E7-02 (Laser breakdown) ❍ × ❍ ❍ Note × ❍ Note There is a risk that the memory is full.
E7-03 (HD breakdown) × × × × × ×
E7 (10, 11, 14) (CCD breakdown) × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
E6 (10, 11, 14) (CIS breakdown) Δ6 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
E7-80 (Scanner communication
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
trouble)
E7-90 (PCU communication trouble) × × × × × ×
E7 (50, 60) (Skating check error) × × × × × ×
U2 (00, 11, 12, 22) (ICU memory
× × × × × ×
error)
U2 (22, 23) (SRAM check sum
× × × × × ×
error)
U2-50 (HD check sum error) × × × × × ×
U7 (RIC external communication Inhibition of use by a customer
× × × × × ×
disable), PF having outstanding fee
U1 (Backup battery voltage fall) × Δ3 × Note × × Note × Transfer enable
L4-30 (Controller fan motor trouble) × × × × × ×
Door open ❍ × ❍ ❍Note ❍ ❍ Note There is a risk that the memory is full.
Toner empty ❍ × ❍ ❍Note ❍ ❍ Note There is a risk that the memory is full.
Process cartridge uninstalled, etc. ❍ × ❍ ❍Note ❍ ❍ Note There is a risk that the memory is full.
Paper empty ❍ × ❍ ❍Note ❍ ❍ Note There is a risk that the memory is full.
Paper JAM ❍ × ❍ ❍Note ❍ ❍ Note There is a risk that the memory is full.
Document JAM × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Simulation × × × × × ×
Key operation (Communication
× × × × × ×
disable)
Δ2: Enable except for the trouble tray
∗ When, however, a paper feed tray trouble is detected during a job, the engine is stopped and printing is disabled.
Δ3: The display goes to the FAX status check menu and the list can be printed.: The received document is outputted.
Δ4: Paper exit is enabled except for the trouble paper exit tray
∗ When, however, a paper feed tray trouble is detected during a job, the engine is stopped and printing is disabled.
Δ5: Only the operation related to image quality can be executed depending on the destination. (low density print)
Δ6: The operation can be executed in the single surface scanning mode.
(6) Writing to the trouble memory
In case of a same trouble in this machine, selection is made with
the simulation to write into the trouble memory or not. If this simu-
lation is set, any trouble is written into the trouble memory uncon-
ditionally.
(SIMULATION. 26-35)
0: A same trouble as the previous one is not written. (Default)
1: Any trouble is written into the trouble memory unconditionally.

[12] ROM VERSION-UP 2. Precautions
A. Relationship between each ROM and
1. General version-up
A. Version-up target ROM's When performing ROM version-up, be sure to check the combina-
tion with the version of ROM installed in the other PWB's including
The version-up target ROM's are listed in the table below.
optional ones.
The version-up procedures of the firmware of this machine is per-
formed without disassembling the ROM from the machine. The Some combinations of ROM versions may not operate the
new program files are collectively written into the ROM's. Some machine properly.
new programs can be written into an optional ROM.
If, however, the above procedure is failed by an accident such as 3. Necessary items for Flash ROM
power interruption during the version-up procedure, use the ROM version-up
copy socket on the MFP control PWB ROM to make version-up of
each ROM individually. • A machine with ROM to be operated
• A spare PCU PWB ROM, an MFP control PWB ROM (Boot,
B. ROM version-up is required in the following Program), a scanner control PWB ROM (Each of which is pro-
cases: vided with the program to allow operations.) (Used when writing
ROM version-up is required in the following cases: the program files into the ROM is failed.)
1) When improvement of performances is required. • A PC operating with either of a USB or Ethernet port.
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the • USB cable or Ethernet cable. (for connection of PC and MFP
machine. control PWB)
3) When installing a new spare part PWB unit for repair with the • File2PRN.exe file (A file transfer tool for Ethernet, and USB pro-
ROM installed. tocols)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be • USB memory device (Supported format in FAT (12/16) only)
repaired. • Version-up program (compression) file
(The SFU file for writing a program to each ROM of the PCU PWB,
the MFP control PWB (boot, program), and the scanner control
PWB, or the SFU file for writing all the programs collectively.)
4. Flash ROM version-up method

A. Version-up procedure 1
Media
Firmware. Adapter
Firmware. + USB Host
USB Memory
Firmware.
Firmware.sfu
(1) Firmware update from USB memory device ∗ The number of key changes depending on the number of
First you must install the firmware file (xxx.sfu) to the root of a USB the file in the USB memory device inserted.
jump drive.
SIMULATION 49-1
• If the firmware is in a folder, Simulation 49-01 cannot open the
folder. FIRMWARE UPDATE.
• Secure Jumpdrive will not work. SELECT FIRMUP FILE, AND PRESS START. 0
1. FILE1.sfu
• If the USB memory is not inserted, “INSERT A USB MEMORY 2. FILE2.sfu
DEVICE CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE, PLEASE USE FAT 3. FILE3.sfu
(12/16) FORMAT” is displayed. .
• Non compliant to FAT32. If it's inserted, "CAN NOT SUPPORT .
FAT32. PLEASE USE FAT (12/16) FORMAT" is displayed. 19. >>NEXT Page
1) Insert the USB memory device into the main unit.

2) Enter the 49-01 screen.Touch the key of the file to be updated.
The screen transfers to the update screen. (In this screen,
[FILE 1] is selected)
MX-M350/M450 N/U ROM VERSION-UP 12 - 1

3) Enter the file/folder number of firmware that tries to be NOTE 2: Operation panel
updated with 10-key, and press [START] key. When entering the diag mode to write into ROM, some keys on the
If selecting the file, "FIRMWARE UPDATE.. ARE YOU SURE operation panel and the LED panel are used. Necessary informa-
?" is displayed. ([1]: execute, [2]: get back) tion including menu items and messages is displayed on the LCD
panel.
SIMULATION 49-1 [START] key is used as [OK] key, [DOCUMENT FILING] key and
FIRMWARE UPDATE.. ARE SURE YOU? [FAX/IMAGE SEND] key as up/down select keys, [JOB STATUS]
FILE1.sfu key as [MENU] key, and [CLEAR] key as [BACK] key.
1. YES 1
2. NO Up/Down key BACK key
4) If the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is dis-

PRINT
played. When the error occurs, "ERROR" is displayed. DOCUMENT
FILING
READY
DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND DATA
LCD touch panel COPY

NOTE: SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS LOGOUT
If the Imager locks up or loses power during the upgrade, it
corrupt the firmware. If this occurs, you can rescue the firm-
ware using the "C. Version-up procedure 3".
MENU key OK key
SIMULATION 49-1
FIRMWARE UPDATE.. COMPLETE 1) When performing version-up of the firmware by using the file
FILE1.sfu transfer tool (File1PRN), the printer driver of the target model
must be installed in advance.
2) When performing version-up of the firmware by using the USB
I/F, take note of the following items.
Since the port for the file transfer tool (File2PRN) differs from
B. Version-up procedure 2
the port for the print mode, if the port for the print mode has
NOTE 1: MFP control PWB ROM DIP switch selection and been already made, be careful not to mistake them. If the USB
Flash ROM slot port for the print mode has been made, it is advisable to delete
To make version-up of the ROM, position of the DIP switch should it in order to avoid confusion.
be below. (Making procedures of the port for the file transfer tool (File2PRN)
Controller PWB in the USB I/F mode)
DIP switch When performing version-up of the firmware by using the USB I/F,
perform the following procedures to make the port in advance.
1) Install the printer driver of the target model.
In this case, set the port to other than the USB mode.
Enlarged view 2) Set the DIP switch to the Flash ROM version-up mode, and
Plate part turn on the power.
3) Connect the PC and the main unit with a USB cable.
4) The PC detects the new hardware by Plug & Play function.
With the screw (*) removed
Screw (*) When writing the program files collectively without disassembling
DIP switch the ROM's from the PWB's, and when writing the program files into
an optional ROM:
NOTE: The PCU ROM, the FAX ROM, and the scanner control
PWB ROM must be provided with the program to
operate.
An empty ROM cannot be used.
1) Connect the PC and the MFP control PWB with a I/F cable.
2) Turn on the PC and the machine.
Enlarged view of DIP switches
3) Copy the file transfer tool and ROM program file into the same
folder of the PC. (When writing with the file transfer tool
File2PRN.exe)
Copy the collective ROM programming file and the file transfer
tool File2PRN.exe into the folder you desire on the PC.
4) The following display is shown after a while from starting the
Diag Write machine.
mode protect
Version Check
Switch Diag mode Write protect
Normal mode
CONF:*********
(Version-up procedure 1) Write protect mode
Diag mode
Write protect cancel
(Version-up procedure 2)
mode
(Version-up procedure 3)
When shipping, the setting of controller write protect bit is cancel
mode side.

5) Press MENU key several time to select an I/F to use from 10) Turn off the machine.
USB, Ethernet. 11) Turn on the machine, and use SIM 22-5 to check that each
(Example) ROM version is properly upgraded.
C. Version-up procedure 3
Firm Update As for the position of the DIP switch, refer to the B. Version-up pro-
cedure 2.
From USB
(MFP control PWB ROM slot)
The MFP control PWB ROM is provided with three Flash ROM
6) Press OK key to display the following menu. slots: CN4, CN5, and CN6.
The boot ROM is installed to CN4, and the main ROM is installed
Firm Update to CN5. CN6 is an empty slot.
Use this empty slot of the MFP control PWB, CN6, to copy the
Waiting Data ROM program.
When writing the program into each ROM of the PCU PWB, the
FAX PWB, and the scanner control PWB individually by using an
7) Transfer the program data from PC to the machine via either of empty slot for ROM copy on the MFP control PWB ROM:
USB or Ethernet.
∗ The program write target ROM installed to the empty slot for
8) When transferring with the file transfer tool File2PRN.exe ROM copy on the MFP control PWB ROM may be empty.
Start File2PRN.exe on the PC. Use this program to transfer (No need to have the program data in it. The empty ROM can be
the ROM program data from the PC to the main unit. used.)
(Procedure) 1) Install the write target ROM to the empty slot for ROM copy on
a) Start File2PRN.exe. the MFP control PWB ROM.
2) Connect the PC and the MFP control PWB with a I/F cable.
3) Turn on the PC and the machine.
4) Copy the file transfer tool and ROM program file into the same
folder of the PC. (When writing with the file transfer tool
C:\desktop\test.sfu File2PRN.exe)
Copy the collective ROM programming file and the file transfer
tool File2PRN.exe into the folder you desire on the PC.
5) The following display is indicated after a while.
Version Check
b) Click Reference button and select a ROM program to
transfer. CONF: *********
Select the target machine's port form Select Printer pull
down list.
6) Press MENU key a few times to show the following display.
c) Click Send button.
d) The LED blinks and the LCD displays appropriate informa-
tion as operation proceeds. CN Update
∗ When version-up of each ROM of the scanner control PWB From USB
is performed, the backlight of the display is turned off. This
does not mean a trouble. Wait for a while.
9) When "Result: OK" is displayed after a few minutes, press Up/ 7) Press OK key to display the following menu.
Down keys to check that there is no display of "Result: NG."
∗ When writing the program file data collectively to the
CN Update
machine without the FAX unit installed, "Result : NG" is dis-
played only to the FAX. This can be neglected. Waiting Data
Firm Update ***

8) Transfer the program data from PC to the machine via either of
Writing Data USB or Ethernet.
9) When transferring with the file transfer tool File2PRN.exe
Start File2PRN.exe on the PC. Use this program to transfer
the ROM program data from the PC to the main unit.
Firm Update (Procedure)
a) Start File2PRN.exe.
Waiting Data
C:\desktop\test.sfu
Firm Update ***
Result: OK

b) Click Reference button and select a ROM program to D. Countermeasures against “Result: NG”
transfer.
Factors of "Result: NG"
c) Select the target machine's port form Select Printer pull
down list. The following cases may be factors of "Result: NG."
∗ The DIP switch for write protect is not set properly.
d) Click Send button.
∗ The FAX cable is not connected. (NG for FAX)
e) The LED blinks and the LCD displays appropriate informa-
tion as operation proceeds. ∗ ROM defect (Very rare case)
10) The LED stops flashing in a few minutes, and "Writing: OK" is
displayed. 5. Turning OFF the power during the
version-up procedure
CN Update If the power is turned OFF during the version-up procedure, nor-
mal writing of data cannot be assured even though the machine
Receiving Data can be booted again.
In such a case, use the spare PCU PWB ROM, the MFP control
PWB ROM (BOOT, PROGRAM), and the scanner control PWB
ROM each of which includes the program to be operated, and per-
CN Update *** form the version-up procedure again.
Replace with the spare PCU, the controller boot, the scanner con-
Writing Data
trol PWB ROM, and perform procedure "C. Version-up procedure
3" for the replaced ROM again to write data into it.
11) Press OK key, and the following display is shown.
6. Version-up procedure flowchart
CN Update ***-> CN5
Write the on-board
Writing OK ? files collectively. (4.)
12) "CN5" and the selection menu of slot numbers is displayed.

Set again.
Select "CN6" to which the target ROM is inserted to with Up/
YES
Down keys, and press OK key. Result: OK?
13) The LED flashes and the display is changed in the following
sequence. NO Update completed
When "Result: OK" is displayed in a few minutes, press Up/
Down keys to check that there is no display of "Result: NG.". YES
Setting mistake? (6.)
CN Update ***-> CN5 NO
Writing Data
YES
NG is BOOT?
NO
CN Update ***-> CN5
Result : OK
YES
NG is SCAN FAX
PCU,MAIN?
14) Turn off the machine.
15) Remove the ROM from the empty slot CN6 for ROM copy on NO
the MFP control PWB ROM.
16) Install the ROM with the revised version to the PWB.
17) Turn on the machine, and use SIM 22-5 to check that the ROM
version is normally upgraded.
∗ Precautions on transferring a ROM program data with the
file transfer tool File2PRN
For successful transferring a ROM program data with the file
transfer tool File2PRN, the following conditions should be
met:
• When transferring a ROM program data with the file trans-
fer tool File2PRN, the destination machine must be con-
figured as a printer.
• The PC must have an appropriate printer driver installed
and configured with an I/F port to use.

NO YES
Booted normally?
Write the on-board files

Remove the BOOT Flash ROM and collectively. (4.)
replace it with a spare one. (If there is
any NG Flash ROM, replace it, too.)
YES
Result: OK?
Write with an empty

socket. (5.) Update completed
NO
YES
Result: OK?
NO Update completed
If the Flash ROM itself is

defective, replace it with a
new one and try again.
NO YES
Booted normally?

Remove the Flash ROM
collectively. (4.)
and replace it with a
spare.
YES
Result: OK?
Write with the empty socket.

Update completed
(6.) NO
YES
Result: OK?
NO Update completed


collectively. (4.)
YES
Result: OK?
Update completed NO


ADU [DU3/DU4] (OPTION)
AR-DU3
AR-DU4
SCANNER TONER HOPPER un DELIVERY un
ADUM1 ADUM2
HV TM1 POM
ORSPD ADUFM DGS
OP PANEL un
LSU un CRUM PWB POD1
CCD PWB
LCD LVDS PWB OPE PWB APIND APOD PGM LD POD2
BACKLIGHT BUZZER CL PWB
APPD1 APPD2 BD PSPS
TOUCH
1. Block diagram
INV PWB POD3

PANEL STMP DSW-D ADUSET VFM1
(OPTION) DEVELOPER un DSW-F
MPFS MPFC VFM1
A. System block diagram
TCS
COIN VENDER
DSPFun[EFX1]/SPFun[EFX2] SCN JNT PWB MPWS MPED
DSW-L
(OPTION) HUS-DV
MSS MPLD1 CFM2
CISun CIScnt PWB PNC DVCH
AR-MU2
* DSPF un (MX-EFX1) only: CIS un, CIScnt PWB AUDITOR MPLS1 MPLS2 VFM2
(OPTION) (OPTION)
SCNcnt MPFSET
SPFM PWB ENGINE LEFT DOOR un
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
MFP CONTROL DRAWER PWB CFM1

SPOD HDD FM-HDD
PWB
HVR PWB
SOCD FM-CNT
PCU PWB PS un
SPFC MIM Mother PWB
PPD
SRRC MHPS FUSING un HVR PWB
SPWS ORSLED HL1 RTH1
DESK/LCC [D27/D28] LUD
SPFS HL2 RTH2
OCSW LCC[D28]
SPF INTER FACE PWB TAN PED
SPLS1 PWB FILTER Control CASETTE un
PWB MPT VR
PWB CSS PWB LUM
SPLS2
MCLUM TMM MCPCL
SCOV DC/PS MAIN DRIVE un
TLUM1 TLUM2 TPFCL
RRC
SPPD
REALY PWB TPCL1 TPCL2 MCSPD
SDSS (OPTION) TRC
TSPD1 TSPD2 MCLUD
DH-SW
MX-M350/M450 N/U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1

SPED MSW FUSE PWB CPFC
MPTLD PWB TTSD TPFD1
FAX BOX [FX-12] DH HEATER PWB DM
TPFD2 TPFD3 TDRS
FAXPWB FAX SW DH-DSK1 MM
T1SS PWB T2SS PWB MCPED
DH-DSK2
(OPTION)
FAX
DH-DSK1, DSK2: 3TRAY DESK [D27]
DH-SCN1 AC I N Japan only DSK
(OPTION)
Control
DH-SCN2 PWB MPT VR
AR-FN6 MCLUM DMM DPFD2 DPFD3 MCLUD DLUM1
AR-FN7 MCPCL DPFCL DPED1 DPED2 DPFD1 DLUM2
MCSPD DPCL1 DLUD1 DLUD2 DDRS DSPD1

AR-MS1
(OPTION) MPTLD PWB DPCL2 D1SS PWB D2SS PWB MCPED DSPD2
CN3 CN1
TX25-100P-LT-H1 BOARD TO BOARD TX24-100R-LT-H1
GND2 1 1 GND2 CN4
GND2 2 2 GND2 BM50B-SRDS-G-TF
/1_DBL- 3 3 /1_DBL-
GND2 1
/1_DBL+ 4 4 /1_DBL+
GND2 21
1_CLK- 5 5 1_CLK-
GND2 23
1_CLK+ 6 6 1_CLK+
GND2 25
1_DATA0- 7 7 1_DATA0-
GND2 27
1_DATA0+ 8 8 1_DATA0+
GND2 29
1_DATA1- 9 9 1_DATA1-
GND2 31
1_DATA1+ 10 10 1_DATA1+
Scanner (1/3)
GND2 50 I/F PWB-CN SD68M

GND2 11 11 GND2
1_CLK+ 13 1 1_CLK+
GND2 12 12 GND2
1_CLK- 11 35 1_CLK-
GND2 13 13 GND2
1_DATA0+ 9 2 1_DATA0+
GND2 14 14 GND2
1_DATA0- 7 36 1_DATA0-
GND2 15 15 GND2
1_DATA1+ 5 3 1_DATA1+
GND2 16 16 GND2
1_DATA1- 3 37 1_DATA1-
(NC) 17 17 (NC)
/1_DBL+ 15 4 /1_DBL+
SCN +12V1 18 18 +12V1
/1_DBL- 17 38 /1_DBL-
+24V3 19 19 +24V3
lcdDIS 36 19 lcdDIS
+24V3 20 20 +24V3
GND2 2 39 GND2
PDSEL1 21 21 PDSEL1
JNT 2_CLK+ 37 6 2_CLK+
PDSEL2 22 22 PDSEL2
2_CLK- 39 40 2_CLK-
/KEYIN 23 23 /KEYIN
2_DATA0+ 41 7 2_DATA0+
SEG0 24 24 SEG0
2. Actual wiring chart
2_DATA0- 43 41 2_DATA0-
GND2 25 25 GND2
8
PWB GND2 26 26 GND2 SCN 2_DATA1+
2_DATA1-
45
47 42
2_DATA1+
2_DATA1-
(1/2) LcdS+ 27 27 LcdS+
/2_DBL+ 35 9 /2_DBL+
LcdS- 28 28 LcdS-
/2_DBL- 33 43 /2_DBL-
LcdM+ 29 29 LcdM+
24 /RES_SCN
LcdM- 30 30 LcdM- cnt GND2 49 44 GND2
LcdD0+ 18 11 LcdD0+
CN1 CN1 LcdCP1- 32 32 LcdCP1-
IL-FPR-40S-VF-E1500 LcdD0- 16 45 LcdD0-
FFC IL-FPR-40S-VF-E1500 LcdCP2+ 33 33 LcdCP2+
CN201 GND2 1 40 GND2 PWB LcdD1+ 14 12 LcdD1+
BM12B-SRSS-TB LcdCP2- 34 34 LcdCP2-
GND2 2 39 GND2 LcdD1- 12 46 LcdD1-
LcdD0+ 35 35 LcdD0+
1 IMG_DOUT1_0 GND2 3 38 GND2 LcdD2+ 10 13 LcdD2+
LcdD0- 36 36 LcdD0- (1/3)
2 IMG_DOUT1_1 GND2 4 37 GND2 LcdD2- 8 47 LcdD2-
LcdD1+ 37 37 LcdD1+
3 IMG_DOUT1_2 1_DATA1+ 5 36 1_DATA1+ LcdD3+ 6 14 LcdD3+
LcdD1- 38 38 LcdD1-
4 IMG_DOUT1_3 1_DATA1- 6 35 1_DATA1- LcdD3- 4 48 LcdD3-
LcdD2+ 39 39 LcdD2+
5 IMG_DOUT1_4 GND2 7 34 GND2 LcdM+ 30 15 LcdM+
LcdD2- 40 40 LcdD2-
6 IMG_DOUT1_5 1_DATA0+ 8 33 1_DATA0+ LcdM- 28 49 LcdM- MFP
LcdD3+ 41 41 LcdD3+
7 IMG_DOUT1_6 1_DATA0- 9 32 1_DATA0- LcdS+ 34 16 LcdS+
LcdD3- 42 42 LcdD3-
8 IMG_DOUT1_7 GND2 10 31 GND2 LcdS- 32 50 LcdS-
GND2 43 43 GND2
9 IMG_AREA1 DCLK+ 11 30 1_CLK+ LcdCP1+ 26 17 LcdCP1+
GND2 44 44 GND2
10 GND2 DCLK- 12 29 1_CLK- LcdCP1- 24 51 LcdCP1-
cnt
YH 45 45 YH
11 AD_CLK GND2 LcdCP2+ 22 18 LcdCP2+
13 28 GND2 /XL 46 46 /XL
12 GND2 /1_DBL+ 14 27 /1_DBL+ LcdCP2- 20 52 LcdCP2-
/STSET 47 47 /STSET
/1_DBL- 15 26 /1_DBL- GND2 38 10 GND2
/STMPS 48 48 /STMPS
GND2 16 25 GND2 GND2 49 49 GND2
SLEEP 44 53 SLEEP
PWB
FRM_CCD1 17 24 FRM_CCD1 LCD_VEE 48 20 LCD_VEE
GND2 50 50 GND2
PAGE1 23 PAGE1 SCN_SET 46 54 SCN_SET
18 GND2 51 51 GND2
CLK_CCD1 19 22 CLK_CCD1 WAKE_UP 40
GND2 52 52 GND2
ADD_CCD1 20 21 ADD_CCD1 GND2 19
+12V1 53 53 +12V1
TXD_CCD1 21 20 TXD_CCD1 FRDY 42
+12V1 54 54 +12V1
RXD_CCD1 22 19 RXD_CCD1 GND2 55 55 GND2
CCD RES_CCD1 23 18 RES_CCD1 +5V2 56 56 +5V2 CN3
GND2 24 17 GND2 BM30B-SRDS-G-TF
GND2 57 57 GND2
+3.3V3 25 16 +3.3V3 /RES_SCN 24
+5V2 58 58 +5V2
+3.3V3 26 15 +3.3V3 VCCW_SCN 26 21 VCCW_SCN
GND2 59 59 GND2
55 WAKE_UP
cnt GND2 27 14 GND2 +3.3V 60 60 +3.3V
/RXD_SCN 27 22 /RXD_SCN
+5VCCD 28 13 +5VCCD FRM_CCD1 61 61 FRM_CCD1
+5VCCD 29 12 +5VCCD /TXD_SCN 23 56 /TXD_SCN
+5VCCD 30 11 +5VCCD /DSR_SCN 25 23 /DSR_SCN
TXD_CCD1 63 63 TXD_CCD1
PWB +5VCCD 31 10 +5VCCD RES_CCD1 64 64 RES_CCD1
/DTR_SCN 21 57 /DTR_SCN
+5VCCD 32 9 +5VCCD GND2 14 27 GND2
RXD_CCD1 65 65 RXD_CCD1
+5VCCD 33 8 +5VCCD POF_SCN 28 58 POF_SCN
ADD_CCD1 66 66 ADD_CCD1
+5VCCD 34 7 +5VCCD /RES_MFP 19 25 /RES_MFP
GND2 67 67 GND2
+5VCCD 35 6 +5VCCD GND2 22 59 GND2
PAGE1 68 68 PAGE1
GND2 36 5 GND2 +12V1 16 26 +12V1
GND2 69 69 GND2

+10V 37 4 +10VCCD 5 GND2
GND2 70 70 GND2
+10V 38 3 +10VCCD +12V1 15 60 +12V1
/CL1 71 71 /CL1
PDSEL0 72 72 PDSEL0
GND2 40 1 GND2 +5V2 12 28 +5V2
+5V2 73 73 +5V2
+5V2 11 62 +5V2
PD 74 74 PD
+5V2 10 29 +5V2
SEG1 75 75 SEG1
+5V2 9 63 +5V2
SEG2 76 76 SEG2
+5V1 20 30 +5V1
GND2 77 77 GND2
GND2 18 31 GND2
/F0 78 78 /F0
64 FRDY
GND2 79 79 GND2
GND2 17 65 GND2
/F1 80 80 /F1
+24V3 5 32 +24V3
GND2 81 81 GND2
GND2 7 34 GND2
/F2 82 82 /F2
+24V3 3 33 +24V3
GND2 83 83 GND2
GND2 8 67 GND2
/F3 84 84 /F3
+24V3 4 66 +24V3
GND2 85 85 GND2
GND2 6 68 GND2
/BZR 86 86 /BZR
GND2 1
GND2 87 87 GND2
GND2 2
+5V1 88 88 +5V1
GND2 29
Lcd DIS 89 89 Lcd DIS
GND2 30
+3.3V 90 90 +3.3V
GND2 91 91 GND2
LCD-VEE 92 92 LCD-VEE
TH 93 93 TH
/CCFT 94 94 /CCFT
/YL 95 95 /YL
XH 96 96 XH
+24V3 97 97 +24V3
+24V3 98 98 +24V3
GND2 99 99 GND2
GND2 100 100 GND2
CN2
FFC-13PIN 52271-1379 CN2
1DISP S5B-PH-K-S
2YD CN1 CN5 MIMA 1
3LP 52271-3079 FFC 30FMN-BT MIMB 2
Scanner (2/3)
4CP XH 30 1 XH /MIMA 3 MIM

5+3.3V /YL 29 2 /YL /MIMB 4
6GND /XL 28 3 /XL +24V3 5
LCD 7M YH 27 4 YH
8D0 /CCFT 26 5 /CCFT
9D1 +24V3 25 6 +24V3
10D2 GND2 24 7 GND2
CN5
11D3 TH 23 8 TH B8B-PH-K-S
12+24V GND2 22 9 GND2 GND2 1
13VEE LVDS LcdD3- 21 10 LcdD3- /RES_MFP 2
PWB LcdD3+ 20 11 LcdD3+ /DSR_SCN 3
LcdD2- 19 12 LcdD2- /RXD_SCN 4
CN4
FFC-4PIN 52271-0469 LcdD2+ 18 13 LcdD2+ /TXD_SCN 5
/YL 1 /YL LcdD1- 17 14 LcdD1- DTR_SCN 6
4
TOUCH XH 2 XH LcdD1+ 16 15 LcdD1+ +5V2 7
3
YH 3 YH LcdD0- 15 16 LcdD0- (NC) 8
2
PANEL /XL 1 4 /XL LcdD0+ 14 17 LcdD0+
LCD-VEE 13 18 LCD-VEE
3.3V 12 19 3.3V
LcdDIS 11 20 LcdDIS
GND2 10 21 GND2
CN3
LcdCP2- 9 22 LcdCP2- CN6
S3B-PH-K-S(LF) S3B-PH-SM4-TB(LF) S6B-PH-K-S
INV BR LcdCP2+ 8 23 LcdCP2+ B3B-EH
/CCFT 3 1 /CCFT BL BL
BR GND2 7 24 GND2 +5V1 1 1 +5V1
PWB GND 2 2 GND GY GY
BR LcdCP1- 6 25 LcdCP1- GND2 2 2 GND2 OCSW
+24V 1 3 +24V LB LB
LcdCP1+ 5 26 LcdCP1+ OCSW 3 3 OCSW
RD
53259-0417 LcdM- 27 LcdM- +24V3 4
4 PL RD
1 CCFT+ /LED0 5
LcdM+ 3 28 LcdM+ LB PL
2 NC /LED1 6 ORS
CCFL LcdS- 2 29 LcdS- LB
3 NC SCN
LcdS+ 1 30 LcdS+
SCN GY LED
4 /CCFT FG
SRA-21T-3
JNT cnt CN8

CN1 CN4 B12B-XASK-1
52610-2471 FFC T24FAZ-SMT-TF +24V3 1
GND2 24 1 GND2 GND2
CN2 2
S6B-PH-K-S PDSEL0 23 2 PDSEL0 /CV_COPY
B6B-PH-SM4-TB(LF)(SN) 3
PDSEL0 1
BR
1 PDSEL0
PDSEL1 22 3 PDSEL1
PWB PWB /CV_COUNT 4
LB PDSEL2 21 4 PDSEL2
PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1 (2/2) (2/3) /CV_START 5
PL +5V2 20 5 +5V2
PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2 /CV_CA 6
ORS PD BL PD 19 6 PD
+5V2 4 4 +5V2 /CV_STAPLE 7
BR GND2 18 7 GND2
PD 5 5 PD /CV_DUPLEX 8
GY +5V2 17 8 +5V2
GND2 6 6 GND2 /CV_SIZE0 9
/KEYIN 16 9 /KEYIN /CV_SIZE1 10
SEG0 15 10 SEG0 /CV_SIZE2 11
MFP SEG1 14 11 SEG1 /CV_SIZE3 12
SEG2 13 12 SEG2
OPE /F0 12 13 /F0
PWB /F1 11 14 /F1
/F2 10 15 /F2 CN9
/F3 9 16 /F3 B13B-PH-K-S PHR-13
GND2 8 17 GND2 /PNC 1 1
GND2 7 18 GND2 /COPY 2 2
GND2 6 19 GND2 /CA 3 3

(NC) 5 20 (NC) /READY 4 4
(NC) 4 21 (NC) /AUD 5 5
/BZR 3 22 /BZR +5V2 6 6
+5V1 2 23 +5V1 GND2 7 7
GND2 1 24 GND2 +24V3 8 8
(NC) 9 9
/TC 10 10
+24V3 11 11
PNC_a 12 12
CN1 CN2 GND2 13 13
SLD5R-1 FFC SLD5S-1
GND2 5 1 GND2
GND2 4 2 GND2
CL1 /CL1 3 3 /CL1
+24V3 2 4 +24V3 CN11
+24V3 1 5 +24V3 S3B-PH-K-S S3B-EH
LB
MHPS 1 3 MHPS
GY
GND2 2 2 GND2
MHPS
CN6 BL
179228-4+175694-4 +5V2 3 1 +5V2
B4B-PH-K-S
RD
+24V3 1 1 +24V3
BR
/STMPS 2 2 /STMPS
STMP LB
/STSET 3 3 /STSET
GY
GND2 4 4 GND2
d e
GY GY
FG
SRA-51T-3 SRA-51T-3
Scanner (3/3)
CNC CN10
PHNR-6-H+BU6P-TR-P-H CND B26B-PHDSS-B S28B-PHDSS CN3
B6B-PH-K-S 9604S-35F FF3-35-R15
BR BR BR 7 RD RD
6 /B 1 2 /B +24V3 1 +24V3
VLED 35 35VLED
RD RD RD 8 RD RD
5 +24V3 2 4 +24V3 +24V3 2 +24V3
GY GY DGND 34 34DGND
SPF PL 4 B 3 PL PL 1 B GND2 5 3 GND2
GY GY VAS 33 33VAS
BR 3 A 4 BR BR 3 A GND2 6 4 GND2
MOTOR BL DGND 32 32DGND
RD 2 +24V3 5 RD RD 5 +24V3 5 +5V1
BL BL VDS 31 31VDS
PL 1 /A 6 PL PL 6 /A +5V2 4 6 +5V2
GY GY DGND 30 30DGND
GND2 9 7 GND2
BL BL SCN 29 29SCN
1754873+179228-3 VAREF 17 8 VAREF
BL BR BR DGND 28 28DGND
+5V1 1 SPPD 19 9 SPPD
BR BR BR LGATE 27 27LGATE
SPED 2 SPFC 18 10 SPFC
SPED GY BR DGND 26 26DGND
GND2 3 SPED 21 11 SPED
BR BR CLK 25 25CLK
1754873+179228-3 SDSS 12 12 SDSS
CNB BR BR DGND 24 24DGND
BL PHNR-11-H+BU11P-TR-P-H SCOV 23 13 SCOV
+5V2 1 B22B-PHDSS-B PL DATA 23 23DATA
PL BL BL SRRC 14 PL 14 SRRC
SCOV SCOV 2 1 +5V1 11 5 +5V BR BR DGND 22 22DGND
GY BR BR SPWS 24 15 SPWS
GND2 3 2 SPED 10 16 SPED PL PL LD 21 21LD CIS
GY GY SPFS 16 16 SPFS
1754873+179228-3 3 GND2 9 1 GND2 GY DGND 20 20DGND
BL BL BL 17 GND2
BL 4 +5V2 8 7 +5V2 SCLK 19 19SCLK
+5V2 1 PL PL PL GND2
BR SCOV 18 SCOV 18 DGND 18 18DGND
SPPD 2 5 7 PL PL CIS
SPPD GY GY GY SPFMO0 3 19 SPFMO0 un
GY 6 GND2 6 2 GND2 PL PL /LST 17 17/LST
GND2 3 BL BL BL SPOD
+5V2 5 SPOD 25 20 DGND 16 16DGND
7 8 +5V2 PL PL
BR BR BR /SPFMA 2 21 /SPFMA
8 SPPD 4 14 SPPD PL PL SD0 15 15SD0
SMP-02V-NC+SMR-02V-N GY GY GY SOCD 26 22 SOCD
9 GND2 3 3 GND2 BR BR
cnt DGND 14 14DGND
RD RD RD RD SPFMA 1 23 SPFMA
1 +24V3 1 10 +24V3 2 11 +24V3 BR BR SD1 13 13SD1
BR BR BR BR SPLS1 22 24 SPLS1
SDSS 2 /SDSS 2 11 /SDSS 1 15 /SDSS BR BR DGND 12 12DGND
BL /SPFMB 11 25 /SPFMB
9 +5VPOD PL PL SD2 11 11SD2
GY SPLS2 20 26 SPLS2 PWB
4 GND2 PL PL DGND 10 10DGND
PL 20 SPOD SPFMB 13 27 SPFMB
B3B-PH-K-S PHNR-6-H+BU6P-TR-P-H PL PL SD3 9 9 SD3
BL SPFSET 15 28 SPFSET
BL BL 1 BL 10 +5V2 GY DGND 8 8 DGND
+5VPOD 1 6 +5VPOD PL GND2 10
2 GY GY 5 2 GY 22 SOCD SD4 7 7 SD4
SPOD GND2 GND2 GY CN7 CN1
3 PL PL 4 3 PL 6 GND2 DGND 6 6 DGND
SPOD SPOD RD S26B-PHDSS B26B-PHDSS
BL BL 12 +24V3 BL SD5 5 5 SD5
1754873+179228-3 3 +5V2 4 BR 2_DATA1- 1 1 2_DATA1-
PL PL 19 /SPFC PL DGND 4 4 DGND
BL 2 SOCD 5 RD 2_DATA1+ 2 2 2_DATA1+
+5V2 1 GY GY 13 +24V3 PL SD6
PL 1 GND2 6 2_DATA0- 3 3 2_DATA0- 3 3 SD6
SOCD 2 PL BR
SOCD GY 17 /SRRC 2_DATA0+ 4 4 2_DATA0+ DGND 2 2 DGND
GND2 3 BR
21 (NC) 2_CLK- 5 5 2_CLK- SD7 1 1 SD7
PHNR-2-H+BU2P-TR-P-H PL
2_CLK+ 6 6 2_CLK+
RD PL
2 +24V3 1 SPF 2_DBL- 7 7 2_DBL-
SPFC BR BR
1 /SPFC 2 2_DBL+ 8 8 2_DBL+
GY
PHNR-3-H+BU3P-TR-P-H GND2 9 9 GND2
BR
RD FRM_CCD2 10 10 FRM_CCD2
3 +24V3 1
PWB PL
2 (NC) 2 PL
SRRC PL PAGE2 12 12 PAGE2 CN2
1 /SRRC 3 BR
ADD_CCD2 13 13 ADD_CCD2 B12B-PHDSS-B
BR
TXD_CCD2 14 14 TXD_CCD2 SD7 1
PL
SMR-03V-NC+SMP-03V-N RES_CCD2 15 15 RES_CCD2 SD6 2
PL
BL BL RXD_CCD2 16 16 RXD_CCD2 SD5 3
1 VAREF 1 OR
BR BR +3.3V 17 17 +3.3V SD4 4
SPFVR 2 SPWS 2 OR
GY GY CNA +3.3V 18 18 +3.3V SD3 5
3 GND2 3 RD
B12B-PHDSS-B +24V3 19 19 +24V3 SD2 6
BL GY
1754873+179228-3 1VAREF GND2 20 20 GND2 SD1 7
BL BR OR
+5V2 1 2SPWS +12V1 21 21 +12V1 SD0 8
BR GY GY
SPLS1 SPLS1 2 9GND2 GND2 22 22 GND2 /LST 9
GY BL BL

GND2 3 5+5V2 +5V2 23 23 +5V2 SCLK 10
BR GY
4SPLS1 GND2 24 24 GND2 GND2 11
GY BL
1754873+179228-3 12GND2 +5V2 25 25 +5V2 GND2 12
BL BL BR
+5V2 1 7+5V2 /CIS_SET 26 26 /CIS_SET
PL PL
SPLS2 SPLS2 2 6SPLS2
GY GY
GND2 3 10GND2
RD
11+24V3
PHNR-2-H+BU2P-TR-P-H PL
3/SPFS
RD SCN
2 +24V3 1
SPFS PL
1 /SPFS 2
cnt
PWB
(3/3)
c
GY
SRA-01T-3.2
a b
GY GY
SRA-21T-3 FG
SRA-21T-3
Cadle
BOARD to BOARD
CN1
TX24-80R-LT-H1 TX25-80P-LT-H1 1 /RESET
RK-H401SD-0190
2 GND2
Engine (1/6)
1 /RESET (NC) 1 1 (NC)

3 DD7 CN3
2 GND2 (NC) 2 2 (NC) : : 24FMN-BIRK-A
3 DD7 PCU_VCCW 3 3 PCU_VCCW RS 1
39 /DASP
4 DD8 (NC) 4 4 (NC) R/W 2
40 GND2
5 DD6 GND 5 5 GND EN 3
6 DD9 GND 6 6 GND D0 4
7 DD5 HSYNC 7 7 HSYNC D1 5
8 DD10 GND 8 8 GND D2 6
9 DD4 GND 9 9 GND HDD D3 7
10 DD11 GND 10 10 GND D4 8
11 DD3 DTEN 11 11 DTEN D5 9
12 DD12 GND 12 12 GND D6 10
13 DD2 GND 13 13 GND D7 11
14 DD13 GND 14 14 GND +5V2 12
15 DD1 VIDEO1 15 15 VIDEO1 +5V2 13
16 DD14 VIDEO0 16 16 VIDEO0 GND2 14
17 DD0 GND 17 17 GND GND2 15
18 DD15 GND 18 18 GND KEY1 16
19 GND2 +12V_FAN 19 19 +12V_FAN KEY2 17
20 KEY +12V2 20 20 +12V2 KEY3 18
21 DMAREQ +12V2 21 21 +12V2 KEY4 19
22 GND2 GND 22 22 GND KEY5 20
23 /DIOW +3.3V2 23 23 +3.3V2 PCU KEY6 21
24 GND2 +3.3V2 24 24 +3.3V2 LED1\ 22
25 /DIOR +3.3V2 25 25 +3.3V2 LED2\ 23
26 GND2 +3.3V2 26 26 +3.3V2 LED3\ 24
27 IORDY GND 27 27 GND PWB LSU UNIT
28 CSEL HDD-VCC 28 28 HDD-VCC CN2 CN2
SLD30R-1 SLD30R-1
29 /DMACK HDD-VCC 29 29 HDD-VCC CN16 CN2
30 GND2 GND 30 30 GND +12V2 30 FFC 30 +12V2 S32B-PHDSS-B S32B-PHDSS-B
31 INTRQ +5V1 31 31 +5V1 PCU_VCCW 29 29 PCU_VCCW
TEST3 BR
32 /ICCS10 +5V1 32 32 +5V1 GND 28 28 GND 1 32 TEST3
BR CN1
33 DA1 +5V1 33 33 +5V1 DTR_PCU 27 27 DTR_PCU TEST2 2 31 TEST2
GY S11B-PH-K-S
34 /PDIAG/CBLID +5V2 34 34 +5V2 GND 26 26 GND GND2 3 30 GND2 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
BR 45 sheets (35 sheets)
35 DA0 +5V2 35 35 +5V2 DSR_PCU 25 25 DSR_PCU /SYNC 4 29 /SYNC RD RD
GY +24V1 11 3 +24V1 1
36 DA2 GND 36 36 GND GND 24 24 GND GND2 5 28 GND2 BR BR
GY VFM1\ 10 2 VFM1\ 2 VFM1
37 /CS0 +24V3 37 37 +24V3 TXD_PCU 23 23 TXD_PCU GND2 6 27 GND2 GY GY
GY GND2 9 1 GND2 3
38 /CS1 +24V3 38 38 +24V3 GND 22 22 GND GND2 7 26 GND2 RD
BR +24V1 8 POWER SOURCE
39 /DASP GND 39 39 GND RXD_PCU 21 21 RXD_PCU LSU_S/H 8 25 LSU_S/H BR
BR VFM1\ 7 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H SECTION
40 GND2 +12V1 40 40 +12V1 POF 20 20 POF VRB 9 24 VRB GY RD
GY GND2 6 3 +24V1 1
DTR_PCU 41 41 DTR_PCU MSW_MON 19 19 MSW_MON GND2 10 23 GND2 RD
GY +24V1 5 BR
DSR_PCU 42 42 DSR_PCU GND 18 18 GND GND2 11 22 GND2 BR 2 VFM1\ 2 VFM1
BR PMCLK\ 4 GY
TXD_PCU 43 43 TXD_PCU RES_PCU 17 17 RES_PCU TEST 12 21 TEST BR 1 GND2 3
BR READY(READY\) 3
RXD_PCU 44 44 RXD_PCU GND 16 16 GND VIDEO 13 20 VIDEO BR
LBR LSU START\ 2
POF 45 45 POF HSYNC 15 15 HSYNC /VIDEO 14 19 /VIDEO GY
BR GND2 1
MSW_MON 46 46 MSW_MON GND 14 14 GND /LDON 15 18 /LDON
GY PHR-5
RES_PCU 47 47 RES_PCU DTEN 13 13 DTEN GND2 16 17 GND2
GY 1 PMCLK
(NC) 48 48 (NC) BUR_PR 12 12 BUR_PR GND2 17 16 GND2
BL 2 READY
BUR_PR 49 49 BUR_PR GND2 11 11 GND2 +5V2 18 15 +5V2
GY 3 START\ PM
DCCNT 50 50 DCCNT VIDEO1 10 10 VIDEO1 GND2 19 14 GND2
BL 4 GND2
HDDFAN_MON 51 51 HDDFAN_MON VIDEO0 9 9 VIDEO0 +5V2 20 13 +5V2
RD 5 +24V1
CNTFAN_MON 52 52 CNTFAN_MON GND 8 8 GND +24V1 21 12 +24V1 CN3 CN1
RD
PWM 53 53 PWM +5V1 7 7 +5V1 +24V1 22 11 +24V1 S4B-PH-K-S B4B-PH-K-S
BR BR
GND 54 54 GND +5V2 6 6 +5V2 /VFM1 23 10 /VFM1 GND2 1 4 GND2
GY LB
GND 55 55 GND +5V2 5 5 +5V2 GND2 24 9 GND2 SYNC\ 2 3 SYNC\
BR BR BD
GND 56 56 GND +5V2 4 4 +5V2 /START 25 8 /START GND2 3 2 GND2
BR BL

GND 57 57 GND +5V2 3 3 +5V2 /VFM1 26 7 /VFM1 +5V2 4 1 +5V2
BR
GND 58 58 GND +5V2 2 2 +5V2 /PMCLK 27 6 /PMCLK
BR
+12V_FAN 59 59 +12V_FAN +12V1 1 1 +12V1 /READY 28 5 /READY
GY
+12V2 60 60 +12V2 GND2 29 4 GND2
GY
+12V2 61 61 +12V2 MOTHER GND2 30 3 GND2
MFP BL
GND 62 62 GND +5V LD 31 2 +5V LD
BOARD GY
CONTROL +3.3V2 63 63 +3.3V2 GND2 32 1 GND2
+3.3V2 64 64 +3.3V2 PWB
BOX +3.3V2 65 65 +3.3V2 CN4
S08B-PASK-2
+3.3V2 66 66 +3.3V2 BR
HDD-MON 1
GND 67 67 GND GY
GND2 2
HDD-VCC 68 68 HDD-VCC BR
CFM-PWM 3
HDD-VCC 69 69 HDD-VCC PL
+12V_FAN 4
GND 70 70 GND BR
CNT-MON 5
+5V1 71 71 +5V1 GY
GND2 6
+5V1 72 72 +5V1 BR
CFM-PWM 7 PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
+5V1 73 73 +5V1 PL
+12V_FAN 8
+5V2 74 74 +5V2 1 HDD-MON 4
+5V2 75 75 +5V2 2 GND2 3
GND 76 76 GND 3 CFM-PWM 2 FM_HDD
+24V3 77 77 +24V3 4 +12V_FAN 1
+24V3 78 78 +24V3
GND 79 79 GND
80
+12V1 80 +12V1
1 CNT-MON 4
2 GND2 3
3 CFM-PWM 2 FM_CNT
4 +12V_FAN 1
(NO ASSEMBLY)
CN19 DELIVERY UNIT
B4B-PH-K-S SMR-06V+SMP-06V-NC
POM2 1 BR BR
CN6 1 /POMXA 1
POM0 2 BR RD
8FE-BT-VK-N 9604S-08C 2 /POMA 2
FFC POM3 3 BR BL
DSW-L 8 1 DSW-F 3 /POMB 3
POM1 4 BR YL
DSW-L 7 2 DSW-F 4 /POMXB 4 POM
Engine (2/6)
RD WH
GND2 6 3 GND2 (NO ASSEMBLY) 5 +24V1 5
MAIN RD BK
GND2 5 4 GND2 CN20 6 +24V1 6
DM DM\ 4 5 DM\
B4B-PH-K-S
DRIVE DM-T 3 6 DM-T
POM1\ 1
POM3\ 2
SMP-03V-BC+SMR-03V-B 179228-3
DMCLK\ 2 7 DMCLK\ BR BL BL
(NC) 1 POM0\ 3 1 POD1 1 1 POD1
8 (NC) GY BR BR
POM2\ 4 2 GND2 2 2 GND2 POD1
BL GY GY
(NC) 5 3 +5V2 3 3 +5V2
CN7 179228-3
BL
173979-2 173981-2 CN4 3 +5V2
BK B32B-PHDSS-B BR
TMA 1 1 TMA BR 1 POD2
POD2
TM1 BK /POMXB 1 GY
TONER HOPPER TMB 2 2 TMB BL 2 GND2
+5V2 2
BR
/POMB 3 179228-3
BR BL
CN9 POD1 4 3 +5V2
9604S-08C BR BR
8FE-ST-VK-N FFC /POMA 5 1 POD3
POD3
DSW-F GY GY
DSW-L 8 1 GND2 6 2 GND2
DSW-F BR
DSW-L 7 2 /POMXA 7
GND2 BL
GND2 6 3 +5V2 8 DSW-L
GND2 RD RD
GND2 5 4 +24V1 9
MAIN BR SFPS-41T-187
MM +5V2 4 5 +5V2 POD2 10 RD
GND2 RD
GND2 3 6 +24V1 11
MM\ GY
DRIVE MM\ 2 7 GND2 12 SMR-03V-N+SMP-03V-NC
GY SMR-03V-N DSW-F
MM-T 1 8 MM-T GND2 13 RD RD RD
BL 1 DSW-L 1 1 DSW-L 1
+5V2 14 SFPS-41T-187
BR 2 (NC) 2 2 (NC) 2
CFM2\ 15 RD RD RD
BR 3 DSW-F 3 3 DSW-F 3
PCU POD3 16
+24V1 17
GY PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
GND2 18
TONER HOPPER CN5 +24V1 19
PWB BR
TSR-04V-K B8B-PH-K-S CFM2\ 20 2 CFM2\ 1 RD
BR RD GY
2 BK CFM2 DUCT SECTION
GND2 1 1 GND2 +24V1 21 1 GND2
GY
CRU +5V2 2 2 +5V2 VFM2\ 22
BL RD
CRUCLK 3 3 CRUCLK +24V1 23
PWB BR GY PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
CRUSDA 4 4 CRUSDA GND2 24
BR RD RD
5 PSPS\ (NC) 25 3 +24V1 1
RD BR BR
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 6 +24V1 GND2 26 2 VFM2\ 2 VFM2 PAPER EXIT UN SECTION
RD GY GY
2 PSPS\ 1 7 (NC) DSW-L 27 1 GND2 3
RD
PSPS 1 +24V1 2 8 +24V1 DSW-L 28
(NC) 29
(NC) 30 LEFT DOOR SECTION
(NC) 31
RD PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
DEVELOPER UNIT CN8 DSW-F 32 TSR-04V-K PHR-3
GY RD RD
QR/P8-12S-C(01) QR/P8-12P-C(01) B11B-PH-K-S 1 GND2 +24V1 1 3 +24V1 1
BR RD DRAWER BR BR HVR GY
1 DVCH1 1 1 DVCH1 2 +24V1 CFM1\ 2 2 CFM1\ 2 CFM1
BR GY GY GY
2 DVCH2 2 2 DVCH2 3 GND2 PWB GND2 3 1 GND2 3 PWB
BR BR BR
3 DVCH3 3 3 DVCH3 4 CFM1\
BR BR
51021-0400 4 TH-DV 4 4 TH-DV PS ROLLER
GY GY
(NC) 1 5 GND2 5 5 GND2 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 179228-3(AMP)
GY CN13 BL
+24V1 2 6 GND2 6 6 GND2 PHNR-09-H+BU09P-TR-P-H 1 +5V2 3 1 +5V2
TCS BR BR B24B-PHDSS-B BR HVR GY
TCS 3 7 TCS 7 7 TCS GY BL BL 2 PPD1 2 2 PPD1
GY GY GND2 1 1 +5V2 9 GY PPD1
GND2 4 8 GND2 8 8 GND2 RD BR BR 3 GND2 1 3 GND2 PWB
RD RD +24V1 2 2 PPD1 8
9 +24V1 9 9 +24V1 BR GY GY
BL BL PED 3 3 GND2 7 179228-3(AMP)
ZHR-4 10 +5V2 10 10 +5V2 BR BL BL
BR BR CPFC\ 4 4 +5V2 6 1 +5V2
+5V2 1 11 HUS-DV 11 11 HUS-DV BL BR BR
WH WH +5V2 5 5 LUD 5 2 LUD
HUS-DV 2 12 DVBias 12 RD GY GY LUD
HUS-DV GND2 3
+24V1 6 6 GND2 4 3 GND2
GY BL BL
#187 GND2 7 7 +5V2 3

TH-DV 4 Bias BR BR BR
RRC\ 8 8 PED 2
BR GY GY 179228-3(AMP)
SRA-21T-3 LUD 9 9 GND2 1
Bias RD 1 +5V2
+24V1 10
BL 2 PED
+5V2 11 PED
BR 3 GND2
TRC\ 12
GND 13
BR CASETTE UNIT
CSS 14
GY
GND2 15 CN1
GY CSS PWB
GND2 16 S4B-PH-K-S
BR BR
PPD1 17 1 CSS CN2
BR GY CSS
LUMB 18 2 GND2 173979-2 173979-2
BL BR OR
+5V2 19 3 LUMB LUMB 1 1 LUMB
BR BR OR LUM
LUMA 20 4 LUMA LUMA 2 2 LUMA
BR
CFM1\ 21
GY
GND2 22
RD
+24V1 23
CN22 GY PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
GND2 24
173981-2 BR
1 CPFC\ 2
1 PCU_RES RD CPFC
2 +24V1 1
2 GND2
BR
1 RRC\ 2
RD RRC
2 +24V1 1
MAIN DRIVE
BR
1 TRC1\ 3
2 (NC) 2 TRC
RD
3 +24V1 1
FUSING UNIT
#EX100 09P-RWZV-K4GG-P4 09R-RWZV-K2GGP4
B-5 (NC)
GY (NC) B-1 SMP-04V-NC+SMR-04V-N
Rth1 B-4 Rth1 BR BR
GY Rth1 B-2 1 RTH1 1
B-3 GND2 GY GY
GY GND2 B-3 2 GND2 2
B-2 Rth2 BR BR (NO ASSEMBLY)
Rth2 B-1 GND2 GY GY CN21
GND2 B-5 4 GND2 4 B8B-PH-K-R
GND2 1
SRA-51T-4 VLP-03V+VLR-03V CN14
CN2 B16B-PH-K-S PCU_RES 2
WH WH WH CN1
HL1 1 HL1 HL1 1 1 HL1N 1 B7B-PH-K-S BR 1 FW PCU-DSR 3
WH WH WH B03P-VL
2 HL2 HL2 2 2 HL2N 2 RD 2 +24VPR PCU-RXD 4
BK BK BK 1 HL1N +24VPR 1
3 N2 L2 3 3 L 3 (NC) BR 3 HLPR PCU-TXD 5
HL2 BK GY 2 HL2N 2
4 F-GND F-GND 4 HLPR PL 4 +12V2 PCU-DTR 6
SRA-51T-4 3 L 3
BR
Engine (100V) (3/6)
HLCNT1 4 5 HLCNT1 +5V2 7

SRA-51T-4 BR (NC) 8
HLCNT2 5 6 HLCNT2
SRA-51T-4 BR
SRA-51T-4 MSW MON 6 7 RTH1
GY 8 GND2
DCCNT/ 7
BR 9 RTH2
GY 10 GND2
RD 11 +24V1
CN5 BR 12 /MSWPR
B12P-HL-A BR 13 MSW MON
RD BR
+24V1 1 14 BUP_PR CN15
RD GY 9604S-14F 1-84432-4(AMP)
+24V2 2 15 GND
#250(BK) RD DSW-F 1 14 DSW-F PS-187
BK AC/DC +24V3 3 16 GND RD
Lot BL GND2 2 13 GND2 RD MHV
+5V1 4
PCU
#250(BK) GND2 3 12 GND2
BK PWB +5VOPT 5 SRA-21T-3
Lout OR DHVREM 4 11 DHVREM WH
+3.3V1 6 WH THV
OR RD 1 +24V1 MHVREM\ 5 10 MHVREM\
#250(WH) +3.3V1 7
WH GY RD 2 +24V2 PWB THV+PWM\ 6 9 THV+PWM\ SRA-21T-4L
Nout GND2 8 PS-187
GY GY 3 GND2 GBPWM\ 7 8 GBPWM\ WH
GND2 9 YL GB
#250(WH) GY 4 +5V2 DHVPWM\ 8 7 DHVPWM\ HV
WH GND2 10
Not GY 5 +5V2 THV-PWM\ 9 6 THV-PWM\ PS-187
GND2 11 RD
BR OR 6 +3.3V1 DVREM\ 10 5 DVREM\ BL DHV
FW 12
OR 7 +3.3V1 DVPWM\ 11 4 DVPWM\
CN4 GY 8 GND2 THVREM\ 12 3 THVREM\ PS-187
CN6 GR DV BIAS
BK GY 9 GND2 MHV-T 13 2 MHV-T
1 L B5P-VH
CN7 THin 14 1 THin
2 (NC) B2P-VH GND2 1 CN17
WH GND2 B9P-VH
3 N 2
MSW B03B-XASK-1 GND2 3
+5V1
BK MSL WH +24V4 4
MSN CN23
+5VOPT
#250(YL) #250(YL) +5VOPT 5
173981-2
BK L N WH 1 2 1 XPNC
#250(WH) #250(WH) 2 +24V1
BK L1 N1 WH
#250(BL) #250(BL)
#110(WH)
+24V1
#110(WH)
/MSWPR ELR-04NVF
BK
BK
GY
WH
WH
4 GND2 4
1 2 3 1 2 3 GY
3 GND2 3
RD
CN1
CN2
WH Nout #250(RD) 2 +24V4 2
(NC)
(NC)
BL
1 +5VOPT 1
B2P3-VH
#250(RD)
MSW LIn
MSW NIn
WH Nout
MSW Nout
MSW Lout
B2P3-VH-BK
BK #250(BK) to DESK UN
Lout
#250(BK)
RELAY
BK Lout CN3
PWB B3B-PH-K-S
+12V2 1
BUP_PR 2
Lin
Lin
Mother PWB
Nin
Nin
GND 3
#250(GR)
#250(GR)
#250(GR)
#250(GR)
CN3
ELP-06V-NV+ELR-06N
BK
BK
V9PS-VH
WH
WH
FUSE PWB BL BL
1 +5V1 1 1 +5V1

VLP-04V+VLR-04V BL 2 +5V1 2 BL 2 +5V1
WH WH GY 3 GND 3 GY 3 GND
#250(BL) 1 N 1 RD RD
BK BK BK 4 +24V3 4 4 +24V3
L1 2 L 2 BR BR
WH WH 5 DCCNT 5 5 DCCNT
#250(YL) 3 Not 3
WH BK BK 6 (NC) 6 6 +12V2
N1 4 Lot 4
7 GND2
#250(BL)
BK 8 GND2
Lout PL
+12V2 1 9 HDD-VCC
#250(YL) GY
WH GND2 2
Nout ELP-02V+ELR-02VF GY
GND2 3
1 DH-L 1 BL
HDD-VCC 4
2 DH-N 2
LCP-04
to HDD
to DESK UN (N model only)
SIN-21T-1.8S
BK
DH-L FAX
SIN-21T-1.8S
WH
DH-N
AC IN
FAX BK
INLET VLR-06V+VLP-06V-1 L L
CN1 L
BK BK MEMORY
B03P-VL 1 LFin 1 WH FAX
BK YL/GR YL/GR N N
L L 3 L 2 FG 2 SW
BK BK
2 (NC) 3 LFout 3 DCPS
WH WH WH N
FG FG 1 N 4 NFin 4
YL/GR 5 FG 5 YL/GR
WH WH BK
6 NFout 6 L L
N N DCPR WH
N N
FUSING UNIT
#EX200 09P-RWZV-K4GG-P4 09R-RWZV-K2GGP4
B-5 (NC) SMP-04V-NC+SMR-04V-N
GY (NC) B-1
Rth1 B-4 Rth1 BR BR
B-3 GND2 GY GY
GY GND2 B-3 2 GND2 2
B-2 Rth2 BR BR (NO ASSEMBLY)
GY Rth2 B-4 3 RTH2 3 CN21
Rth2 B-1 GND2 GY GY
GND2 B-5 4 GND2 4 B8B-PH-K-R
GND2 1
SRA-51T-4 CN14
VLP-03V+VLR-03V CN2 B16B-PH-K-S PCU_RES 2
WH WH
HL1 1 HL1 HL1 1 1 HL1 1 B7B-PH-K-S BR 1 FW PCU-DSR 3
WH WH AC/DC
2 HL2 HL2 2 2 HL2 2 RD 2 +24VPR PCU-RXD 4
BK BK +24VPR 1
3 N2 L2 3 3 L2 3 (NC) BR 3 HLPR PCU-TXD 5
HL2 BK GY PWB 2
4 F-GND F-GND 4 HLPR PL 4 +12V1 PCU-DTR 6
SRA-51T-4 3
BR +5V2 7
Engine (200V) (4/6)
HLCNT1 4 5 HLCNT1
SRA-51T-4 BR (NC) 8
HLCNT2 5 6 HLCNT2
SRA-51T-4 BR
SRA-51T-4 BK MSW MON 6 7 RTH1
FILTER BR GY 8 GND2
DCCNT/ 7
PWB WH BR 9 RTH2
CN1
GY 10 GND2
B03P-VL
HL-1N 1 WH 1 HL1 11 (NC)
HL-2N 2 WH 2 HL2 CN5 12 (NC)
CN2 B12P-HL-A BR
HL-L 3 BK 3 L2 13 MSW MON
B03P-VL RD
+24V1 1 BR 14 BUP_PR CN15
L2 1 BK RD GY 9604S-14F 1-84432-4(AMP)
L #187(BK) +24V2 2 15 GND
(NC) 2 RD DSW-F 1 14 DSW-F PS-187
+24V3 3 16 GND RD
(NC) 3 L2R #187(BK) BL GND2 2 13 GND2 RD MHV
CN1 +5V1 4
PCU
B2P4-VH L2R 4 BK GND2 3 12 GND2
+5VOPT 5 SRA-21T-3
OR DHVREM 4 11 DHVREM WH
+3.3V1 6 RD WH THV
BK OR 1 +24V1 MHVREM\ 5 10 MHVREM\
+3.3V1 7 RD
Lot #250(BK) GY 2 +24V2
PWB THV+PWM\ 6 9 THV+PWM\ SRA-21T-4L
GND2 8 GY
PS-187
GY 3 GND2 GBPWM\ 7 8 GBPWM\ WH
BK GND2 9 YL GB
Lout #250(BK) GY 4 +5V2 DHVPWM\ 8 7 DHVPWM\ HV
GND2 10
WH GY 5 +5V2 THV-PWM\ 9 6 THV-PWM\ PS-187
GND2 11 RD
Nout #250(WH) BR OR DVREM\ 10 5 DVREM\ BL DHV
FW 12 6 +3.3V1
OR DVPWM\ 11 4 DVPWM\
WH 7 +3.3V1
Not #250(WH) GY THVREM\ 12 3 THVREM\ PS-187
8 GND2
CN6 GY GR DV BIAS
B5P-VH 9 GND2 MHV-T 13 2 MHV-T
CN4 CN7 THin 14 1 THin
B2P-VH GND2 1 CN17
BK
1 L GND2 2 B9P-VH
2 (NC) GND2
WH 3
+5V1
3 N +24V4 4
CN23
+5VOPT
MSW B03B-XASK-1 +5VOPT 5
BK MSL WH 173981-2
MSN
1 2 1 XPNC
#250(YL) #250(YL)
2 +24V1
BK L N WH
#250(WH) #250(WH)
BK L1 N1 WH
#250(BL) #250(BL)
ELR-04NVF
BK
BK
WH
WH
GY 4 4
GND2
1 2 3 1 2 3 GY
3 GND2 3
CN1
CN2
RD 2 2
WH Nout #250(RD) +24V4
BL
(NC)
(NC)
1 +5VOPT 1
B2P3-VH
#250(RD)
MSW LIn
WH Nout
MSW NIn
MSW Lout
MSW Nout
B2P3-VH-BK
BK Lout #250(BK) to DESK UN
#250(BK)
RELAY
BK Lout CN3
PWB B3B-PH-K-S
+12V2 1
BUP_PR 2
Mother PWB
Lin
Lin
Nin
Nin
GND 3
#250(GR)
#250(GR)
#250(GR)
#250(GR)
CN3
ELP-06V-NV+ELR-06N
BK
BK
V9PS-VH
WH
WH
FUSE PWB BL 1 +5V1 1 BL 1 +5V1
VLP-04V+VLR-04V

BL 2 +5V1 2 BL 2 +5V1
#250(BL) 1 N 1 RD
BK BK BK 4 +24V3 4 RD 4 +24V3
L1 2 L 2 BR
WH WH 5 DCCNT 5 BR 5 DCCNT
#250(YL) 3 Not 3
WH BK BK 6 (NC) 6 6 +12V2
N1 4 Lot 4
7 GND2
#250(BL)
BK 8 GND2
Lout PL
+12V2 1 9 HDD-VCC
#250(YL) GY
WH GND2 2
GND2 3
1 DH-L 1 BL
HDD-VCC 4
2 DH-N 2
LCP-04
to HDD
to DESK UN (N model only)
SIN-21T-1.8S
BK
DH-L FAX
SIN-21T-1.8S
AC IN WH
DH-N
FAX BK
INLET VLR-06V+VLP-06V-1 L L
CN1 L
BK BK MEMORY
B03P-VL 1 LFin 1 WH FAX
BK YL/GR YL/GR N N
L L 3 L 2 FG 2 SW
BK BK
2 (NC) 3 LFout 3 DCPS
WH WH WH N
1 N 4 NFin 4
FG FG YL/GR YL/GR
5 FG 5
WH 6 NFout 6 WH BK
L L
N N DCPR WH
N N
FUSING UNIT
#TAIWAN 09P-RWZV-K4GG-P4 09R-RWZV-K2GGP4
GY
B-5 Rth1 SMP-04V-NC+SMR-04V-N
GY Rth1 B-1
Rth1 B-4 GND2 BR BR
GND2 B-2 1 RTH1 1
GY B-3
Rth2 GY GY
GY Rth2 B-3 2 GND2 2
B-2 GND2 BR BR (NO ASSEMBLY)
GND2 B-4 3 RTH2 3 CN21
Rth2 B-1 (NC) GY GY
(NC) B-5 4 GND2 4 B8B-PH-K-R
GND2 1
SRA-51T-4 CN14
VLP-03V+VLR-03V B16B-PH-K-S PCU_RES 2
WH WH WH CN2
HL1 1 HL1 HL1 1 1 HL-1N 1 B7B-PH-K-S BR 1 FW PCU-DSR 3
WH WH WH
2 HL2 HL2 2 2 HL-2N 2 RD 2 +24VPR PCU-RXD 4
BK BK BK +24VPR 1
3 N2 L2 3 3 L2 3 BR 3 HLPR PCU-TXD 5
HL2 BK GY (NC) 2
4 F-GND F-GND 4 CN1 PL 4 +12V2 PCU-DTR 6
HLPR 3
SRA-51T-4 B03P-VL BR +5V2 7
HLCNT1 4 5 HLCNT1
SRA-51T-4 1 HL-1N BR (NC) 8
6 HLCNT2
Engine (Taiwan) (5/6)
SRA-51T-4 HLCNT2 5
2 HL-2N BR 7 RTH1
SRA-51T-4 MSW MON 6
3 HL-Lin GY 8 GND2
DCCNT/ 7
FILTER PWB BK BR 9 RTH2
CN1 L2out 3 GY 10 GND2
(NC) 2
BK 11 (NC)
L2in 1 CN5 12 (NC)
B03P-VL(RD) B12P-HL-A BR 13 MSW MON
RD BR CN15
+24V1 1 14 BUP_PR
RD GY 9604S-14F 1-84432-4(AMP)
+24V2 2 15 GND
#250(BK) RD DSW-F 1 14 DSW-F PS-187
BK AC/DC +24V3 3 16 GND RD
Lot BL GND2 2 13 GND2 RD MHV
+5V1 4
PCU
#250(BK) GND2 3 12 GND2
BK PWB +5VOPT 5 SRA-21T-3
Lout OR DHVREM 4 11 DHVREM WH
+3.3V1 6 WH THV
OR RD 1 +24V1 MHVREM\ 5 10 MHVREM\
#250(WH) +3.3V1 7
WH GY RD 2 +24V2 PWB THV+PWM\ 6 9 THV+PWM\ SRA-21T-4L
Nout GND2 8 PS-187
GY GY 3 GND2 GBPWM\ 7 8 GBPWM\ YL
WH
GND2 9 GB
#250(WH) GY 4 +5V2 DHVPWM\ 8 7 DHVPWM\ HV
WH GND2 10
Not GY 5 +5V2 THV-PWM\ 9 6 THV-PWM\ PS-187
GND2 11 RD
BR OR 6 +3.3V1 DVREM\ 10 5 DVREM\ BL DHV
FW 12
OR 7 +3.3V1 DVPWM\ 11 4 DVPWM\
CN4 GY 8 GND2 THVREM\ 12 3 THVREM\ PS-187
CN6 GR DV BIAS
BK GY 9 GND2 MHV-T 13 2 MHV-T
1 L CN7 B5P-VH
2 (NC) GND2 1 CN17 THin 14 1 THin
B2P-VH
WH B9P-VH
3 N GND2 2
MSW B03B-XASK-1 GND2 3
+5V1
WH +24V4 4
BK MSL MSN CN23
+5VOPT
#250(YL) #250(YL) +5VOPT 5
173981-2
BK L N WH 1 2 1 XPNC
#250(WH) #250(WH) 2 +24V1
BK L1 WH
N1
#250(BL) #250(BL)
ELR-04NVF
BK
BK
GY
WH
WH
4 GND2 4
1 2 3 1 2 3 GY 3 3
GND2
RD
CN1
CN2
WH Nout #250(RD) 2 +24V4 2
BL
(NC)
(NC)
1 +5VOPT 1
B2P3-VH
#250(RD)
MSW LIn
WH Nout
MSW NIn
MSW Lout
MSW Nout
B2P3-VH-BK
BK #250(BK) to DESK UN
Lout
#250(BK)
RELAY
BK Lout CN3
PWB B3B-PH-K-S
+12V2 1
BUP_PR 2
Mother PWB
Lin
Lin
Nin
Nin
GND 3
#250(GR)
#250(GR)
CN3
ELP-06V-NV+ELR-06N
BK
BK
V9PS-VH
#250(GR) WH
#250(GR) WH
FUSE PWB BL BL

1 +5V1 1 1 +5V1
VLP-04V+VLR-04V BL 2 +5V1 2 BL 2 +5V1
#250(BL) N 1 RD RD
BK BK 1 BK 4 +24V3 4 4 +24V3
L1 L 2 BR BR
WH 2 WH 5 DCCNT 5 5 DCCNT
#250(YL) Not 3
WH BK 3 BK 6 (NC) 6 6 +12V2
N1 4 Lot 4
7 GND2
#250(BL)
BK 8 GND2
Lout PL
+12V2 1 9 HDD-VCC
#250(YL) GY
WH GND2 2
GND2 3
1 DH-L 1 BL
HDD-VCC 4
2 DH-N 2 to HDD LCP-04
to DESK UN
SIN-21T-1.8S
BK
DH-L FAX
SIN-21T-1.8S
AC IN WH
INLET DH-N
CN1 FAX BK
B03P-VL VLR-06V+VLP-06V-1 L L
L
BK BK BK MEMORY
L L 3 L 1 LFin 1 WH FAX
YL/GR YL/GR N N
2 (NC) 2 FG 2 SW
WH BK BK
FG FG 1 N 3 LFout 3 DCPS
WH WH N
4 NFin 4
YL/GR 5 FG 5 YL/GR
N N WH 6 WH BK
6 NFout L L
DCPR WH
N N
Engine (6/6)
CN12 CN10
B30B-PHDSS-B B24B-PADES(BULE)
1VAREF +5V2 1
2+5V3 VAREF 2
3+24V2 +24V2 3
4+24V2 GND2 4
5GND2 GND2 5
6GND2 MCPPD 6
7ADMEN1\ MCDRS 7
8ADMCK1\ MCPED 8
9ADMEN2\ MCLUD 9
10ADMCK2\ MCPWS 10
MULTICS
11MPFC\ MCSS1 11
12MPFS\ MCSS2 12
13DGS\ MCSS3 13
14APID MCSS4 14
ADU 15
16
17
APOD
APPD2
APPD1
MCSPD
MC SET
MCPCL\
15
16
17
18MPLD1 MCFCL\ 18
19MPED MCLUM\ 19
20MPWS MCM-T 20
21DSW-D MCMCLK\ 21
22ADU SET MCM\ 22
23MPF SET MCPFS\ 23
24MSS\ DCPR\ 24
25ADM H/L
26ADUFM\
27
28
29
MPLS2
MPLS1
(NC)
PCU
PWB
30(NC)
CN11
B22B-PADRS(RED)
TXD-FIN1 1
RXD-FIN1\ 2
DTR-FIN1\ 3
DSR-FIN1\ 4
RES-FIN1 5
GND2 6
TXD-FIN2 7
RXD-FIN2\ 8
DTR-FIN2\ 9
DSR-FIN2\ 10
RES-FIN2 11
GND2
TXD-DSK 13
12 DESK
RXD-DSK\ 14
DTR-DSK\ 15
DSR-DSK\ 16
RES-DSK 17
TRC-DSK\ 18
FGS-FIN\ 19
FM1\ 20
DCPR\ 21
+24V2 22

CN11
B22B-PADRS PADP-22V-1-R
TXD_FIN1 1
RXD_FIN1/ 2
DTR_FIN1/ 3
DSR_FIN1/ 4
RES_FIN1 5
GND2 6
TXD_FIN2 7
OPTION (1/1)
RXD_FIN2/ 8
DTR_FIN2/ 9
DSR_FIN2/ 10
RES_FIN2 11
GND2 12
TXD_DSK 13
RXD_DSK/ 14
DTR_DSK/ 15
DSR_DSK/ 16
RES_DSK 17
TRC_DSK/ 18
FGS_FIN/ 19
(N.C) 20
(N.C) 21
(N.C) 22
PCU PWB
CN6
B5P-VH VHR-5N
GND 1 ELP-04NV ELR-04V
GND 2 4 GND GND 4
GND 3 3 GND GND 3
+24V4 4 2 +24V4 +24V4 2
+5VOPT 5 1 +5VOPT +5VOPT 1
1 1 1 +24V_D
AR-D27,28
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-3 2 2 2 P-GND
DCPS 3 3 3 +5V
4 4 4 GND2
5 5 5 S-GND
6 6 6 TXD_DSK
7 7 7 RXD_DSK/
8 8 8 DTR_DSK/
9 9 9 DSR_DSK/
10 10 10 RES_DSK
Main body CNB 11 11 11 TRC_DSK
SMP-11V-BC SMR-11V-B
B22B-PADRS / PADP-22V-1-R
+5V 1
+5V 2
S-GND 3
+5V 4 AR-FN6,MS1
S-GND 5 1 1 1 +5V
+24V_F 6 2 2 2 +24V_F
S-GND 7 3 3 3 GND2
+24V_F 8 4 4 4 S-GND
S-GND 9 5 5 5 P-GND
+24V_F 10 6 6 6 F-GND
CNA P-GND 11 7 7 7 TXD_FIN2
VHR-5N / B5P-VH +24V_F 12 8 8 8 RXD_FIN2
1 GND P-GND 13 9 9 9 DTR_FIN2/

2 GND +24V_F 14 10 10 10 DSR_FIN2/
3 GND P-GND 15 11 11 11 RES_FIN2
4 +24V4 +24V_D 16 12 12 12 FGS_FIN/
5 +5V P-GND 17 13 13 13 +24V_F
P-GND 18 14 14 14 +24V_F
GND 19 15 15 15 P-GND
GND 20 16 16 16 P_GND
GND 21 17 17 17 S_GND
GND 22 18 18 18 (N.C)
SMR-18V-N SMP-18V-NC
1 TXD_FIN1
AR-FN7
Power I/F PWB UN 1 1
2 2 2 RXD_FIN1/
3 3 3 DTR_FIN1/
4 4 4 DSR_FIN1/
5 5 5 RES_FIN1
6 6 6 +24V_F
7 7 7 +5V
8 8 8 GND2
9 9 9 S-GND
10 10 10 F-GND
11 11 11 +24V_F
12 12 12 P-GND
ELP-12V ELR-12V
OPTION I/F UN
JAPAN
SRA-21T-4
GR/YL GR/YL
SRA-21T-4 DESK
CN-A CN-B CNN
B2P3-VH(BK) B3B-PH-K-S B3B-PH-K-S
ELP-02V+ELR-02VF BK PK
1 DH-L DHRY1 1 1 DHRY1
DESK
1 DH-L 1 BK 2 (NC) VB(+24V) 2 RD 2 VB(+24V)
WH WH BR PWB
2 DH-N 2 3 DH-N DHRY2 3 3 DHRY2
Main Body CN-F

B2P3-VH(BL)
BK PS-250-R
DH-L 1
(NC) 2
SW1
DH-LINE (OPTION) (1/1)
DH-L(DHSW) 3 BK PS-250
DH-HEATER
PWB CN-D
B2P3-VH(RD) ELR-02V+ELP-02V PAPER
DH-L(DHSW) 1 BK
1 DH-L(DHSW) 1 BK
(NC) 2 WH DH_DESK
DH-N(DESK) 3 WH 2 DH-N(DESK) 2
SCN CN-C
ELP-02V+ELR-02V B2P3-VH
ELR-02VF+ELP-02V BK
BK 1 DH-L(DHSW)
1 DH-L(DHSW) 1 BK
1 DH-L(DHSW) 1 2 (NC)
DH_DH1 WH WH
2 DH-N(SCN) 2
WH
3 DH-N(SCN)
2 DH-N(SCN) 2
AC CABLE
BK
DH_DH2 WH
EX
SRA-21T-4
GR/YL GR/YL
SRA-21T-4 DESK
CN-A
B2P3-VH(BK)
ELP-02V+ELR-02VF BK
1 DH-L
BK
1 DH-L 1 2 (NC)
WH WH
2 DH-N 2 3 DH-N
Main Body CN-F

B2P3-VH(BL)

BK PS-250-R
DH-L 1
(NC) 2
SW1
DH-L(DHSW) 3 BK PS-250
DH-HEATER
PWB
SCN CN-C
ELP-02V+ELR-02V B2P3-VH
ELR-02VF+ELP-02V BK
BK 1 DH-L(DHSW)
1 DH-L(DHSW) 1 BK 1
DH-L(DHSW) 1 2 (NC)
DH_DH1 WH WH
2 DH-N(SCN) 2
WH
3 DH-N(SCN)
2 DH-N(SCN) 2
AC CABLE
BK
DH_DH2 WH
3. Signal name list
Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Signal name Name Function/Operation Remark
L H No. NO. name
+24V_PR Power relay 24V Power relay 24V — — 14 2 PCU
+5VLD 5V power for laser diode 5V power for laser diode — — 16 31 PCU
ADUSET ADU detection signal ADU detection With ADU Without ADU 12 22 PCU
APIND ADU paper entry sensor ADU paper entry detection Paper pass — 12 14 PCU
signal
APOD ADU paper exit sensor Paper exit detection Paper present 12 15 PCU
signal
APPD1 ADU paper transport ADU upper-stream section Paper pass — 12 17 PCU
sensor signal 1 paper pass detection
APPD2 ADU paper transport ADU lower-stream section Paper pass — 12 16 PCU
sensor signal 2 paper pass detection
BUP_PR Power save mode relay Changeover between the — — 2 12 PCU
signal power save mode and the 14 14
normal power mode
CRUCLK Communication CLK CRUM communication — — 5 3 PCU
CLK
CRUSDA Communication data/ CRUM communication — — 5 4 PCU
address signal data/address signal
CSS Paper tray insertion Paper tray insertion With tray Without tray 13 14 PCU
detection signal detection
DMCLK OPC drum motor rotating OPC drum motor rotating — — 6 7 PCU
speed control (CLK) signal speed control
DM-T OPC drum motor lock OPC drum motor lock Rotation Stop/Lock 6 6 PCU
DSR_PCU Serial communication Send control signal (serial — — 2 25 PCU
control signal communication)
DSW-D ADU door sensor signal Door open/close detection Door open Door close 12 21 PCU
DSW-F Front door open/close Front door open/close Front door Front door 4 32
detection signal detection open close 6 1
6 2
9 1
9 2
15 1
DSW-L Left door open/close Left door open/close Left door open Left door 4 27 PCU
detection signal detection close 4 28
DTR_PCU Control signal for serial Receive control signal — — 2 27 PCU
communication (Serial communication)
DVCH1 DV unit identification Installation — — 8 1 PCU
signal 1 acknowledgment
FW AC power full wave signal Power monitor — — 14 1 PCU
FWP-PCU Flash write protect signal Flash write protect — — 2 29 PCU
GND2_Tnin GND GND 5 1 PCU
HLCNT1 Fusing roller center Fusing roller center OFF ON 14 5 PCU
section heater lamp section heating control
control signal
HLCNT2 Fusing roller both sides Fusing roller both sides OFF ON 14 6 PCU
heater lamp control signal heating control
HLPRout Fusing heater lamp power Fusing heater lamp power Relay OFF Relay ON 14 3 PCU
relay control signal relay control
HSYNC Horizontal sync signal Horizontal sync — — 2 15 PCU
HUS-DV Development humidity Humidity detection around — — 8 11 PCU
sensor the developing unit
LSU_S/H Laser beam horizontal Laser beam horizontal — — 16 8 PCU
sync signal position timing control
LUD Paper tray upper limit Paper tray upper limit — Upper limit 13 9 PCU
LUMA Paper tray lift-up motor Paper tray lift-up control Stop Up 13 20 PCU
control signal
LUMB Paper tray lift-up motor Paper tray lift-up control Stop Up 13 18 PCU
control signal

L H No. NO. name
MCLUD MP tray upper limit sensor MP tray upper limit — Upper limit 10 9 PCU
signal detection
MCM_T Multi-purpose paper feed Multi-purpose paper feed Rotation Stop/Lock 10 20 PCU
tray transport motor lock tray transport motor lock
signal detection
MCMCLK Multi-purpose paper feed Multi-purpose paper feed — — 10 21 PCU
tray transport motor clock tray transport motor
signal rotating speed control
MCPED MP tray paper empty MP tray paper empty Paper present — 10 8 PCU
sensor signal detection
MCPWS MP tray width sensor MP tray paper width — — 10 10 PCU
detection detection
MCSET 10 16 PCU
MCSPD MP tray paper remaining MP tray paper remaining When pressed — 10 15 PCU
quantity sensor signal quantity detection
MCSS1 MP tray rear edge sensor MP tray rear edge size When pressed — 10 11 PCU
1 signal detection
2 signal detection
3 signal detection
4 signal detection
MHV-T Main charger trouble Main charger trouble Trouble/ Normal 15 13 PCU
detection signal detection Without MHV
MM-T Main motor lock detection Main motor lock detection Rotation Stop/Lock 9 8 PCU
signal
MPED ADU manual feed paper Manual feed tray paper Paper present — 12 19 PCU
sensor signal empty detection
MPFSET Manual feed unit detection Manual feed unit detection Provided Not provided 12 23 PCU
signal
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length Manual paper feed tray — Paper 12 18 PCU
sensor signal paper length detection present
MPLS1 ADU tray pull-out sensor Manual feed extension — Pull out 12 28 PCU
signal tray pull-out detection
MPLS2 ADU tray storing sensor Manual feed extension — Storing 12 27 PCU
signal tray storing detection
MPWS ADU manual feed paper Manual feed paper width — — 12 20 PCU
width detection signal detection
PAGE Page signal Print timing control to the — — 2 13 PCU
controller (output for every
page)
PED Paper tray empty sensor Paper empty detection — Paper empty 13 3 PCU
signal
PMCLK Polygon mirror motor drive Polygon mirror motor drive — — 16 27 PCU
clock signal clock
POD1 Paper exit detection 1 Detection of paper exit Paper pass — 4 4 PCU
signal from the fusing section
POD2 Paper exit detection 2 Paper exit paper pass Paper pass — 4 10 PCU
signal detection
POD3 Paper exit detection 3 Detection of paper exit to Paper pass — 4 16 PCU
signal the upper section paper (Full detection)
exit tray (Full detection)
RES_DSK Desk reset signal Desk reset Operation Reset 11 17 PCU
enable
RES_FIN1 Finisher reset signal Finisher reset Operation Reset 11 5 PCU
enable
RES_FIN2 Finisher reset signal Finisher reset Operation Reset 11 11 PCU
enable
RES_PCU PCU reset signal The controller resets the Operation Reset 2 17 PCU
PCU. enable
RTH1 Fusing roller temperature Fusing roller temperature — — 14 7 PCU
detection signal detection (Center section)
RTH2 Fusing roller temperature Fusing roller temperature — — 14 9 PCU
detection signal detection (Edge section)

L H No. NO. name
RXD_DSK Serial I/F data (DESK) Serial I/F data (DESK- — — 11 14 PCU
PCU PWB)
RXD_FIN1 Serial I/F data Serial I/F data — — 11 2 PCU
(FINISHER) (FINISHER-PCU PWB)
RXD_FIN2 Serial I/F data Serial I/F data — — 11 8 PCU
(FINISHER) (FINISHER-PCU PWB)
RXD_PCU Serial communication Send data to the controller — — 2 21 PCU
send data signal
TCS Toner concentration Toner concentration — — 8 7 PCU
TH-DV Developing temperature Temperature detection — — 8 4 PCU
sensor around the developing unit
THVin N.C. N.C. — — 15 14
TMA Toner motor control signal
Toner motor ON/OFF — — 7 1 PCU
control
TMB Toner motor control signal Toner motor ON/OFF — — 7 2 PCU
control
TXD_DSK Serial I/F data (DESK) Serial I/F data (PCU PWB- — — 11 13 PCU
DESK)
TXD_FIN1 Serial I/F data Serial I/F data (PCU PWB — — 11 1 PCU
(FINISHER) - FINISHER)
TXD_FIN2 Serial I/F data Serial I/F data (PCU PWB — — 11 7 PCU
(FINISHER) - FINISHER)
TXD_PCU Serial communication Receive data from the — — 2 23 PCU
receive data signal controller
VIDEO Image signal Image signal to the LSU — — 16 13 PCU
VIDEOin- Image signal Image signal from the — — 2 9 PCU
controller to the PCU PWB
VIDEOin+ Image signal Image signal from the — — 2 10 PCU
controller to the PCU PWB
VRB Laser power control signal Laser power control — — 16 9 PCU
XADM_H/L ADU motor current control ADU motor current control — — 12 25 PCU
signal
XADMCK1 ADU upper transport ADU upper transport — — 12 8 PCU
motor clock signal motor rotation speed
control
XADMCK2 ADU lower transport ADU lower transport — — 12 10 PCU
motor clock signal motor rotation speed
control
XADMEN1 ADU upper transport ADU upper transport ON OFF 12 7 PCU
motor control signal motor ON/OFF control
XADMEN2 ADU lower transport ADU lower transport ON OFF 12 9 PCU
motor control signal motor ON/OFF control
XADUFM ADU cooling fan control Cooling fan control ON OFF 12 26 PCU
signal
XCFM1_PWM Suction fan control signal Suction fan control Max. air flow OFF 13 21 PCU
XCFM2PWM Ozone exhaust fan control Ozone exhaust fan control OFF ON 4 15 PCU
signal 4 20
XCPFC Paper cassette paper feed Paper feed clutch control Paper — 13 4 PCU
clutch control signal transport
XDGS ADU gate solenoid control Gate select in duplex or Duplex Single 12 13 PCU
signal paper exit
XDHVPWM Separation high voltage Separation high voltage — — 15 7 PCU
output control signal PWM control
XDHVREM Separation high voltage Separation high voltage ON OFF 15 4 PCU
control signal ON/OFF control
XDM OPC drum motor control OPC drum motor ON/OFF ON OFF 6 5 PCU
signal (ON/OFF)
XDSR_DSK Serial communication Receive control — — 11 16 PCU
control signal
XDSR_FIN1 Serial communication Receive control — — 11 4 PCU
control signal
XDSR_FIN2 Serial communication Receive control — — 11 10 PCU
control signal
XDTR_DSK Serial communication Send control — — 11 15 PCU
control signal

L H No. NO. name
XDTR_FIN1 Serial communication Send control — — 11 3 PCU
control signal
XDTR_FIN2 Serial communication Send control — — 11 9 PCU
control signal
XDVPWM Developing bias voltage Developing bias PWM — — 15 11 PCU
control signal (PWM) control
XDVREM Developing bias control Developing bias ON/OFF ON OFF 15 10 PCU
(ON/OFF) signal
XFGS_FIN Finisher gate solenoid Finisher gate solenoid — — 11 19 PCU
control signal control
XFM1 Fan Fan — — 11 20 PCU
XGBPWM Main charger grid bias Main charger grid bias — — 15 8 PCU
voltage (PWM) control voltage (PWM) control
signal
XLDON Laser ON/OFF control Laser ON/OFF control ON OFF 16 15 PCU
signal
XMCDRS MP door open/close MP left door open/close — Door close 10 7 PCU
sensor signal detection
XMCFCL Multi-purpose paper feed Clutch for transport from Paper — 10 18 PCU
tray transport clutch the MP tray transport
XMCLUM Multi-purpose paper feed MP tray lift up Up Stop 10 19 PCU
tray lift-up motor
XMCM Multi-purpose paper feed Multi-purpose paper feed ON OFF 10 22 PCU
tray transport motor tray transport motor ON/
control signal OFF control
XMCPCL Multi-purpose paper feed Clutch for paper feed from 10 17 PCU
clutch the MP tray
XMCPPD MP transport sensor Paper detection on the Paper — 10 6 PCU
signal path detection
XMHVREM Main charger control Main charger ON/OFF ON OFF 15 5 PCU
signal
XMM Main motor control signal Main motor ON/OFF ON OFF 9 7 PCU
control
XMPFC ADU manual feed paper Clutch for paper feed from Paper feed — 12 11 PCU
feed clutch control signal the manual paper feed
tray
XMPFS ADU manual feed paper Solenoid for paper feed Paper feed — 12 12 PCU
feed solenoid control from the manual paper
signal feed tray
XMSS ADU shutter solenoid Shutter open/close control Paper feed — 12 24 PCU
control signal in manual paper feed
XMSWMON MSW monitor signal Main switch monitor — — 14 13 PCU
XMSWOFF MSW OFF signal Main switch OFF signal — — 2 19 PCU
XMSWPR Main switch power relay Main switch power relay Relay ON Relay OFF 14 12 PCU
XPNC Mechanism counter Mechanism counter — — 23 1 PCU
XPOF Power OFF status signal Power OFF status Power OFF Power ON 2 20 PCU
XPOMA Paper exit motor control Paper exit unit paper — — 4 5 PCU
signal (Phase A) transport
XPOMB Paper exit motor control Paper exit unit paper — — 4 3 PCU
signal (Phase B) transport
XPOMXA Paper exit motor control Paper exit unit paper — — 4 7 PCU
signal (Phase /A) transport
XPOMXB Paper exit motor control Paper exit unit paper — — 4 1 PCU
signal (Phase /B) transport
XPPD1 Resist roller front paper Detection of paper pass in Paper pass — 13 17 PCU
pass detection signal front of the resist roller
XPSPS Separation solenoid Separation solenoid Separation — 5 5 PCU
XREADY LSU motor READY signal LSU motor READY — — 16 28 PCU
detection
XRRC Resist roller clutch control Resist roller clutch ON/ Paper — 13 8 PCU
signal OFF control transport
XRSVOUT2 Reserved Reserved — — 5 7 PCU
XSTART Polygon mirror motor drive Polygon mirror motor ON OFF 16 25 PCU
start signal control

L H No. NO. name
XSYNC LSU horizontal sync LSU horizontal sync — — 16 4 PCU
detection signal detection (BD sensor
signal)
XTHV+PWM Transfer charger output Transfer charger output — — 15 6 PCU
control signal (THV+) control (PWM control)
XTHV-PWM Transfer charger output Transfer charger output — — 15 9 PCU
control signal (THV-) control (PWM control)
XTHVREM Transfer charger control Transfer charger ON/OFF ON OFF 15 12 PCU
signal (THV) control
XTRC Paper transport roller Paper transport roller ON/ — — 13 12 PCU
clutch control signal OFF control
XTRC_DSK Paper transport timing Paper transport timing — — 11 18 PCU
signal
XVFM1_PWM Cooling fan control signal Cooling fan control Max. air flow OFF 16 23 PCU
16 26
XVFM2PWM Heat exhaust fan control Heat exhaust fan control Max. air flow OFF 4 22 PCU
signal
XVIDEO Image signal Image signal to the LSU — — 16 14 PCU
*1: Multi paper feed tray vertical size detection
Vertical size detection: Connector level Paper size
Multi paper feed tray 1 M1SS1 M1SS2 M1SS3 M1SS4
AB series Inch series China series
Multi paper feed tray 2 M2SS1 M2SS2 M2SS3 M2SS4
1 L L H L B5 Extra K16
2 H L H L A4 LT A4
A5R INVR A5R
3 H L L L B5R EX-R K16R
4 H H L L A4R LTR A4R
5 L H L L Foolscap Extra Foolscap
6 L H L H B4 LGL K8
7 L L L H A3 WLT
0 H H H H Tray not installed
*2: Options
No. CV_SIZE3 CV_SIZE2 CV_SIZE1 CV_SIZE0 Paper size
0 0 0 0 0 none
1 0 0 0 1 A3
2 0 0 1 0 A4
3 0 0 1 1 LT
4 0 1 0 0 B4
5 0 1 0 1 LG
6 0 1 1 0 WLT
7 0 1 1 1 INV
8 1 0 0 0 B5
9 1 0 0 1 Extra
10 1 0 1 0 A5
11 1 0 1 1 F4
12 1 1 0 0 A4R
13 1 1 0 1 B5R
14 1 1 1 0 LTR
15 1 1 1 1 A5R

Memo
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
n
s
i
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use
soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220°C, which is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is
inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed
the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is
confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after
completion of soldering work.
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
"TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES"

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2007 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® Server 2003 and
Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2007 February Printed in Japan

MX M450 &amp; MX M350

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

MX M450 &amp; MX M350

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SERVICE MANUAL

[1] GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

This document has been published to be used

For North America: For Europe:

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.

ADVERSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES OG SIKKERHEDSLÅS BRYTES.

LASER KLASSE 1 OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING,

[1] GENERAL [5] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 5. BASE SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

A. Basic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 A. Condition settings screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

B. Option lineup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 B. Address book screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

C. List of combination of peripheral devices . . . . . . .2-4 6. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

5. Laser scanner section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43 3. Automatic copy image rotation -

A. Cautions for servicing

3) Do not look directly at the light source of the scanner module.

5) Do not make any modifications to this machine. Doing so may

MX-M350/M450 N/U GENERAL 1 - 1

MX-M350/M450 N/U CONFIGURATION 2 - 1

10. Exit tray 7. Finisher

1. Scanner module with DSPF 8. Right upper exit

6. Upper exit tray

12. Duplex module

13. Saddle stitch

14. Punch module

5. Multi purpose drawer

4. Stand/3 x 500 sheet 3. Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet

MX-M350/M450 N/U CONFIGURATION 2 - 2

(2) Other options

MX-M350/M450 N/U CONFIGURATION 2 - 3

Data security kit (For a model with HDD installed)

Application communication module

Application integration module

Scanner module with DSPF

Network scanner expansion kit

Sharpdesk 100 license kit

Internet fax expansion kit

External account module

Saddle stitch finisher

Right upper exit tray

Fax memory (8 MB)

Upper exit tray

Flash ROM kit

= Must be installed together.

MX-M350/M450 N/U CONFIGURATION 2 - 4

B ∗ Showing noise benchmark in each model as a whole system.

If a printer driver for Windows or Macintosh is used for printing, the

MX-M350/M450 N/U SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 1

MX-M350/M450 N/U SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 2

MX-M350/M450 N/U SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 3

MX-M350/M450 N/U SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 4

(3) Support image *1: Model without HDD installed

Mode Scanner Internet Fax FAX (6) Specified multiple destinations

MX-M350/M450 N/U SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 5

(10) F code transmission

MX-M350/M450 N/U SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 6

Mode Fax *1: During OC mode

(6) Exposure/Copy Quality Process

MX-M350/M450 N/U SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 7

MX-M350/M450 N/U SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 8

MX-M350/M450 N/U SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 9

B. European Subsidiary/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

MX-M350/M450 N/U CONSUMABLE PARTS 4 - 1

MX M450 & MX M350

MX M450 & MX M350